You are on page 1of 288

‫���ﺮی‬

‫از � ﮕﺎ�ﯽ دﯾ��‬

‫ﺷﻬﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺖﺍﷲ‬

‫ﺩﻛﺘﺮ ﺳﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺣﺴﻴﻨﻲﺑﻬﺸﺘﻲ‬

‫ﺑﻨﻴﺎﺩ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻬﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺖﺍﷲ ﺩﻛﺘﺮ ﺑﻬﺸﺘﻲ‬


‫ﺗﻬﺮﺍﻥ ‪1390‬‬
‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻨﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪(1‬‬
‫‪39‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪(2‬‬
‫‪67‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪(3‬‬
‫‪87‬‬ ‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ‪:‬‬
‫‪89‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﻮﻡ‪:‬‬
‫‪133‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﻲ )‪(1‬‬
‫‪153‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﻲ )‪(2‬‬
‫‪165‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﻲ )‪(3‬‬
‫‪185‬‬ ‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‪:‬‬
‫‪187‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻭﺣﻲ‬
‫‪209‬‬ ‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪211‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻋﺠﺎﺯ‬
‫‪237‬‬ ‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﺸﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪239‬‬ ‫ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺍﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎء‬
‫‪259‬‬ ‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﻫﻔﺘﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪261‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﻦ‬
‫‪283‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫‪286‬‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺏﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﮕﻔﺘﺎﺭ‬

‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭﻫـﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺷـﻬﻴﺪ ﺁﻳـﺖﺍﷲ ﺩﻛﺘـﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺸﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﺒﻮﺕ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴـﺖ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻳـﺖﺍﷲ ﺩﻛﺘـﺮ ﺑﻬﺸـﺘﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻘﻠﻲ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﺘﻔﻲ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺎﺳﺦﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻬﻢ ﭼﺮﺍﻳﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺍﻛﺮﻡ )ﺹ( ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺑـﻪ ﻟﺤـﺎﻅ ﺍﺛﺒـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻬﻢ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑـﻪ ﺟﺎﻣﻌـﻪﺷﻨﺎﺳـﻲ ﺗـﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻃﻲ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺣـﺚ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘـﺶ ﺭﺳـﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣـﺖ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻜﻲ ﭘﻴـﺎﻡ ﺁﮔـﺎﻫﻲﺑﺨـﺶ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﭘﻴﺸﻮﺍﻱ ﻣﺠﺴﻢ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻨـﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤـﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﭘﻴﺸﻮﺍﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﻩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺋﺒﻪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣـﻮﻥ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺷـﻜﻞ ﮔﺮﻓﺘـﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺒـﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﺨﺴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ »ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ« ﻃﻲ ﺳﻪ ﺟﻠﺴﻪ ﺍﺭﺍﺋـﻪ ﺷـﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ »ﻭﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ« ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳـﺎﻝ ‪ 1354‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻤﻴﻨﺎﺭ ﺩﺑﻴﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﻨﻲ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﮔﻔﺘـﺎﺭ ﺳـﻮﻡ ﺑـﺎ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫»ﻭﺣﻲ« ﻧﻴﺰ ﻃﻲ ﺳﻪ ﺟﻠﺴﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﻴﻨﺎﺭ ﺩﺑﻴﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤـﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﻨـﻲ ﺍﻳـﺮﺍﺩ ﺷـﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻣﻴﻦ ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺑـﺎ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ »ﺭﺍﺑﻄـﺔ ﻋﻠـﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻘـﻞ ﻭ‬
‫‪ 8‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻭﺣﻲ« ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﺡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴـﺪﺍﻥ ﺑـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲﺑﺨﺸـﻲ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤـﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺸـﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑﺤﺚ ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ »ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻋﺠﺎﺯ« ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣـﺔ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ ﺍﺭﺍﻳﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻋﺠﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺍﺑـﻎ‬
‫ﻣﻲﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﻴﻨﺎﺭ ﺩﺑﻴﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﻨـﻲ ﺍﺭﺍﺋـﻪ ﺷـﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﺸﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ »ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺍﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺑ‪‬ﻌﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻧﺒﻴـﺎء«‪ ،‬ﻣـﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺳﺨﻨﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﺁﻳﺖ ﺍﷲ ﺩﻛﺘﺮ ﺑﻬﺸﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺖ ﻭﻻﺩﺕ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ )ﻋﺞ( ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ 1359‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑـﻪ ﻫﻤـﺰﺍﺩ ﺑـﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻣـﺮ ﻫـﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻗـﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻋـﺪﺍﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﻀﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﻫﻔـﺘﻢ ﺑـﺎ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ »ﻣﺴـﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻤﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﻦ« ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺸﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎء ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣـﺖ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﻮﺍﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﻨﻲ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﻣﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺗﻔﺴـﻴﺮ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻤـﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﻨـﻲ‪» ،‬ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﻛﺴـﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺁﺋـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻴﻦ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺭﺿﺎﻱ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ«‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻣـﻲﭘـﺮﺩﺍﺯﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻃـﻲ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺣﺜﻲ ﺍﺭﺯﻧﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐﺷﻨﺎﺳﻲ ﺭﻭﺣﺎﻧﻴﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﻴﺪﻭﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﻣﺔ ﻓﻜـﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺷﻬﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺖﺍﷲ ﺩﻛﺘﺮ ﺑﻬﺸﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻡ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻨﻴﺎﺩ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻬﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺖﺍﷲ ﺩﻛﺘﺮ ﺑﻬﺸﺘﻲ‬


‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪(1‬‬
‫ﺑِﺴ‪‬ﻢِ ﺍﷲِ ﺍﻟﺮﱠﺣ‪‬ﻤﻦِ ﺍﻟﺮﱠﺣﻴﻢ‪‬‬

‫ﺍَﻟْﺤ‪‬ﻤ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﻟ‪‬ﻠّﻪ‪ ‬ﺭ‪‬ﺏِّ ﺍﻟْﻌﺎﻟَﻤﻴﻦْ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺼ‪‬ﻠﻮﺓُ ﻭ‪‬ﺍﻟﺴ‪‬ﻼﻡ‪ ‬ﻋ‪‬ﻠﻰ ﺟ‪‬ﻤﻴﻊِ ﺍَﻧْﺒﻴﺎﺋ‪‬ـﻪ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺭ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ـﻠﻪ ﻭ‪ ‬ﻋ‪‬ﻠـﻰ‬
‫ﺳ‪‬ﻴِّﺪ‪‬ﻧﺎ ﺧﺎﺗَﻢِ ﺍﻟﻨﱠﺒِﻴ‪‬ﻴﻦ ﻭ‪ ‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻَﺋ‪‬ﻤ‪‬ﺔِ ﺍﻟْﻬ‪‬ﺪﺍﺓِ ﻣ‪‬ﻦْ ﺍَﻫ‪‬ـﻞِ ﺑ‪‬ﻴ‪‬ﺘ‪‬ـﻪ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺨ‪‬ﻴ‪‬ـﺮَﺓِ ﻣ‪‬ـﻦْ ﺁﻟ‪‬ـﻪ‪ ‬ﻭ‪‬‬
‫ﺻ‪‬ﺤ‪‬ﺒِﻪ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺴ‪‬ﻼﻡ‪ ‬ﻋ‪‬ﻠَﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎ ﻭ‪ ‬ﻋ‪‬ﻠﻰ ﻋ‪‬ﺒﺎﺩ‪‬ﷲِ ﺍﻟﺼ‪‬ﺎﻟ‪‬ﺤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗَﻮﻟَﻪ‪ ‬ﺗَﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪» :‬ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥَ ﻣ‪‬ﺤ‪‬ﻤ‪‬ﺪ‪ ‬ﺍَﺑﺂ ﺍَﺣ‪‬ﺪ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ﻦْ ﺭِﺟﺎﻟ‪‬ﻜُﻢ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻟﻜ‪‬ﻦْ ﺭ‪‬ﺳﻮﻝَ ﺍﷲَ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﱠﺒِﻴ‪‬ﻴﻦَ ﻭ‪ ‬ﻛﺎﻥَ ﺍﷲُ ﺑِﻜُﻞﱢ ﺷَﻲ‪‬ء‪ ‬ﻋ‪‬ﻠﻴﻤﺎً«‪ 1.‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺒﺖ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺻﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻪ ﺟﻠﺴﻪ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻣـﺖ ﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻫﻢ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﺜﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﻴـﺪﻭﺍﺭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺳـﻪ ﺟﻠﺴـﻪ‬
‫ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﮔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﺗﻤـﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻳـﺎﺩﺑﻮﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺟﻠﺴـﺎﺕ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﺳـﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﺰﻳـﺰ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻜـﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﻣـﻲ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻧﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ )ﺹ( ﺁﺧﺮﻳــﻦ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻟﻘـﺐ ﺧﺎﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨّﺒﻴـﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺧـﺎﺗَﻢ ﺍﻧﺒﻴـﺎ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳـﺎﻥ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺧـﺪﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻧﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻭﺻﺎﻑ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﺍﻛـﺮﻡ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ ﻭ ﺑـﺎ ﻋﻘﺎﻳـﺪ ﻣﻠـﻞ ﻭ ﻧﺤـﻞ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺣﺰﺍﺏ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :40‬ﻣﺤﻤﺪ )ﺹ( ﭘﺪﺭ ﻫﻴﭻﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﺷـﻤﺎ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ )ﭘـﺲ ﺯﻳﻨـﺐ ﺯﻥ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺯﻧﺪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ(‪ .‬ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺧـﺎﺗﻢ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎﺳـﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﺧﺪﺍ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ )ﺣﻜﻤﺶ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺣﻜﻤﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺍﻭ( ﺑﺮ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺍﻣﻮﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ«‪.‬‬
‫‪ 14‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﻭﺷـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻘﻴﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻘﻴﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﮔـﺮﻭﻩ ﻳـﺎ ﺩﻭ ﮔـﺮﻭﻩ ﻳـﺎ ﺳـﻪ ﮔـﺮﻭﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻘﺎﻳﺪ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻧﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻋﺼﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻭ ﻗﺮﻭﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﻛﺮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺑﻴـﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻭ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺠﺎ ﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺧﺪﺍﺳـﺖ؟ ﺑﻨـﺪﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻪﺍﻳﻢ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻠﺴﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻌﺘﻘـﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻩﺍﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﻛﺮﻡ ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﺠـﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻋﻘﻴـﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴـﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ؟ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻘﻴﺪﻩ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺣـﺪﻳﺚ‪ .‬ﻣﺴـﻠﻤﺎﻧﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻘﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺧﺪﺍﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮﮔـﺰ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻘﻴﺪﺓ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺟﻨﺒﺔ ﺧﻮﺩﭘﺴﻨﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﻏﻠﻮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﻛﺮﻡ ﻳـﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﺭﺥ ﻛﺸـﻴﺪﻥ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻳـﻚ ﻧﻜﺘـﺔ ﻣﻬـﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﻭﻗﺖ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﺸﻮﺍﻳﺸـﺎﻥ ﻳـﻚ ﺳﻠﺴـﻠﻪ ﻣﺰﺍﻳـﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﺧﺼﻠﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺤﺼﺎﺭﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﭘﻴﺸﻮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﭘﻴﺸﻮﺍﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﮔﻮﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﻢ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺧﻮﺩﺧﻮﺍﻫﻲ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﭘﺴﻨﺪﻱ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩﺳﺘﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﻮﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺑـﻪ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴـﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺁﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻧﺎﻥ ﻧﺪﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻧﺒﺎﻳـﺪ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﺔ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻛﺮﻳﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺧﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻒ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﺴـﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﻧـﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺔ ﭘﻴﺎﻡﺁﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻣﺆﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺔ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻡ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺔ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻴﻢ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﺑﺪﺍﻧـﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤـﺔ‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻡ ﻭ ﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼً ﻣﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺒﺎﺭﻙ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪15 (1‬‬

‫ﺍﻛﺮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ »ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺻـﻠّﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴـﻪ ﻭ ﺁﻟـﻪ ﻭ ﺳـﻠﻢ«‪.‬‬


‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﻣﻮﺳـﻲ)ﻉ(‪ ،‬ﻧـﺎﻡ ﺣﻀـﺮﺕ ﻋﻴﺴـﻲ )ﻉ(‪ ،‬ﻧـﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﺍﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ )ﻉ(‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﻧﻮﺡ )ﻉ( ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻡ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺲ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺑﺮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑـﺮ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﺍﻛـﺮﻡ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺧﻀﻮﻉ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﻴـﺰ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦﻃـﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻣﺖ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﮔﻪﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﺖ ﻧﺎﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎ ﺁﮔﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛـﻢ‬
‫ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺒﺎﻳـﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﺣﺴـﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑـﻪ ﺳـﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﻘـﺪﺱ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺧﺪﺍ ــ ﺳﻼﻡﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ ﺍﺟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ــ ﻛﻤﺘـﺮﻳﻦ ﺗـﻮﻫﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﻜﻨـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺣﻜﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﻘﺪﺱ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺍﻫﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﻲ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺼﺔ ﺍﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻗﺼـﻪﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﺸﻮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺸـﻮﻳﻢ ﻭ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﺗـﻮ ﻋﻈﻤـﺖ ﺍﻧﺤﺼـﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻭ ﻳـﻚ ﻧـﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻋﻈﻤﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﺧﻮﺍﻫﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺑﻜﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻼً ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺴﻴﺤﻴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻬﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻗﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﻨﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺧﺪﺍ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺴـﻴﺤﻲ ﻣـﻲﮔـﻮﻳﻴﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﻱ ﻣﺴـﻴﺤﻲ! ﺗـﻮ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻴﺢ )ﻉ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺸﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻫـﻢ ﻣﺴـﻴﺢ )ﻉ( ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﭘﻴﺸـﻮﺍﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻛـﻪ ﭼـﻮﻥ ﻣﺴـﻴﺢ )ﻉ( ﺣﺠـﺖ ﻭ ﺁﻳﺘـﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻫﻢ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻧﻤﻲﮔـﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻮ ﻣﺴﻴﺢ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﻳـﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺻـﻼً ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑـﺮ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﺻﻒﺁﺭﺍﻳﻲ ﺍﻳﻦﭼﻨﻴﻨﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻴﭻﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﺍﻳﻦﮔﻮﻧـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻠﻪ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦﺩﻟـﻲ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷـﻦﺑﻴﻨـﻲ‬
‫‪ 16‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻋﻴﺒﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻀـﺮﺕ ﻣﻮﺳـﻲ )ﻉ(‬
‫ﺩﻳﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﻣﻘـﺎﻡ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻲ )ﻉ( ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻴﺴﻲ )ﻉ(‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺧﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻧﮕﻴﺨﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻓﺮﻭﺑﻨﺪﻳـﺪ ﻭ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴـﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻴﺴﻲ )ﻉ( ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻲ‬
‫)ﻉ( ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻳﺪﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﭙﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣـﺎ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﺧﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻧﻪ؛ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺑـﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﻫﻮﺍ ﻭ ﺳﻪ ﻫﻮﺍ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺲ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺑﺸﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺁﻳـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﻱ ﻣﺎ ﺁﻣﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳـﺪﻳﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﺼﺐ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻴﻦﻗﺪﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻠﺐ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤـﺎﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺧﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﻣـﻲﭘـﺬﻳﺮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺧﺘﻢ ﻧﺒﻮﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧـﺐ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧـﺐ ﺁﻭﺭﻧـﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦﻃﻮﺭ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻨﺠـﺎﻩ ﻳـﺎ ﺻـﺪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻣﻲﺁﻣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺎ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ ﺁﻳـﺎﺕ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﻭ ﻧﺸـﺎﻧﻪﻫـﺎﻱ ﻧﺒـﻮﺕ ﻭ ﺣﺠـﺖﻫـﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻬـﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻫـﻢ ﺑـﻪ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻲﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺖ ﻭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺘﻲ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﻲﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘــﺲ ﺍﻋﺘﻘــﺎﺩ ﻣﺴــﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﺑــﻪ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴــﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒــﺮ ﺍﺳــﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧــﻮﻋﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺧﻮﺍﻫﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻌﺼ‪‬ﺐ ﻭ ﺟ‪‬ﻬﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺣﻖ ﻭ ﺍﻧﻜـﺎﺭ ﺣـﻖ ﺳﺮﭼﺸـﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔ ﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﺠﺎ ﺳﺮﭼﺸﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ؟ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺳﺮﭼﺸﻤﻪ ﻣـﻲ ﮔﻴـﺮﺩ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﻛـﻪ ﻣﺴـﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺴـﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﭼـﻪ ﻣﺴـﻠﻤﺎﻧﻢ؟ ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﻫﻤـﺔ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ؛ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻫـﻢ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﻱ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪17 (1‬‬

‫ﻭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻭ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑـﺎﻥ ﺧـﻮﺩ‪ ‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻡ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻔﺖ ﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﺮﻭ ﺣﻖ ــ ﻧﮕﻔﺖ ﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﺮﻭ ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ــ ﺧﺪﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺭﺷﺘﺔ ﻧﺒﻮﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻧﻜﻨﻢ؟ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻼﻧﻲ ﺗﻌﺼﺐ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺧﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩﭘﺴـﻨﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨـﺎﺭ ﺑﮕـﺬﺍﺭ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻛﻦ؟ ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻢ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺑﻜﻨﻢ؟ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣـﻦ ﺑـﻪ ﻣﻘـﺎﻡ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﺧﺪﺍ ﭘـﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻢ ﻭ ﺑـﺎ ﺻـﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﻛﺎﻣـﻞ ﻣـﻲ ﮔﻮﻳـﺪ ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺻﻼً ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻢ ﺁﻥ ﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ ﺑﮕـﻮﻳﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺁﻳـﺎﺕ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨـﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻢ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﻭ ﮔﻔﺖ‪» :‬ﻻ ﻧَﺒِﻲ‪ ‬ﺑ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ـﺪ‪‬ﻱ«‪» 1،‬ﺑﻌـﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ«‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺻﻼً ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪ ﻓﺮﻭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻣﻌﺘﻘﺪ ﺑﺸـﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻼﻡ ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻨﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻼﻡ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺧﺪﺍﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺻﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺗﻢ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ ﻧـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺼﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻡ؛ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻌﺪﺍً ﺁﻣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗّـﺖ‬
‫ﻭ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻳﺪﻡ ﺍﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺷﺎﻳﺴﺘﺔ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣـﻲ ﭘـﺬﻳﺮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺻﻼً ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻳﻌﻘﻮﺏ ﻛﻠﻴﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻬﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﻼﻣﻴﻪ‪1365 ،‬ﻕ‪ ،‬ﺝ‪ :1‬ﺹ‪ 264‬ﻭ‬
‫‪269‬؛ ﺝ‪ :6‬ﺹ‪.379‬‬
‫‪ 18‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﻛـﺮﻳﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺁﻳﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺳـﻨﺖ ﻭ ﺣـﺪﻳﺚ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺁﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻛﺮﻳﻢ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳـﻪ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺗـﻼﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻛﺮ ﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪» :‬ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﭘﺪﺭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺁﻭﺭ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨّﺒﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑـﺮ ﻫﻤـﻪ ﭼﻴـﺰ ﺁﮔـﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ«‪ .‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻗﺪﺭﻱ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﻪ ﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﭘﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺁﻭﺭ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗﻢ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺧﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺔ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺁﻳﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺁﻳﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻼﻭﺕ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﺄﻧﻮﺱ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﺔ ‪ 40‬ﺳـﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺣـﺰﺍﺏ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 33‬ﻗﺮﺁﻥ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻼﻭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺭﺳـﻲ ﺁﻳـﺎﺕ ﻗﺒـﻞ ﻣﻄﻠـﺐ ﺭﻭﺷـﻦ‬
‫ﻣــﻲ ﺷــﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﻳــﺎﺕ ﻗﺒــﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨــﺔ ﺩﺍﺳــﺘﺎﻥ ﺯﻳﻨــﺐ ﺍﺳــﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒــﺮ ﺍﺳــﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺘﺮﻋﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺯﻳﻨﺐ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻳﻨﺐ ﻛﻪ ﻧـﻮﺓ ﺩﺧﺘـﺮﻱ ﻋﺒـﺪﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫ﺍﺳــﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈــﺮ ﻧﺴــﺐ ﻭ ﺷــﺮﺍﻓﺖ ﺧــﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﮔﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺧــﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩﺍﻱ ﭘــﺮﺍﺭﺯﺵ‪،‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻓﺘﻤﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﺪﺭﺑﺰﺭﮔﺶ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻫـﺎ ﺑـﺰﺭگ ﻭ ﺳـﺎﻻﺭ ﺧﺎﻧـﺪﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻲﻫﺎﺷﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺳﺎﻻﺭ ﻗﺮﻳﺶ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﺪﺭﺵ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺧﺘﺮﺧﺎﻧﻢ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ ﻣﺴـﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒــﺮ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺧــﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺵ ﺧﻮﺍﺳــﺘﮕﺎﺭﻱ ﻣــﻲ ﻛﻨــﺪ‪ .‬ﺑــﺮﺍﻱ ﭼــﻪ ﻛﺴــﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﮕﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ؟ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﮕﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟ ﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎً ﺑ‪‬ﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺧﺪﻳﺠﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺷﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺯﺩﻭﺍﺝ ﺑـﺎ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺨﺸﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻋـﺮﺽ ﻛـﻨﻢ ﻛـﻪ ﺯﻳـﺪ ﺟـﺰء ﻧﺨﺴـﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﭼﻨـﺪ ﻧﻔـﺮ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﭘ ﻴﻐﻤﺒــﺮ ﺍﺳــﻼﻡ ﺍﻳﻤــﺎﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻧــﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜــﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬــﺎ ﻫــﻢ ﺯﻳــﺪ ﺍﺳــﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒــﺮ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪19 (1‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺷﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺁﻣـﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺟـﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺑـﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻓﻌـﺎﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻫﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻴﺎﻗﺖ؛ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﺪﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﺑـﻮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻫـﻴﭻ‬
‫ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺎﺟﺒﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻀﻴﻠﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴـﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻣﻲ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺯﻳـﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺩﮔـﻲ ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻮﺷﺶﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺭﺯﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﺩﮔﻲ ﻣﺒﺎﺭﺯﻩ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻔﺼ‪‬ﻞ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺯﻳـﺪ ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ‬
‫ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ ﺗـﻚ ﺩﺭ ﻣـﻲﺁﻳـﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻤـﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﺰﺩﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻡ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﻲﺩﺍﻧﻢ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻫـﻴﭻ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺻـﺤﻨﻪﻫـﺎ ﺑﺮﺧـﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ؟ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﻡ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﺳﺎﻝﻫـﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻳـﻚ ﺧـﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻛﺮ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻨﺪ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻴﺸـﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻤـﻲ ﺟﻤـﻊ ﻭ ﺟـﻮﺭ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻛﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻪﺷﺎﻥ ﻧﺒﺎﺷـﺪ؛ ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻋـﻴﻦ ﺣـﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺮﺭﻱﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼً ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﺩﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨـﺎﻥ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺑﺪﻫﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺘﻬـﻲ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ‬
‫ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﺟﻮﺭﺗﺮ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻧـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺗـﻮ ﺗـﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺯﺣﻤﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﺸﻴﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺒـﺖ ﻛـﺮﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﺧﻴﻠـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗـﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮ ﺗﺴﻮﻳﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑِﺮﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﻟـﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﭘـﺎﺩﺍﺵ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺎﺱ ﻭ ﺷﻜﺮﺍﻧﺔ ﻣﺤﺒـﺖ ﻫـﺎ ﻭ ﺧـﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻠـﻲ ﺗـﻮ‪ ،‬ﺁﻣـﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺴـﺘﻴﻢ ﻛـﻪ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻫﺎﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﺩﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫـﻢ ﻛـﻪ ﺭﻓﺘـﻲ‪ ،‬ﻫـﺮ ﻛـﺎﺭﻱ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦﻛـﻪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻛﺮﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺑﺸﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﺮﺍ؟ ﭼـﻮﻥ ﻣـﺮﺩﻱ ﺑـﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻚ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻮﻡ ﻭ ﺧﻮﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺮ ﻭ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛـﻪ ﺣـﺎﻻ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫‪ 20‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺩﺭﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻣﻲﺭﻓﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﭼﻪ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺷـﺖ؟ ﻛـﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﮔﺮﻣـﻲ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﺩ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺯﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﭽﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺁﻣﺪ ﻭ ﺷﺪ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺴﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﺭﺳﻴﺪﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻣـﻲﻛﺮﺩﻧـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﺬﺕ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺣـﺎﻻ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺠـﺎ ﺑﻴـﺮﻭﻥ ﻣـﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻠﺒﻪﺍﻱ ﻣﻲﺭﻓﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﺳﻮﺕ ﻭ ﻛﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺷـﺐ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻧﺠـﺎ ﻣـﻲﺭﺳـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲﻛﺸﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺴﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﺎﺭﺍﺣﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻔﺖ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻼﺹ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻡ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺒﺎﻳـﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪﻩﺍﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﻧﻤﻲﺭﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤـﻴﻦﺟـﺎ ﻣـﻲﻣـﺎﻧﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺪﻫﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﻣـﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻘـﻮﻕ ﺻـﺮﻑ ﻧﻈـﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﻴﻦﺟﺎ ﻣﻲﻣﺎﻧﻢ ﻭ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣـﻲﻛـﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺻـﻼً ﻣـﻦ ﭘـﻮﻝ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﭼـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ؟‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻫﻢ ﺗﻌﺠﺐ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺧﻴﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﺓ ﺟﻮﺍﻣﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﻋـﺮﺽ ﻣـﻲﻛـﻨﻢ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ ﭘﻮﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻧﺪﺍﺷـﺖ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﻣﻨﺪﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺴﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﺎً ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠـﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻮﺍﻣﻊ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﺔ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻏﺮﺏ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺑـﻪ ﭼﺸـﻢ ﻣـﻲﺧـﻮﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﺭﻭﺣﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭼـﺮﺍ؟‬
‫ﭘﻮﻝ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ؟ ﭼﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﭘﻨﺠﺎﻩ ﺳﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﭼﻬـﻞ ﺳـﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳـﺎ ﺣـﺪﺍﻗﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻲ ﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺯﺣﻤﺖ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻻ ﻫﻢ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺴـﺘﮕﻲ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪21 (1‬‬

‫ﻭ ﺗﻘﺎﻋﺪﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻴﻤﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺗﻘﺎﻋﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﺓ‬


‫ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻲﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﭘﺮﺳﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﮕﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻨﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﮔـﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭ ﺑﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﺠﺎ ﺑﺮﻭﻧﺪ؟ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬـﺎ ﺑـﺮ ﺣﺴـﺐ ﻣﻘـﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﺎﻟـﺐ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻤﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻲ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫـﺮ ﻭﻗـﺖ ﻣـﺮﻳﺾ ﻣـﻲﺷـﺪﻧﺪ ﻣـﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴـﺘﻨﺪ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺮﻭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﭘﺮﺳﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻣـﻲﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﭘـﺲ‬
‫ﭼﻪ ﻛﻤﺒﻮﺩﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ؟ ﻛﻤﺒﻮﺩ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺑـﻮﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﭘﺴـﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺘﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲﻛـﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺧﺘـﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﺮﻳﻜـﺎ‪ .‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﺎﻻﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ ﻣﻴﻼﺩ ﻣﺴﻴﺢ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﻚ ﻭ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺧﻴﻠـﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﻫﻤﺖ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺩﻭﻱ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴ‪‬ﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬـﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬـﺎ ﭘﻨﺎﻫﮕﺎﻫﺸـﺎﻥ ﭘـﺎﺭﻙﻫـﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺵﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﭘﺎﺭﻙﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮔﺮﺩﺵﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﭘﻨﺎﻫﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﺗﻚ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﺸـﻴﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻜـﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﺸﻴﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺗﻚ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺣﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺯﺩﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺳﺮ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺑـﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﮔﺮﻧـﻪ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺁﻧﺠـﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺸﻴﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻨﺪ ﺯﻥﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﻮﻫﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﺩﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻭ ﺗﻚ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺗﺎﺯﻩ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲﮔﺬﺭﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﺐﻫﻨﮕـﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺴﻜﻦ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﻠﻔـﻦ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﻪﭼﻴﺰ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻚ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺎﻧـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺴـﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺩﺍﻧﻢ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﮔﺰﻳﺴﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﺎﻟﻴﺴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺸﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺎ ﭼﻪ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ؟ ﺍﺻـﻼً ﻳﻜـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮﺑﻨﺎﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﻓﻠﺴﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻏﺮﺑﺖ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻮﺍﻣـﻊ‬
‫‪ 22‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻏﺮﺑﻲ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺮﻥ ﺍﺧﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻟـﺬﺍ ﺑـﺮ ﭘﺎﻳـﺔ‬
‫ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻜﻮﺷـﻨﺪ ﻭﺍﺑﺴـﺘﮕﻲ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲﺍﺵ ﺑﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻭﺣﺪﺕ ﻭ ﻏﺮﺑﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻠﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻫﺮ ﻛﻮﺷﺸﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﻨـﺪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﺠﺎﺕ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻧﺸﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺪﻳﻦ ﺳـﺒﺐ ﺍﺷـﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺣﺴـﺎﺱ ﺗﻨﻬـﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻚ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻮﺍﻣﻊ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﺔ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻫـﻢ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ ﺍﻣـﺮﻭﺯ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﺪ؟ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ ﻣﺴـﺘﻘﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﻭ ﺗﻌﻬﺪﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟـﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗـﻚ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻮﺍﻣﻊ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﺻﻼً ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺷـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﺎﺯ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺜﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ــ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺗﻮﻟﻲ ﻭ ﻭﻻﻳﺖ ﺍﺟﺘﻤـﺎﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﺣﺴـﺎﺱ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻧـﺎﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺷﺶ ﻧﻤﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﻄﻒ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭙﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﻮﻳﻲ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺒﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﻛﻢﻣﻬـﺮﻱ ﻧﺴـﺒﺖ ﺑـﻪ ﺧـﻮﺩﺵ ﻣـﻲﻳﺎﺑـﺪ‪ .‬ﻳـﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻮﻝﺍﷲ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺠﺎ ﺑﺮﻭﻡ؟ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﺻﻼً ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺠﺎ ﺑﺮﻭﻡ؟ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻣﻲﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻳﺪ ﻓﺮﺯﻧﺪﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﻭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺴـﺮﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻻ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﻛـﻪ ﻓﺮﺯﻧـﺪ‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﺯﻧـﺪ ﻛﻤـﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ ﻭ ﺟـﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﻳـﻚ ﻓﺮﺯﻧـﺪﻩ ﺗـﺎﺯﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺯﻧﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺪﺭ ﻭ ﻣﺎﺩﺭﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻧﻴﺎ ﺭﻓﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻲﭘﻨﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﭘﺪﺭ ﻭ ﻣﺎﺩﺭﻱ ﺑﻲﺑﻀﺎﻋﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﺓ ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻭ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﺯﻧﺪﻱ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻮﺍﻣﻊ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻣﻌﻤـﻮﻝ ﺑـﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺍﻣﻊ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻣﻲﺁﻣﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺮﺯﻧﺪﻱ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﻓـﺖ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﺯﻧﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻘـﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻓﺮﺯﻧـﺪ ﻣﺸـﻤﻮﻝ ﻫﻤـﺔ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪23 (1‬‬

‫ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺪﺭ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺯﻧﺪﻱ ﻣﻲﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺪﺭﺵ ﺍﺭﺙ ﻣﻲﺑﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻗﻲ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﮔﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑـﻪ ﭘـﺪﺭ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺯﻧـﺪﻱ ﻣﻴـﺎﻥ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺍﺟـﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺯﻳﺪ ﭘﺴﺮﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﺓ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﭘﺴـﺮ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺧﻮﺷﺤﺎﻝ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻼً ﻏﻼﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ ﺑـﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣـﺎﻻ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺯﻧﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻫﻢ ﺧﻮﺷﺤﺎﻝ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺁﻣﺪ ﻭ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﻪ ﺁﻣﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺼﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﺓ ﺩﺧﺘﺮﻋﻤﺔ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺯﻳﻨﺐ‪ ،‬ﺩﺧﺘﺮﺷـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺴﺮﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﺓ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﮕﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﮕﺎﺭﻱ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩ؛ ﺭﻭﺷﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺧﻮﺍﺳـﺘﮕﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘـﻴﻦ ﺑـﺪﺍﻥ ﻋﻤـﻞ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﮕﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺘﺔ ﺟﺎ ﺍﻓﺘـﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ ﻣـﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨـﺪ ﺩﺧﺘـﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﮕﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳـﺮﺍﻍ ﭘـﺪﺭ ﻭ ﻣـﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻭ ﻣـﻲﺭﻭﻧـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﺷ ﻤﺎ ﺩﺧﺘﺮﺧﺎﻧﻤﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴـﺪ ﺷـﻮﻫﺮ ﺑﺪﻫﻴـﺪ؟‬
‫ﺍﺻﻼًٌ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﺧـﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺘﺮﺧﺎﻧﻢ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﺎءﺍﷲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻦ ﺍﺯﺩﻭﺍﺝ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻧﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺨﺖ ﺑـﺮﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣـﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴـﺪ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺷـﻮﻫﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ؟ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﻫﺮ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺁﻗﺎ ﭘﺴﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﻭ ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﺩﺍﻣـﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ؟ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑـﺎ ﻛﻠﻴـﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘـﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻧـﺪ ﻭ ﮔﻔﺘﻨـﺪ ﺑﻠـﻪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥﻭﻗـﺖ‬
‫ﻣــﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻴــﺪ ﻣــﻦ ﻓــﻼﻥ ﭘﺴــﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣــﻲﺷﻨﺎﺳــﻢ‪ ،‬ﺁﻗــﺎ ﭘﺴــﺮﻱ ﺍﺳــﺖ ﺑــﺎ ﺍﻳــﻦ‬
‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﭘﺪﺭ ﻭ ﻣﺎﺩﺭﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﮕﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﺷـﻤﺎ ﻣـﻲﺁﻳﻨـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﮕﺎﺭﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﮕﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﻭﺭﺯﻳﺪﺓ ﺟﺎ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻗـﻞ ﻣﺘـﻴﻦ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﻛﺮﻡ )ﺹ( ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﺳـﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺩﺧﺘﺮﻋﻤـﺔ‬
‫‪ 24‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﮕﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺷـﻲ ﻣﺘـﻴﻦ ﺍﺑﺘـﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ‬


‫ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻳﻨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺷﻮﻫﺮ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ؟ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ؟ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﻢ ﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﺑﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻠﻪ ﮔ ﻔﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﻓﺮﻣـﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺯﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺴـﻠﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻳﻤـﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺎ ﻫـﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﻳﺴﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻳﻨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻳﺪ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺏ ﺯﻳـﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﺓ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ ﺩﺍﺷـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻳﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬـﺎ ﺑﺴـﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﺭﺍﺣـﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻧﻔﺮﻣﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺑـﺮﺩﻩ ﺑـﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺑﺮﺩﮔﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺳـﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺑـﺮﺩﮔﻴﺶ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺯﻳﻨﺐ‪ ،‬ﻧـﻮﺓ ﻋﺒـﺪﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻣـﻲﺧـﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻏﻼﻡ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺳـﻨﺖ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﺧـﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﮔﻲ ﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤـﻲ ﺁﻳـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻓـﻲ ﻫـﻢ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺗﺨﻠـﻒ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳـﺨﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﻭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﮕﺎﺭﻱ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﭙﺬﻳﺮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻢ ﺟﻮﺭ ﺩﺭﻧﻤﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣـﺮﻑ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺣﺮﻓـﻲ ﺯﺩ‪ .‬ﺗـﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻧـﺪ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻳﻨﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﻃـﺮﻑ ﮔﻔﺘﻨـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﻨﺐ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﮕﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻓﻜـﺮ ﻛـﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﻛـﻪ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺯﻳﻨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﮕﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﮔﻔﺘـﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ؟ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺣﺎﻻ ﻣﺸـﺨﺺ ﺷـﺪ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧـﻮﺩﺵ ﺧﻮﺍﺳـﺘﮕﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﻤـﻲ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜـﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻳـﺪ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﮕﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺣـﺮﻑ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣـﺮﻑ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ‬
‫ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺯﻳﻨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺯﻳﺪ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺟﺎﻫﻠﻴﺖ ﻭ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﮔﻲ ﺯﻳﻨﺐ ﺣﺎﻻ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪ؟ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪ ﻋﺮﻭﺱ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ‪ .‬ﭼـﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺪ ﭘﺴﺮﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﺓ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺯﻥ ﺍﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪ ﻋﺮﻭﺱ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪25 (1‬‬

‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺯﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺯﻳﻨﺐ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﻣـﺪ‪ .‬ﮔـﻮﻳﻲ ﺯﻳﻨـﺐ ﺗﺤـﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻏﺮﻭﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﮔﻲ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻳﺪ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻳﺪ ﺁﻣﺪ ﺧﺪﻣﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻳـﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻮﻝﺍﷲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺯﻳﻨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻼﻕ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺳﺮ ﻧﻤﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯﺩﻭﺍﺝ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﻧﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺯﻳﻨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺯ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺻﺒﺎﺣﻲ ﺻﺒﺮ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺁﻣﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺶ ﻛـﺮﺩ ﺍﺟـﺎﺯﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻳﻨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻼﻕ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﻨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻼﻕ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺴـﺄﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﻛﺮﻡ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺁﻣﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺯﻳﻨﺐ‪ ،‬ﺩﺧﺘﺮﻋﻤﻪﺍﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺘﺮﻱ ﺷﺎﻳﺴﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻏﺮﻭﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﮔﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻴـﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻭ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺯﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺯﻳﺪ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻼﻕ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺧﺘﺮ ﺷـﺪ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﻮﺓ ﺑﻲﻫﻤﺴﺮ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺫﻫﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﮕﺎﺭﻱ ﭘﺪﺭ ﻭ ﻣﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻭ ﺧﻴﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﮕﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻗﻠﺒﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺑـﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼـﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﺳـﻼﻣﻲ ﻋﺎﺩﻻﻧـﺔ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺩﻭﺍﺟﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺍﻡ ﻧﻴﺎﻭﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻴﻮﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻲﻫﻤﺴﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺯﻳﻨﺐ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺯﻳﻨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻣـﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫـﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﻫﻤﺴـﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﺩﺛﻪ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺸـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﻭﺑﻪﺭﻭﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳـﻦﻛـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻣـﺮﺩﻡ ﻛـﻪ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣـﻮﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﮔﻲ ﺟﺎﻫﻠﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯﺩﻭﺍﺝ ﺑـﺎ ﺯﻳﻨـﺐ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺣﺮﺍﻡ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﭙﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘـﻪ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳــﻼﻡ ﻣــﻲﮔﻮﻳــﺪ‪ :‬ﭘﺴــﺮﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻳــﻚ ﺟﻨﺒــﺔ ﻋــﺎﻃﻔﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﮔﺮﻧــﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺴﺮﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﭘﺴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﺴﺮ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻴـﺎﻥ ﺷـﻤﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻭ ﻗـﻮﻡ ﻭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﻳﺸﻲ ﺧﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻤـﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﻮﻧـﺪ ﺭ‪‬ﺣ‪‬ﻤـﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﻧﻤـﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 26‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺯﻳﻨﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺣﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﺟﺎﻫﻠﻴـﺖ‬
‫ﺯﻳﻨﺐ ﺑﺮ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺣﺮﺍﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺏ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻳﻨﺐ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻫﻤﺴﺮ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑـﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻜﺴـﺖ ﺭﻭﺣـﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺯﺩﻭﺍﺝ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺨﺎﺭ ﻫﻤﺴـﺮﻱ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻧﺸـﺎﻃﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﺒﺨﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻧﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺑـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﮕـﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﭼـﻪ؟ ﻧﮕـﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻧﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺟﺪﻳـﺪﻱ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈـﺎﻡ ﻗـﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﺮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺍﻡ ﻧﻴﺎﻭﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﺗﺰﻟـﺰﻝ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻒ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻧﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﻝ ﻫـﺎ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃـﺮﻑ ﺩﺷـﻤﻨﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻣﻨﺪ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺍﺣﺎﻃﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﻲ ﮔﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻧﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤـﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺳـﻲ ﻣﻄﻠـﺐ‪ .‬ﻭﺣـﻲ ﺁﻣـﺪ ﺑـﺮ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺗﻮ ﺑﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﮕـﺮﺍﻥ ﻫﺴـﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﻛـﻨﺶ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﺒﺎﺵ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﻃﻌﻴﺖ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺮﻭﺭﺩﮔﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺑـﻼﻍ ﻛـﻦ‪ .‬ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻛﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﭘﺴﺮﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﭘﺴﺮ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﭘﺪﺭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﭘﺴﺮﻱ ﻧـﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻟﻄﻴﻒ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪» :‬ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥَ ﻣ‪‬ﺤ‪ ‬ﻤ‪‬ﺪ‪ ‬ﺍَﺑﺂ ﺍَﺣ‪‬ﺪ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ـﻦْ‬
‫ﺭِﺟﺎﻟ‪‬ﻜُﻢ‪ .«‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻄﺎﻓـﺖ ﻣﻄﻠـﺐ ﺧـﻮﺏ ﺩﻗـﺖ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺴـﺎﻧﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﺠﻴﺒﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻼﻏﺘـﻲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻫﺴﺖ ﺩﺭﻙ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺘـﻪ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﺧُـﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻳـﺰ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﺑ ﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺍﺯﺩﻭﺍﺟﻲ ﺑﻜﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯﺩﻭﺍﺝ‪ ،‬ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﺭﻭﺣﻲ ﺯﻳﻨﺐ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﻧﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺳﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯﺩﻭﺍﺝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻜﺮ ﺟﺎﻫﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻧﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﭘﺎﻱ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻮﺳﻴﺪﺓ ﺟﺎﻫﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺴـﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪27 (1‬‬

‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻧﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻛﻨﺶ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯﺩﻭﺍﺝ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﻜﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯﺩﻭﺍﺝ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻥ ﭘﺴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻧـﺪﻩ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﭘـﺪﺭﻱ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺴﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﺴﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﻜ ﺎﻟﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻣﻄﻠـﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﻪ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻛﻨﺪ؟ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺍﷲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻛـﻪ ﭘـﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺪ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻢ‪ .‬ﺯﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺯﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﺴـﺮ ﭘـﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً ﺯﻳﺪ ﭘﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺩﻝ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑ ﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻝ ﺭﻧﺞ ﺩﻳﺪﺓ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺯﻳﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﺩﺛﻪ ﺁﺳـﻴﺐ ﺩﻳـﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺯﻳـﺪ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﻫﻤﺴﺮﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻻ ﻫﻤﺴـﺮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺷﻲ ﺍﺵ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻤﺴـﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳـﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﭘﺴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﺓ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺷﻲ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺍﮔـﺮ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻳﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻜﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣـﺮﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﭘﺪﺭ ﺯﻳﺪ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺛﺮ ﺭﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻄﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮﻱ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﺳﻪ ﻭ ﻛﻮﺯﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮ ﺳﺮ ﺯﻳﺪ ﺩﻝ ﺷﻜﺴـﺘﻪ ﺑﺸـﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪» :‬ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥَ ﻣ‪‬ﺤ‪ ‬ﻤ‪‬ﺪ‪ ‬ﺍَﺑﺂ ﺍَﺣ‪‬ﺪ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ﻦْ ﺭِﺟﺎﻟ‪‬ﻜُﻢ‪ .«‬ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﭘـﺪﺭ ﻫـﻴﭻﻳـﻚ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺯﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳـﻚ ﺻـﻒ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻳﺪ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﺭﻭﺣﻲ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪» .‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻟﻜ‪‬ﻦْ ﺭ‪‬ﺳـﻮﻝَ ﺍﷲَ ﻭ‪‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻨﱠﺒِﻴ‪‬ﻴﻦَ«‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜ ﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗﻢ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺁﻭﺭ ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺗﻢ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻫﻢ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴـﺐ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﺳـﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻴـﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﺮﻣـﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺯﺩﻭﺍﺝ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻳﻨﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻃﻠﺴﻢ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻡ ﺣﺮﻣﺖ ﺍﺯﺩﻭﺍﺝ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺑـﺎ ﺯﻥ‬
‫ﭘﺴﺮﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩﺍﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻜﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣـﻲ ﺑـﺮﺩ ﻭ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﻫـﻢ ﺑـﺎ ﺯﻳﻨـﺐ‬
‫ﺍﺯﺩﻭﺍﺝ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 28‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﺳﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺁﻳـﻪ ﺁﻣـﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪» :‬ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥَ ﻣ‪‬ﺤ‪‬ﻤ‪‬ﺪ‪ ‬ﺍَﺑﺂ ﺍَﺣ‪‬ـﺪ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ـﻦْ ﺭِﺟـﺎﻟ‪‬ﻜُﻢ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻟﻜ‪‬ـﻦْ ﺭ‪‬ﺳـﻮﻝَ ﺍﷲَ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺧـﺎﺗَﻢ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﱠﺒِﻴ‪‬ﻴﻦَ«‪ .‬ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺟﻬـﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣـﺎﻻ ﺑـﺎﺯ ﻧﻜﺘـﻪﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺁﻓﺮﻳـﺪﮔﺎﺭ ﺟﻬـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻗـﻒ ﻭ ﺷـﺄﻥ ﻧﺰﻭﻟـﻲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻳﻨﺐ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﺴﺮ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺪ‪ ‬ﭘﺴﺮﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩﺍﺵ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﺯﺩﻭﺍﺝ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻳـﻚ ﻏﻮﻏـﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠـﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻒ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻧﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﻱ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻳﻢ؛ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺮﻭﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺯﺩﻭﺍﺝ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨـﻪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﻴﻨـﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺰﻟﺰﻝ ﻋﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻧﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻣـﻲﺁﻳـﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨـﻪ ﺍﻋـﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻤـﺪ ﻧـﻪ ﺗﻨﻬـﺎ ﺭﺳـﻮﻝ ﺧﺪﺍﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜـﻪ ﺁﺧـﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﺳـﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯﺩﻭﺍﺝ ﻣﻘﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﺷـﻚ ﻭ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻬﺔ ﻋﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻧﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﻣـﺎ ﺷـﺶﻣﻴﺨـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺳﻮﻝﺍﷲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺧﺎﺗﻢ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎء ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‪» :‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻟﻜ‪‬ﻦْ ﺭ‪‬ﺳﻮﻝَ ﺍﷲَ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻨﱠﺒِﻴ‪‬ﻴﻦَ« ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻔﻲ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺧـﻞ‬
‫ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﭘﺮﺍﻧﺘـﺰ ﺑـﻪ ﻣـﺮﺩﻡ ﺍﻋـﻼﻡ ﺷـﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺁﻳﻪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻡ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺳﺮ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ــ ﭼﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻫـﻞ ﻋﻠـﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﭼﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ــ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻧـﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻓﻼﻧﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﻣـﺎ ﺧﻴﻠـﻲ ﺟـﻮﺭ ﺩﺭﻧﻴﺎﻣـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺁﻳـﻪ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪29 (1‬‬

‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﭘﺪﺭ ﻫﻴﭻﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﺷـﻤﺎ ﻧﺒـﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜـﻦ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗﻢ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭼـﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳـﺒﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﺒـﺎﻃﻲ ﺑـﻴﻦ ﻣﺴـﺄﻟﺔ‬
‫ﭘﺪﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺭﺳﻮﻝﺍﷲ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺧﺎﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨّﺒﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺗﻮﺿـﻴﺢ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﺗﻔﺼـﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻒ ﻭ ﺷﺄﻥ ﻧﺰﻭﻝ ﺁﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻄﺮﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪﻫـﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﻧﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﺮﺑـﻮﻁ ﺑـﻪ ﻋﺼـﺮ ﻧـﺰﻭﻝ ﺁﻳـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻣﻮﻗـﻊ ﺑـﻪ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻧﺎﻥ ﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪﻧﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﻧﻤﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻼﻡ ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺻﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﻭ ﺭﺳﻮﻝﺍﷲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨّﺒﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻬﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻭﺍﺧﺮ؛ ﻭ ﮔﺮﻧـﻪ ﻣـﻦ ﺳـﺎﺑﻘﺎً ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨـﻮﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻫـﻴﭻ ﺟـﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﺪﻳـﺪﻩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﮔﻮﻳﻢ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺟﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﺎﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻡ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩﻩﺍﻡ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻭﺍﺧﺮ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﻚ ﻭ ﺷﺒﻬﻪ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺁﻗـﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﻪ ﺧﺎﺗ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﻟﻨّﺒﻴﻴﻦ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻴﻴﻦ؟ ﺧـﺎﺗ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﻟﻨّﺒﻴـﻴﻦ ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﺧـﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﺧﺎﺗ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺧَﺘَﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳ‪‬ﺨْﺘ‪‬ﻢ‪ .‬ﺧَﺘَﻢ‪ ‬ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ »ﭘﺎﻳـﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩ«‪ .‬ﺧـﺎﺗ‪‬ﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ »ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ«‪ .‬ﺧﺎﺗ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﻟﻨّﺒﻴﻴﻦ‪» :‬ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥﺩﻫﻨﺪﺓ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ«‪ .‬ﻭﻟـﻲ ﺧـﺎﺗَﻢ؛ ﺧـﺎﺗَﻢ‬
‫ﻛﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳـﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺧـﺎﺗَﻢ ﺍﻟﻨّﺒﻴـﻴﻦ ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ »ﺯﻳـﻮﺭ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ«‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻭ ﺟﺪﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ ﺻـﺪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﮔﺮﻧﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺻﻼً ﺗﺎ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻣـﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﻳـﺮﺓ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌـﺎﺗﻢ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺎﻓﺘﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨـﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌـﻪ ﻣـﻲﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩﻡ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻗﺒﻼً ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻚ ﻭ ﺷـﺒﻬﻪﻫـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﺎً ﺑﻪ ﻋﻜﺲ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺭﻫﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻣـﺬﻫﺐ ﭘﻮﺷـﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻮﻫـﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳـﻪ ﺑﺎﻓﺘـﻪﺍﻧـﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼـﻪ ﺧـﺎﺗ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﻟﻨّﺒﻴـﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻭ ﭼـﻪ ﺧـﺎﺗَﻢ ﺍﻟﻨّﺒﻴـﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ 30‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫)ﺧﺎﺗ‪‬ﻢ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﺸـﺘﺮ ﺍﺳـﺖ(‪ .‬ﺍﺷـﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧـﺪ‪.‬‬


‫ﺍﺻﻼً ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭼﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﻭ ﭼﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺧﺎﺗ‪‬ﻢ؛ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻢ ﺧﺎﺗ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﻟﻨّﺒﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺷـﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﺍﻟﻨّﺒﻴﻴﻦ؛ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﻫﻢ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﻣﻌﻨـﻲ ﻓـﺮﻕ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻢ ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻧﮕﺸـﺘﺮ ﺁﻣـﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻫـﻢ ﺧـﺎﺗ‪‬ﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻋﺒـﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺮﻭﺯﺁﺑــﺎﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻗــﺎﻣﻮﺱ ﺍﺳــﺖ ﻛــﻪ ﻣــﻦ ﻧــﺺ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠــﺎ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ ...» :‬ﻭ ﺧ‪‬ﺘﺎﻣﺎً‪ :‬ﻛﻜﺘﺎﺏٍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﻴﻦُ ﻳ‪‬ﺨْﺘَﻢ‪ ‬ﺑـﻪﻋﻠـﻲ ﺍﻟﺸـﻲ‪‬ء‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺨـﺎﺗَﻢ‪ :‬ﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿَﻊ‪ ‬ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﻨَﺔِ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺣ‪‬ﻠْﻲ‪ ‬ﻟﻺِﺻ‪‬ﺒ‪‬ﻊِ ﻛﺎﻟﺨﺎﺗ‪‬ﻢ«‪ 1.‬ﺧﺎﺗ‪‬ﻢ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻣ‪‬ﻬﺮ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻧﮕﺸـﺘﺮ‪ .‬ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫـﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﭘـﺲ ﺑـﺮﻋﻜﺲ ﺁﻧﭽـﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻬـﺎ ﺧﻴـﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺧﺎﺗ‪‬ﻢ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻧﻘﺸﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﻢ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺁﻳﻪ ﻧـﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﻠـﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﺗ‪‬ﻢ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﺍﻟﻨّﺒﻴﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳـﺎ ﮔﻔﺘـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺧﺎﺗ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﻟﻨّﺒﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﻕ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ؟ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴـﺐ ﮔﻔﺘـﻪ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍَﻋﺮﺍﺏ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﻓﻬﻤﻨﺪ »ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺮ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﺍﻥ«‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ »ﺯﻳﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﺍﻥ« ﺑﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﺯﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ ﺧﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﭼـﻪ ﻛﺴـﻲ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌـﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﻢ؟ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻋﺮﺏﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺮﺏﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﺮﺏﻫﺎﻱ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﭼﺮﺍ؟ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺑـﻪ ﻣﺴـﻠﻤﺎﻧﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻨﺎﻥ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟـﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﻫﻢ ﻋﺮﺏ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻋـﺮﺍﺏ ﻏﻴـﺮ ﻣﺴـﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻃـﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻧﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻋﺮﺍﺏ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ‪ .‬ﺑـﻪ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏﻫﺎﻳﺸـﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌـﻪ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻫﺮ ﺍﺣﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﻫﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻟﺒـﺎﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﺒـﻲ ﻭ ﺷـﺮﻛﺎء‪،‬‬
‫‪1970‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﺝ‪ :2‬ﺹ‪ ،15‬ﺫﻳﻞ‪» :‬ﺥﺕﻡ«‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪31 (1‬‬

‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﻓﻌﻼً ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺗ‪‬ﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﺬﺍﺭﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻔـﺘﻢ »ﺧـﺎﺗَﻢ ﺍﻟﻘـﻮﻡ«‪،‬‬
‫»ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺮﺍ«‪» ،‬ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﺎ«‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮔﻔﺘـﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳـﺎ ﻣـﻲﻓﻬﻤﻨـﺪ »ﺯﻳـﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻤﺎ«‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﻲﻓﻬﻤﻨﺪ »ﭘﺎﻳـﺎﻥ«؟ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﮔﻔﺘـﻴﻢ »ﺧـﺎﺗَﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻘّﻘـﻴﻦ«‪ ،‬ﻣـﻲﻓﻬﻤﻨـﺪ‬
‫»ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻘﻖ« ﻭ »ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﻘﻘﺎﻥ« ﻳﺎ ﻣﻲﻓﻬﻤﻨﺪ »ﺯﻳﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻘﻘﺎﻥ«؟‬
‫ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ‪ ‬ﺍﻻ‪‬ﺻ‪‬ﺒ‪‬ﻊ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺼﻪﺍﺵ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﻀﻲﻫﺎ ﻣ‪‬ﻬﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﮕـﻴﻦ ﻳـﻚ ﺍﻧﮕﺸـﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺻﻼً ﻣ‪‬ﻬﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺸﺎﻥ ﻣـﻲﻛﺮﺩﻧـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﮔـﻢ ﻧﺸـﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻫـﺮ ﺟـﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣ‪‬ﻬﺮ ﺑﺰﻧﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﺸـﺘﺮ ﺍﻃـﻼﻕ ﺷـﺪﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺮْ ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺳـﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣ‪‬ﻬﺮ ﻣﻲﺯﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺻـﻼً ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣ‪‬ﻬﺮ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺠﺎﻫﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲﺭﻓﺘـﻪ ﺍﺳـﺖ؟ ﻣﻌﻤـﻮﻻً ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣ‪‬ﻬﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺪﻳﻢ ــ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺼﺮ ﻧﺰﻭﻝ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ــ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻋـﺮﺍﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻧﺎﻣـﻪ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴـﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺁﺧﺮ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺴﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻻﻙ ﻭ ﻣ‪‬ﻬﺮ ﻣﻲﺯﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺘﻬـﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﻛـﻪ ﻻﻙ‬
‫ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﮔ‪‬ﻞ ﭼﺴﺒﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺮِ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺟـﺎ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﮔ‪‬ﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﺔ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﻣﻲﭼﺴﺒﺎﻧﺪﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔ‪‬ﻞ ﺑـﺎﺯ ﻧﺸـﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺎ ﻣ‪‬ﻬـﺮ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺯﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣ‪‬ﻬﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻡ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻲﮔـﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻻﻙ‬
‫ﻭ ﻣ‪‬ﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣ‪‬ﻬﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺼﺮﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼً ﻣﻮﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻓﺖ؛ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺮﻡ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻧـﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣـﻲﺯﺩﻧـﺪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻫـﺮ ﺟـﺎﻳﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣ‪‬ﻬﺮ ﻣﻲﺯﺩﻧﺪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ ﻣ‪‬ﻬﺮ ﻭ ﻣـﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪﺍً ﺷﺪ ﻻﻙ ﻭ ﻣ‪‬ﻬﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻻﻙ ﺟﺎﻧﺸـﻴﻦ ﻣـﻮﻡ ﺷـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷـﺪ ﻻﻙ ﻭ ﻣ‪‬ﻬـﺮ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ‬
‫‪ 32‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺮﺑﺴﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﻣﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ؛ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﻳﻦﻗﺪﺭ ﺯﻧﺒﻮﺭ ﻋﺴـﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠـﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺒﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻻﻛﻲ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ‪ .‬ﻻﻙ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭼﻪ ﭼﻴـﺰﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩ؟ ﮔ‪‬ﻞ ﻭ ﻣ‪‬ﻬﺮ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣ‪‬ﻬﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔ‪‬ﻞ ﻣﻲﺯﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺣﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻋﺼﺮ ﻓﻴﺮﻭﺯﺁﺑـﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺻـﺎﺣﺐ ﻗـﺎﻣﻮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻛـﻪ ﻣﻄﻠـﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ ﺭﻳﺸـﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲﺍﺵ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪» :‬ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺗَﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﺿَـﻊ‪ ‬ﻋﻠـﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﻨَـﺔ«‪ .‬ﺧـﺎﺗﻢ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔ‪‬ﻞ ﻣﻲﺯﻧﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛـﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺧـﺎﺗﻢ ﻭ ﻣ‪‬ﻬـﺮ ﺑـﻮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺗﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﮕﺸـﺘﺮ ﻫـﻢ ﺑـﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﺵ ﻛﺠﺎﺳـﺖ؟ ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﻫﻤـﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ »ﻣﻮ ﻻﻱ ﺩﺭﺯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺮﻭﺩ« ﻭ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻴﮕﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﻴﻔﺘﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗـﺖ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﮔ‪‬ﻞ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗﻢ ﻣﻲﺯﻧﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ‬
‫ﻣ‪‬ﻬﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻣ‪‬ﻬﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﮕﺸـﺘﺮ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻳـﺎ ﻣ‪‬ﻬـﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻣ‪‬ﻬـﺮ ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﺁﺭﺍﻡﺁﺭﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻲ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻘَﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻡ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻧﻔـﺮ ﺁﺧـﺮﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦﻛـﻪ ﺗﻤـﺎﻡ ﺍﻇﻬـﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ُ ﺍﻟﻘَﻮﻡ‪ ‬ﺍَﻱ‪ ‬ﺁﺧ‪‬ﺮُﻫ‪‬ﻢ«‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺧﻴﻠـﻲ ﺭﻭﺷـﻦ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟُﻐَﻮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ »ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﻗﻮﻡ؛ ﺧﺎﺗﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺁﺧـﺮﻱ ﺁﻣـﺪﻩ‪» .‬ﺟـﺎء‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻘَـﻮﻡ« ﻭ ﺑﻌـﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ »ﻭ‪ ‬ﺟﺎء‪ ‬ﺧﺎﺗَﻤ‪‬ﻬ‪‬ﻢ«‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺁﺧﺮﻱ ﺁﻣـﺪ‪ .‬ﭘـﺲ ﺧـﺎﺗَﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﮔـﺮﻭﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻـﻼًٌ ﻣﻌﻨـﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺁﺧﺮﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﺻﻼً ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺴﻲ‬
‫ﻣــﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫــﺪ ﺩﺭﺑــﺎﺭﺓ ﺁﻳــﻪ ﺳــﺨﻨﻲ ﺑﮕﻮﻳــﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻠﻤــﺔ ﺧــﺎﺗﻢ ﺑــﻪ ﺗﻨﻬــﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪33 (1‬‬

‫ﺳﺨﻦ ﻧﮕﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺧﺎﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨّﺒﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﭼﻪ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ؟ ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﺍﻟﻨّﺒﻴﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺮ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﺑﮕﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻋـﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﺴـﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻏﻴـﺮ ﻣﺴـﻠﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﻣـﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﭙﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﺍﻟﻨّﺒﻴـﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻨـﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﭼﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺻﻼً ﻓﻜﺮ ﻋﺮﺏ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﻣ‪‬ﻬﺮ ﻣـﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ؟ ﺍﺻـﻼً ﻓﻜـﺮﺵ‬
‫ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﻣ‪‬ﻬﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﻗﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴـﺐ ﺧـﺎﺗَﻢ ﺍﻟﻨّﺒﻴـﻴﻦ ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺧﺎﺗ‪‬ﻢ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺟﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﺷﻨﺎﺳـﺎﻥ‪،‬‬
‫َ ﺍﻟﻨّﺒﻴﻴﻦ ــ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺧﺎﺗ‪‬ﻢ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺑﺸﻮﺩ ــ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺧﺎﺗ‪‬ﻢ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺧﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺎﺗ‪‬ﻢ ﻭ ﺧـﺎﺗَﻢ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﺗ‪‬ﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻡ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺘـﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﭼﻪ؟ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻣ‪‬ﻬﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻬﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺁﻳﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﻪ ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﺗ‪‬ﻢ ﻣﺴـﺄﻟﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺙ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺩﺑﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﺍﻟﻨّﺒﻴﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﺗ‪‬ﻢ ﺍﻟﻨّﺒﻴـﻴﻦ ﺑـﺎ ﺻـﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﻭ ﺑـﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﺰﻟﺰﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﺮﺍﺑﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺼﺮ ﻧﺰﻭﻝ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺑﻮﺩﻧـﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻋـﺮﺍﺏ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺼﺮ ﻧﺰﻭﻝ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﻌﻨﺎ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪﻧـﺪ ﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻧﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﭘﺪﺭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﭘﻴـﺎﻡ ﺁﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺧﺪﺍ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺷﺎﺋﺒﺔ ﺍﺑﻬﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺩﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻧﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺍﺻﻼً ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺰﻭﻝ ﺁﻳﻪ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷـﻦ‬
‫‪ 34‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﻪ ﺩﻻﻟـﺘﺶ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺟﺎﻱ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺜﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺣﺪﻳﺚ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻳﺚ ﺯﻳـﺎﺩﻱ ﻫﺴـﺖ‪ .‬ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺪﻳﺚ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧـﻮﺍﻧﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻜـﻲ ﺣـﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓـﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺷـﻴﻌﻴﺎﻥ ﻣـﻮﻻ‬
‫ﺍﻣﻴﺮﺍﻟﻤﻮﻣﻨﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ )ﻉ( ﻣﻜﺮﺭ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﻛﺮﻡ )ﺹ( ﺩﺭ ﺟﻨﮓ ﺗﺒـﻮﻙ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻼً ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﺑﺴﻴﺞ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺲ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﻼﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﭙﺎﻫﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺎﺯﻡ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺰﺭگﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﺪﺭﺕﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺭﻭﻡ ﺑﺠﻨﮕﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌـﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻲ)ﻉ( ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﻳﺎ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻨﮓ ﺗﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻳﻨـﻪ ﺑﻤـﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﻫـﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﻛﻨﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻠﻲ)ﻉ( ﺳﺨﺖ ﺁﻣﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﺟﻨﮕـﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺷـﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺮﺩﺍﺭ ﺟﻨﮓﺁﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻨﮓﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻣﻮﻫﺒـﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺮﻭﻡ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ! ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺁﻣﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻠﺦ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﻳﺎ ﻋﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﺒﺎﺵ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻢ ﺗﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻀﻴﻠﺖ ﺑـﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‪» ،‬ﺃﻧْـﺖ‪‬‬
‫ﻣ‪‬ﻨﱢﻲ ﺑِﻤ‪‬ﻨْﺰِﻟَﺔِ ﻫﺎﺭ‪‬ﻭﻥَ ﻣ‪‬ﻦْ ﻣ‪‬ﻮﺳﻲ ﺇﻟّﺎ ﺍَﻧﱠﻪ‪ ‬ﻻ ﻧَﺒِﻲ‪ ‬ﺑ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﻱ«‪ 1.‬ﻗﺼﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻫﺎﺭﻭﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﺒﻴﻦ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﺳﻲ )ﻉ( ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﭘﺮﻭﺭﺩﮔﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻋﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺑﻨﻲﺍﺳﺮﺍﻳﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﺎﺭﻭﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺑﻨﻲﺍﺳﺮﺍﺋﻴﻞ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺴـﺄﻟﻪ ﻣﻬـﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﭘﺮﻭﺭﺩﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗـﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺍﺻـﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻲ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻘﺮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺑﻼﻍ ﺷـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺧﻴﻠـﻲ ﻣﻬـﻢ ﺑـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣـﺎ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﻛﻠﻴﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﺝ‪ :8‬ﺹ‪.107‬‬


‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪35 (1‬‬

‫ﻫﺎﺭﻭﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺳﻲ ﺭﻓﺖ؟ ﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻫﺎﺭﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺑﻤﺎﻧـﺪ ﺗـﺎ ﺑﻨـﻲﺍﺳـﺮﺍﺋﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴـﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻲ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺸﺒﻴﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﻻ )ﻉ(‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻣﺄﻧﻮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺗﺐ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻟﭙﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺎﻧﻊ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻟﻪﺍﺵ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺗﻮ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﻫﺎﺭﻭﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻫﺎﺭﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻲ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻢ ﻫﺎﺭﻭﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﻮﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻟـﻲ ﻫـﺎﺭﻭﻥ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺭﻫﺒﺮﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺳﻲ ﭘﻴﺸﻮﺍﻱ ﺍﻭ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺯ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻄﺎﺏ ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺳـﻲ‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﻱ ﻫﺎﺭﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﻧﻔﺮﻱ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﻋﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨـﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺪﻳﺚ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﺍﺧﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ )ﺹ( ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﺷـﻴﻌﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﻨﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻀﺎﻳﻞ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﻗـﺐ ﻣـﻮﻻ ﻋﻠـﻲ )ﻉ( ﻫـﻢ ﻫﺴـﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﻳﺚ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﺷﻴﻌﻪ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺳﻨﻲ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﻱ ﺷﻴﻌﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻔﺴﺮ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻣـﺬﻫﺐ ﻣـﺎ ﻃﺒﺮﺳـﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﺴـﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺁﻳﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪» :‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺻ‪‬ﺢ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﺤ‪‬ﺪﻳﺚْ ﻋ‪‬ﻦْ ﺟﺎﺑِﺮِ ﺑﻦِ ﻋ‪‬ﺒ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﺍﷲ‬
‫ﻋ‪‬ﻦِ ﺍﻟﻨﱠﺒﻲ‪) ‬ﺹ( ﻗﺎﻝَ‪ :‬ﺇﻧﱠﻤﺎ ﻣ‪‬ﺜَﻠﻲ ﻓ‪‬ﻲ ﺍﻷﻧْﺒﻴـﺎء ﻛَﻤ‪‬ﺜَـﻞِ ﺭ‪‬ﺟ‪‬ـﻞٍ ﺑ‪‬ﻨـﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺍً ﻓَﺎَﻛْﻤ‪‬ﻠَﻬـﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﺣ‪‬ﺴ‪‬ﻨَﻬﺎ ﺍ‪‬ﻟّﺎ ﻣ‪‬ﻮﺿ‪‬ﻊ‪ ‬ﻟَﺒِﻨَﻪ ﻓَﻜﺎﻥَ ﻣ‪‬ﻦْ ﺩ‪‬ﺧَﻞَ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻓَﻨَﻈَﺮ ﺍ‪‬ﻟَﻴﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﻝَ ﻣﺎ ﺍَﺣ‪‬ﺴ‪‬ﻨﻬﺎ ﺍ‪‬ﻟّـﺎ ﻣ‪‬ﻮﺿ‪‬ـﻊ‪‬‬
‫ﻫﺬ‪‬ﻩ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻠَﺒِﻨَﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﻝ )ﺹ(‪ :‬ﻓَﺄﻧَﺎ ﻣ‪‬ﻮﺿ‪‬ﻊ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻠَﺒِﻨَﻪ ﺧُﺘ‪‬ﻢ‪ ‬ﺑِـﻲ‪ ‬ﺍﻷﻧْﺒﻴـﺎء‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍُﻭﺭ‪‬ﺩ‪‬ﻩ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺒ‪‬ﺨـﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣ‪‬ﺴ‪‬ﻠ‪‬ﻢ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺻ‪‬ﺤﻴﺤ‪‬ﻴ‪‬ﻬِﻤﺎ«‪ 1.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ‪ :‬ﺣـﺪﻳﺚ‬
‫ﺻــﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺳــﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺟــﺎﺑﺮ ﺑــﻦ ﻋﺒــﺪﺍﷲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒــﺮ ﻛــﻪ ﻓﺮﻣــﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﻗﺼــﺔ ﻣــﻦ ﺩﺭ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺑــﻮﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻀــﻞ ﺑــﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺴــﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺮﺳــﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﻤــﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴــﺎﻥ ﻓــﻲ ﺗﻔﺴــﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘــﺮﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺻــﻴﺪﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﺒﻌﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﻓﺎﻥ‪1355 ،‬ﻕ‪ ،‬ﺝ‪ :4‬ﺹ‪.362‬‬
‫‪ 36‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺼﺔ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻱ ﻳـﻚ ﺩﺍﻧـﻪ‬
‫ﺁﺟﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﻧﻪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻛﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺑ‪‬ﻪ ﺑ‪‬ﻪ! ﭼﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﻗﺸﻨﮕﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ! ﭼﺸﻤﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﺟـﺮ ﺧـﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺍﻓﺘﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪» :‬ﺣﻴﻒ! ﺍ ﻱ ﻛﺎﺵ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺁﺟﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻧﻘﺼﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺖ! ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺧﺎﻧـﺔ ﻧﺒـﻮﺕ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻳﻜﻲ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻈﺎﻡِ ﻣﻌﻴ‪‬ﻦ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﻧﺒـﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺟﺎﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺧﺸـﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳـﻚ ﻋـﺪﺩ ﺁﺟـﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺟﺮ ﺁﺧﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻦ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﭘﺎﻳـﺎﻥ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻨـﺪ«‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺣـﺪﻳﺚ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺮﺳﻲ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﺍﻳﺖ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺟﺎﺑﺮ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻃﺒﺮﺳﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻫﻞ ﺳـﻨﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺨﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣ‪‬ﺴﻠ‪ ‬ﻢ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﺳـﺘﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﻫﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺣﺪﻳﺚ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺨﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻳﺚ ﻫﺠﺪﻫﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﺎﻗـﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ ﺻـﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﺴـﻠ‪‬ﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣـﺪﻳﺚ ‪ 22‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ ﻓﻀـﺎﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ ﺧـﻮﺩﺵ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﻠ‪‬ﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺣﻨﺒﻞ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻣ‪‬ﺴﻨَﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺩﻭﻡ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ،398 ،257‬ﻭ ‪ ، 412‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻘـﻞ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﺣـﺪﻳﺚ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﻳﺚ ‪ 412‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺳﺨﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﻢ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻓﻜـﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺄﻧﻮﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨـﻪ ﺍﺷـﺎﺭﻩ ﻣـﻲﻛـﻨﻢ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻳﺚ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺑﻮﺩﺍﻭﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻣﺬﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺣﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺣﻨﺒﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺘﺎﺏﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻫﻞ ﺳﻨﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﻮﺍﺏ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺷـﻤﺎﺭﻩﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴـﺎﻧﻲ ﺟﺎﻟـﺐ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪37 (1‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻪ‬


‫ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻛﺮﻳﻢ ﻭ ﭼﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺳـﻨﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻳـﺚ ﻣﻌﺘﺒـﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴـﺄﻟﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻧﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ ﺧـﺎﺗﻢ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺴﻲ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﻤـﺪ ﺑـﻦ ﻋﺒـﺪﺍﷲ )ﺹ( ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺁﻳـﻪ ﻭ ﺣـﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﺧـﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺻﻼً ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪» .‬ﻧُﺆْﻣ‪‬ﻦُ ﺑِﺒ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﺾٍ‬
‫ﻭ‪ ‬ﻧَﻜْﻔُﺮُ ﺑِﺒ‪‬ﻌﺾٍ«‪ 1‬ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤـﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﻣﺒﻨـﺎﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻋﻘﻴـﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻧﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻥﺷﺎءﺍﷲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻄﻠـﺐ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪﻳﻢ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؛ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﻔﻬﻤـﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺳـﻨﺪ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺁﺧـﺮ ﭼﻄـﻮﺭ ﺷـﺪ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧﺪ ﺭﺷﺘﺔ ﻧﺒﻮﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻳﺎﻓـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻣـﺎ ﻳـﻚ ﺳـﺆﺍﻝ ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺤﺚ ﺟﻠﺴـﺔ ﺁﻳﻨـﺪﻩ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧﺪ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻟﺔ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺎ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﻛﺸﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻴﻌﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﻬـﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺍﺋﻤﻪ )ﻉ( ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻴﻌﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﺳـﺖ ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧـﺪ ﺑﺤـﺚ ﺟـﺎﻟﺒﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﻤﻢ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻧﻴـﺰ ﻫﺴـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﺨﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻛﻨﻢ »ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴـﺖ‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ«‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻴﻌﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﻫـﻢ ﻣﺮﺑـﻮﻁ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﺤ‪‬ﻤ‪‬ﺪ‪ ‬ﻟ‪‬ﻠّﻪ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺻ‪‬ﻠﱠﻲﺍﷲ ﻋ‪‬ﻠﻲ ﺳ‪‬ﻴِﺪ‪‬ﻧﺎ ﻣ‪‬ﺤ‪‬ﻤ‪‬ﺪ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺁﻟ‪‬ﻪ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻄّﺎﻫ‪‬ﺮﻳﻦْ‪.‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﻣﺤﻤﺪﺑﺎﻗﺮ ﻣﺠﻠﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﻮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺮﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎ‪1404 ،‬ﻕ‪ ،‬ﺝ‪ :65‬ﺹ‪.292‬‬


‫‪ 38‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺑﺎﺭ ﭘﺮﻭﺭﺩﮔﺎﺭﺍ! ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﻠﺐ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺤﻜـﻢ‬


‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻧﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺻـﺎﻟﺢ ﻫﻤـﺮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎ! ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻇﻠﻤﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻜﻲ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻓـﺮﻭﺯﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎ! ﺑـﻪ ﻣـﺎ ﻣﺴـﻠﻤﺎﻧﺎﻥ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﻴـﻖ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻳﺎﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺖ ﺍﺳـﻼﻣﻲ ﺑـﺎ ﺁﻧﭽـﻪ ﺩﺭﺧـﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﺎﺳﺖ ﺩﻓﺎﻉ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺷﻤﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻭ ﺟﺎﻣﻌـﺔ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﻓﻴـﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻮ ﻭ ﻫﻤﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﺎﺑﻮﺩ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻭﻇﺎﻳﻔﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬـﺪﺓ ﻳﻚ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻣﻘﺮﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎ! ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﻣـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎ ﺧـﻮﺩﺕ ﻭ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺮﺁﻧﺖ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻧﺪﺍﻥ ﭘﺎﻙ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺕ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺪﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻣـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺮﻭﺍﻥ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻴﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻲ )ﻉ( ﻭ ﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﭘﺎﻙ ﺷﻴﻌﻪ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻩ‪ .‬ﻣـﺎ ﻭ ﭘـﺪﺭ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺩﺭ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻧﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻤﻮﻣـﺎً ﻣﺸـﻤﻮﻝ ﺭﺣﻤـﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻐﻔـﺮﺕ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻩ‪ .‬ﺻ‪‬ﻠﱠﻲﺍﷲ ﻋ‪‬ﻠﻲ ﺳ‪‬ﻴِﱢﺪ‪‬ﻧﺎ ﻣ‪‬ﺤ‪‬ﻤ‪‬ﺪ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺁﻟ‪‬ﻪ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻄّﺎﻫ‪‬ﺮﻳﻦْ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪(2‬‬
‫ﺑِﺴ‪‬ﻢِ ﺍﷲِ ﺍﻟﺮﱠﺣ‪‬ﻤﻦِ ﺍﻟﺮﱠﺣﻴﻢ‪‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻛﺮﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻨﺖ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺍﻳﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﺍﻛـﺮﻡ )ﺹ( ﺍﺯ ﻃـﺮﻕ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺻﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺷﻚ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡﺁﻭﺭ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ؛ ﺑـﻪ ﻃـﻮﺭﻱ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﮔـﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺴﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺣﻀﺮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻘﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡﺁﻭﺭ ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺴﻲ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺣﺪﻳﺚ ﻭ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺳﻨﺖ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﭙـﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺘـﺪﺍ ﻧﭙـﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳـﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻼً ﺍﻭ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺑـﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﻟـﻲ ﺁﺧـﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺮﺩ ﻗﺮﺁﻥﺷـﻨﺎﺱ ﻭ ﺣـﺪﻳﺚﺷـﻨﺎﺱ ﺍﺻـﻼً ﻣﻔﻬـﻮﻡ ﻧـﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺷـﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨـﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﺗﻔﺼـﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﮔـﺬﺭﻡ )ﭼـﻮﻥ ﺑﺤـﺚ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳـﻪ ﺟﻠﺴـﻪ ﻓﺸـﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻡ(‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴـﺖ ﻭ ﺁﺧـﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺑـﻮﺩﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪﺍﻱ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ‪ 100‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 150‬ﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺮﺩﻳﺪﻱ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﺬﻫﺒﻲ ﺭِﻓﻮﺭﻣﻴﺴﺖ ﺑـﻪ ﻧـﺎﻡ ﻗﺎﺩﻳـﺎﻧﻲﻫـﺎ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺪﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻫﺸﺘﺎﺩ ﻭ ﭼﻨـﺪ ﺳـﺎﻝ ﻗﺒـﻞ ﻧﻬﻀـﺘﻲ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ »ﻧﻬﻀﺖ ﻗﺎﺩﻳﺎﻧﻲ« ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺆﺳﺲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻬﻀﺖ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ‬
‫‪ 42‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﺍﻟﻨّﺒﻴﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﺔ ﻛﺮﻳﻤﺔ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻫﺴـﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ »ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥَ ﻣ‪‬ﺤ‪‬ﻤ‪‬ﺪ‪ ‬ﺍَﺑﺂ ﺍَﺣ‪‬ﺪ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ﻦْ ﺭِﺟﺎﻟ‪‬ﻜُﻢ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻟﻜ‪‬ﻦْ ﺭ‪‬ﺳﻮﻝَ ﺍﷲَ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻨﱠﺒِﻴ‪‬ـﻴﻦ«‪ ،‬ﻧﻈـﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺟﺰﻭ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻭﻟﻴـﻪﺷـﺎﻥ ﺍﻋـﻼﻡ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨﻨـﺪ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺷـﺮﻳﻌﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧـﺐ ﺧﺪﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺩﻳﺎﻧﻲﻫـﺎ‪ ،‬ﻏـﻼﻡﺍﺣﻤـﺪ ﻗﺎﺩﻳـﺎﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺮﮔـﺰ ﺁﻭﺭﻧـﺪﺓ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺷـﺮﻉ ﺟﺪﻳـﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺩﺍﻧﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳـﻦ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﺁﺧـﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺿـﻴﺢ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺷـﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺣﻘﺎﻳﻖ ﺑﻲﭘﺮﺩﺓ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻠـﻢ ﺍﻟﻬـﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺣﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﺬﺭﺍﻧـﺪ ﻭ ﻛﺴـﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻫـﻢ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﻢ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺒﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻈﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎء ﺑﻨﻲﺍﺳﺮﺍﺋﻴﻞ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺳﻲ)ﻉ( ﺁﻣﺪﻧﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺷﺮﻉ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻏﻼﻡﺍﺣﻤﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﺭﺑـﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻭ ﺑـﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨـﺪ ﺍﻭ ﻣﻬـﺪﻱ ﻣﻮﻋـﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺴـﻴﺢ ﻣﻮﻋـﻮﺩ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻑﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺷﺮﻉ ﺟﺪﻳـﺪ ﻭ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ ﺟﺪﻳـﺪ ﻧﻤـﻲﺩﺍﻧﻨـﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺘـﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻳﻌﺖ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻳﻌﺘﻲ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺁﻣﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻳـﺔ ﻛﺮﻳﻤـﺔ‬
‫»ﺍَﻟْﻴ‪‬ﻮ‪‬ﻡ‪ ‬ﺍَﻛْﻤ‪‬ﻠْﺖ‪ ‬ﻟَﻜُﻢ‪ ‬ﺩﻳﻨَﻜُﻢ‪ 1«‬ﻭ ﺁﻳﺔ‪» :‬ﻭﺍَﺗْﻤ‪‬ﻤ‪‬ـﺖ‪ ‬ﻋ‪‬ﻠَـﻴ‪‬ﻜُﻢ‪ ‬ﻧ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﻤ‪‬ﺘـﻲ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺭ‪‬ﺿـﻴﺖ‪ ‬ﻟَﻜُـﻢ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟْﺎ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ﻼﻡ‪ ‬ﺩﻳﻨﺎً«‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﺁﻥﻗـﺪﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﺍﺳـﻼﻣﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﺷﺶﻣﻴﺨﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻛـﻪ ﺣﺘـﻲ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﮔـﺮﻭﻩ ﻛـﻪ ﻣﻤﻜـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‬

‫‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪ .2‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺎﺋﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :3‬ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻴﺪﻡ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻌﻤﺘﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﻭ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻡ«‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪43 (2‬‬

‫ﺭﻳﺸﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍﻳﺶ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺭﻳﺸﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﭘﻴـﺪﺍﻳﺶ ﮔﺮﻭﻫـﻲ‬


‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻓﺮﻳﻘـﺎ ﺑـﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺟﺎﻟـﺐ ﺍﻳـﻦﻛـﻪ ﺣﺘـﻲ ﮔﺮﻭﻫـﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻴﺤﻴﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺑﻮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻄﻔﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻪ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﺑﺮﺭﺳـﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻜﺘﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺎﻟﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻫـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺁﻳـﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈـﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻳﺸﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳـﺎ ﻧـﻪ ﺟـﺎﻱ ﻳـﻚ ﺑﺮﺭﺳـﻲ ﻣﺤﻘﻘﺎﻧـﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺼﻔﺎﻧﺔ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻇﻦ ﻭ ﮔﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺼﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﻲﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣـﻲﺩﻫـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﻣـﺎ ﺷـﺮﻉ ﻭ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﻧﻤﻲﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺷـﺮﻳﻌﺖ ﻭ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ ﺧـﺘﻢ ﺷـﺪ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻏﻼﻡﺍﺣﻤـﺪ ﻗﺎﺋـﻞﺍﻧـﺪ ﭼﻴـﺰﻱ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻛﻤﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻴﻌﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺋﻤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﻛﺮﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﭼﻮﻥ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻡ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﺒﺎﺭﺯﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻗﺔ ﺿﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻃﻨﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻗﺔ ﻗﺎﺩﻳـﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜـﺮﺭ ﺗﻮﺻـﻴﻪ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩﺍﻡ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻼً ﺧﻼﻑ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺮﺩﻡِ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭼـﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﻳـﺎﻧﻲﻫـﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻋﺘﻘـﺎﺩ ﺑـﻪ ﻭﺣـﻲ ﮔـﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻏﻼﻡﺍﺣﻤﺪ ﻣﻨﺤﺮﻑﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻬﺪﻱ ﻣﻮﻋﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻭ ﻣﻨﺤﺮﻑﺍﻧـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺴﻴﺢ ﻧﺠﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻭ ﻣﻨﺤﺮﻑﺍﻧﺪ؛ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ ﺩﻳﻨـﻲﺍﻱ ﻛـﻪ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻧﻴـﺎ ﺗـﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨﻨـﺪ ﭼﻴﺴـﺖ؟ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺩﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﻣﺴﺠﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﺯﺷﺎﻥ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺯ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﺭﻭ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺠﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ؟ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﺯﻩﺷﺎﻥ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯﺓ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﺯﻛﺎﺕ ﻓﻄﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺯﻛﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﻟﺸﺎﻥ ﭼﻴﺴـﺖ؟ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ ﺯﻛـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻄﺮ ﻭ ﺯﻛﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﺣ‪‬ﺠ‪‬ﺸﺎﻥ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺣـﺞ ﺧﺎﻧـﺔ ﺧﺪﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﻌﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤـﻲﺷـﻮﺩ ﺑـﺎ ﻛﺴـﺎﻧﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺻـﻼً ﻳـﻚ ﭼﻴـﺰ‬
‫‪ 44‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻣﺴﺨﺮﻩﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻤـﻪﭼﻴـﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﻳـﺪ ﺩﺭﺳـﺖ‬


‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻥ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻫﻞ ﺳﻨﺖ ــ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻫـﻞ ﺳـﻨﺖ ﺑـﺮﻭﺯ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ ــ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳـﺪ ﺭﻫﺒـﺮ ﻣـﺎ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻌﺖ ﻭ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺷﺮﻳﻌﺖ ﻭ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻗﺔ ﻧﻮ ﻫﻢ ﺟﺰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺧـﻮﺩﺵ‬
‫ﺑﭙﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﺎﺭﻩﺍﻱ ﻧﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﻴﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﻼﻡﺷﻨﺎﺳﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ )ﺹ( ﻣﺴـﺄﻟﻪﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﻟﻴـﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﺖ ﻭ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻘﻴﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻼﻡ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﻨﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻘﻠﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺍﻗﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻲﺭﺍﻫـﻪ ﺭﻓﺘـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻢ‪ .‬ﭼـﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺧـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴـﺎﺋﻞ ﻫﺴـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻠﻤـﺮﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻜﺮﻱ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﺑﺸﺮﻱ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺐ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥﻫـﺎ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻳـﻲ ﺭﻭﺷـﻨﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‪‬ﺍﻙ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻨـﺪﺓ ﺣﻘـﺎﻳﻖ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴـﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻮﻱ ﻭ ﭘ‪‬ﺮﺑ‪‬ﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺟﺎﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﻠﻤﺮﻭﺵ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻭﺳـﻴﻊ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﻏﻴﺐ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻠﻤﺮﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻧﻴـﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸـﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﻓﻬﻤﻴﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﺣﺴـﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻏﻴﺒﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋـﺎﻟﻢ ﺣـﺲ ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ﻋﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻓﺮﺍﺗـﺮ ﻧﻤـﻲﺗـﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑـﺮﻭﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻏﻴﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺕ ﻭ ﺣﺴﻲ ﻣـﻲﻳﺎﺑـﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻈـﺎﻡ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪45 (2‬‬

‫ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ﺣﺲ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻔﻬﻤﺎﻧﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺁﻥ ﭘﺸـﺘﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻏﻴﺒـﻲ‪،‬‬


‫ﺣﻜﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺩﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺭﺣﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺭﺣﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻔﻬﻤﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻏﻴﺐ ﻭ ﻧﻬﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺎﺣﺖ ﺑﭙﺮﺩﺍﺯﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻮﻻً‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺶ ﻋﻴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺨـﺶ ﺣﺴـﻲ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺟﻬـﺎﻥ ﺑـﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺁﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺠﻲ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﻳـﻢ‪ .‬ﺣـﺎﻻ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻟـﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﻛﻤـﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪ ﻭ ﻋﻘﻞ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻏﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸـﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻘﻞ ﺑﻔﻬﻤﺪ ﻓﺮﺷﺘﮕﺎﻥ ﻛﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﭼﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ؟ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻜﻨـﺪ؟‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻋﻠﻤﻲِ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻲِ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻫﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﺸـﺎﻫﺪﻩﺍﻱِ ﻃﺒﻴﻌـﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻋﻘﻼﻧﻲِ ﻓﻠﺴﻔﻲِ ﻓﻜﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣـﺪﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗــﻼﺵ ﻭ ﻛﻮﺷــﺶ ﺑﮕﻮﻳــﺪ ﻣــﻦ ﻓﻬﻤﻴــﺪﻡ ﻛــﻪ ﻣﻼﺋﻜــﻪ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺷــﺘﮕﺎﻥ ﭼﮕﻮﻧــﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺗﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﭼﻪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻠﻤـﺮﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺷـﺎﻥ ﭼﻴﺴـﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻋﺸﺎﻥ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻜﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻼً ﻛﺴﻲ ﺍﺩﻋﺎﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻧﻴﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤـﻚ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸـﻪ ﺩﺭﺑـﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﺮﺷـﺘﮕﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﺩ؟ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺻـﻼً ﺁﻫـﻦ ﺳـﺮﺩ ﻛﻮﺑﻴـﺪﻥ ﻭ ﺁﺏ ﺩﺭ ﻫـﺎﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﻴﺪﻥ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺑـﻲﻣﺼـﺮﻑ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺑـﻪ ﺟـﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﻤـﻲﺭﺳـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻜـﻪ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻧﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥﻫﺎﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﻭ ﻓﻜﺮﻱ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧـﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﻴﻨﺪﻳﺸﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻣـﻲﺧـﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺑـﺎ ﻛﻤـﻚ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸـﺔﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﺑـﺎﺭﺓ ﻛﻴﻔﻴـﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﺖ ﻓﺮﺷﺘﮕﺎﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻼً ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻴﻬﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﺮ ﻓﺮﺷﺘﮕﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻏﻴﺐ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻬـﺎﻥ ﻫﺴـﺘﻨﺪ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫‪ 46‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﺁﮔـﺎﻫﻲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻌـﺎﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻞ ﺟﻬـﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﺳـﻨﺪ ﻣـﺎ ﻭﺣـﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻭﺣـﻲ ﻧﺒـﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣـﺎ ﭼﮕﻮﻧـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻋﻘﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻠـﻢ ﻭ ﺗﺠﺮﺑـﻪ ﺩﺭﺑـﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻌـﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﻲ ﻛﺴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ؟ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻜﻮﺷﻨﺪ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺟﺴـﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻘﻠﻲ ﺍﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﺣﻤﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺟﺎﻭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻧﻴﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺁﻥ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫ﻭﺣﻲ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﭼﺸﻤﺔ ﻭﺣﻲ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻟﻴـﻞ ﻋﻘﻠـﻲ ﻫـﻢ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻗﺎﻣﻪ ﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﺟﺰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﺎﺭﻩﺍﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻦ ﭼﻴـﺰﻱ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﮔـﺎﻫﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺻـﻼً ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻋﻘـﻞ ﻭ ﻋﻠـﻢ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﺴﺐ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻭﺣـﻲ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻛﺴﺐ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲﻫﺎﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﺴﺐ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﭼﺸﻤﺔ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻴﻨﺎً ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻘـﻞ ﻧﺪﺍﺷـﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻘﻼﻧﻲ ﻛﺴﺐ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻲﺷـﻮﺩ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻳـﻚ ﺁﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻮﺍﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺧ‪‬ﺮَﺩ ﻣﺤﺮﻭﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻋﻘﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻭ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻋﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺏ؟ ﺍﻭ ﻋﻘﻠﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻄﻠﺒـﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺁﺩﻡ ﻛﻮﺭ ﻛـﻪ ﭼﺸـﻤﺶ ﻧﻤـﻲﺑﻴﻨـﺪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣـﺎﺕ ﺣﺴـﻲِ‬
‫ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﻮ ﻛﻮﺷـﺶ ﻛـﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨـﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣـﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑـﻮﻁ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓﻫﺎ ﻣﻄﻠﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻭ ﺍﺻﻼً ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﻪ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ؟ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﻔﻬﻤﺪ ﺳﺮﭼﺸﻤﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﮔـﺎﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭﺣﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﭼﺸﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺸﻨﺎﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻﻼً ﺣـﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺣـﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪47 (2‬‬

‫ﻛﺴﺐ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲﻫﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺯﺣﻤﺖ ﺑﻲﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﻛﺸﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻧـﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﻫـﻢ ﻭﺣـﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺷـﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﻭ ﺑـﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﭼﺸﻤﺔ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻳﺎﻓـﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗـﺖ ﺑـﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘـﻲ ﻣـﻲﻓﻬﻤـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎ ﻧﻄﻠﺒﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎ ﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻴﭻﻛﺲ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﺟﺰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻣﺎﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﻳـﻚ ﺳـﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣـﻲﺧـﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﭘﺎﺳـﺦ ﺩﻫـﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺧﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒـﻮﻝ ﻛـﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ ﺁﺧـﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺘﺎً ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣـﻲﺁﻳـﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺳـﺆﺍﻝ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﺷﺪ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻏـﺎﺯ ﺁﻓـﺮﻳﻨﺶ‬
‫ﺑﺸﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺸﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺩﺍﻣـﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑـﻪ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻧﻴـﺎﺯ ﻗﻄـﻊ ﺷـﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺧﺪﺍ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﻱ ﺑﻔﺮﺳـﺘﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺎﻗﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻧـﺪ؟ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﻔﻬﻤﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺳـﺆﺍﻝ ﺑﺠﺎﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻣـﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺆﺍﻻﺕ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻴـﺰﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺣـﻲ ﮔﻔﺘـﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﭙﺬﻳﺮ ﻭ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻧﮕﻮ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﺑﭙﺬﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺣﺮﻓﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻫـﻢ ﺑـﺰﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﭙﺬﻳﺮ ﻭ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻧﮕﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻪﺧﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﭙﺬﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻓﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺰﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﺆﺍﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻫـﻢ ﺑﻜـﻦ‪ .‬ﺑـﻪ ﺍﺳـﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﻭﺣـﻲ‬
‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻲ؟ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻐﺰﺕ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑـﻪ ﺗـﻮ ﺑﮕـﻮﻳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻧﭙﺮﺱ ﻭ ﺍﻟّﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﻱ! ﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻـﻼً ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣـﺎ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔـﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻛﻦ‪ .‬ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﻋﻘﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﺴـﻠﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻛﻦ ﻭ ﺁﻥ‬
‫‪ 48‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺆﺍﻻﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﮔﻔﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺆﺍﻻﺕ ﺑﺮﺩﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻥﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺳـﺆﺍﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻗﺎ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺑﺪﻫﻲ‪ ،‬ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺭﻭﺷﻦﻛﻨﻨـﺪﺓ ﺩﻝﭼﺴـﺐ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺑـﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﺁﻥﻗـﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺑﺪﻫﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﺒﺮ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩﭘﺴﻨﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨـﺎﺭ ﺑﮕـﺬﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﮕﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻮ ﻧﻤﻲﺩﺍﻧﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺴﺖﻭﺟﻮﻱ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﺵﺭﻭﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺸﺪﺩ ﻭ ﭼﻤﺎﻕ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻼ ﺷﻴﻮﺓ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻨﮓ ﺳﺆﺍﻻﺕ ﻋﻘﺪﻩ ﺯﺍ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺻ ً‬
‫ﺳﻴﺮﻩﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺒﺎﻁ ﻛﺮﺩ؛ ﺷﻴﻮﻩﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺧـﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺳـﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨﻨـﺪ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺖ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﻲ ــ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﺔ ﻳـﻚ ﻣﺴـﺄﻟﺔ ﺳﻴﺎﺳـﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ ـــ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺏ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩﺍﺵ ﺳﺨﻨﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥﻭﻗﺖ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻛﻼﻡ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻟﻄﻴﻒ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪» :‬ﻻ ﺗَﺴ‪‬ﺌَﻠُﻮﺍ ﻋ‪‬ﻦْ ﺃﺷْﻴﺂء‪ ‬ﺍ‪‬ﻥْ ﺗُﺒﺪ‪ ‬ﻟَﻜُـﻢ‬
‫ﺗَﺴ‪‬ﺆْﻛُﻢ‪ 1.«‬ﺳﺆﺍﻻﺗﻲ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻮﺍﺑﺶ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﻪﻗﺪﺭ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‪ ،‬ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻣﺮﺑﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺩﻟﭙﺬﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳـﺎ ﺁﻧﭽـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺻﻼً ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺷـﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺮﻓـﺖ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻮﺿـﻴﺤﻲ ﺑـﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﭽـﻪ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥﻫـﺎ ﻣـﻲﻳﺎﺑﻨـﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﮔﻔﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪» :‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻳ‪‬ﺴ‪‬ﺌَﻠُﻮﻧَﻚ‪ ‬ﻋ‪‬ﻦِ ﺍﻟﺮﱡﻭﺡِ ﻗُﻞِ ﺍﻟﺮﱡﺭﻭﺡ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ﻦْ ﺃَﻣ‪‬ـﺮِ‬
‫ﺭ‪‬ﺑ‪‬ﻲ ﻭ‪ ‬ﻣﺂ ﺍُﻭﺗﻴﺘُﻢ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ﻦَ ﺍﻟْﻌ‪‬ﻠْﻢِ ﺍﻟّﺎ ﻗَﻠﻴﻼً«‪ 2.‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮ ﻣﻲﭘﺮﺳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﺡ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﺑﮕﻮ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺎﺋﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :101‬ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﭙﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﺵ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺯﺷـﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺪ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻏﻤﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ«‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺮﺍء‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :85‬ﻭ ﺗﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﺭﻭﺡ ﻣﻲﭘﺮﺳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺩﻩ ﻛـﻪ ﺭﻭﺡ ﺍﺯ )ﻋـﺎﻟﻢ(‬
‫ﺍﻣﺮ ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ )ﻭ ﺑﻲﻭﺍﺳﻄﻪ ﺟﺴﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻥﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﻣـﻲﮔﻴـﺮﺩ( ﻭ )ﺷـﻤﺎ ﭘـﻲ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ( ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﻙ ﺍﺳﺖ«‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪49 (2‬‬

‫ﺭﻭﺡ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻭ ﻛُﻨﻬ‪‬ﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃـﻮﺭ‬


‫ﻛﻠﻲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺍﻳﻦﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﻫﻤـﻪﭼﻴـﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﺑـﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻟﻄﻤﻪﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﻲﺯﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺟـﺎﻳﻲ ﻟﻄﻤـﻪ ﺑﺰﻧـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺭﻭﺡ ﻳﻚ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲﺍﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺻﻼً ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﻲ ﻗﺮﺁﻧـﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﺳﺨﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻴﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻼﻥ ﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺋﻤـﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺎﻫﺮﻳﻦ )ﺱ( ﻭ ﺭﻭﺍﻳﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺆﺍﻝﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻋـﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻣ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﻤ‪ّ‬ـﻢ ﻭ ﻏﻴـﺮ ﻣ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﻤ‪ّ‬ـﻢ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺆﺍﻻﺕ ﺩﻳﻨﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﺳﺨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳـﺆﺍﻝﻛﻨﻨـﺪﻩ ﻣـﻲﺩﻫـﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳـﺎ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮ ﻭ ﺩﻝﭼﺴﺐ ﻭ ﻗـﺎﻧﻊﻛﻨﻨـﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨـﺎﻥﺁﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳـﺎ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﭼﻨـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺳﺨﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺘﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻴﺒﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﺁﻗـﺎ ﺑﻨـﺪﻩ ﻫـﻢ ﻣﺜـﻞ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻢ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻮﺷﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻳـﺎ ﺩﺍﻧـﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﺩﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻘﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎ ﺑﮕﺸﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺣ‪‬ﺴﻦ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺧﻮﺩﻡ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺁﻣـﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺘـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻭﺍﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺕﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ ــ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻌﺎً ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 7‬ﺳﺎﻝ ـــ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺗﺤﺼﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻖ ﻭ ﻛﻼﻡ ﻭ ﻓﻠﺴﻔﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺷـﺮﻭﻉ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩ ﺑـﻮﺩﻡ ﻭ ﭘـﻴﺶ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺩﺍﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺘﺎﺩﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﻓﺘﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻠـﺘﺶ ﻫـﻢ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺑـﻮﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﺷـﻴﻮﺓ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺏﻧﻮﻳﺴﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻭ ﻓﻠﺴﻔﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏﻫـﺎ ﺻـﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻧﺒﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻔﺼـﻞ ﺩﺍﺷـﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ ﭼﻴـﺰﻱ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫‪ 50‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻓﻼﺳﻔﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺻﻼً ﺑﺮﺍﻧﮕﻴﺨﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﺦ ﻭ ﺑ‪‬ﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻠﺴﻔﺔ ﻗـﺪﻳﻢ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺟﻨﮓ ﺩﺭﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺒﺎﺭﺯﻩ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺩﺍﻥ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﺧـﻮﺭﺩ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩ ﺑـﻮﺩﻡ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺩﺍﻥ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻧﻮﻃﻠﺒﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪﻟﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻧـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺩ ﻫﻢ ﺟﺪﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺩ ﺑـﺰﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﺳـﺘﺎﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻳـﺎﺩ ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﻤﻲﺭﺳﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺍﺻﻼً ﺧﺰﺍﻧـﺔ ﭘ‪‬ـﺮ ﺍﺭﺯﺵ‬
‫ﻓﻠﺴﻔﻲ ﺧﻮﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮﺵ ﺟﺴﺖﻭﺟﻮ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻭ ﺑﮕـﺮﺩﻡ ﺗـﺎ ﺷـﺎﻳﺪ ﺁﮔـﺎﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺯﻧﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﺐ ﻛﻨﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﻝ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻧـﺪﻩ ﺑـﻮﺩﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳـﺮﺍﻍ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺴـﻔﻲ ﺧﻮﺩﻣـﺎﻥ ﻧـﺮﻭﻡ‪ .‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﺎً ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﺎﺕ ﻓﻠﺴﻔﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﻋـﺎﺯﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﺎﺕ ﻓﻠﺴﻔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﺮﻭﻡ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺭﻓـﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﺷـﺮﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺗﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪ .1330‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﻗـﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺩﺍﻥ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺩﺭ ﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺯﻩ ﻛﻮﺷﺸﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺤـﺚﻫـﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺴـﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻝﺳﺮﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﺍﻳـﻦﻗـﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﮕﻴﺰﻩ ﺍﻡ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴـﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺷـﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺘﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎ ﺩﻭﺍ ﺑﻜﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﭼـﻮﻥ ﺍﺳـﺘﺎﺩﺍﻧﻲ ﺑـﺲ ﻣﻌـﺮﻭﻑﺗـﺮ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻨﻲ ﭘ‪‬ﺮ ﻃُﻤﻄﺮﺍﻕ ﺗﺮ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﻓﺘـﻪ ﺑـﻮﺩﻡ ﻭ ﺑـﺎﺯ‬
‫ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺎﻣﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﺻﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻼﻧﻲ ﺑﺪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻳﻜﻲ ـ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻠﺴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﻲ‪ .‬ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺣﺜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺤﺚﻫـﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺴـﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻏﺮﺏ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻛﺘﺎﺏﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑـﺎﻥﻫـﺎﻱ ﻓﺎﺭﺳـﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎً ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﻡ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺗﺮﻳﺎﻟﻴﺴﻢ ﺩﻳﺎﻟﻜﺘﻴﻚ ﻭ ﺑﺤﺚﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﮔﻔﺖ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﺎً ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻫﻢ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺤﺜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻮ ﺑﺪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪51 (2‬‬

‫ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻱ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻠﺴﻪ ﺭﻓﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻳـﻚ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻏﻴـﺮ ﻓﻠﺴـﻔﻲ ﺍﻳﺸـﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻠﺴﻔﻪ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛـﺮﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺤﺜـﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻳﺸـﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻨﺘﻲ ﻣـﻦ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪﺍﻡ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻠﺴﻪﺍﻱ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺳﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺤﺜـﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﻣـﻦ ﻋﻀـﻮ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺧﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺧـﻮﺩﻡ ﺍﺟـﺎﺯﻩ ﻧﻤـﻲﺩﻫـﻢ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻃﺮﺡ ﺑﻜﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦﻛـﻪ ﺑﻌـﺪﺍً‬
‫ﻋﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺳﺆﺍﻻﺗﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﺑﻌـﺪ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺟﻠﺴﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻄﻒ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﺪ ﺑـﺎ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﻭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﻔﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﺁﻳـﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺭﻓﺘﻢ ﮔﻔﺘﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻼﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﺒﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈـﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺷـﻜﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺿـﻴﺢ ﺑـﺪﻫﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ ﺍﺷـﻜﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺩ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻮﻳﻲ ﺍﺻﻼً ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺗـﺎ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻧﺸﻨﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﺒﺮ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫﻢ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻟﺤﻈﻪﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﻧﮓ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﮔﻮﻳﻲ ﺩﺭﺑـﺎﺭﺓ ﺻـﺤﺒﺖ ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺁﺭﺍﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻲ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈـﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻟﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻛـﺮﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﺶ ﻭ ﻃﻤﺄﻧﻴﻨﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺍ ﮔـﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻧـﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭﻧﮓ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺍﻳﺸـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻟﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺑـﺎ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﺵ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩ؛ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﻨﺪﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺧﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﻳـﺎ ﺗﻌﺼـﺐ ﻭ ﺗﺸـﺪ‪‬ﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺎ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺼﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺻﻼً ﻣﻄﻠـﺐ ﺑـﻪ ﺩﻟﻴـﻞ ﺑـﻪ ﻣﻘﺼـﺪ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﮔﺮﻧﻪ ﺑﺤﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﺮﺳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣـﻦ‬
‫‪ 52‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺍﺛﺮﻱ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑـﺮ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻑ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩ ﺑـﻮﺩﻳﻢ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﺒﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺸﻮﻧﺖ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻡﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻦ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﺗﺮ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩ؛ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦﻛـﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﺳـﺘﺎﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻲ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺤـﺚ ﻭ ﻛـﺎﻭﺵ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻜـﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﻨـﺎﻥ ﺑـﺎ ﺣﻮﺻـﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻃﻤﺄﻧﻴﻨـﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﻧﺖ ﻓﻜﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺍﺧﻼﻗﻲ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﺎﻧـﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣـﻦ ﺍﺛـﺮ‬
‫ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺷﺪ ﻋﺰﻡ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺴﺦ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻭ ﭼﻨـﺪﻳﻦ ﺳـﺎﻝ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺩ ﺳﺮ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﺑﻜﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﺴـﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻳﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﺆﺍﻻﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻭ ﻃﺮﺡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺪﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ ﻳـﻚ ﻣﺴـﻠﻤﺎﻥِ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣـﺎﺕ ﻭ‬
‫ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ﺩﻳﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻲ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺣـﺎﻣﻼﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺮ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﺻـﺎﺩﻕ )ﻉ( ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨـﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺤﺎﺑﺔ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﻭ ﮔﻠﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﭼـﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺟﺪﻝ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ؟ ﺟﺪﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺤﺚﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺘﻴﺰﻩﺟﻮﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻜﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﻫﺒﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺭﻫﻨﻤﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺆﺍﻝﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻘﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳـﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً ﻓﻜﺮ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻛـﻪ ﺳـﺆﺍﻟﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻃـﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻫـﻴﭻ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺘﺎﻥ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﭼـﻪ ﺑﺴـﺎ ﻣﻄﻠﺒـﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺷـﻤﺎ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪53 (2‬‬

‫ﺳــﻮﺍﺑﻖ ﻋﻠﻤــﻲ ﻭ ﺫﻫﻨــﻲ ﻓــﺮﺍﻭﺍﻥ ﺑــﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﺗــﺎﻥ ﺣــﻞ ﻛــﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳــﺪ ﻭ ﺣــﺎﻻ‬


‫ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺰﺍﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ؛ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺁﻥﻛـﻪ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺍﺑﻖ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﻭ ﺫﻫﻨﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺗﻮﺿـﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮﻱ ﻭ ﮔﺮﻩﮔﺸﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺷـﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺲ ﻧﺎﺑﺠﺎﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴـﺎﻥ ﻣـﺎ؟ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﻨﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﺍﺟﺘﻤـﺎﻋﻲ ﺁﻓـﺖ ﺑﺰﺭﮔـﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻳـﻚ ﻋﺎﻣـﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻭﻗﺖ ‪ 10‬ﻧﻔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻫﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺸﻜّﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ‪ 10‬ﻧﻔـﺮ‪ ،‬ﻫـﺮ ﻛـﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ‪ 9‬ﻧﻔﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻗﺒـﻮﻝ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺧﻴﻠـﻲ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺼﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﻭﺷـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻧﻤﻲﻓﻬﻤﻨﺪ؟ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮔﻔﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺁﻓﺘـﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﺄﺳﻔﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﻪﺟﺎ ﻃﻠﻮﻉ ﻛﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮ ﺩﻝ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭼﻪ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ ﻛﻮﭼـﻚ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﻋﺶ ﺍﻳﻦﻗﺪﺭ ﻭﺳﻴﻊ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻐﺰ ﻭ ﺩﻝ ﺁﻥ ‪ 9‬ﻧﻔﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺘﺎﺑـﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﻪ ﺗﻮﻗـﻊ ﺧﻮﺩﺧﻮﺍﻫﺎﻧـﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺳـﺖ؟‬
‫ﺣﺮﻓﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻥ‪ .‬ﺩﻟﻴﻠﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻃـﺮﻑ ﻗـﺎﻧﻊ ﺷـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺑـﻪ ﺧـﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﺍﻳﻦﻗﺪﺭ ﺯﻭﺩ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺳﻮءﻇﻦ ﻭ ﺑﺪﺩﺍﻭﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻳﻢ؟ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻓﻴـﻖ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻣـﺮﻭﺯ ﺩﻭﺳـﺖ ﺻـﻤﻴﻤﻲ ﻣـﺎ ﻭ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻋﺘﻤـﺎﺩ ﻣـﺎ ﺑـﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻲﺯﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻧﻤﻲﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻧﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﻭﻟﺶ ﻛﻦ؟ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﻲﺧﻮﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮕﻴـﺮ؟ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺴﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ‪ 20‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 30‬ﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺩﻭﺳـﺖ ﻫﺴـﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﺎﺳﻲ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪﭼﻴﺰ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺣـﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﭙـﺬﻳﺮﻓﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣـﻲ ﮔـﻮﻳﻲ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻫـﻢ ﻭﻟـﺶ ﻛـﻦ‪ .‬ﭘـﺲ ﭼـﻪ ﻛﺴـﻲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪ 54‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻱ؟ ﭘﺲ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻣـﺎ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻫـﻢ ﺟﻤـﻊ‬


‫ﺑﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﻙ ﺗﻚﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﺠﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻭ ﻋﺼﺎﺑﻪ ﻭ ﻋﺼﺒﻪ ﺩﺭﺑﻴﺎﻳﻴﻢ؟ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ؟ ﻣﺤﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺧﺼـﻠﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺣﻴﻪ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺗﺮﺑﻴـﺖ ﺍﺳـﻼﻣﻲ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺑﻴﺖ ﺷﻴﻌﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺗﺮﺑﻴـﺖ ﺍﻣـﺎﻡ ﺻـﺎﺩﻕ )ﻉ( ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪ .‬ﭼﻨـﺪ ﺗـﻦ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺻﺤﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻨﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ؛ ﻫـﻢ ﺣﻀـﻮﺭﺍً ﻫـﻢ ﻏﻴﺎﺑـﺎً‪ .‬ﺣﺘـﻲ ﻏﻴﺎﺑـﺎً؛‬
‫ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﺮﺷـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﺒ‪‬ﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻴﺰﻩﺟﻮﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺟﺪﻝ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﺪﻝ ﻓﻘـﻂ ﻳـﻚ ﻣﻄﻠـﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺸـﺘﺮ ﺍﺛﺒـﺎﺕ ﻧﻤـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ؛ ﺁﻥ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺧﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺟﺪﻝﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻴﭻﭼﻴـﺰ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻧﻤﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﻔﻬﻤﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺻﻼً ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮﻱ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻜـﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺩﻫﺪ؟ ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﻨﺖ ﻭ ﺷﻴﻮﺓ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻣﻼﻥ ﻋﻠـﻮﻡ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻳـﻢ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﻜﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻭ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻓـﻼﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﺆﻣﻨﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪» :‬ﺍَﻟﱠـﺬﻳﻦَ‬
‫ﻳ‪‬ﺆْﻣ‪‬ﻨﻮﻥَ ﺑِﺎﻟْﻐَﻴ‪‬ﺐ«‪ 1،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺖ ﺧﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻜﺮﺕ ﺧﻠﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺯﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺘﻲ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻧﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﮕﻮ ﻭ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻛـﻦ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﻳـﺶ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺳﺮﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻜﺮ ﺗﻮ ﺑﻴـﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻜﺸـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﭼﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ‪ .‬ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺍﻗﻞ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣـﻲﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻼﺵ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﮔﺮﻧﻪ ﻛﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺆﺍﻻﺕ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻣﻌـﺔ ﻣـﺎ ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺆﺍﻝْ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺘﺎً ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳـﺘﻨﺎﺩ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻘﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :3‬ﺁﻥ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺐ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﺭﻧﺪ«‪.‬‬


‫ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪55 (2‬‬

‫ﺑﺮ ﻭﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒـﻮﻝ ﻛـﺮﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺳـﺆﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻳﻢ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻏـﺎﺯ ﺗـﺎ ‪1400‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺩﻭﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ؟ ﻣﮕﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻓﺮﻗﻲ ﻫﺴـﺖ؟ ﻣﮕـﺮ‬
‫ﭼﻪ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﻲ ﻫﺴﺖ؟ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻛـﻪ ﻣـﻲﺧـﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻲ‬
‫ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﭼـﻪ ﻣـﻲﻓﺮﺳـﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ؟ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪» :‬ﻟَﻘَﺪ‪ ‬ﺍَﺭ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ﻠْﻨﺎ ﺭ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ﻠَﻨﺎ ﺑِﺎﻟْﺒ‪‬ﻴِّﻨﺎﺕ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍَﻧْﺰَﻟْﻨﺎ ﻣ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﻬ‪‬ﻢ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻜ‪‬ﺘـﺎﺏ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻤﻴـﺰﺍﻥَ ﻟ‪‬ﻴ‪‬ﻘُـﻮﻡ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨّﺎﺱ‪ ‬ﺑِﺎﻟْﻘ‪‬ﺴ‪‬ﻂ«‪ 1.‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻟﺔ ﺁﻳﻪ ﻧﻜﺘﺔ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺔ ﺁﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧـﻮﺍﻧﻢ‬
‫»ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍَﻧْﺰَﻟْﻨَﺎ ﺍﻟْﺤ‪‬ﺪﻳﺪ‪ ‬ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ‬ﺑ‪‬ﺄْﺱ‪ ‬ﺷَﺪﻳﺪ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ﻨﺎﻓ‪‬ﻊ‪ ‬ﻟ‪‬ﻠﻨّﺎﺱِ ﻭ‪ ‬ﻟ‪‬ﻴ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﻠَﻢ‪ ‬ﺍﷲُ ﻣ‪‬ﻦْ ﻳ‪‬ﻨْﺼ‪‬ﺮُﻩ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺭ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ﻠَﻪ‪‬‬
‫ﺑِﺎﻟْﻐَﻴ‪‬ﺐِ ﺍ‪‬ﻥﱠ ﺍﷲَ ﻗَـﻮِﻱ‪ ‬ﻋ‪‬ﺰﻳـﺰ«‪ 2.‬ﺁﻳـﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺟﻤـﻪ ﻣـﻲﻛـﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﻣـﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻧﻤـﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻳﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﻻﻳﻞ ﺭﻭﺷـﻨﮕﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮﻱ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥﺁﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻣﻌﻨـﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪» .‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍَﻧْﺰَﻟْﻨﺎ ﻣ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﻬ‪‬ﻢ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻜ‪‬ﺘﺎﺏ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ«‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻴـﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﻲ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮓ ﺑﺨﺸـﺪ‪» .‬ﻟ‪‬ﻴ‪‬ﻘُﻮﻡ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻨّﺎﺱ‪‬‬
‫ﺑِﺎﻟْﻘ‪‬ﺴ‪‬ﻂ«‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻗﺴـﻂ ﻭ ﻋـﺪﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻻﻧﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎ ﺧﻴﺰﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﭘﺎ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ‪ .‬ﻣـﺮﺩﻡ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ‬

‫‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪ .2‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :25‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﺎ ﻣﺎ ﭘﻴﻤﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﺩﻟّـﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺠـﺰﺍﺕ ﻓﺮﺳـﺘﺎﺩﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻋﺪﻝ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺍﻟﺖ ﮔﺮﺍﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺁﻫﻦ )ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻠﺰﺍﺕ( ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ )ﺟﻨﮓ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺯﺍﺭ( ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻨـﺎﻓﻊ ﺑﺴـﻴﺎﺭ ﺑـﺮ ﻣـﺮﺩﻡ ﺍﺳـﺖ )ﻧﻴـﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻋﺪﺍﻟﺖ( ﺁﻓﺮﻳﺪﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺭ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ﻠﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﻗﻠﺒـﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﻳـﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ؛ )ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ( ﻛﻪ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺘﺪﺭ )ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻳﺎﺭﻱ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺑﻲﻧﻴﺎﺯ( ﺍﺳﺖ«‪.‬‬
‫‪ 56‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺑﻜﻨﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺮﺁﻧﻲ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻡ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺻـﻼً ﻣﻴـﺪﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺜﻢ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺁﻥﻗﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﻄﺎﻳﻒ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩﻡ ﻫﻢ ﻟﺬﺕ ﻣﻲﺑﺮﻡ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻳﻚ ﺁﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺟﻠﺴﻪ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻟﻄﺎﻳﻔﺶ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧـﻮﺩﺵ ﻭ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺩ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺑﺤﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻠﺴﻪ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺘـﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺷﺒﺨﺘﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻫﻞ ﻓﻦ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ(‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻗﺴﻂ ﻭ ﻋﺪﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺜﺖ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﻭ ﺁﻣـﺪﻥ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻼً ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻴﺸﺎﻥ ﻋﺎﺩﻻﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻫﻦ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻠﺤﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺁﻫﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻋـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺁﻥﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﻌﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺮﺑﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﭘ‪‬ـﺮ ﺯﺣﻤـﺖ ﻭ ﺯﺣﻤـﺖﺯﺍ ﻭ‬
‫ﺟﻨﮓ ﺁﻓﺮﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺏ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻭﺍﻗﻌـ ًﺎ ﺁﻫـﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳـﺖ ﺑﺸـﺮ ﻧﺒـﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺟﻨﮓﻫﺎ ﺍﻳﻦﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﺫﻳﺖ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﻗﻠﻮﻩ ﺳﻨﮓ ﭘﺮﺗﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻤﺘﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﻲ ـ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﺸﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻼﺡﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻫﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦﻗﺪﺭ ﺑ‪‬ﺄﺱ ﻭ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺔ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥﻫـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻤﺎﻳـﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺣـﻖ ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻝ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺮﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻼﺡ ﻭ ﺁﻫﻦ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺗـﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤـﻮﻉ ﺍﻳﻨﻬـﺎ ـــ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﻳﺪ ــ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﻢ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﺴـﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺧﺪﺍ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻧﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺐ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﺁﺧﺮﺵ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺟﺎﻟﺒﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺮﺭ ﮔﻔﺘﻪﺍﻡ ﻛﺴـﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻙ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻋﺠﺎﺯ ﺳـﺨﻨﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻗﻌـﺎً‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﻄﺎﻳﻒ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳـﻴﻠﺔ ﻛﺴـﺎﻧﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﺧﺮﺵ ﭼـﻪ ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ‪ .‬ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ ﺍﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪57 (2‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻧﺮﻭﺩ؛ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻑﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭ ﮔﺮﻧﻪ ﺧـﺪﺍ ـــ »ﺍ‪‬ﻥﱠ ﺍﷲَ‬
‫ﻗَﻮِﻱ‪ ‬ﻋ‪‬ﺰﻳﺰ« ــ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺧﺪﺍ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻣﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻧـﺎ‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﻣﺮﺗﺒــﻪ‪ .‬ﺗــﺎﺯﻩ ﻫﻤــﺔ ﺍﻳﻨﻬــﺎ ﻣــﺎﻝ ﻛﻴﺴــﺖ؟ ﻣــﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺩﺗــﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﻳــﻦﻗــﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﻪ ﻟﻄﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻇﺮﻳﻒ ﻭ ﭘﺮﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﻦ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺳﺨﻦ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ﻭﺭﺯﻳﺪﻩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﻧﺸـﺎﻥ ﻣـﻲﺩﻫـﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻛﺠﺎ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺣﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺣﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺟﺬﺑﻪﺁﻓﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﻡ ﻫﻴﺠﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣـﻲﮔـﻮﻳﻢ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩﺍﺵ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻴﺠﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻋﺠﻴﺐ‪ ‬ﺟﺬﺑـﻪﺁﻓـﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﻪ ﭼﻪﻗﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ! ﭼﻪ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﭼﻴﺪﻩﺍﻧـﺪ ﺗـﻚﺗـﻚ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺁﻳـﺔ ﺩﻭ ﺳـﻄﺮﻱ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻫﻤـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡﺑﺨﺸﻲ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺏ ﺣﺎﻻ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪» :‬ﻟَﻘَﺪ‪ ‬ﺍَﺭ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ﻠْﻨﺎ ﺭ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ﻠَﻨﺎ ﺑِﺎﻟْﺒ‪‬ﻴِّﻨﺎﺕ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍَﻧْﺰَﻟْﻨﺎ ﻣ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﻬ‪‬ـﻢ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟْﻜ‪‬ﺘﺎﺏ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥَ ﻟ‪‬ﻴ‪‬ﻘُﻮﻡ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻨّﺎﺱ‪ ‬ﺑِﺎﻟْﻘ‪‬ﺴ‪‬ﻂ«‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺣﺪﻳﺪ؛ ﻋﻨـﺪﺍﻟﻠﺰﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﺪﺍ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﻓﺮﺳﺘﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻭﻻً‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﺩ‪» :‬ﻟ‪‬ﻴ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﻠَﻢ‪ ‬ﺍﷲُ ﻣ‪‬ﻦْ ﻳ‪‬ﻨْﺼ‪‬ﺮُﻩ‪‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ‬ﺭ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ﻠَﻪ‪ ‬ﺑِﺎﻟْﻐَﻴ‪‬ﺐِ«‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﻡ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻣﻲﻓﺮﺳﺘﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻳﻦﻛـﻪ ﻗـﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻓﺮﺳﺘﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻫﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺣﺪﻳﺚ ﻭ ﺩﻳﻦ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺁﻳـﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﻦ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ ﻭ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﻳﻢ ﻳـﻚ ﻋـﺎﻟﻢ ﻣـﻮﺭﺥ‬
‫‪ 58‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻣﺤﻘﻖ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪﺷﻨﺎﺳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺭﺳـﻲ‬


‫ﻋﺎﻟﻤﺎﻧﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺻﻼً ﺍﻧﮕﺎﺭ ﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﺎﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻴﻨﺎً ﻣﺜﻞ ﻓـﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﺻﻼً ﺑﻪ ﺧﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻣﻌﺘﻘﺪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﺭﻭﻳﻢ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻏـﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺖ‪ ‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺑـﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻣـﻲﺁﻳـﻴﻢ ﺟﻠـﻮ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﻩﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﻣـﻲﺁﻳـﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳـﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺟﻤﻌﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺳﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺭﺳـﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺣـﺪ ﻣﺤﻠـﺶ ﺍﺻـﻼً‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺗﻤﺪﻥ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻫﻨﮓ ﺑﺸـﺮﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﺑﻼﻍ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺟﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺴـﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺛـﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺷـﺘﻪﻫـﺎﻱ ﻳﻮﻧـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻓﺮﻫﻨﮓ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺪﻥ ﻏﺮﺏ ﻭ ﺩﻧﻴﺎ ﺩﺭ ‪ 2500‬ﺳـﺎﻝ ﭘـﻴﺶ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻـﻼً‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻬﻀﺖ ﻳﻬﻮﺩ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦﻗﺪﺭ ﻛـﻢ‪ ،‬ﻧـﺎ ﺁﮔـﺎﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻳﻦﻗﺪﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ ﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺖ ﻛﻢ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺭ ﻭ ﻣﺪﺵ ﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﺑـﻮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﻧﻬﻀﺘﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺷﻜﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻗﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺭﻓﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺩﻳﺪﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧـﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﺻﻼً ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺭﺩ ﭘﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠـﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺷـﺘﻪﻫـﺎﻳﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻮﻧـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻔـﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻦ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﭼﻴﺰﻫـﺎﻱ ﺑﺴـﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺒﻬﻤـﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀـﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴـﺪ ﭼـﻪﻗـﺪﺭ ﻭﺳـﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺟﻤﻌﻲ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺣـﺎﻻ ﺍﻣـﺮﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻓـﻼﻥ ﮔﻮﺷـﺔ ﺩﻧﻴـﺎ‬
‫ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻣﻲﺍﻓﺘﺪ )ﻳﻚ ﺧﺒﺮ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ( ﻭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺧﺒﺮ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﭼـﻪﻗـﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪59 (2‬‬

‫ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ! ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣـﻴﻦ ﺗـﺎ ﺁﺳـﻤﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﺑﻨـﺎ ﺑـﺮﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻﻼً ﻭﺿﻊ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﺸﺮ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺧﻮﺩﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺏ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻳـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺳﻮ‪‬ﻡ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺳـﺎﻝﻫـﺎﻳﻲ ﻛـﻢ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺶ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻧﮕﻴﺨﺘﻪ ﺷـﺪﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺧـﻮﺩ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻣﻴﺮﺍﺙ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺳﻴﻊ ﺗﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷـﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒـﺎﻁ ﻣﻴـﺎﻥ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻋﺼـﺎﺭ ﺑﻌـﺪﻱ ﻣﺤﻔـﻮﻅ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥﺁﻭﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻧﻘﺸﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﻔﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﻧﻘـﺎﻁ ﺩﻭﺭﺩﺳـﺖ ﻣﻨﺘﻘـﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻌﺜﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻳـﺎ ﻧـﻪ؟ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻘﻖ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻭ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﺣﻀـﺮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ )ﻉ( ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﺪﻫـﺪ ﻭ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻳـﺎ ﻧـﻪ؟ ﻧﺘﻴﺠـﺔ ﺗﺤﻘﻴـﻖ ﺗـﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ ﻣﻴـﺎﻥ ﻣـﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻴـﺎﻥ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺟﺎ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺟـﺎ‪ .‬ﻧـﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺟﺐ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻨـﺎ‬
‫ﺑـﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻣـﺮﻭﺯ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑـ ﺎ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴـﺐ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑـﺎ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻧـﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻗﻴـﺎﻡ ﺑـﻪ ﻗﺴـﻂ ﻛﻨـﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠـﻲ‬
‫‪ 60‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻣﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻭ ﺁﻳـﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻲ )ﻉ( ﭼﻄﻮﺭ؟ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺷـﻤﺎ ﺗـﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻬـﺪﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﺗـﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻋﻬﺪﻳﻨﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﻘﻘﺎﻥ ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﻣﺤﻘﻘﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﻪﻗﺪﺭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﻋﻬـﺪﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌـﻪ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ ﺗـﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻋﻬﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻬﺪﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﻫﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺎﻥﺷﻨﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻬﺪﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳـﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺗﺒﻠﻴﻐﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌـﻪ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟـﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻛﺘﺎﺏﻫـﺎﻱ ﺯﻳـﺎﺩﻱ ﺑـﻪ ﺯﺑـﺎﻥﻫـﺎﻱ ﺍﺭﻭﭘـﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺴـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺑﺴـﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻘﻘﺎﻧﻪﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺑﻲﻃﺮﻓﺎﻧﻪﺗﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻣـﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻲ )ﻉ(‪ ،‬ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳـﻲ )ﻉ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟ ﻫـﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻴﺴﻲ )ﻉ( ﭼﻄﻮﺭ؟ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ ﭼﻄـﻮﺭ؟ ﭘﺎﺳـﺦ ﻣﺤﻘـﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻧﻪ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﺆﻣﻦ‪ .‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻣـﺎ ﻭ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻭ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﺗـﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺑﻠـﻪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨـﻪ ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ژﻧﻮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻔﻠـﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﻣﺴـﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺷـﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻥﺷـﺎءﺍﷲ ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺻﺘﻲ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﺎﻳـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻳـﺎ ﺳـﻪ ﺟﻠﺴـﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻳـﻚ ﺟﻠﺴـﺔ ﻋﻤـﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﺎً‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﻛﻨﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮﺁﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪﺍﺵ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﺓ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ‬
‫ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﺗـﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ ﺗﺮﺩﻳﺪﻧﺎﭘـﺬﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻣﺴـﺄﻟﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺴـﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪61 (2‬‬

‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﻭﻻً ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻧـﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺗـﻼﺵ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻧﻬﻀـﺘﻲ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺟﻨﺒﺸﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻭ »ﻟ‪‬ﻴ‪‬ﻘُﻮﻡ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻨّﺎﺱ‪ ‬ﺑِﺎﻟْﻘ‪‬ﺴ‪‬ـﻂ« ﺭﺍ ﻋﻤـﻞ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴـﺎً‬
‫ﺟﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺧـﻮﺩﺵ ﻫـﻢ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨـﺔ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺠﺰﺓ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﭼﻪ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩﺍﻱ ﻛـﻪ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﭼﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻣﻌﺠـﺰﺍﺕ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮﻱ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺴﻠّﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ؟ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﺗـﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ ﻣﺴـﺄﻟﻪﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ؛ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳـﺎ ﻣﻨﻔـﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﻄﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ ﻣﻌﺠـﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌـﺪﺩ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻩ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠـﺐ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑــﺎ ﺻــﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﻣــﻲﮔﻮﻳــﺪ‪ .‬ﻫــﺮ ﻭﻗــﺖ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒــﺮ ﻣﻌﺠــﺰﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻳــﻪ ﻭ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨــﻪﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺠﺎ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ؟ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﺔ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﻖﭘﺬﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻣﻌﺠـﺰﻩ ﺑـﻪ ﺩﺭﺩ ﻣـﻲﺧـﻮﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﻬﺎﻧﻪﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻌﺠـﺰﺓ ﭼﺸـﻤﻲ ﻭ ﺣﺴـﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﻲ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻋﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﻣـﻲﮔﻴـﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻋﺠﺐ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﮔﺮ ﺯﺑﺮﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺪ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺴ‪‬ﺎﻋﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﺯ ﻃﻼ ﺑﻴﺎﻓﺮﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﻍ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻛﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻜـﻨﻢ ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨـﺪ ﭼـﻪ؟‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﻲﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨـﺪ ﻣﺤﻤـﺪ ﺟـﺎﺩﻭﮔﺮ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺠﺐ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﮔﺮ ﺯﺑﺮﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻮﺷﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻬﺎﻧﻪﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﻲﺩﻫـﺪ‪ .‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻮﺷـﻴﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﻛﺎﻭﺷـﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺁﻧـﻲ‬
‫‪ 62‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺻﺮﻳﺢ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣـﺎﻻ ﺁﻳـﺎ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘـﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﺍﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳـﺖ؟ ﺭﻳـﮓ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺧـﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺚﻫﺎ ﺍﺻﻼً ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭼـﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺚﻫﺎ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻡ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ؟ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻟﻲ ﻧـﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﺍﻧﺶ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩ ﻣـﻲﺩﻫـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬـﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﻌﺎﺩ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴـﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻋﺠﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻔﻬﻤﺪ ﻏﻠﻂ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺸﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻧﻘﺸﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗـﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﻭﺷـﮕﺮْ ﺁﻳـﺎﺕ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﺓ ﺟﺎﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻴﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﺁﻳﺔ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺁﻳﺔ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﻈﺎﻣﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺠـﺰﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺼﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﺸﺮ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻋﺼﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺼﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﻋـﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﺍﻋﺠـﺎﺯ ﻧﺒـﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻇﻬـﻮﺭ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ ﻛـﻪ ﻣﺪﻳﻨـﻪ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺑﺴـﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ؟ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻧﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺷﻚ ﻫﺴﺖ؟ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺩﺷﻤﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ــ ﺩﺷﻤﻨﺎﻥ ﺧـﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻢ ــ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﻨﺪ ﺣﺠـﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼـﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪ ﻭ ﺁﺛـﺎﺭﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺪ؟ ﻧﻪ ﺧﻴـﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳـﺪ ﺗـﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺘـﺮ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻨـﺪﻳﻦ ﺑـﺎﺭ ﻛـﺎﻧﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻴﺤﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻳﻬﻮﺩﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻧﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺣـﻮﺍﺩﺙ‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﻼﺏﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﺍﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﻨـﻴﻦ ﭼﻴـﺰﻱ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪63 (2‬‬

‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺁﻣﺪ؟ ﺧﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻧﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺣﻜﻮﻣﺖﻫـﺎﻳﻲ‬


‫ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻣﻨﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺑﻮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﺎﭼﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻧﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌـﺔ ﻣﺮﻛـﺰﻱ ﺍﺳـﻼﻣﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻃـﻮﻝ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﺪ؟ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﺕﻫـﺎﻳﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺟﺮﺃﺕ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﮔﺮﻧـﻪ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻧﻘـﻼﺏﻫـﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠـﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻧﮕﻮﻥ ﻣﻲﺷﺪﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺡ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺳـﺮ ﻧﻴـﺰﻩ ﺑﻜﻨﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈـﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲِ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﻫﺒـﺖ ﺗـﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺭﺑﻄﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺩﻳﻦ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﻥﻗﺪﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻞ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﺼﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻗﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺟﻬﺶِ‬
‫ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﻧﻬﻀﺖ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻭ ﻧﻬﻀﺖ ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻬﻀـﺖ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ ﻭ ﭘﻴـﺮﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻭ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻲ ﺑﻲﺳﺎﺑﻘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻧﺪﺍﻱ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻗﺼـﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺑﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﺗـﺎ ﺯﻣـﺎﻧﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺪﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺯ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺟﻤﻌﻲ ﻣﻲﺭﺳﺪ؛ ﺁﻥ ﻣـﺮﺯﻱ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺎﻭﺭﺍء ﺍﻭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺯ ﭼﺎپ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭﺍﺕ؛ ﻣـﺮﺯ ﺭﺍﺩﻳـﻮ‬
‫ﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴـﺰﺍﻥ ﻭ ﺑ‪‬ﻴﻨـﺎﺕ ﻭ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﻴﻨﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻧـﻪ ﺩﻳﻨـﻲ؛ ﻳـﻚ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴـﺖ ﻋﻴﻨـﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻭﺟﺪﺍﻥﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻖﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺩﻟـﻲ‬
‫ﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﺗﻮ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺐ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺗﻌﻬ‪‬ﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﺗﻮ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻂ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ؛ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻣﻴـﺪﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﺣـﺎﻻ‬
‫‪ 64‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﺪ؟ ﻧﻘﺶﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻜـﻢ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺁﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﺶﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻤﻲ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻋـﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﻘـﺶ ﺍﺻـﻴﻞ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ :‬ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻘﺶﻫـﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻋـﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻬﺪﺓ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ ﺟﺎﻣﻌـﺔ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥﻫـﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺮﻭﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻫﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺷﻴﻌﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻜﺮﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺁﻥ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺼﺮ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺼـﺮ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﻣﺎﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻔﻬﻤﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻛﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻼﻡ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻣـﺎ ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﺶ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨـﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺗﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺨﻮﺭﻧـﺪ‪ .‬ﺗـﺎ ﺯﻣـﺎﻧﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺗﻤﺪﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﻱ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳـﻚ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﻡ ﻧﺮﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﻱ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮ ﺍﻳﻔﺎ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﻴﻦﻗـﺪﺭ ﻛـﻪ ﺗﻤـﺪﻥ ﺑﺸـﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈـﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻭ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﭘﻲﮔﻴﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﻤﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻋﺼﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻗﺮﻭﻥ ﻭ ﺟﻮﺍﻣـﻊ ﺑﺸـﺮﻱ ﮔﻮﻧـﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺑﮕـﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻓﻬـﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﻴـﺪﻭﺍﺭﻡ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺑﺤـﺚ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻢ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ــ ﺣﺘـﻲ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻣﺴـﺄﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﺷﺪﻩ ــ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻭﺟﺪﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻖ ﻫﻢ ﺑﭙﺴﻨﺪﺩ ﻭ ﺑﭙﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺣـﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑــﺎﺯﻣﻲﮔــﺮﺩﻡ ﺑــﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﺒــﻲ ﻛــﻪ ﻋــﺮﺽ ﻛــﺮﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﮔــﺮ ﻓﻜــﺮﻱ ﻫﺴــﺖ ﻛــﻪ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪65 (2‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﻛـﺎﻣﻼً ﺣـﻞ ﻧﺸـﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﻧﻤﻲﻛـﻨﻢ ﻭ ﺁﻣـﺎﺩﮔﻲ ﭘﺎﺳـﺦ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻗـﺒﻼً ﻫـﻢ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻛـﺮﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﺁﻣـﺎﺩﮔﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦﮔﻮﻧـﻪ ﺩﻭﺳـﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺸـﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺸﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻔﺼﻼً ﮔﻔﺖ ﻭﮔﻮ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﺁﻳﻨـﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨـﺶ ﺳـﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻴﻌﻪ ﻭ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺍﻣﺎﻣـﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﺍﺭﺗﺒـﺎﻃﺶ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺶ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺑﺤـﺚ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻥﺷﺎءﺍﷲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪(3‬‬
‫ﺑِﺴ‪‬ﻢِ ﺍﷲِ ﺍﻟﺮﱠﺣ‪‬ﻤﻦِ ﺍﻟﺮﱠﺣﻴﻢ‪‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺤﺜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴـﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣـﺖ ﺑـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ )ﺹ( ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺧﺪﺍﺳـﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺏ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺑﻼﻍ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻠﺐ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻘـﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺘﻘـﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻃﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﻚ ﻭ ﺷﺒﻬﻪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭙﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﮕﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻛﺴﻲ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺎﻡﺁﻭﺭ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﻭ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳ‪‬ﻤ‪‬ﺖ ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻗﻠﺒﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌـﺎﻟﻴﻤﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﻚ ﻭ ﺷﺒﻬﻪ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﺪ؟ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻼً ﺟﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﺒﻬﻪﺍﻱ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺁﻭﺭﻧـﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻲ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﻧﺠـﺎ ﻣﻄﻠـﺐ ﺻـﺎﻑ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻟﺶ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺑﻬﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﻌﻨﺎ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ ﭼـﻮﻥ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﻛـﺮﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺍﻳـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺻﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﺎ ﺻـﺮﺍﺣﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡﺁﻭﺭ ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ ﺍﻭ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺩﻭﻡ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥﻛﻪ ﻗﻠﺐ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﭘـﺬﻳﺮﻓﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡﺁﻭﺭ ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻴﻢ ﺍﻭ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﺷـﻦ‬
‫‪ 70‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻧﺸﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﺷﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺗﺎ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﺷﺘﻪﺍﺵ ﻫﻤﭽﻨـﺎﻥ‬


‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ؟ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﻛﺸﻒ ﺯﻳﺮﺑﻨﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﻳـﻚ ﺳـﺆﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻤﻨﺪﻱ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻴﻨﺎً ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻘﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧﻢ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﺴﻮﻑ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﭼﺸﻤﻢ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻚ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺷﻚ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺩﻳﺪﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺟـﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻄـﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷـﻴﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﻗـﺮﺹ ﺩﺭﺧﺸـﻨﺪﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺨﺸﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻚ ﺷﺪ؟ ﺳـﺆﺍﻝ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﻃﻊ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻫﻢ ﻫﺴـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺟﻠﺴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺆﺍﻻﺕ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑـﺎ ﮔﺸـﺎﺩﻩﺭﻭﻳـﻲ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺑﻪﺭﻭ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺴ‪‬ﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﻘﺪﻩﮔﺸﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﻩﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻜﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﺔ ﺿـﻌﻒ ﺍﻳﻤـﺎﻥ ﻫـﻢ ﻧﺸـﻤﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﮕـﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﺪ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘـﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳـﻚ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺗـﺎﺭﻳﻜﻲ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺷﻚ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﺷﺪ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻭ ﺧُﺮﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳـﺆﺍﻝ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺮﺳـﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ؟ ﻳـﺎ ﮔﻔـﺖ ﻣﻌﻠـﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﻼﻧﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﻪ؛ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻫـﻴﭻ ﻣﻨﺎﻓـﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻛـﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻛﺮﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺶ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﻻﻳﻠﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳـﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺁﺩﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺁﻳـﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨـﺎﺗﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﻫﻤـﺮﺍﻩ ﻣـﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﭼﻨـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﻠﺐ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺎﻳﺔ ﺩﻳـﻦ ﺑـﺮ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪71 (3‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻘﺮﻩ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴـﺪ ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻼﻡِ ﺑﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻒ ﻭ ﻻﻡ ﻭ ﻣﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎﻱ ﺑﺸﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺷﻚ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻣﺘّﻘﻴﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﻘﻮﺍﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗـﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ ﻣـﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫـﺪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺑﻨﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺮﺩﻣﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨﻨـﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻝ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪» :‬ﺍَﻟﱠﺬﻳﻦَ ﻳ‪‬ﺆْﻣ‪‬ﻨُﻮﻥَ ﺑِﺎﻟْﻐَﻴ‪‬ﺐ«‪» :‬ﺍﻟﻢ‪ .‬ﺫﻟ‪‬ﻚ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻜ‪‬ﺘـﺎﺏ‪ ‬ﻻ‬
‫ﺭ‪‬ﻳ‪‬ﺐ‪ ‬ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ‬ﻫ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﻱ ﻟ‪‬ﻠْﻤ‪‬ﺘﱠﻘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺍَﻟﱠﺬﻳﻦَ ﻳ‪‬ﺆْﻣ‪‬ﻨُﻮﻥَ ﺑِﺎﻟْﻐَﻴ‪‬ﺐ«‪ 1.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﺔ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻤـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺠﺎ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ؟ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻛﺖ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺗﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﻣـﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﭘـﺲ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺶ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﺎ ﻛﻤـﻚ ﺁﻳـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺗﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻟﺔ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻣﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻴﻢ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻧﻈـﺎﻡ ﺧﺪﺍﭘﺴـﻨﺪﺍﻧﺔ ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻨﺎﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪» :‬ﻟَﻘَﺪ‪ ‬ﺍَﺭ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ﻠْﻨﺎ ﺭ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ـﻠَﻨﺎ ﺑِﺎﻟْﺒ‪‬ﻴِّﻨـﺎﺕ« ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨـﺎﺕ »ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍَﻧْﺰَﻟْﻨـﺎ ﻣ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﻬ‪‬ـﻢ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟْﻜ‪‬ﺘﺎﺏ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ«‪ .‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻪ »ﻟ‪‬ﻴ‪‬ﻘُﻮﻡ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻨّﺎﺱ‪ ‬ﺑِﺎﻟْﻘ‪‬ﺴ‪‬ﻂ«‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺩﻡ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺑـﻪ ﻏﻴـﺐ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻧـﺪ ﻭ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴـﺰﺍﻥ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻫـﻢ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺣﺠﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻮﺑـﺖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻨﺸﻴﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻂ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ »ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍَﻧْﺰَﻟْﻨَﺎ ﺍﻟْﺤ‪‬ﺪﻳـﺪ‪‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ‬ﺑ‪‬ﺄْﺱ‪ ‬ﺷَﺪﻳﺪ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ﻨﺎﻓ‪‬ﻊ‪ ‬ﻟ‪‬ﻠﻨّﺎﺱ«؛ ﺣﺘـﻲ ﺗـﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺮﺣﻠـﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻲﺯﻧﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻘﻘﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻭ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳــﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻘــﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳــﺎﺕ ‪» :3-1‬ﺍﻟــﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻳــﻦ ﻛﺘــﺎﺏ ﻛــﻪ ﻫــﻴﭻ ﺷــﻚ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺴــﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤــﺎﻱ‬
‫ﭘﺮﻫﻴﺰﻛﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺐ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﺭﻧﺪ«‪.‬‬
‫‪ 72‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻄﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺪﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﻱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﺑـﻲﺣـﺪ ﻭ‬


‫ﻣﺮﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺟﻤﻌﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺼـﺮ ﺧـﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﻱ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨـﺎﺗﻲ ﻣـﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻭ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺼﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺼﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺼﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﻴﻨﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺗﻤﺪﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺳﻴﺎﺳـﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻧﻬﻀﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻧﺪ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﺑـﻮﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳـﻚﻛﻨﻨـﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗـﺎﺭﻳﻜﻲﺯﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺁﻣـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭﻱﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻘﻘﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﭙﺮﺳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ )ﻉ( ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺗـﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ ﻗﻄﻌـﻲ ﺭﻭﺷـﻦ ﺗﺮﺩﻳﺪﻧﺎﭘـﺬﻳﺮ ﭘﻴـﺪﺍ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ؟ ﻣﺤﻘـﻖ ﺗـﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻣــﻲﮔﻮﻳــﺪ‪ :‬ﻧــﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒــﺎﻁ ﻣﻴــﺎﻥ ﻣــﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻴــﺎﻥ ﺍﺑــﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ )ﻉ( ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈــﺮ ﺗــﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪﮔﻲﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﺟﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﺟﺎ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﭙﺮﺳـﻴﺪ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻭ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻲ )ﻉ( ﻭ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴـﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﮔﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؛ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺻﻼً ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻧﻮﺳﺎﺧﺘﺔ ﻣﻮﺳـﻲ ﻭ ﻳﻮﺷـﻊ )ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻤـﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻡ( ﺑﺎ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻـﻠﺔ ﻛﻮﺗـﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﺑﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺁﻳﻴﻦ ﻳﻬﻮﺩ ﺑـﻪ ﺩﺳـﺖ ﺩﺷـﻤﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺁﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺍﻓﺘﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻣﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺧـﻂ ﺗـﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺼـﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﻣـﺎﻥ ﺗـﺎ ﻋﺼـﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻲ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻭ ﻣﺒﻬﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ ﻋﺼﺮ ﻋﻴﺴﻲ )ﻉ( ﻫﻤﻴﻦﻃﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻘﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﭙﺮﺳﻴﺪ )ﺣﺘﻲ ﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺴـﻠﻤﺎﻥ(‪ .‬ﻛـﻪ ﺁﻳـﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﺒـﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪73 (3‬‬

‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻋﺼﺮ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺁﻳـﺎﺕ‬


‫ﻭ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳـﺎ ﻧـﻪ؟ ﭘﺎﺳـﺦ ﻣﺤﻘـﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺰﺭگﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺔ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﻲ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﻛـﻪ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴـﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻭ ﺁﻳﺔ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨـﺔ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺼـﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻲ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﻭ ﭼـﻪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﺔ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻤﺪﻥ ﺑﺸـﺮﻱ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻣﻮﻗ‪‬ـﻒ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﻧﻬﻀﺖ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺸﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻨﮕﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻝ ﺑـﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻫﺴـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺼﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﻛـﻪ ﺁﻥﻗـﺪﺭ ﻧُﺴ‪‬ـﺦ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻛﺖ ﭼﺎپ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻧﻴﺎ ﺗﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺻـﻼً ﺍﺣﺘﻤـﺎﻝ ﺍﻳـﻦﻛـﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﻱ‬
‫ﻧﺴﻞ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻧﻴﺎ ﺑﺮﺍُﻓﺘﺪ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺻﺘﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﺩﺳـﺖ ﻣﺤﺮّﻓـﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﻔﺘـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﻗﺮﺁﻧـﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻔﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺸﺮ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﻣﺤـﺎﻝ ﺑـﻪ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﻣـﻲﺁﻳـﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣـﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺴﺨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻴﻞ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﺸﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺻﺖﻃﻠﺒﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑﺁﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻒﻛﻨﻨـﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨـﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻔﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺸﺮ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻧﺪ؟ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﭼﻴـﺰﻱ ﻣﺤـﺎﻝ ﺑـﻪ ﻧﻈـﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺭﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻦ ﻋﻴﻨﻲ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻧﻬﻀﺖ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻭ ﺁﻳﺔ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻭ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻳﺔ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨـﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﺎﺳﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﻜﺎﺭﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺗﻢ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮔﻔﺖ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺁﻣـﺪ؟ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﻳﺔ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛـﻪ ﻫﺴـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 74‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ؟ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺆﺍﻝِ ﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﻋـﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍ ﻣـﺮﻭﺯ ﻣﺎﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈـﺮ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒــﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺭﺳــﺎﻟﺘﺶ ﻫﻤــﻴﻦ ﺍﺳــﺖ‪ .‬ﻣــﻲﺁﻳــﺪ ﺗــﺎ ﺑــﺎ ﻧﺸــﺎﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷــﻨﮕﺮ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥﺁﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻴﺐ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳـﺪ ﻣـﻦ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ﻏﻴﺐ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﺩﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﻏﻴﺐﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺳﻌﺎﺩﺕﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﺗـﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠـﺎ ﻣﻘـﺎﻡ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻫﻢ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻲ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺭﻫﺒﺮ ﺍﻣﺖ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﺍﻣـﺎﻡ ﺑـﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺠﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﭘﻴﺸـﻮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺯﻣـﺎﻡﺩﺍﺭ ﺑـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺯﻣـﺎﻡﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺧﺼـﻠﺖ ﺑﺮﺟﺴـﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺧﺼﻠﺖ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺖﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺑـﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻤـﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺧﺼـﻠﺖ ﺑﺮﺟﺴـﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﺡ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣـﻦ ﻭ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ ﻫﺠﺮﺕ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺭﻭﺡ ﻭ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﻳﻜـﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﺍﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﻲﺁﻣـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻪ ﭼـﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺴﻲ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ؟ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﻓﺘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺑﺎﻃﻦ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺡ ﻭ ﻋﻤـﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻳـﻢ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺡ ﻗـﺎﻧﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻧﻔْـﺲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺡ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣـﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﺴـﻜﻴﻮ‪ 1‬ﻛﺘـﺎﺑﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑـﺎ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺻﻼً ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺩﻳﻦ ﻧﻨﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻗـﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺑﺸـﺮﻱ‬

‫‪1. Charles-Louis de Secondat Montesquieu‬‬


‫ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪75 (3‬‬

‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺑﺸﺮﻱ ﻫﻢ ﺭﻭﺣـﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺷـﻜﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻗـﺎﻧﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻼً ﺍﻳﻦﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺳﺆﺍﻝﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﻣـﻲﺧﻮﺍﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺍﻧﺪ ﺭﻭﺡ ﻓﻼﻥ ﻓﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﺯ ﻗـﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ ﭼﻴﺴـﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻪ ﭼـﻪ ﻛﺴـﻲ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩ؟ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺖﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﺭﻭﺡ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻃﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺁﻧﻲ ﭼـﻪ ﻛﺴـﻲ ﺑـﻮﺩ؟‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈـﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌـﻪ ﻛﻨـﺪ؟ ﻫﺮﮔـﺰ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋـﺔ ﺗﻌـﺎﻟﻴﻢ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪﻥ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻲ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟـﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻳـﻚ ﺩﺭﺟـﻪﺍﺵ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺔ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻋﺮﺑﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺑﻔﻬﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣـﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨـﺪ ﺗـﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻔﻬﻤﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳـﻖ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺳﻨﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻫﻞ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻨﺎﺳـﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻳـﻚ ﺩﺭﺟـﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺯﺑﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌـﻪ ﺩﺳـﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻮﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑـﺎﻻﺗﺮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻـﻼً ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻛﺎ ﺭ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﺎ ﻣﻨﺒـﻊ ﻭﺣـﻲ ﺍﺭﺗﺒـﺎﻁ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺭﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻃﻦ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻃﻦ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻃﻨﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗـﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻭ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻧﻬﻔﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻨﺎﺳﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺮﭼﺸﻤﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺩﺍﻧﺎﻳﺎﻧـﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﺑﺎﻃﻦﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﺮﺑـﻮﻁ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻣﺎﻣـﺖ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺸـﻮﺍﻳﻲ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺸﻮﺍ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺟـﻊ ﻣـﺮﺩﻡ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺭﻫﺒﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﺆﺍﻻﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﺔ ﺭﻭﺡ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺡ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤـﻖ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺡ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻃﻦ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺭﻭﺑﻪﺭﻭ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 76‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﺧﺼﻠﺖ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﺔ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪:‬‬


‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻣ‪‬ﺜَﻞ ﺍﻋﻼﻱ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻛﺮﻳﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﺴﻢﻛﻨﻨـﺪﺓ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﻛـﺮﻳﻢ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔـﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺴﻲ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺮﺩ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻗﺮﺁﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺴﻢ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣ‪‬ﺜَﻞ ﺍﻋﻼﻳـﺶ‬
‫ﻛﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﻨﺸﻴﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﺭﺯﺵ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﺚ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﻔـﺖ‬
‫ﻭ ﮔﻮ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺩﻟﺶ ﺑﻨﺸـﻴﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺁﻥﻛـﻪ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑـﺎﻥ ﻛﺴـﻲ ﺑﺸـﻨﻮﺩ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺴﻤﺔ ﺯﻧﺪﺓ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺭﺍﺣﺖﺗﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺩﻝ ﻣﻲﻧﺸﻴﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺷـﻤﺎ ﺳـﺨﻦ‬
‫ﺣﻖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻞﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻖ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؛ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﻖ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺭﺯﺷﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻـﻮﺕ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺛـﺮ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻭﻟﻲ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﺸﻮﺍﻱ ﺣﻖ ﻛـﻪ ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ ﺷﺨﺼـﻴﺶ‪،‬‬
‫ﺯﻧــﺪﮔﻲ ﺧــﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﮔﻴﺶ‪ ،‬ﺯﻧــﺪﮔﻲ ﺍﺟﺘﻤــﺎﻋﻴﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤــﺎﻡ ﻧﺸــﻴﺐ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺍﺯﻫــﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺴﻢﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﺣﻖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﻝﻫﺎ ﻧﻬﺎﻝ ﺣـﻖ ﻣـﻲﻧﺸـﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﺸـﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﻓﻘـﻂ‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﺶ ﺣﻖ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻴﺶ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚﺗﺮ ﻣﻲﺷـﻮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺻـﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺷﻚ ﻛﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﭘﻨﺎﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺧﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻﻼً ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻭ ﮔﻔـﺖ ﭘﻴﺸـﻮﺍﻱ ﺣـﻖ؟‬
‫ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﻧﻬﻀﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻫﺒﺮﻱ ﺭﻫﺒﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﻦ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻬﻀﺖ ﻋﻤﻼً ﭘﺎﻱﺑﻨﺪ ﻧﺒﺎﺷـﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻪ ﺛﻤـﺮ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫـﺪ ﺭﺳـﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺟﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻧﻴﺎ ﻧﻬﻀﺖ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﺯﻱ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻬﻀﺖ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻃﻦ ﻭ ﻇـﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻴﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥﺯﺍ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺭﻫﺒﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺤﺖ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭﺵ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻚ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺠﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺭﻫﺒﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ! ﻭ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﻛـﺮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘـﺎﻡ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻡﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﻣﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺼﻠﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻋـﻼ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻋﻼ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪77 (3‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﻻ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‪ ‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﮔﻔﺖ ﺑـﺎ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺮﻱ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺯ ﭼﺸﻢﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫـﺪ ﺭﻫﺒـﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘـﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺭﻫﺒﺮﻱ ﺑﺒﻴﻨـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻭ‪‬ﻻً ﺭﻓﺘـﺎﺭﺵ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤـﻞ ﺷﺨﺼـﻴﺶ‪ ،‬ﺭﻫﺒـﺮﻱ ﺍﺟﺘﻤـﺎﻋﻴﺶ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺠﺴﻢﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻴﻮﺓ ﺣﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺶ‪ ،‬ﮔﻔﺘـﺎﺭﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﻼﻣﻴـﻪﻫـﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨـﺶﻧﺎﻣـﻪﻫـﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻗـﻮﺍﻧﻴﻨﺶ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻴﻨﺶ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴـﺎﺝ‪ ‬ﺩﺍﺋﻤـﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻫـﻢ ﻫﺴـﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﻫﻢ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻣـﺮﺩﻡ ﻣـﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴـﺎﺝ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺭﻭﺑﻪﺭﻭ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺠﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦﮔﻮﻧـﻪ ﺍﻓـﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻲ ﻭ ﺧﻼﻕ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦﮔﻮﻧـﻪ ﺍﻓـﺮﺍﺩ ﻣـﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨـﺪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻕ ﺭﻭﺡ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﮔﺮ ﻧﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻋـﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺟﺴــﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈــﺮ ﺳــﺨﻦﻭﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳــﺨﻦﻭﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ ﻣــﺎﻫﺮ‪ ،‬ﺟــﺬﺍﺏ‪ ،‬ﮔﻴــﺮﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺴﻮﻧﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻠﻤﺶ ﻗﻠﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺳﺤ‪‬ﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼـﻪ ﺧـﻮﺏ ﺍﺳـﺖ؟ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺻﺪ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﻨﺸﻴﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺒﻠﻴﻎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺑﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺩﻭﺭﺗﺮ ﻣﻲﺷـﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦﻛـﻪ ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨـﺪ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺣﻖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ؟ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻻﻳﻠـﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺣﻘﺎﻧﻴﺖ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭼـﺮﺍ ﺩﻝ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺴـﺒﺖ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺣﻘﺎﻧﻴﺖ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻗﺎﻧﻊ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﺵ ﺷﺒﻬﻪﺁﻭﺭ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﺷـﻚﺯﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻫﺒﺮ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﻳﺰﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺯﻥ‬
‫ﻭ ﻓﺮﺯﻧﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ ﻛﻨـﺪ؟‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻧﺶ ﻛﻪ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻨﺪ ﻋﺠﺐ ﺷـﻴﻄﺎﻥﻫـﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻃـﺮﺍﻓﺶ‬
‫‪ 78‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻭ ﻛﺠﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻼﻡ ﻭ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﺩ؟ ﺍﺻﻼً ﻛﺠﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﭘﺎﻛﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﻣـﺮﻭﺝ ﭘـﺎﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﮕﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ؟ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﭘﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﮕـﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ؟ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺍﺻﻼً ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﺑﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺛﺮﻱ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻧﺪ؛ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﺮﻓﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺁﻭﺍﺯﻩﺷﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺸـﻨﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘـﻂ‬
‫ﺳﻼﻡ ﻭ ﺻﻠﻮﺍﺗﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﮔﺮ ﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ ﺍﻳـﻦﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﻲﺷـﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔـﺮ ﭼﻴـﺰﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷـﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤـﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻟﺸﺎﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﭘ‪‬ﺮَﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻋﺼﺮﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻣـﺎﻡ ﻭ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﻮﺍ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺒـﺮﻱ ﻛـﻪ ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ ﺷﺨﺼـﻴﺶ‪ ،‬ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ ﺍﺟﺘﻤـﺎﻋﻴﺶ‪ ،‬ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﮔﻴﺶ‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﺴﻢ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﮕﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺳـﺆﺍﻻﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭﺑـﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻔﺴـﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺷـﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﺑـﺎﻃﻦ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺮ ﺍﻭ ﻋﺮﺿـﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛـﻪ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴـﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣـﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﺎ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ )ﺹ( ﺑﺴﺎﻁ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷـﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﺑﺮﺭﺳـﻲ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴـﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﻱ ﻭ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴـﺰﺍﻥ ﻭ ﺁﻳـﺎﺕ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻫﺒﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﺧﺼﻠﺖ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ــ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻋﻤﻴﻖ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻭ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺁﻥﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻴﺶ ﻣﺠﺴﻢ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ــ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﺣﺘﻴـﺎﺝ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪79 (3‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺷﻴﻌﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴـﺎﺝ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﭼـﻪ ﻛﺴـﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ؟ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻲﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤـﻖ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﺒـﺎﻁ ﺑـﺎ ﺳﺮﭼﺸـﻤﺔ ﻭﺣـﻲﺍﻧـﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻠـﻢ‬
‫ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﻋﻠﻲ )ﻉ(‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﺻﺎﺩﻕ )ﻉ( ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻋﺎﻟﻤـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺷـﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺍﻳـﺎﺗﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺻـﺤﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﺋﻤـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺜﻼً ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪» :‬ﺳ‪‬ﺄَﻟْﺖ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻌﺎﻟ‪‬ﻢ«؛‪ 1‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻨﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻋـﺎﻟﻢ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣ ﺎ ﻋﻠﻤﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺛﺎﻥ ﻋﻠـﻢ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺒﺮ ﺍﻣﺖ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻭ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻋﻠﻤﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺼﺮ‬
‫ﭘﻴ ﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺳﺆﺍﻻﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻖ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺡ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺸﺎﻥ ﻛﻤﺎﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺷﻴﻌﻪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﺍﻣﺎﻣـﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﭽﻨـﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﻔـﻮﻅ ﻧﮕـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺸﻮﺍﻱ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺼـﻠﺖ ﺑﺮﺟﺴـﺘﻪ ﺑﺮﺧـﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣ‪‬ﺜَﻞ ﺍﻋﻼﻱ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﺑـﺮ ﻓﺮﺍﺯﻫـﺎﻱ ﺍﻭ ﻧﻘﻄـﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳـﻚ ﻭ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﻜﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ »ﻋﺼﻤﺖ« ﻳﺎ »ﭘﺎﻛﻲ«‪ .‬ﭘﺎﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻴﻌﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣـﺎﻥ ﺍﻫـﻞ ﺑﻴـﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻣـﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﻭﺣ ﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﺍﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪ ﻋﺼﻤﺖ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻛﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻧـﻮﻉ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﻛﻠﻴﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﺝ‪ :2‬ﺹ‪.654‬‬


‫‪ 80‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺁﻟﻮﺩﮔﻲ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ ﺷﻴﻌﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺑﻪﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﻟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺷـﺪ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮﻱ ﺑـﺎ ﺁﻳـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ ﻧﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺭﻫﺒﺮ ﺍﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻭ ﺭﻫﺒﺮ ﺍﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺭﻫﺒﺮ ﺍﻣﺖ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﺼﻤﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﻱ ﻭ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﺶ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﺄﻥ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺒﺮﻳﺶ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻣـﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻭ ﭘﻴﺸﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺭﻫﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﺼـﻠﺖ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﺧـﺎﺹ ﺍﺟﺘﻤـﺎﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺘﻨـﻊ ﻭ ﻣﺤـﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺧﺎﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﺋﻤﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻳـﻦﻛـﻪ ﭼﻄـﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﻋﺴﮕﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﻏﺎﻳﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺗﻤـﺎﻡ ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣـﺎﻻ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻛ ﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﻴـﻒ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻣـﻦ ﺑﺨـﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨـﺪ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﺟﻮﺭ ﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻟـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﺷـﻴﻌﻪ ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻫﺒﺮﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺧﺼـﻠﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻣﺴـﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺟﺎﻟﺐ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺴـﺄﻟﺔ ﻧﺎﻳـﺐ ﺍﻣـﺎﻡ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺯﻧـﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨـﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘـﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺗﻜﻴـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻴﻌﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺼﺮ ﻏﻴﺒﺖ ﺍﻣـﺎﻡ )ﻉ( ﺑـﻪ ﻣﺴـﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻌﻬـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻲ ﻣـﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫـﺪ ﻣﺴـﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﻔﺘـﻪ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﺩ ﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻥ! ﺍﻱ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺧـﻮﺩﺕ ﺗﻌﻬـﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺴـﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﺣﺴـﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻲ! ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺵ! ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﺣﻜﻢ ﺩﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺍﺣﻜـﺎﻡ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺼﻮﻡ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﻭﺣﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺴﻲ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻟﻴﺎﻗﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺟـﺎﻱ ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺗـﻮ ﺑـﺮ ﻋﻬـﺪﻩ ﻣـﻲﮔﻴـﺮﻡ‪ .‬ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪81 (3‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﺼﻮﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻮﺷﻢ ﻋﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﭼﺸﻤﺔ ﻭﺣـﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻢ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺁﻧﭽ ﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻭﺭﻧـﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺍﺭﺗﺒـﺎﻁ ﻣﺴـﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻨﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﺩﺳـﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﺮ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺭﻫﺒﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺭﻭﺡ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ ﻛﻨـﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻨـﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﻴﺴـﺖ؟ ﺭﻭﺡ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺮﺩ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﭘـﺲ ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﺭﻭﺡ ﻗـﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷـﻜﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴـﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺳـﺆﺍﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺁﮔﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻭ ﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺴـﻠﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻫـﺮ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍ ﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﺍ ﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻦ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚﺗﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻴﺶ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨـﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺸـﺘﺮﻱ ﭘﻴـﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻲ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﺍﻳﺶ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﻴﺪ‪» ‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮﻱ« ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻝ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺫﻫﻦ ﻫﺎﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫـﺮ ﻗـﺪﺭ ﺑـﻪ ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﺍﻭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨـﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺸـﺘﺮﻱ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻛﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻘﻮﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻀﻴﻠﺖ ﺍﻭ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺠﺴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺗﻘﻮﺍ ﻭ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ ﻭ ﻧﻈـﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻤـﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻘـﻮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺸﻮﺍﻱ ﻣﺠﺴـﻢﻛﻨﻨـﺪﺓ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺷـﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻝﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺡﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻧﻬﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻤـﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻝﻫـﺎ ﻣﺴـﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺎﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺷﺪ ﺗﻮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻭ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻞﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﻁ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺗﻘـﻮﺍ ﻭ ﻋـﺪﺍﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺷﻴﻌﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺼﺮ ﻏﻴﺒﺖ ﺑﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻨﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺛﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺼﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻣﻲﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻏﻴﺒﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﻳﻜﺴﺮﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺮﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﻋـﺎﻟ‪‬ﻢ ﺁﮔـﺎﻩ ﻋـﺎﺩﻝ ﺑـﺎ ﻋﻤـﻞ‪ ،‬ﻻﺍﻗـﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺻــﺪﻱ ﻗﺎﺑــﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈــﻪ‪) ،‬ﻫﻔﺘــﺎﺩ ـ ﻫﺸــﺘﺎﺩ ﺩﺭﺻــﺪ( ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳــﻦ ﺍﺛــﺮ ﻣﺤﻔــﻮﻅ‬
‫‪ 82‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷـﻴﻌﺔ ﺭﺍﺳـﺘﻴﻦ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺭﺍﺳـﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻟﻪﺭﻭ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻭ ﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺪﻱ )ﺳﻼﻡ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ ﺍﺟﻤﻌـﻴﻦ( ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣـﻖ‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺳﺮﺳﺮﻱﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﻩﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﮕـﺮ ﺑﺒـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺑﻨﮕﺮ ﺑﺒﻴﻦ ﺑـﻪ ﭼـﻪ ﻛﺴـﻲ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﮕـﺮ ﺑﺒـﻴﻦ ﺁﮔـﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻭ ﭼﻴﺴـﺖ؟ ﺗﻘـﻮﺍﻱ ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﻓﻀﻴﻠﺖ ﺍﻭ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﻴﻌﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺼﺮ ﻏﻴﺒـﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻌﻤﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣـﻲﺑـﻮﺩ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻳـﺎﺩ ﺁﺳـﻴﺐﭘـﺬﻳﺮ ﺑـﻮﺩﻩﺍﻳـﻢ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺣﺘـﻲ ﺍﻣـﺮﻭﺯ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﺁﺳﻴﺐﭘﺬﻳﺮﻳﻢ؛ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴـﻤﺖ ﺑﺴـﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻮﺗـﺎﻫﻲ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺴـﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺴـﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻫﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺮﺟـﻊ ﺩﻳﻨـﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﭘﺎﻧﺼﺪ ﻫﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﭘـﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﻢ ﻫﻢ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﻲﮔﻮﻳﻢ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻋـﺪﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺩﻗـﺖ ﻧﻤـﻲﻛﺮﺩﻧـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﻭﺍﻭﻳـﻼ ﺑـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧـﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻴﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻮﻡ ﻣـﺮﺩﻡ ﻣـﺎ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ ﭼﻴﺰﻫـﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣـﻲﺩﺍﻧﻨـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋـﺎﻟﻢ ﻋـﺎﺩﻝ ﻭ ﺣﺘـﻲ ﺍﻋﻠـﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺪﻝ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻓـﻼﻥ ﻛـﺲ ﻋـﺎﻟﻢ ﺑﺮﺟﺴـﺘﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳـﺎ ﺧـﻮﺩﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺰﺩﻳـﻚ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺷـﺮﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺸﻨﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺑـﻪ ﻋـﺪﺍﻟﺖ ﻭ ﺗﻘـﻮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻨﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣـﺮﺩﻡ ﺁﮔـﺎﻩ ﺍﻫـﻞ ﺣﺴـﺎﺏ ﻭ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻋﺪﻝ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﻗﻠﺒﻲ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻲ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺭﻋﺎﻳـﺖ ﻧﻜـﺮﺩﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻲﺳﺮ ﻭ ﺳـﺎﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻮﺟـﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﻓﻜـﺮ ﻭ ﻋﻤـﻞ ﺩﻳﻨـﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻣﻌـﺔ ﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪83 (3‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺳﻴﺐﭘﺬﻳﺮﻱ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻣﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻲﺍﻋﺘﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺁﻗﺎﻳﻲ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﺧـﻮﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﻪ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻟﻄﻴﻒ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﻜﺮﻫـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﺤـﺮﻑ ﻛـﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼـﻪ ﻗـﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻄﻴﻒ! ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﺁﻣﺪ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻗﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺪ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻭ ﻣﺸـﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻳﺪﻡ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪﺭﻱ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻭ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛـﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺳﺨﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻗﺎ ــ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﺡ ﺑﺪﻫـﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ــ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺶ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﻴﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻋﺎﻱ ﺍﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻖ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﺠﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻓـﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻋﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﻟ‪‬ﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻖ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﺠﺎﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻃﺮﺯ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻣﻮﺭ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻧﻬﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭼﺮﺍ؟ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣـﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻛﺠﺎ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻋﺎﻱ ﻓﻼﻥ ﺁﻗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻘﺶ ﻣﺴﺘﺠﺎﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻧـﻪ؟ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻛﺲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺩﻋﺎ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺖﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺗـﻮ ﻣـﻲﺧﻮﺍﺳـﺘﻲ ﻻﺍﻗـﻞ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻲ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻠـﻢ ﻭ ﻋـﺪﺍﻟﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤـﺎﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻀﻴﻠﺖ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺧﻮﺍﺹ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﻋﺎﻱ ﺍﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻖ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﺠﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻪ ﺍﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑ‪‬ﺮﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﻨﺠﻴﺪ؟ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺳ‪‬ﻤ‪‬ﺖﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣ‪‬ﻨﺼﺐ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻟﻴﺎﻗﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺖﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺼﺐ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻣﺰﻱ ﻃﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﺜﻤـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻳﻢ؟ ﻛﺠﺎﻱ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻭ ﻛﺠﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺳﻨﺖ ﺍﺻﻼً ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻫﺴﺖ؟ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻦﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺠﺎﺳـﺖ؟‬
‫ﻫﻤــﺎﻥ ﻣــﻦﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﺩﻱ ﻋــﻮﺍﻡ ﭘﺴــﻨﺪﺍﻧﻪ‪ .‬ﺣــﺎﻻ ﺍﮔــﺮ ﺑﻨــﺪﻩ ﻣــﻲﺧﻮﺍﺳــﺘﻢ ﺩﺭ‬
‫‪ 84‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺁﻥ ﺟﻠﺴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻗﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺲ ﺑﻔﻬﻤﺎﻧﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻗﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻗﻼﺑﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺷـﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺑﺸﻨﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺧﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺑـﺎﺭ ﻛـﻦ! ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً ﻣﺄﻳﻮﺱ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻠﺴﻪ ﻓﻜﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻢ؛ ﻭ‬
‫ﮔﺮ ﻧﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﺄﻳﻮﺱ ﺷﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺮﺳﻴﺪﻡ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺤﺜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛـﻨﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﻦ! ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺍﻫﻞ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺳـﺎﺯﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺻـﻼً ﺑـﺪﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺻﻞ ﺩﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻧﺶ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﺭﻫﺎﻳﺶ ﻛـﺮﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻟـﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻻ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻣـﻲ ﺗـﻮﺍﻧﻢ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺳﺨﻦ ﺣﻖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﺭﻫﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﻨـﻲ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﻫﻮﺷـﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻼﻙ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺿﺎﺑﻄﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺧـﻮﺩ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺳﻨﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻭ ﺍﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺪﻱ )ﺳﻼﻡ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ ﺍﺟﻤﻌﻴﻦ( ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻣـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺿﺎﺑﻄﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﻨـﺪﻳﻢ‪ :‬ﻋﻠـﻢ‪ ،‬ﺁﮔـﺎﻫﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻤـﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘـﻮﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻀﻴﻠﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ‪ :‬ﻛﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻲ ﻫﻢ ﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﭘﺎﻙ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﭘﺎﻛﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺗﺮ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺿـﺎﺑﻄﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﺕ ﻓﺮﺻﺖ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻲ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻫـﻢ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺘﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻭ ﺟﻨﺠﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺷﺎﻳﻌﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻪ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺎﻳﻌﻪﻫـﺎ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣـﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨـﻴﻦ ﺟـﻮﺍﻣﻌﻲ ﺟﻨـﺒﺶ ﻣﻮﻓـﻖ ﻭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻡ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ؟ ﻣﺤﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳـﻦ‪ ،‬ﺭﻫﺒـﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻣﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺭﺗﻖ ﻭ ﻓﺘﻖ ﺍﻣﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳـﺖ ﺍﻭﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ )‪85 (3‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻫـﻢ ﺗﻌﻠـﻴﻢ ﺷـﻴﻌﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﻴﻌﺔ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ )ﻉ(! ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻡﺩﺍﺭﻱِ ﺯﻣﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺪﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻪ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻟـﻚ ﺍﺷـﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻠـﻲ )ﻉ( ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺒـﺖ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻋﻠـﻲ )ﻉ( ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣـﺎﻡ ﻣﺠﺘﺒـﻲ )ﻉ( ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺪﺍ )ﻉ ( ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﺻﺎﺩﻕ )ﻉ( ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﻋﺴﮕﺮﻱ )ﻉ( ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻏﺎﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺼﺮ ﻧﺒـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼـﻪ ﻛﺴـﻲ‬
‫ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ؟ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﺷﺘﺮ ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺎﻧﺸﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻣـﺮﺩﻡ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺗﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺍﻣـﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﻀﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﺮﻭﺍﻳﻲ ﻭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺴـﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻄﻴـﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛـﻨﻢ ﻭ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻄﺎﻳﻒ ﺍﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻴﻌﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻋﻼ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻋﻼ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻟﻴﺎﻗﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﮔﺰﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻋﻼ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳـﺮ ﻭ ﻛـﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺵ‪ .‬ﻛﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﺨﻨﻲ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺗﻘﻮﺍ ﻟﻴﺎﻗﺖ ﻧﻴﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻣـﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫـﺪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﺯﻣﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﻣﺖ ﻧﻘﺸﻲ ﺍﻳﻔﺎ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﺪﺍﻟﺖ ﻭ ﻛﻴﺎﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺗﺪﺑﻴﺮ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻱ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋـﺪﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺎﻗـﺖ ﻛـﺎﺭﮔﺰﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻴـﺮ ﺑـﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺁﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﺮﻭﺍﻱ ﭘﻨﻬﺎ ﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴـﺄﻟﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺷـﻴﻌﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﻌﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕـﺎﻩ ﻛـﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﻦ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﮕﻮ ﺣﺎﻻ ﻛﻪ ﺻﺪﺩﺭﺻﺪﺵ ﻏﺎﻳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﻼً ﺁﻥ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﻣـﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺗـﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣـﻲ ﺩﻫـﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻭ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﺮﻭﺍﻳﻲ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮﺍﻥ ﻣـﻲ ﭘـﺬﻳﺮﻡ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻣﺖ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﻟﻴﺎﻗـﺖ‬
‫‪ 86‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻋﻼ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻄﺎﻳﻒ ﺍﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣـﺬﻫﺐ ﺷـﻴﻌﺔ ﺩﻭﺍﺯﺩﻩ ﺍﻣـﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣ ﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺪ ﺷﻴﻌﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﻧﻴﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴـﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺼﺮ ﻏﻴﺒﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻭ ﺿﺎﺑﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﻬﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭ ﭘﺮﻭﺭﺩﮔﺎﺭﺍ ! ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻤـﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻤـﺮﺍﻩ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻫﺒـﺮﺍﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻡﺩﺍﺭﺍﻥ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺸﻨﺎﺳﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺗﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﻳﻎ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﭘﺮﻭﺭﺩﮔﺎﺭﺍ! ﺑﺰﺭگﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻓﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺖ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴـﺎﺯ ﺑـﻪ ﺭﻫﺒﺮﺍﻧـﻲ ﭼﻨـﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﻳﺴـﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻱ ﺧﺪﺍﻱ ﺭﺣﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﺣﻴﻢ! ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺮﻡ ﺍﻣﻴﻨـﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﻌﻤـﺖ ﭼﻨـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺭﻫﺒﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺭﺯﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﺭﻱ؟ ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻟﻬﺎ! ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﻛﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻫﺒﺮ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻧـﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴـﺮﻭﺍﻥ ﻧﺎﺩﻳـﺪﺓ ﺍﻭ ﻫﺴـﺘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻧﺪﻳـﺪﻩ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﺭﻫﺒـﺮﻱ‬
‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻪﺍﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻟﻬﺎ! ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫـﺮ ﺩﻋـﺎﻳﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻫـﺖ ﺍﻋﺘـﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑﻫـﺎ ﻭ ﮔﻨـﺎﻩﻫـﺎ ﻭ ﻟﻐـﺰﺵﻫـﺎ ﺩﭼـﺎﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺗـﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺗﻮﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﻨـﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥﻛـﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴـﺘﻴﻢ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺗﻮ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧﺪﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻐﻔـﺮﺕ ﺧـﻮﺩﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺮﻩﻣﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺨﻨﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪ 1354‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺩﺑﻴﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑِﺴ‪‬ﻢِ ﺍﷲِ ﺍﻟﺮﱠﺣ‪‬ﻤﻦِ ﺍﻟﺮﱠﺣﻴﻢ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺤـﺚ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺑـﻮﻁ ﺑـﻪ ﻭﺣـﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴـﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻭﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﺜﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺣـﻲ ﭘﻴـﺪﺍ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺫﻫﻦ؛ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺑﺸـﻮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮﺍﻥ ﻫـﻢ ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ ﻛـﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷـﺖ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨﻨـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺶ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺻﺮﻑﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﭼـﻮﻥ ﻣﻬـﻢ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺚﻫﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺡ ﻣﻄﻠـﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻙ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎً ﺑﺤﺚﻫﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻭﺑﻪﺭﻭﻱ ﺷﻤﺎﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﺚﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧﺴﺘﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺒﺐ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺩﺍﻧﺶﺁﻣﻮﺯ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻤﻜﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻪ ﻫـﺮ ﺣـﺎﻝ ﺍﺣﺘﻴـﺎﺝ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻭ ﭼﻪﺑﺴـﺎ ﺩﻭﺳـﺘﺎﻥ ﻫﻤـﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺚﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺧﻮﺏ ﻭ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻨﺪ؛ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﻫـﺮ ﺣـﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﮔﺬﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩﺍﺵ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﮔـﺎﻫﻲﻫـﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎً ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻜﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﻲﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﻋﻨﺎﻳـﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻴﻦ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻭ ﺗﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻫﺴـﺘﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺳﺘﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺟـﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣـﻮﻥ ﻣـﻲﺩﻫﻨـﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳـﻚ‬
‫‪ 92‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﻫﻢ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﺎﺳـﻴﻢ‪،‬‬


‫ﻫﻤﻴﻦﻃﻮﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺟﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺑﻴـﺮﻭﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﮔﻴـﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻻﺍﻗـﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﻳـﺮﺓ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺳـﺘﺪﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﮔﻴﺎﻫﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺳﺘﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻤﺲﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻣﺸـﺨﺺﺗـﺮ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﮔﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻧﺶ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻧﺶ ﻫﻢ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻣـﻲﺩﻫـﺪ‪ .‬ﺑـﺎﺯ ﺣـﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﺴـﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺑـﺮگ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺭﺯﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺷﺐ ﻛـﺮﺑﻦ ﻭ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺑﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﻛﺴﻴﮋﻥ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺑـﺰﺭگ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺳﺘﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉﺗﺮ ﻭ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺧﻴﻠـﻲ ﻣﺘﻨـﻮﻉ ﻭ ﮔﻮﻧـﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺟـﻮﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﺍﺟﺰﺍ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﺎﻥﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻋﻀﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﻡﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺍﻓﺘﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺳﺘﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺳﺘﺪ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸـﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺶ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﻣـﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻋﻠـﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﻭ ﺁﮔـﺎﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻗﺪﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺳﺘﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺧﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ‬
‫ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺳﺘﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺧﺎﻟـﺖ ﻋﻠـﻢ ﻭ ﺁﮔـﺎﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﭼـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔـﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻧﻘـﺶ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺁﮔﺎﻫﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺑﻲﺍﺭﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﻨـﻮﺯ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻱ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻘﺸﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ؟ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺭﻭﺷـﻨﻲ ﺑـﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺶ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺭﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻜﺲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﺎً ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ ﻣﻲﻛﻨـﻴﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻔﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺮﻭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻤﺪ ﺣﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻔﺮﺡ ﺫﺍﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ‪93‬‬

‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﺭﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﺸﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ؟ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛـﻪ ﻧﻘـﺶ‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺳﺘﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻗﻄﻌﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺳﺘﺪ ﺍﺻﻼً ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﻏﺬﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺪﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﺎﻧـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻـﻼً‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻏﺬﺍ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺳـﺮ ﺳـﻔﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻪ ﺳﺮ ﺳﻔﺮﻩ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻻﺍﻗﻞ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻘﺎﺏ ﻳﺎ ﻳﺨﭽﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﻏﺬﺍ ﻣـﻲﺭﻭﻳـﺪ؟ ﺍﺻـﻼً ﺍﻣﻜـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ؟ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﻭ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲﺍﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻏﺬﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺠﺎﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻﻼً ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﻏﺬﺍ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴـﺪ‬
‫ﻏﺬﺍ ﻛﺠﺎﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﻏﺬﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺨﻮﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻏﺬﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤـﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻄـﻮﻑ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﻏـﺬﺍ ﻛﺠﺎﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ‪،‬‬
‫ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺳﺘﺪ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻴﺶ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺳﺘﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑـﺎ ﻣﻮﺟـﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣـﻮﻧﺶ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘـﺶ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻧﺎﭼﺎﺭﻳﻢ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺧﻮﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﭼﻪ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙﻫﺎﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﭼـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺠﺎﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ ﻣـﺎ ﺗـﺎ ﭼـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧـﺪ ﻧﻘـﺶ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻋﻠـﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﭼﻴﺴـﺖ؟ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺆﺍﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺻﻼً ﺳﺮﺍﻏﺶ ﻧﻤﻲﺭﻭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺍﻳﻦﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻼً ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺳﺮﺍﻏﺶ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺭﻓﺖ؛ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫـﻢ ﻛـﻪ ﺑﺤـﺚ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﭼﻴﺴـﺖ‪ ،‬ﮔﻤـﺎﻥ ﻣـﻲﻛـﻨﻢ ﻫﻤـﺔ ﻣـﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻠـﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺮﻓـﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎً ﺭﻭﺷﻨﻲ ﻣﻲﻓﻬﻤﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫‪ 94‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻣﺎ ﺟﺎﻱ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻭ ﭼﺮﺍ ﻭ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻧﻤﻲﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻋﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻭ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺖ ﻭ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻨﺎﺳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﻪﺍﻱ ﻣﺒﻬﻢ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ؟‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻏﺬﺍ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻣـﺎ ﻓـﺮﻕ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑــﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘــﻲ ﻓــﺮﻕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣــﺎ ﻫﻤــﺎﻥﻃــﻮﺭ ﻛــﻪ ﺍﺻــﻞ ﻋﻠــﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻨﺎﺳﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺶ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﺎﺳﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻣـﺎ ﻣـﻲﺩﺍﻧـﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﻭ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻣﺎ ﭼﻪ ﺑـﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﻣـﺎﻥ ﻭ ﭼـﻪ ﺑـﺮ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻤـﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺁﻧﭽـﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻧﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭ ﻳـﻚﺟـﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠـﻒ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﺟﻬـﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠـﻒ ﺗﻘﺴـﻴﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣـﺜﻼً‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﮔـﺎﻩ ﺑﺸـﻮﻧﺪ ﺑـﺮ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺸﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑ‪‬ﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻓـﺮﻕ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤـﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑ‪‬ﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻳـﻚ ﺳـﻄﺢ ﻧﻴﺴـﺘﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﻣﻮﺟـﻮﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻢ(‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎ ﺑـﺮ ﻛﺸـﻒ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﻭ ﻛﺴـﺐ ﻣﻌﺮﻓـﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑ‪‬ﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﻡﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺭﮔﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺸـﺎﺑﻬﻲ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴـﺐ ﺁﮔـﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑ‪‬ـﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻴﺸﺎﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼً ﻫﻢ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻳـﺪﻥ ﭼﺸـﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳـﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻴﻨـﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺼﺒﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﮔﺎﻭ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﺁﻫـﻮ؛ ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺁﻳـﺎ ﺣـﻮﺯﺓ ﺩﻳـﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻭ ﮔﺎﻭ ﻭ ﭘﺮﻭﺍﻧﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺭﻧﮓﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺸﺔ ﺭﻧﮕﺎﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻻﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﻤـﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑـﺎ ﺭﻧـﮓﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺁﻟﺒﺎﻟﻮﻳﻲ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻮﺭ ﻣـﻲﺑﻴﻨـﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺁﻫﻮ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺎﻭ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ‪95‬‬

‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺭﻧﮕﺎﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺎﻭ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺳـﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻭ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﺭﻧﮓﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤـﻪﭼﻴـﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺗﺐ ﺳﻴﺎﻫﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺗﺐ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻛﺴﺘﺮﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﭘ‪‬ﺮ ﺭﻧـﮓ ﻣـﻲﺑﻴﻨـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺍﻋﺼـﺎﺏ ﺑﻴﻨـﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳـﻢ‪ .‬ﻫـﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺮﻛـﺰ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻗﻠﻤﺮﻭ ﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺁﮔـﺎﻫﻲ ﻣـﺎ ﺑـﺎ ﺁﮔـﺎﻫﻲ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺑﺸﺮ ﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺪﻣﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛـﻴﺶ ﺑﻴـﺎﻭﺭﺩ؛ ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺸﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﻮﻱﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻛـﻪ ﺯﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺍﻭ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺸﻢ ﮔﺎﻭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﻨـﻮﻉﻫـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺸـﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑـﺎﺯ ﺑـﺎ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻦ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸـﺘﺮﻙ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧــﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﻀــﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧــﺎﺕ ﺣﺘــﻲ ﻛﻤﺘــﺮ ﺍﺳــﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣــﻮﺭﺩ ﺻــﺪﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﺴـﺖﻫـﺰﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻛـﺎﻧﺲ ﺻـﻮﺗﻲ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳـﮓ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻨﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻣﻲﺷـﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻦ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﻣﺘﺸـﺎﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﻡﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﭼﺸﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻋﺼﺒﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﻋﺼﺒﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﻗﻠﻤـﺮﻭ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﻭ ﺣـﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻮﺟـﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻇﺮﻳﻒﻛﺎﺭﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻳـﺎﺩ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻴـﺪﺍﻥ ﺑ‪‬ـﺮﺩ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻮﺟـﻮﺩ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙﻛﻨﻨـﺪﺓ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﻡﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﻲ ﻣﺘﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫* ﺁﻳﺎ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ؟‬


‫ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﻡﻫـﺎﻱ ﺣﺴـﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﻡﻫـﺎﻱ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛـﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﻼﻭﺍﺳﻄﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﻡﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺴﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣـﻊﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳـﻄﻪ‬
‫‪ 96‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﻡﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺻـﻄﻼﺡ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﺣﺴﻲ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲﺷـﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﻔـﻮﻅ ﻣﺎﻧـﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﭼـﻮﻥ ﻓﻜـﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻗـﺒﻼً ﺩﻳـﺪﻩﺍﻳـﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏﻫـﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺍﻥﺷﻨﺎﺳـﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﺣﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣـﻦ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺑﺤـﺚﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺟﻨﺒﻲ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﻡ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻭﻗـﺖ ﻛﻮﺗـﺎﻩ ﺑـﻪ ﺑﺤﺜﻤـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺳﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴـﻲﺍﻧـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﻡﻫـﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺭﮔﺎﻥ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨـﻮﻉﻫـﺎﻳﻲ ﻣـﻲﻳﺎﺑـﺪ‪ .‬ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜـﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺩﺭﻙ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺷـﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﺑـﻪ ﻭﺳـﻴﻠﺔ ﮔـﻮﺵ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﻛﻨـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺷﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﺑﻮﻳﻴﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺫﺍﺋﻘﻪ ﻭ ﭼﺸﻴﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺖ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺖ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺍﻋﺼـﺎﺏ ﺍﺣﺴـﺎﺱﻛﻨﻨـﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺮﺩﻱ ﻭ ﮔﺮﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﻧﺮﻣﻲ ﻭ ﺯﺑـﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺴـﺎﺱﻛﻨﻨـﺪﺓ ﺳـﺨﺘﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﺴﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﻙ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧـﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻭﻥﻧﮕﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻧﮕﺮﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺑﺒﻴﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﺷـﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺩ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺗﺸﻨﮕﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻨﮕﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻓﻼﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﺔ ﺑﺪﻧﺘﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻛـﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ؟ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻫﻴﭻﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻋﺼﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﻡﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺶﺗﺮ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴـﺐ ﺍﺻـﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺪﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﺪﺍﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓـﺖﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻘﻼﻧﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ‪97‬‬

‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺗﻌﻘّﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣـﺎ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻳـﻦﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺫﻫﻨﻤـﺎﻥ ﻣﻔﻬـﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎً ﺩﺭ ﺫﻫﻨﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺟﺎﻱ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺫﻫﻨﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻔﻬـﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻗﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻓﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻪ ﻫﻤـﻪ ﺍﻃـﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺫﻫـﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﻳـﻢ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎً ﻳﻚ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺴﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺟﻠﺐ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻲﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻫﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻣﺎ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧـﺪ ﻣﻔـﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﻛﻠـﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻓﺮﺳـﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺒﻴـﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻟﻄﻒ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻌﻤﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺪﻩ ﮔﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﻲﻛـﻨﻢ ﻛـﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻌـﺎً‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺜﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺚﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻟﻨﺸﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻄﻖ ﻭ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺪﺭ‬
‫ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﻼﻣﻲ ﻭ ﻓﻠﺴﻔﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺑـﻪ ﺛﻤـﺮ ﺑﺮﺳـﺎﻧﻴﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺕﻫﺎ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻲﺑﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺯﻩ ﮔﺮﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻧﻤﻲﮔﺸﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﻭ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﺓ ﻭﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢﺩﻫﻨﺪﺓ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺕ ﭘﻴـﺮﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪﺍﻱ ﻗﻄﻌﻲ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﻘـﺶ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﭼﻴﺴـﺖ؟ ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﻢ؛ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣـﻲﺯﻧـﻢ‪ .‬ﻣـﻲﮔـﻮﻳﻢ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﺸـﺮ ﻛـﻪ ﺑﺸـﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻭ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﻲﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ؛ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦﻛـﻪ ﺍﮔـﺮ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻳﻜﺎﻳﻚ ﺍﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣـﺎ ﺑﻴـﺎﻭﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺎﺯ ﺍﺟـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫‪ 98‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺩﻧﻴﺎ ﻋﻘﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﻗـﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴـﺎﺭ ﻣـﺎ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﺩﻩ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺍﺟـﺮﺍﻱ ﻗـﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﭼـﻪﻗـﺪﺭ ﻋﻘـﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻜﺮ ﻭ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ؟ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻧﻴـﺎ‪ .‬ﭼـﻮﻥ ﻧـﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻧـﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺍﻭ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﻭ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﻧـﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﻫﺴـﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺑﺸﺮ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺑﺸﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺸﻒ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺸﻨﺎﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺑﻪﺧﻮﺩ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷـﻦ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻨﻲ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺸﺮ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻭﺣﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧـﺪ‪:‬‬
‫»ﻭ‪ ‬ﻣﺎ ﻳ‪‬ﻨْﻄ‪‬ﻖُ ﻋ‪‬ﻦِ ﺍﻟْﻬ‪‬ﻮﻱ‪ .‬ﺍ‪‬ﻥْ ﻫ‪‬ﻮ‪ ‬ﺍ‪‬ﻟّﺎ ﻭ‪‬ﺣ‪‬ﻲ‪ ‬ﻳ‪‬ﻮﺣﻲ«‪ 1.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠـﺎ ﺑـﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺸﺮ ﻣﻲﺍﻓﻜﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻔـﻮﺱ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻠﻤـﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﮔﺬﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺘﺠﻠﻲ ﺷـﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻠﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻛﺠﺎﺳﺖ؟ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺣﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧﺪﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺸﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺁﻣﺪ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﻬـﻲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺸﺮ ﺍﺑﻼﻍ ﻛﺮﺩ؛ ﻣﺎﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥﻫﺎﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻨﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻳـﻚ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﭽـﻪ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣـﺮﺩﻡ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﻲ ﻭ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺮﺳـﺘﺎﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺪ ﭼﻪ؟ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺤﺼﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺛﺒﺖ‬
‫ﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻟﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴـﺎﺭ ﻋـﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﻣﻌـﺪﻭﺩ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﺠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ‪ 2‬ﻭ ‪» :3‬ﻭ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺳﺨﻦ ﻧﻤﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ‪ .‬ﺳـﺨﻦ ﺍﻭ ﻫـﻴﭻ ﻏﻴـﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻲ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ«‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ‪99‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴـﺎﺭ ﻋﻤـﻮﻡ ﻧﻤـﻲﮔﺬﺍﺭﻧـﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﻜـﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬


‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻣﻲﮔﺬﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻳـﻚ ﺳﻠﺴـﻠﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴـﺮﺍﺕ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺒــﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻔــﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﮔــﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻔــﺲ ﺍﻟﻬــﻲ ﻛــﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒــﺮ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﺳــﺎﻟﻢ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻒ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻫﻤـﻪ ﻫﺴـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﺩﺭﺑﺴﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺵ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﻨـﺪﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺷﻴﺸﻪﻫـﺎﻱ ﺷﻜﺴـﺘﻪﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺟﺪﻳـﺪﻱ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﭼﻪ ﺯﻣـﺎﻧﻲ ﺁﻣـﺪﻥ ﻧـﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﻭ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺟﺪﻳـﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ؟ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻭ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻠـﻴﻢ ﺍﻭ ﻭ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﺍﻭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺴـﻠﻤﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜـﻪ ﻣﺜـﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﻘﻖ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺻﻼً ﺩﻳﻦ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺣﺘـﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﻫـﻢ ﻣﻌﺘﻘـﺪ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﺋﺒﺔ ﺩﺧﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻌﺼﺒﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﻭﻥ‬
‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪600‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺩﻩ ﻗـﺮﻥ ﭘـﻴﺶ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﭽـﻪ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ )ﻉ(‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺡ )ﻉ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﻲ )ﻉ(‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﻭﻭﺩ )ﻉ(‪ ،‬ﻋﻴﺴﻲ )ﻉ(‪ ،‬ﺗـﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳـﺖﻧﺨـﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻋﻤﻮﻡ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ؟ ﮔﻔﺘﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﻜﻨﻴـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻳﺴـﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻜﻠّﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﺬﺍﻫﺐ ﻣﺨﺘﻠـﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﺒﻴﻨـﻴﻢ ﭼـﻪ ﺟـﻮﺍﺏ ﻣـﻲﺩﻫـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﻒ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺑـﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺮﺑـﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳـﺖ ﺍﺳـﺖ!‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼً ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻬـﺪ‪‬ﻳ ﻦ ﺑـﻪ ﺯﺑـﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳـﻲ ﻳـﺎ ﻋﺮﺑـﻲ ﺳـﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺷﺤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻡ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪ؛ ﭼـﻮﻥ ﻣـﺎ ﻣـﻲﺧـﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴـﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻬﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 100‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻋﺮﺑـﻲ ﻫـﻢ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﻋﻬﺪﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻬﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻠـﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺧـﺎﻧﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺻﻼً ﺩﺭ ﺧﻂ ﺩﻳﻦ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺘـﻲ ﺑﻌﻀـﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺧﺎﻥ ﻳﻬﻮﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻣﺴﻴﺤﻲ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗـﻮﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﻧﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻫﻤﺔ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺗﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪600‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻳـﻚ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻘﻖ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻤـﻮﻡ ﻧﺒـﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻳـﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻼً ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷـﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪» :‬ﻳ‪‬ﻜْﺘُﻤ‪‬ﻮﻥَ ﻣﺎ ﺍَﻧْﺰَﻝَ ﺍﷲ«‪ 1،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻣﻲﻧﻬﺎﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﻤﻲﻧﻬﺎﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻧـﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦﻫـﺎﻱ ﻗﺒﻠـﻲ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳـﺎﻥ ﻗـﺮﻥ ﺷﺸـﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻼﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺎﻟﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺖﻧﺨـﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴـﺎﺭ ﺟﺴـﺖﻭﺟـﻮﮔﺮﺍﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﻘﻖ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫـﻴﭻ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺤﺚﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻟﻲ ﻛﻼﻣﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﻘـﻂ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌـﺔ ﺗـﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﻭﺷـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﻥ ﺷﺸﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﭼﻨـﻴﻦ ﻧـﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺸﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧـﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻮﺩ؟ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺗﺎﺯﻩﺍﻱ ﻣﻲﺁﻣﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧـﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺗـﺎﺯﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ )ﺹ( ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺁﻣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤـﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺁﻳـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬

‫* ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﻣﺴﻴﺢ ﻫﻢ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻟﺰﻭﻣﻲ ﻧﺒـﻮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ؟‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻘﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :174‬ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺁﻳﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ«‪.‬‬


‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ‪101‬‬

‫ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﺆﺍﻻﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻲﺩﻫـﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻌـﻼً ﺑﺤـﺚ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪600‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺒﻠـﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﺳـﺎﻟﻢ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﻡ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺎ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻘﻘﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﻨـﻲ‪ .‬ﺧـﻮﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺁﻣﺪ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺳﺎﻝﻫﺎﻱ ‪610‬‬
‫ﺗﺎ ‪632‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻳﻦ ‪ 22‬ﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺧُﺮﺩﻩﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ‪ 23‬ﺳﺎﻝ ــ ﭼﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﻝﻫﺎ ﺷﻤﺴﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺳﺎﻝﻫﺎ ﻗﻤﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒـﺎً‬
‫‪ 23‬ﺳﺎﻝ ــ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺸﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓـﺖ ﺍﻣـﺮﻭﺯ ﺑـﻪ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺖﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ؟ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺴـﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﺟـﻮﺍﺏ ﺑﺪﻫﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ؟ ﺧﻮﺷﺒﺨﺘﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦِ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﺣـﺪﻭﺩ ﭼﻨـﺪ ﻗـﺮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﻘﻘﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻥﻗﺪﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﻣـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻧﻨﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﻣﺴـﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﭼﻨـﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺮ ﺑـﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺘﺎﺏﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺎﻟﺒﻲ ﻧـﻮﺷﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺯﺭﻛﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺘـﺎﺑﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻬـﺎﺭ ﺟﻠـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺑﺴـﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺎﻟـﺐ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻮﻃﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﻘﺎﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻫـﺎﻥ ﻧﻮﺷـﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺴـﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺟﺎﻟﺒﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤـﺖ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ ﺗـﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﻴﺢ ﻛﺘﺎﺏﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺎﻟﺒﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ ﺑﺴﻴـﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﺑـﺰﺭگ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻗﺮﺁﻥِ ﻧﻮﻟﺪﻛﻪ‪ 1،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻧﺸﻤﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﺁﻟﻤﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺗﻘـﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﺣـﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ 60‬ﺳﺎﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑـﺎﻥ ﺍﺭﻭﭘـﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﻣﺘـﺮﺟﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻌـﺮﻭﻑ ﻛـﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻴــﺶ ﻓﺸـﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗـﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪1. Theodor Nöldeke‬‬


‫‪ 102‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻭﻟﻲ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎﻳﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﻣـﻦ ﻣـﻲﺷﻨﺎﺳـﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤـﻪﺍﻱ‬


‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺁﻟﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺩ ﭘ‪‬ﺮ ﺗﺒﺤﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺷﺘﺔ ﺍﺳﻼﻡﺷﻨﺎﺳـﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﻧـﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺕ‪ 1.‬ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺁﻟﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﻣـﻦ ﻣـﻲﺷﻨﺎﺳـﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﻳﺪﻡ ﻓﺎﻳـﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﻧـﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻬﺘـﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻤﻴﻦﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻼﺻﻪﺍﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺪﻣﺘﺘﺎﻥ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻮﺏ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪) ،‬ﺷـﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺳﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ( ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﻣـﻪ ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﻤﻌﻲ ‪ -‬ﺻﺮﻑ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍ‪‬ﻋﺮﺍﺏﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺯﺑﺮﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺋـﺖﻫـﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠـﻒ ﺁﻣـﺪﻩ – ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖﺑﻨﺪﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﻣـﺮﻭﺯ ﺑـﻪ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺼﺮ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑـﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳـﺘﺮﺱ ﻫﻤـﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪ ،1960‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪ 15‬ﺳﺎﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷـﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﻤـﻮﻣﻲ ﺗﻤـﺪﻥ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻫﻨـﮓ‬
‫ﺑﺸﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺗـﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺟﺎﻣﻌـﺔ ﺑﺸـﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﻇﻬـﻮﺭ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻄﻲ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻤـﺔ ﻧـﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦﻫـﺎﻱ ﻗﺒﻠـﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳـﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺩﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺎﺗﺶ ﺟﺎﻣﻌـﺔ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻣﻨـﺪﻱ ﺑـﺮ ﺍﺳـﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﺩ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺒﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻣﺬﻫﺒﻲ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻣﺬﻫﺒﻲ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺣﻠـﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﻫﺠـﻮﻡ ﻭ ﺣﻤﻠـﺔ ﺩﺷـﻤﻨﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﺘﻼﺷﻲ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩژ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻭ ﺩژ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻣﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻘﻼﺏ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻣﺖ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﻫﺴـﺘﺔ‬

‫‪1. Rudi Part‬‬


‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ‪103‬‬

‫ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﭘﺮﺍﻛﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻣﺎﺭ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ .2 .‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻫﻨﮓ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻃـﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺻـﻨﻌﺖ ﭼـﺎپ ﻫـﻢ ﻧﺒـﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴـﺦ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺗﺎﺳﺮ ﺑـﻼﺩ ﺍﺳـﻼﻣﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺸـﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪ . 3 .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺿـﻊ ﺍﺩﺍﻣـﻪ ﭘﻴـﺪﺍ ﻛـﺮﺩ ﺗـﺎ ﭘﻴـﺪﺍﻳﺶ ﺻـﻨﻌﺖ ﭼـﺎپ ﻛـﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻌـ ًﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺘﺎﺧﻴﺰﻱ ﻧﻮ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻫﻨﮓ ﺑﺸﺮﻱ ﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﺪﺍﻳﺶ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﭼﺎپ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﮔﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻓﺮﺿـﻲ ﻭ ﺧﻴـﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻜﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺸﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻳﻜﻨﻮﺍﺧﺖ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺗﺎﺳﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻧﻤﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧـﺰﻭﻝ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﺗـﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺪﺩ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺼﺪ ﻣﺎ ﭘﻴﺶﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫـﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ »ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥَ ﻣ‪‬ﺤ‪‬ﻤ‪‬ﺪ‪ ‬ﺍَﺑﺂ ﺍَﺣ‪‬ﺪ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ﻦْ ﺭِﺟﺎﻟ‪‬ﻜُﻢ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻟﻜ‪‬ﻦْ‬
‫ﺭ‪‬ﺳﻮﻝَ ﺍﷲَ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻨﱠﺒِﻴ‪‬ﻴﻦَ ﻭ‪ ‬ﻛﺎﻥَ ﺍﷲُ ﺑِﻜُﻞﱢ ﺷَﻲ‪‬ء‪ ‬ﻋ‪‬ﻠﻴﻤﺎً«؟ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﻧﻴﺎﻣـﺪ ﺗـﺎ ﭘـﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺪﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔـﺮ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻭ ﺁﻣـﺪ ﭘـﺪﺭ ﺑﺸـﺮﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻭ ﺁﻣﺪ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﺓ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ــ ﺑﻨـﺪﻩ ﻫـﻢ ﻧﻤـﻲﮔـﻮﻳﻢ ﺧـﺎﺗ‪‬ﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻢ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ــ ﺁﻣﺪ ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻭ ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣ‪‬ﻬﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻲﺭﺳﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﺧﺮﺵ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣ‪‬ﻬﺮ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺻـﻼً‬
‫ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎً ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﻋﻤﺪﻩﺍﺵ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻻﻙ ﻭ ﻣ‪‬ﻬـﺮ ﻓﻌﻠـﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺑﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻛـﻪ ﻟﻮﻟـﻪ ﻣـﻲﻛﺮﺩﻧـﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔ‪‬ـﻞ ﭼﺴـﺒﻨﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺯﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣ‪‬ﻬﺮ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﺎﺗَﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺵ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻫﻴﭻﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺤﺚﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩﻳـﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸـﺪﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺴﺖﻭﺟﻮﮔﺮﻱ ﻣـﺬﻫﺒﻲ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺘﻘـﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ 104‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺳﺎﺩﻩﺗﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦﺗﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﺤﻜﻢﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺤﺜﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ‬


‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺩﻳﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﺎﺭﺵ ﭘﻨﺠـﺎﻩ ﺗـﺎ ﺩﻟﻴـﻞ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻴﻤﻪﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﭽﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً ﻫﻢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺛﺒـﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴـﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺶ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﺗﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﻣـﻲﺑﻴـﻨﻢ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺁﻥ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷــﺖ ﻣــﻲﺷــﻮﺩ ﻛــﻪ ﻧﻘــﺶ ﭘﻴــﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺟــﺔ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻳــﻦ ﺍﺳــﺖ ﻛــﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻓﺮﺍ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺸﺮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﭼﺸـﻤﺔ ﻭﺣـﻲ ﺑـﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺸـﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﺎﺑﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺭ ﭼﻪ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻕ ﻧﻤـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺁﻣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﮔﻔﺘﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺤـﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻧـﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﻭ ﻧـﻮﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺿـﺮﻭﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺟﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥﻫـﺎ ﻫﻤـﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻫﺴـﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﺴـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺍﮔـﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺑﻪﺧـﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺣـﺎﻻ ﻧـﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺁﻣـﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻲ )ﻉ( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻳﺪﻱ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧـﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻨﺶ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺑﻌـﺪﻱ ﭼـﺮﺍ؟ ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗـﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﻢ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺤﺜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺴﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺳﺎﻟﻢ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺗﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺟﺪﻳـﺪ ﭘﻴـﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺳﺎﻟﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴـﺖ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻣـﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻓﻜﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴـﺪ ﺁﻳـﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣـﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻛﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻫﺴﺖ؟ ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﺿـﺮﻭﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺤـﺚ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ‪105‬‬

‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻴﻢ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻠﻲ ﻫﻢ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺁﻣـﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺑـﻪﺧـﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻳـﻚ ﺯﻣـﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﺶ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺁﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺿـﻤﻨﺎً ﻧـﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﺸﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؛ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻏﺎﻓـﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺑـﻪﺧـﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺷـﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻴﻢ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ :‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻴﻢ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳـﺖ؟ ﺩﻗـﺖ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺳﺆﺍﻝ‪ .‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻴﻢ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧَﺴـﺦ‪ ،‬ﻧَﺴـﺦ ﻗـﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺟﺎﻱﮔﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻬـﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻮﺟـﺐ ﺁﻣـﺪﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﻪ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺬﻫﺐ ﺗﺸﻴ‪‬ﻊ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﻪ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣـﻲﺩﻫـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﺷﻴﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﺋﻤـﺔ ﻫـﺪﻱ‬
‫)ﺱ( ﻣﻔﺴﺮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺒﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺍﻧـﺪ؛ ﺣﺘـﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﺷـﻜﻞ ﻧَﺴـﺦ‪» ،‬ﻧَﺴ‪‬ـﺦُ ﺍﻟْﻘُـﺮْﺁﻥِ‬
‫ﺑِﺎﻟْﺤ‪‬ﺪﻳﺚ ﻭ‪ ‬ﻧﺴ‪‬ﺦُ ﺍﻟْﺤ‪‬ﺪﻳﺚ‪ ‬ﺑِﺎﻟْﺤ‪‬ﺪﻳﺚ«‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻧَﺴـﺦ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌـﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻔﺴﺮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺒﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺣﺪﻳﺚ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﻭ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺗـﺎﺯﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺗﺎﺯﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﭼﺸﻤﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ؛‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺩﻳﻦ ﻭ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺒﻴ‪‬ﻦ ﻭ ﻣﻔﺴ‪‬ﺮ ﺩﻳﻦ ﻭ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻻﺑﺪ ﺍﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠـﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﭘـﺲ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﺣﻜـﺎﻡ‬
‫ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺪﮔﺎﻩ ﺷﻴﻌﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻛﻤﻠﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻪ ﭼﻴـﺰ ﻣـﻲﺩﺍﻧـﺪ؟ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻡِ ﻣﺘﻤ‪‬ﻢ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻘﺎﻳـﺪ ﺷـﻴﻌﻪ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺟﻮﺍﺑﺶ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﺳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﭼﻮﺏ ﺗﺸﻴﻊ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺍﺳـﺘﻢ ﺧـﻮﺍﻫﺶ ﻛـﻨﻢ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫‪ 106‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﮔﺎﻩ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳـﺎ ﻣﻮﺟـﺐ ﺁﻣـﺪﻥ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺁﻣـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺁﻣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺶ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﭼـﻮﻥ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺣﺠﺖ ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺍﻣـﺎﻡ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺳﺮ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﺓ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺶ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺟـﺐ‬
‫ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺳﺆﺍﻝﻫﺎﻳﺸـﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﻣﻮﺳﻲ )ﻉ( ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﻲﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺮﻡ ﻣﻲﺁﻣﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ؟ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺑﻲﺟﺎﺳﺖ؛ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﺪﻩ ﻣـﻲﮔـﻮﻳﻢ ﺁﻗـﺎ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻣﻲﺁﻣﺪ؟ ﻣﺴﻠّﻢ‪ .‬ﭼﺮﺍ؟ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ؛ ﺁﻥ ﻋـﺎﻟﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺐ ﻣﺴﻠّﻢ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﺴـﻠّﻢ ﺑـﻮﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻧـﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﻣﻮﺳـﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻲﺷـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻋـﻴﻦ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ ﻣﺴـﺄﻟﺔ ﺟﺒـﺮ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴـﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻣﻲﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺁﻥ »ﻋﺎﻟ‪‬ﻢ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺴ‪‬ﺮﱢ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﺨَﻔﻴ‪‬ﺎﺕ«‪ 1‬ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻓﺮﺳﺘﺪ ﻭ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺑﺸﺮﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﺳـﺎﻟﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳـﺘﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻧﻤﻲﮔﺬﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﻳﻦﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻫﻢ؛ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﭼﻴﻨﺶ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﻗﻀﺎ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﻛﺴﻲ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﻫﻢ ﭼـﻪ ﻛﺴـﻲ ﻣـﻲﺁﻳـﺪ؟‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒــﺮ ﺧــﺎﺗﻢ‪ .‬ﻧــﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺳــﺎﻟﻢ ﺑﺎﻳــﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴــﺎﺭ ﺑﻤﺎﻧــﺪ‪ .‬ﻧــﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺳــﺎﻟﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺖﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻴﭻ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺻـﻼً ﺷـﻤﺎ ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﻣﺠﻠﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﻮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺝ‪ :87‬ﺹ‪.308‬‬


‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ‪107‬‬

‫ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻋﻴﺴﻲ )ﻉ( ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻨﻮﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻴﺴﻲ )ﻉ( ﻣﻲﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻫﺎﻥ ﺍﻱ ﻣ‪‬ﻼﻱ ﻳﻬـﻮﺩﻱ! ﺗﻌـﺎﻟﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺎﻟﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻧﮕﺬﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﺔ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﭼﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﭼﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺘﺎﺏﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳـﺘﺮﺱ ﺧـﺎﺭﺝ ﺷـﺪﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺩﺳـﺖ ﻧﻤـﻲﺧـﻮﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﻮﺩ؟‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻣﺴـﺄﻟﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳـﺪﮔﺎﻩ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺁﻳﻴﻦ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻫﻢ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻣـﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻓﺮﺍ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺸﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺗﻜـﺮﺍﺭ ﻣـﻲﻛـﻨﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺗﺎﺯﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺮﻱ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻤـﺎﻝ ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫* ﻧَﺴﺦ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪﻳﺚ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ؟‬


‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ! ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻧَﺴﺦ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷـﻦ ﻛﻨـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﭼﻪ ﻓﺮﻗﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ؟ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﭼﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﻌﻨﻴﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺣﺖ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺣﺖ ﺩﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﻧﺴﺨﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺣﺖ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﻢ ﻭ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻓﻬﻤﻴـﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺣﻜﻢ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥﮔﺬﺍﺭ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﻳﻚ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻣﻲﻓﻬﻤﺪ ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻏﺎﻓﻞ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﻋﻠﻤﺶ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 108‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻴﭻﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ؛ ﻧﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻲ )ﻉ( ﻫﻢ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻧـﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻓﺮﺳـﺘﻨﺪﺓ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻗـﺎﻧﻮ ْﻥ ﺧﺪﺍﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗـﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﻗﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﻦ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﻗـﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻓﺮﺳﺘﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﻲﺷـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﺷـﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻴﻄـﻲ ﻗـﺎﻧﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻋﺒـﺎﺭﺕ ﺑـﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻓـﻼﻥ ﻣﻄﻠـﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﭘﺲ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﻗـﻊ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﺻﻼً ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻔﻆ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﻲﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻃﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴـﺄﻟﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣـﻲﺩﺍﻧـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻪ ﻣـﺎ ﺧﺒـﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻗـﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺼﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻮﺽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑـﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺍﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﻓﺮﻗﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﮕـﺮ ﺁﻧﺠـﺎ‬
‫ﭼﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ؟ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨـﺪ؟‬
‫ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﺎً ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣـﺪﻭﺩ ﺩﻭﺍﺯﺩﻩ ﻗـﺮﻥ ﭘـﻴﺶ ﻣﻄـﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ »ﻧَﺴ‪‬ﺦُ ﺍﻟْﻘُﺮْﺁﻥِ ﺑِﺎﻟْﺤ‪‬ﺪﻳﺚ« ﺍﺻﻼً ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻋﺪﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺤﺎﺵ ﻭ ﻭﺣﺸﺖ ــ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺸﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ ــ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻔﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﻛـﻪ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪» :‬ﻣﺎ ﻧَﻨْﺴ‪‬ـﺦْ ﻣ‪‬ـﻦْ ﺁﻳ‪‬ـﺔٍ ﺍَﻭ‪‬‬
‫ﻧُﻨْﺴ‪‬ﻬﺎ ﻧَﺎﺕ‪ ‬ﺑِﺨَﻴ‪‬ﺮٍ ﻣ‪‬ﻨْﻬﺎ ﺍَﻭ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ﺜْﻠ‪‬ﻬﺎ«‪ 1.‬ﭘﺲ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺣـﺎﻻ ﻛـﻪ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻘﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :106‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺣﻜﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻃﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ‬
‫)ﻭ ﻣﺘﺮﻭﻙ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﻢ( ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﻢ«‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ‪109‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺪ ــ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ــ ﭘﺲ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺣﺪﻳﺚ‬


‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻜﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ ﺗﻔﺴـﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻭﺣﺸﺖ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺳﻮﻝﺍﷲ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻧـﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺘﺎﺏﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ .‬ﻣـﺎﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦِ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﻣـﻮﺟﺒﻲ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻣـﺪﻥ ﻧـﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﺒﻴ‪‬ﻦ ﻭ ﻣﻔﺴ‪‬ﺮ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺪ ﺷﻴﻌﻪ ﺣﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺷـﺄﻥ‬
‫ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧﺪ؟ ﺷﺄﻥ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺼﻠﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﺎً ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺣﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﻨﻲﺍﺳﺮﺍﻳﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺯﻳـﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻭﺻﻴﺎء ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺩﻧـﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺘﻬـﻲ ﺑـﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻧﺒﻲ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻫـﻢ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻠﻤـﻪ ﺑﺤﺜـﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻭﺻﻲ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺒﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺧﺒﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪» :‬ﻋ‪‬ﻠَﻤﺎء‪ ‬ﺍُﻣ‪‬ﺘـﻲ‬
‫ﻛَﺄﻧْﺒﻴﺎء‪ ‬ﺑ‪‬ﻨﻲﺍ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ﺮﺍﻳﻴﻞ«‪ 1.‬ﭼﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﺼـﻮﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﭼﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﻳﻜـﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺟـﺎﺯﻩ ﺑﺪﻫﻴـﺪ ﻳـﻚ ﻭﻗـﺖ ﺑﺤـﺚ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻢ ﺟﻤﻊﺑﻨـﺪﻳﺶ ﻛـﻨﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻤﻊﺑﻨـﺪﻱ ﻣـﻲﻛـﻨﻢ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﭘﺮﺳـﺶ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺳـﺦ ﻭ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﻳﻚ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲﺍﺵ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻠﺴﻪ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻊﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﻣﺠﻠﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﻮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺝ‪ :2‬ﺹ‪.22‬‬


‫‪ 110‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺟﺴﺖﻭﺟﻮﮔﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺮﺍﻁ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫـﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﻤـﺎً ﻭﺭﺩ‬


‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﺶ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪» :‬ﺍ‪‬ﻫ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﻧَﺎ ﺍﻟﺼ‪‬ﺮﺍﻁَ ﺍﻟْﻤ‪‬ﺴ‪‬ﺘَﻘﻴﻢ«‪ 1.‬ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻋﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻫﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﻭ ﻛﺸﻒ ﻭ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧـﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎً ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻴﻞ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻴﭻﻭﻗﺖ ﻫﻢ ﺩﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻔﺘﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻋـﻼﻭﻩ ﺑـﺮ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﭼـﺮﺍﻍ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮ ﻋﻘﻞ ﻭ ﺣﺲ ﻭ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻣﻨﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺧـﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺳﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﺑﺸﻲ ﺍﻓﻜﻨـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑـﻲﺍﻋﺘﻨـﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻣﺎﻧﺪ؟ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮﮔﺰ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﻟﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑـﻲﺍﻋﺘﻨـﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﺩ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻨﻲ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﺍﻏﺶ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺣـﻲ ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺷـﻨﺎﺧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻌـﺎﻟﻴﻢ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣـﺎﺩﺍﻡ ﻛـﻪ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ ﻳـﻚ ﻧﺒـﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺑﺸﺮ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺟﺒﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻧﻤﻲﺧﻮﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺧـﺎﺭﺝ ﺷـﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻨﻬـﺎﻥ ﺷـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻼﻳﻲ ﺳﺮﺵ ﺁﻣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻨـﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗـﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺁﻣـﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﺎﺳﻴﻢ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﺸـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﻥ ﺷﺶ ﻣﻴﻼﺩﻱ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦﻫـﺎﻳﻲ ﺁﻣـﺪﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻏﻮﻏﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ ﺳﺎﻟﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺖﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﭙﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦﻫﺎ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻫﻴﭻﻛﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺖﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻟﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻲﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴـﺎﺭ ﺑﺸـﺮﻳﺖ ﻫﻤﭽﻨـﺎﻥ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﻤﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :6‬ﺗﻮ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻓﺮﻣﺎ«‪.‬‬


‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ‪111‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺑﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻴﺸـﺘﺮ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ؛ ﺁﻥ ﻫـﻢ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﻭﺩﺍﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﻭﺳﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﻪﺍﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺩﻳﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭻﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ ﺩﺳﺖﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻧـﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ـــ ﺑـﻪ ﺷـﻬﺎﺩﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺧـﺎﻥ ﺑـﻲﺷـﻤﺎﺭ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺴـﻠﻤﺎﻥ ـــ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋـﻪﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞﺩﻫﻨﺪﺓ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﭘ‪‬ﺮﭘ‪‬ﺮﺗﻮ ﺁﻓﺮﻳﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﺧﻼﻕ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﻡ )ﺹ( ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺑﺸﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻫﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ ﻓﻬﻢ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺳﺮ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺍﺑﻬـﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤـﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞِ ﻓﻜﺮﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺑﻪﺧـﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻧﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺳﻨﺖ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻋﺘﺮﺕ ﻭ ﺳﻨﺖ ﻫـﻢ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﭼﻴﺰ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺻﻼً ﭼﻮﻥ ﻋﺘﺮﺕ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺟﺰ ﺣﺎﻣـﻞ ﻭ ﻣﺒـﻴ‪‬ﻦ ﺳـﻨﺖ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻋﺘﺮﺕ ﻭ ﺳﻨﺖ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺗﺎﺯﻩ ﺑـﻪ ﻫـﺮ ﺣـﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩﺍﻱ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺑﻜﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤـﺔ ﻭﺣـﻲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻟﻐـﺖ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺏ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺷﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺗﻨﺪﻱ ﻭ ﻛﻨﺪﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪» .‬ﺍَﻣ‪‬ﺮٌ ﻭ‪‬ﺣﻲ« ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪» .‬ﻣﻮﺕ‪ ‬ﻭ‪‬ﺣﻲ« ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﻭﺣـﻲ ﻳﻜـﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺷﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﻣﻌﻨـﻲ ﺍﺷـﺎﺭﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔـﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺭﻣﺰﻱ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎ ﺑﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺒﺶ ﺩﻭﮔﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ﻏﻴﺐ ﺭﻣﺰﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷـﺎﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻛـﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻛﻠﻤـﻪ ﺷـﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺼﻠﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗـﺎً ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨـﺔ ﺍﺷـﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻭﺣـﻲ ﻭ ﺭﻳﺸـﺔ ﺁﻥ ﻛـﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ 112‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻣﻔﺼﻠﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﺍﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻥﺷﺎءﺍﷲ ﺍﻣﻴﺪﻭﺍﺭﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬


‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻮﻡ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺖ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺭﻳﺸﻪﮔﻴﺮﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺟﻤﺎﻻً ﺑﻪ ﭼﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺁﻗﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺑـﺪﻫﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻟﻐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨـﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﻧـﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﺎﺹ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺳﺆﺍﻻﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﺪﺍ ﺟـﺎ ﻧـﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ؛ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﻩﮔﺎﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻭ ﺳﺮﭼﺸﻤﻪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﻫﺴـﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺳﺮﭼﺸـﻤﻪﻫـﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﻮﻧـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ؛‬
‫ﻭﻟﻮ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺁﺏ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﻫﻢ ﻛـﻪ ﺑﺮﻣـﻲﮔـﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺳﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺳـﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺴـﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻧـﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷـﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺰﺭگﺗـﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺳﺮﭼﺸﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺟﺎﻫـﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬـﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺠـﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎ؟ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺷﻚ ﻣﻨﺒﻊﻫـﺎﻱ ﻓـﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻬـﻲ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻫـﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺳـﻤﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﺧـﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺳـﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻭﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﻭﺣﻲ ﻛﺠـﺎ ﻫﺴـﺘﻨﺪ؟ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ؟ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ؟ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﻲ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﺎً ﻫﻴﭻ ﺍﺻﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻡ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺰﻭﻝ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻱ ــ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﻧﺰﻭﻝ ﻋﻴﻨﻲ ــ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﺩﻳﺪﮔﺎﻫﻲ ــ ﻧﻪ ﻓﻠﺴﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﻪ ﻋﻘﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻲ ـــ ﺍﺻـﻼً ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﻌﺎﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺑـﺮ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻧــﺎﺯﻝ ﻣــﻲﺷــﻮﺩ ﻛــﻪ ﻣﻘــﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻘــﺎﻣﺶ ﺑــﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﻛﺠﺎﺳــﺖ؟ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺯﻣــﻴﻦ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ‪113‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﻳﺪﺵ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻤﺶ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺣﺶ ﻫﺮ ﺟﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﺑـﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ‬


‫ﻛﺠﺎﺳﺖ؟ ﺟﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﺠﺎﺳﺖ؟ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻣﻲﺁﻳـﺪ؟‬
‫ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﺩﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﻴﻨﻢ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻼﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ‪» .‬ﺣ‪‬ﺒ‪‬ﻞُ ﺍﻟْﻤ‪‬ﻨْﺰﻭﻝ ﻣ‪‬ﻦَ ﺍﻟﺴ‪‬ـﻤﺎء‪ ‬ﺍ‪‬ﻟَـﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟْﺎَﺭ‪‬ﺽ«‪ .‬ﻧﺰﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺍَﻧْﺰَﻟْﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍَﻧْﺰَﻝَ‪» ،‬ﺍَﻧْﺰَﻝَ ﺍﻟﺘﱠﻮﺭﺍﺓَ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﺎ‪‬ﻧْﺠﻴﻞ«‪ 1.‬ﻓﻬﻢ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺍﻳﻨﻬـﺎ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻘﻄﻌﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺳـﺎﻳﺮ ﻛﻠﻤـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺭﻣـﺰﻱ ﺳـﺮّﻱ ﺑـﺎﻃﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ؟‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﻔﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻳـﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳـﻖ ﻣﺤﺎﺳـﺒﺎﺕ ﻛـﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪ؟ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﺸﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻟﻲ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﻴﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﻔﺴﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﺘﺐ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭼـﻪ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍﺭﺯﺵ ﻭ ﺍﺻـﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﺪﻣﺘﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﻧﻴﺴـﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻟـﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺘﺐ ﺗﻔﺴـﻴﺮ ﻳـﺎ ﺣﺘـﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﺎﻣـﻪ ﺩﻧﺒـﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻘﻄﻌـﻪ ﻳـﻚ ﻣﻌﻨـﻲ ﺭﻭﺷـﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣـﺎ ﻳـﻚ ﻣﻌﻨـﻲ ﺭﻭﺷـﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻭ ﻛﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎﻳﻲ؟ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎﻱ ﺑﺸﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺑﺴـﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬـﻢ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻛﻼﻡ ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻛﻼﻣﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎﻱ ﺑﺸﺮ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺸـﺮ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﮕﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺸـﺮ ﻛﻼﻣـﻲ ﻓﺮﺳـﺘﺎﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﻣﺒـﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪،‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺁﻝ ﻋﻤﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪)» :3‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ( ﺗﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺠﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩ«‪.‬‬


‫‪ 114‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻭ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺒـﺎﻱ ﺍﻭ ﻧﺒﺎﺷـﺪ؟ ﭼـﻮﻥ ﻋـﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎﻧﻪﮔﻴﺮ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺣﺮﻓﺸﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺒـﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻬـﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﻴﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﺗﻨﻬـﺎ ﺯﺑـﺎﻥ ﻋﺒـﺮﻱ‪،‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﮔﻴﺶ ﻋﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪» .‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻟَﻮ ﺟ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﻠْﻨﺎﻩ‪ ‬ﻗُﺮْﺁﻧﺎً‬
‫ﺍَﻋ‪‬ﺠ‪‬ﻤﻴﺎً ﻟَﻘﺎﻟُﻮﺍ ﻟَﻮ‪ ‬ﻻ ﻓُﺼ‪‬ﻠَﺖ‪ ‬ﺁﻳﺎﺗُﻪ‪ 1.«‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺁﻳﻪﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻫﺴـﺖ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﻴـﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣـﻲﻓﺮﺳـﺘﺎﺩﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗـﺖ ﻳـﻚ ﺑﻬﺎﻧـﺔ ﺭﻭﺷـﻦﺗـﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻬﻀﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤﻠـﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻧﻬﻀﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺔ ﻧﻬﻀﺖﻫـﺎﻱ ﺩﻧﻴـﺎ ﻧﻬﻀـﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﻬﻀـﺖ ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩﻧـﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦﻛـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫»ﻛﻬﻴﻌﺺ« ﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥﺩﻫﻨﺪﺓ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﻛﻼﻡ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎﻱ ﻋﺮﺑﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻴﻦﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷـﻤﺎ ﻓﺮﺳـﺘﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﺎً ﻳﻚ ﻧﻜﺘﺔ ﻟﻄﻴﻒ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻳﺎﺩﻡ ﺁﻣﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﻧﻘّـﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺩﻳﻨﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻋـﺮﺏﻫـﺎ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺏﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺮﺑﺴﺘﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻳﻦ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻫﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳـﺪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ﺑﻨﮕﺮﻳﺪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪» :‬ﺍَﻓَﻼ ﻳ‪‬ﻨْﻈُﺮُﻭﻥَ ﺍ‪‬ﻟَﻲ ﺍﻟْﺎ‪‬ﺑِﻞِ ﻛَﻴ‪‬ﻒ‪ ‬ﺧُﻠ‪‬ﻘَﺖ‪ 2.«‬ﭘﻴﺪﺍﺳﺖ ﻛـﻪ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﺼﻠﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :44‬ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻋﺠﻢ ﻣﻲﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻲﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﭼـﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ )ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻋﺮﺏ( ﻧﻴﺎﻣﺪ )ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻗﻮﻡ ﻋﺮﺏ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ(«‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺷﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :17‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻠﻘﺖ ﺷﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻲﻧﮕﺮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ )ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺣﻜﻤﺖ‬
‫ﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﻌﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺸﺮ( ﺧﻠﻖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟«‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ‪115‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺷﺘﺮﭼﺮﺍﻥﻫﺎﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻗﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻜﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣـﺜ ً‬
‫ﻼ‬
‫ﺟﻨﺎﺏ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ــ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻛﻼﻡ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺖ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﺳﺖ ــ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘـﺔ ﻇﻬـﻮﺭﺵ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﺴﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﻲﻧﮕﺮﻳـﺪ ﺯﺭ‪‬ﺍﻓـﻪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧـﻪ‬
‫ﺁﻓﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﺧﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﺯﺭﺍﻓﻪ ﻛﺠﺎﺳﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﻣـﺎ ﺑﺒﻴﻨـﻴﻢ؟‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺸـﺎﻧﻪﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻓﺶ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻳﺶ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﻦ ﻋﺮﺏ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻲ ﻭ ﻳﻮﻧﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫»ﻛﻬﻴﻌﺺ«‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻣـﺎ ﺯﺑـﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﻼﻣـﻲ‪ ،‬ﺟﻤﻠـﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﺑﭙﺮﺳـﻴﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺑﭙﺮﺳﻴﻢ؟ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺷﻤﺎﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺑـﺎ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨـﻲ ﺭﻭﺷـﻦ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ؛ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ ﻳـﻚ ﻣﻌﻨـﻲ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻬﻢ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗـﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠـﺎ ﺑﺮﺷـﻤﺮﺩﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣـﺎً ﺁﺷـﻨﺎ ﻫﺴـﺘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺣﺴﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻓﻜﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻘﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﺎﺳﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺁﺷـﻨﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻴﮕﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼً ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟـﻢ ﺍﻟﻬـﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻢ ﮔﺬﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﺍﻫﻞ ﻋﺮﻓﺎﻥ »ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﻠﺒﻲ«‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻳﻜﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻓﻌﻼً ﻣﻲﺧـﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺑﺨـﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸـﺎﻥ ﺑـﺪﻫﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻴﻤـﻪﻋﻠﻤـﻲ ﺍﺧﻴـﺮ »ﺗﻠـﻪ ﭘـﺎﺗﻲ«؛‪ 1‬ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻛﻪ ﮔـﺎﻫﻲ ﻣﻴـﺎﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻮﺟـﻮﺩ ﺁﮔـﺎﻩ‬

‫‪1. Telepathy‬‬
‫‪ 116‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻲﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ‬


‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼً ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻩﺍﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﺩﻟـﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻼﻧﻲ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻋﺎﻃﻔﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺄﻟﻢ ﻭ ﺩﻝﻧﮕﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﻲﻛـﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﻣـﺜﻼً‬
‫ﻓﺮﺯﻧﺪﻱ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺩﺭﺵ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻧﮕﺮﺍﻧـﻲ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﻣﻌﻴ‪‬ﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺧﺒﺮ ﻣﻲﺭﺳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺩﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﻣﻌـﻴ‪‬ﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺭﻧﺞ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻣـﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﮔﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﻛـﻨﻢ ﻣـﺎ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦﮔﻮﻧـﻪ ﻭﺍژﻩﻫـﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﻫﻢ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻧﺎﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﻭ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﮔـﻮﻳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑـﺎﺯ ﺁﻧﭽـﻪ ﻣﺴـﻠّﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺸﻢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭ ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺸﺎﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺭﻧﮓﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷـﻜﻞﻫـﺎ ﺳـﺎﻟﻢ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﻣـﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧـﺪ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑ‪‬ﺮﺩ ﺩﻳـﺪ ﻳﻜﺴـﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺴـﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻲﻫﺎ ﺗﻴﺰﭼﺸﻢﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨـﺪ ﺗـﺎ ﻓﺎﺻـﻠﺔ ﺻـﺪﻣﺘـﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﻀﻲﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺗﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﭘﻨﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻨـﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻲﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺸﻤﺸﺎﻥ ﺿـﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﺣﺘـﻲ ﭘـﻨﺞ ﻣﺘـﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﻴﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣـﺎ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧـﻮﺍﻉ ﺁﮔـﺎﻫﻲ ﮔﻔﺘـﻴﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑ‪‬ﺮﺩ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ‪ .‬ﻣـﻦ ﻓﻌـﻼً ﺳـﺮﺍﻍ ﺍﻟﻬـﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻑﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﻲﺭﻭﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﺭﻭﻡ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻓﻜـﺎﺭ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻇﺮﻳﻒ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﺭﻭﻳﻢ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻠﺴـﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﻫﻤـﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺴـﺐ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣـﺎﺕ ﻇﺮﻳـﻒ ﻭ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻠـﻲ ﻭ ﻭﺍﻻﻱ‬
‫ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ؟ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻣﺪﻋﻲ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ‪117‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﻴﻦﺟﺎ ﺳﺨﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺧﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻧـﺎﻳﻲ ﺑـﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻇﺮﻳﻒ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺚ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻊﺑﻴﻨﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺼﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻫﻤﻴﻦﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑـﺪﻫﻴﻢ ﻭ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﻳﻜـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺟﺒـﺎﺕ ﺗﺸـﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤـﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺼﻴﻠﻲ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺟﺒﺎﺗﺶ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎً ﻫﻤﺔ ﺑﭽﻪﻫـﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﻪ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﻨـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﺍﺳـﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻗـﺪﺭﺕ ﻳـﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺷـﺘﻪﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﻧﺸﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻓﻠﺴﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺳﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻛﻼﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻡ؛ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﭼﺮﻧـﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺮﻧـﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺴـﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻢ‪ :‬ﮔﻔﺘﻲ ﭼﺮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼـﺮﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻬـﺎ ﺑﺮﭼﺴـﺐ ﺯﺩﻱ؟‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﮔﻔﺘﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻴﭻ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻡ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﺵ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ ﭼﺮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﮔﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺻﻼً ﻗﺎﻓﻠﺔ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻗﺮﻥﻫـﺎ ﻛـﻪ ﻫـﻴﭻ‪ ،‬ﻫـﺰﺍﺭﺍﻥ ﺳـﺎﻝ ﭘـﻴﺶ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺷﺘﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺕﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻨﻮﻧﺪﻩﻫﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺪﺗﻲ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻭ ﮔﻔﺖﻭﮔـﻮ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﺣـﻞ ﻭ ﻫﻀـﻢ‬
‫ﻧﺒﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻻﻥ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﭽﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺑﻴﺮﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨـﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺩﺑﻴﺮﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﻬﻢ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻻﻥ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻭ ﻣﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﭙﻠﻤﺔ ﺧﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺑﭽﻪﻫﺎﻳﺸـﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺭﻳﺎﺿـﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﻧـﻮ ﻭ ﻣـﺪﺭﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻧـﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺁﮔـﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪ .‬ﻭ ﭼـﻪ ﺑﺴـﺎ ﺍﮔـﺮ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺯﺣﻤﺖ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺪﻫﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻨﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﮔﻮﻳﻲ ﻇﺮﻓﺸﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻻﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪﻩ ﮔﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬـﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻭ ﻇﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫‪ 118‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺑ‪‬ﺮﺩ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛـﻲ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻤـﻲ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﻣﻤﺘـﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺑﺴـﻴﺎﺭ ﺑـﺎﻻ ﻭ‬


‫ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﻧـﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺍﺑـﻎ ﻋﻠﻤـﻲ ﺑﺸـﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺷـﺘﻪﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺷﺘﺔ ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﻲ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﻣﻲﺷـﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﻣﺴـﺎﺋﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺍﺯ ﻗﻠﻤﺮﻭ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﺸـﺮ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻙ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺒﻴـﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻧـﻮﻋﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧـﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺴﺐ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑ‪‬ﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻣﻨﺪﺗﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﻭ ﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻩﺁﻭﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥﻫـﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺁﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭﻙ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻗﺪﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥﻫـﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﺑـﺎ ﺯﺑـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭﻙ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﭼﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺟﺰ ﺍﻳـﻦﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟـﺐ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﻤﺒﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻤـﻮﻻً ﻧـﻮﻉ ﻛﺴـﺎﻧﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺑ‪‬ﺮﺩ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﻲ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻣﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑ‪‬ﺮﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﭼـﺎﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺟﺰ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻭﺍژﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛـﻪ ﻣـﺎ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬــﺎ ﺑــﻪ ﺯﺑــﺎﻥ ﺳــﻤﺒﻠﻴﻚ ﻭ ﺭﻣــﺰﻱ ﻳــﺎﺩ ﻣــﻲﻛﻨــﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻻﻥ ﺣﺘــﻲ ﺑﺴــﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻲ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳـﻚ ﺭﻣـﺰ‬
‫ﭼﻴﺰ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼً ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﺁﻗﺎ ﻭﺍﺣـﺪ ﻟـﻮﻛﺲ‪ 1،‬ﻓﻮﺗـﻮﻥ‪ 2.‬ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺍً ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻚ ﺳﺮ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﺗـﻮﻥ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﻧﺼﺎﻑ ﺑﺪﻫﻴـﺪ ﺍﻻﻥ ﻛـﻪ ﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻪﺍﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻥ ﭼﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ؟ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻥ ﻭﺍژﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻣﺰﻱ ﻭ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻄﻠﺒﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﺤﺚ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻚ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ ﻣـﻲﺧـﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴـﻪ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﻣـﻲﮔـﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﺑﻠـﻪ‪،‬‬

‫‪1. Lux‬‬
‫‪2. Photon‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ‪119‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞﺩﻫﻨﺪﺓ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﺗﻢ ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻪ ﻭﺍﺣـﺪ‬


‫ﻣﻮﺟﻲ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻮﺝ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣـﻮﺝ ﻧـﻮﺭﻱ ﻫـﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠـﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻥ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩﺍﺵ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﻜﻨﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﮔـﺮ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻚﺩﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺤـﺚ ﻧـﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻴﻦﻗﺪﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺗﺶ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﻓـﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳـﻚ ﺳﻠﺴـﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺍژﻩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺍژﻩﻫﺎ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪﻭﺩﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﻬﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺍﮔـﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺴﻲ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍژﻩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﻧـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻭ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﻬﻢ ﺑﻜﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﮔﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﻛـﻨﻢ ﻛـﻪ ﻓﻜـﺮ ﻭﺍﻗـﻊﺑﻴﻨﺎﻧـﻪﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑ‪‬ﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻬـﺎﻥ ﻫﺴـﺘﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍژﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺍژﺓ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺘﻬـﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳـﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺳﺮﻭﺵ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﺒﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻻﻥ ﺩﻗﻴـﻖ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻃﺮﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻦﻃﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﻭﺍژﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍژﺓ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﺍژﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﻭﺣﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺑ‪‬ﺮﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣـﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨـﺪ ﭼﻴﺰﻫـﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻨـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﻧﻮﺍﺑﻎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﭼﻴﺰﻫـﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺸـﻨﻮﻧﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﻧﻮﺍﺑﻎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻨﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻔﻬﻤﻨـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﻧﻮﺍﺑﻎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﻓﻬﻤﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﭘﺲ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻔﻬﻤﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺻـﻼً ﻭﺣـﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺠﺎ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً ﺍﻧﺒﻴـﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻳـﻚ ﭼﻨـﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻧـﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺴﺐ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ؟ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﺷﻨﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 120‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻃُﺮُﻗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻨـﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻭﺳـﻴﻊﺗـﺮ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑ‪‬ﺮﺩﺗـﺮﻱ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ ﻳـﺎ ﻧـﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺆﺍﻻﺕ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﻣـﻲﻛﺮﺩﻧـﺪ‪ .‬ﺷـﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋـﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺸـﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴـﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠـﻒ ﮔـﺎﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺆﺍﻝﭘﻴﭻ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺆﺍﻻﺗﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺳﺆﺍﻝﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺳـﺆﺍﻝ ﭘﺎﺳـﺦ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﭼﺸﻤﺔ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻳﻨـﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻴﺸﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳـﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﺎً ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺵﻗﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻜﺎﺭﺍﻧﻤـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺶ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﻣﺎﺣﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﻤﻜﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻗﻪﻣﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺟﻤـﻊﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﻣـﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻳـﺎﺕ ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﺓ ﺁﮔـﺎﻫﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﻧـﺪﺓ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺁﻳـﻪ ﻭ ﮔﻮﻳﻨـﺪﺓ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺭﻭﺍﻳـﺖ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﺪ ﺳﺎﻝ ﻗﺒـﻞ ﻧـﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻﻼً ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺑـﺎ ﻫـﻢ ﻓـﺮﻕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪﺍﻱ ﺻﺪ ﺳﺎﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻧﺼﺪ ﺳـﺎﻝ ﻗﺒـﻞ ﻣﻄـﺮﺡ ﺑـﻮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩﺍﺵ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﭘﺨﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺸـﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳـﻚ ﻭﻗـﺖ ﺍﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺻﻼً ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻧﺼﺪ ﺳﺎﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻳﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺗﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳـﻪ ﺗـﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩ‪‬ﻩ ﺗـﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﺳﺦﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺻﺪ ﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺩﻭﻳﺴـﺖ ﺳـﺎﻝﻭﭘﺎﻧﺼـﺪﺳـﺎﻝ ﻭ‬
‫ﻫﺰﺍﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ‪1200‬ﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺻﻼً ﺩﺭ ﺩﻧﻴﺎ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻛﺠﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﻣﺴﻠّﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭ ﺳﺮﭼﺸﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻏﻴـﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻣﻨﺒﻊﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳـﺮﭼﺸﻤﻪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﺎﺳﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻣﺴـﻠّﻢ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ‪121‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻢ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻓﺮﻳﺪﮔﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺣـﻲ ﻣـﻲ ﮔـﻮﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻭﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻧﻜﻨﻨـﺪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻭﺣـﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﻣــﻲ ﮔــﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻳــﻚ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺧﺎﺻــﻲ ﺍﺳــﺖ ﺷــﺒﻴﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﺣﺴــﺎﺱ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺍﻳــﺎﺕ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨـﻮﻉ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﻭﺣـﻲ ﻛـﺎﻣﻼً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌـﺪﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺘـﺐ ﺣـﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﺎﻣـﻪ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺻـﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻫﻞ ﺳـﻨﺖ ﻭ ﺷـﻴﻌﻪ ﻫﺴـﺖ؛ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨـﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴـﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻛـﺎﻓﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﺗﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺘﺐ ﺷـﻴﻌﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ ﻭﺳـﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟـﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺣﺴﻦ ﺻﻔﺎﺭ ﻗﻤﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼـﻠّﻲ ﻫﺴـﺖ ﺩﺭﺑـﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻭ ﻃُﺮُﻕ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﺎﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌـﺎﺭﻓﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺩﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺖ ﻧﻬﺎﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﺭﻣﺰﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﻮﻡ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺭﻣﺰﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺷـﻢ ﻣـﻲ ﺧـﻮﺭ‪‬ﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻳـﺎﻓﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﻨﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﻢ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺣـﻲ‬
‫ﺍ ﻟﻬﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﻮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﺭﻣﺰﻱ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺨﻮﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﻲ ﺳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤـﻲﺁﻭﺭﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻭ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺱ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻮ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﻮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻖ ﺗـﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗـﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻖ ﺗﻖ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴـﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺒـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻮ ﺭﺱ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺷــﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﺍﻳــﻦ ﺻــﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﻛــﺎﻣﻼً ﻣﻄﻠــﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻣــﻲﮔﻴــﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻧــﻮﺍﻋﺶ‬
‫‪ 122‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ ﻋﺎﻣـﻞ ﻭﺣـﻲ ﺍﻟﻬـﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺷﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮﻡ ﻣﺠﺴﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﻢ ﺳﺨﻦ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗـﺎً ﺩﺭ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺍﻳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﻳﻜـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺷـﻤﺎ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮﻱ ﺳـﺨﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﻉ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻭﺵ ﺍﻟﻬﻲ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻠﺒﻢ ﻣﻲﻧﺸﻴﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮﻡ ﺻـﺤﻨﻪﻫـﺎ ﻭ ﺣﻘـﺎﻳﻖ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﻋﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﻪﭼﻴﺰ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻳـﻚ ﺳﻠﺴـﻠﻪ ﺭﻭﺍﻳـﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷـﻨﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﮔﻮﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺩﻳﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺍﻭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓـﻖ ﺗـﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺩﻳﺪ ﺍﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﺪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳـﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻡ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩ ﺑـﻮﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﻔﺼ‪‬ﻞ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳـﻢ‬
‫ﻭ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﺪﺍﻣﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺟﺎﻟﺐﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺟﺎﻣﻊﺗـﺮ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺟﺎﻟﺐﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﺠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻢ‪ .‬ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﮔﻮﻳﺎﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺣـﺪﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﺧـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧـﻮﺍﻉ ﮔﻮﻧـﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺷـﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﺍﺧﻴـﺮﺵ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬
‫»ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻨﱠﺠ‪‬ﻢِ ﺍ‪‬ﺫﺍ ﻫ‪‬ﻮﻱ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺿَﻞﱠ ﺻﺎﺣ‪‬ﺒ‪‬ﻜُﻢ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻣﺎ ﻏ‪‬ﻮﻱ‪ .‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻣﺎ ﻳ‪‬ﻨْﻄ‪‬ﻖُ ﻋ‪‬ﻦِ ﺍﻟْﻬ‪‬ﻮﻱ‪ .‬ﺍ‪‬ﻥْ‬
‫ﻫ‪‬ﻮ‪ ‬ﺍ‪‬ﻟّﺎ ﻭ‪‬ﺣ‪‬ﻲ‪ ‬ﻳ‪‬ﻮﺣﻲ‪ .‬ﻋ‪‬ﻠﱠﻤ‪‬ﻪ‪ ‬ﺷَﺪﻳﺪ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻘُﻮﻱ‪ .‬ﺫُﻭ ﻣ‪‬ﺮﱠﺓٍ ﻓَﺎﺳ‪‬ﺘَﻮﻱ‪ .‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻫ‪‬ﻮ‪ ‬ﺑِﺎﻟْﺎُﻓُﻖِ ﺍﻟْﺎَﻋ‪‬ﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛُﻢ‪ ‬ﺩ‪‬ﻧﺎ ﻓَﺘَﺪ‪‬ﻟّﻲ‪ .‬ﻓَﻜﺎﻥَ ﻗﺎﺏ‪ ‬ﻗَﻮ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ﻴ‪‬ﻦِ ﺍَﻭ‪ ‬ﺍَﺩ‪‬ﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻓَﺎَﻭ‪‬ﺣﻲ ﺍ‪‬ﻟﻲ ﻋ‪‬ﺒ‪‬ـﺪ‪‬ﻩ ﻣـﺂ ﺍَﻭ‪‬ﺣـﻲ‪ .‬ﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﻛَﺬَﺏ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻔُﺆﺍﺩ‪ ‬ﻣﺎ ﺭ‪‬ﺃﻱ‪ .‬ﺍَﻓَﺘُﻤﺎﺭ‪‬ﻭﻧَﻪ‪ ‬ﻋ‪‬ﻠﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳ‪‬ﺮﻱ‪ .‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻟَﻘَـﺪ‪ ‬ﺭ‪‬ءﺍﻩ‪ ‬ﻧَﺰَﻟَـﺔً ﺍُﺧْـﺮﻱ‪ .‬ﻋ‪‬ﻨْـﺪ‪‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ‪123‬‬

‫ﺳ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﺭ‪‬ﺓِ ﺍﻟْﻤ‪‬ﻨْﺘَﻬﻲ‪ .‬ﻋ‪‬ﻨْﺪ‪‬ﻫﺎ ﺟ‪‬ﻨَﺔُ ﺍﻟْﻤ‪‬ﺎْﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﺍ‪‬ﺫْ ﻳ‪‬ﻐْﺸَﻲ ﺍﻟﺴ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﺭ‪‬ﺓَ ﻣﺎ ﻳ‪‬ﻐْﺸﻲ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﻍَ ﺍﻟْﺒ‪‬ﺼ‪‬ﺮُ ﻭ‪‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻃَﻐﻲ«‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻥﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛـﻲ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﺍﻛـﺮﻡ )ﺹ( ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﮔﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳـﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻳـﺎ ﺛﺮﻳـﺎ ﺁﻥﮔـﺎﻩ ﻛـﻪ ﺁﻫﻨـﮓ ﻏـﺮﻭﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻪ ﮔﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﻧـﻪ ﺑﻴﺮﺍﻫـﻪﺭﻭ‪ .‬ﻧـﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺮﺍﻫﻪ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻧـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻫـﻮﻱ ﻭ ﻫـﻮﺱ‬
‫ﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺨﻦ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﻭ ﺳﺮﻭﺷﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺵ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺁﮔـﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻲ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ »ﻋ‪‬ﻠﱠﻤ‪‬ﻪ‪ ‬ﺷَﺪﻳﺪ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻘُﻮﻱ‪ .‬ﺫُﻭ ﻣ‪‬ﺮﱠﺓٍ ﻓَﺎﺳ‪‬ﺘَﻮﻱ‪ .‬ﻭ‪‬‬
‫ﻫ‪‬ﻮ‪ ‬ﺑِﺎﻟْﺎُﻓُﻖِ ﺍﻟْﺎَﻋ‪‬ﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺛُﻢ‪ ‬ﺩ‪‬ﻧﺎ ﻓَﺘَﺪ‪‬ﻟّﻲ‪ .‬ﻓَﻜﺎﻥَ ﻗﺎﺏ‪ ‬ﻗَﻮ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ﻴ‪‬ﻦِ ﺍَﻭ‪ ‬ﺍَﺩ‪‬ﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻓَﺎَﻭ‪‬ﺣﻲ ﺍ‪‬ﻟﻲ ﻋ‪‬ﺒ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺂ ﺍَﻭ‪‬ﺣﻲ«‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﻫﻤﺔ ﻫﻤﻜﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺁﻳﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﺠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ‪ » :17-1‬ﻗﺴﻢ ﺑـﻪ ﺳـﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﭼـﻮﻥ ﻓـﺮﻭﺩ ﺁﻳـﺪ‪ .‬ﻛـﻪ ﺻـﺎﺣﺐ ﺷـﻤﺎ )ﻣﺤﻤـﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺼﻄﻔﻲ( ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔـﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺿـﻼﻟﺖ ﻭ ﮔﻤﺮﺍﻫـﻲ ﻧﺒـﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻫﺮﮔـﺰ ﺑـﻪ ﻫـﻮﺍﻱ ﻧﻔـﺲ ﺳـﺨﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺨﻦ ﺍﻭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ )ﺟﺒﺮﺋﻴﻞ( ﻫﻤﺎﻥ )ﻓﺮﺷﺘﺔ( ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎ )ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻲ ﺧﺪﺍ( ﻋﻠﻢ ﺁﻣﻮﺧﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣ‪‬ﻠَ ﻚ ﻣﻘﺘـﺪﺭﻱ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺧﻠﻘـﺖ ﻛﺎﻣـﻞ )ﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻜﻮﺗﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ( ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻋﻼ )ﻱ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻣﺸـﺮﻕ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻧﻴﺖ( ﺑـﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺁﻣﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻭ )ﺑﻪ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺣﻖ( ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﺪﺍﻥ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﻲ ﻛﻪ( ﺑﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻗـﺪﺭ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ )ﺧﺪﺍ( ﺑﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﺓ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﻭﺣـﻲ ﻓﺮﻣـﻮﺩ ﺁﻧﭽـﻪ ﻛـﻪ ﻫـﻴﭻﻛـﺲ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻙ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﭽﻪ )ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺐ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ( ﺩﻳﺪ ﺩﻟـﺶ ﻫـﻢ ﺑـﻪ ﺣﻘﻴﻘـﺖ ﻳﺎﻓـﺖ ﻭ ﻛـﺬﺏ ﻭ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﻝ ﻧﭙﻨﺪﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻳﺎ )ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻓﺮﺍﻥ( ﺑﺎ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ )ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ ﻣﻌﺮﺍﺝ( ﺑﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛـﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻴﺰﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ؟ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ )ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﺒﺮﺋﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ( ﺭﺳـﻮﻝ ﻣﺸـﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛـﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧـﺰﺩ‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺎﻡ( ﺳﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻬﻲ )ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﺮﺵ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻬـﺎﻱ ﺳـﻴﺮ ﻋﻘﻠـﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺷﺘﮕﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺍﺭﻭﺍﺡ ﻣﺆﻣﻨﺎﻥ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻘـﺎﻡ ﺑـﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺁﮔـﺎﻩ ﻧﻴﺴـﺘﻨﺪ(‪ .‬ﺑﻬﺸـﺘﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﻣﺴـﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻘﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﺪﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺳﺪﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪ )ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻋﻈﻤـﺖ ﺣـﻖ(‬
‫ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺣﺪﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺁﮔﻪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﭼﺸﻢ )ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻘﺎﻳﻖ ﺁﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ( ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻨﮕﺮﺩ ﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﻛﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺶ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ«‪.‬‬
‫‪ 124‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻛﻨﻨــﺪ‪ .‬ﭼــﻮﻥ ﻋﺠﻴــﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﻩﻫــﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠــﻒ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘــﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣــﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﻣــﺎﻥ‪،‬‬


‫ﻏﻠﻂﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﺿﻤﻴﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺴـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ؟ ﺁﻥ ﺳـﺨﺖ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻣﻨـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﺟـﻮﺩ ﭘ‪‬ﺮﻧﻴـﺮﻭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﭘ‪‬ﺮﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﺓ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺗﺎﻓﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻓﺮﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﻮﻳﻲ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺁﻭﻳﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﻛـﻨﻢ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗـﺖ‬
‫ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ؟‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻓﺮﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺳﺮ ﺟﺎﻳﺶ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﻮﻳﻲ ﺁﻭﻳﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻫـﻮﺍ ﻣﻌﻠـﻖ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﺰﺩﻳـﻚ ﺷـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻛﻤﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺰﺩﻳـﻚﺗـﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺗﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﺑﻨـﺪﺓ ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻭ ﻭﺣﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦﻛـﻪ ﻣﻌﻠـﻮﻡ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛﻴﺴـﺖ‪ .‬ﺟﺒﺮﺋﻴـﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪ .‬ﻏﻠـﻂ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻜـﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍ‪‬ﻟﺤﺎﺩﻱِ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺯﮔﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺸـﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﻤـﻪﻣﺨﻔـﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺄﺳﻒ ﺩﻳﺪﻡ ﺁﻗﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺩﻋﺎ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺮﺓ ﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺮﻡ )ﺹ( ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﻲﻏﺮﺿﻲ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺧـﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺿﻤﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻢ‪» .‬ﻋ‪‬ﻠﱠﻤ‪‬ﻪ‪ :«‬ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﺍﻭ ﻳـﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩ‪» .‬ﺷَﺪﻳﺪ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻘُﻮﻱ«‪ :‬ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻣﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﻣـﺎ ﺗـﺎ ﺁﺧـﺮ ﺁﻣـﺪﻳﻢ ﻣﻌﻠـﻮﻡ ﺷـﺪ‬
‫ﺟﺒﺮﺋﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻣﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ »ﺫُﻭ ﻣ‪‬ﺮﱠﺓٍ« ﺍﺳﺖ‪» .‬ﻣ‪‬ﺮﱠﺓ« ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨـﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻨﺎﺑﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧـﻮﺏ ﺑـﻪ ﻫـﻢ ﻣـﻲﭘﻴﭽﻨـﺪ ﺗـﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ »ﻣ‪‬ﺮﱠﺓ« ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎﻡ ﺁﻥ ﻃﻨﺎﺏ ﻫـﻢ ﺑـﺎﺯ ﻣـﻲﮔـﻮﻳﻴﻢ‬
‫»ﻣ‪‬ﺮﱠﺓ«‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ »ﻣ‪‬ﺮﱠﺓ«‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﮔﻲ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻣﻨـﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻳــﻦﻃــﻮﺭ ﺑــﻪ ﻫــﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻴــﺪﻩ ﺍﺳــﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳــﻦ ﻣﻮﺟــﻮﺩ »ﺍ‪‬ﺳ ـﺘَﻮﻱ«‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨــﻲ ﺳــﺮ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ‪125‬‬

‫ﺟﺎﻳﺶ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ »ﺩ‪‬ﻧﺎ« ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺁﻣﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ »ﺗَﺪ‪‬ﻟّﻲ« ﺩﺭ ﻓﻀـﺎ ﻣﻌﻠـﻖ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺁﻣﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺩﻭ ﻗﻮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺗﻴﺮ ﻳـﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺮ ﺗﻴﺮ‪» ،‬ﺍَﻭ‪ ‬ﺍَﺩ‪‬ﻧﻲ«‪ .،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻕ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪﺓ ﺍﻭ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ »ﻋ‪‬ﺒ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﻩ« ﺑﻪ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺑﺮﻣﻲﮔـﺮﺩﺩ؟ ﻋﺒـﺪﻩ ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﺑﻨـﺪﺓ ﺍﻭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﻨﺪﺓ ﺧﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ »ﺍَﻭ‪‬ﺣﻲ« ﻭﺣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴـﻲ ﺑﺮﻣـﻲﮔـﺮﺩﺩ؟ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ »ﺷَﺪﻳﺪ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻘُﻮﻱ«‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﮕﻴـﺮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻـﻼً ﺁﻳـﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺁﻳﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲﺁﻳـﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺣـﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﺓ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫـﺪ ﺭﻭﺷـﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ‪» :‬ﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﻛَﺬَﺏ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻔُﺆﺍﺩ‪ ‬ﻣﺎ ﺭ‪‬ﺃﻱ«‪ .‬ﺩﻝ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﻭﻏﻲ ﻧﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﺸﺶ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﺭﻭﻍ ﻧﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺟﺪﻝ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨﻴـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺁﻳـﺎ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻲ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺪﻱ ﻳـﺎ ﻧـﻪ؟ ﺑـﻪ ﺭﺍﺳـﺘﻲ ﺩﻝ‬
‫ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪ؟ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺟﺪﻝ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﺪ؟ ﺩﻳـﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﺧﻴﺎﻝ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﻭ ﺩﻳـﺪﻩ ﺗـﺎ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴـﺪ ﺷـﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﻴـﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻱ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﻻﺕ ﺷﺪﻱ‪» .‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻟَﻘَﺪ‪ ‬ﺭ‪‬ءﺍﻩ‪ ‬ﻧَﺰَﻟَﺔً ﺍُﺧْﺮﻱ«‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﺠﺎ؟ »ﻋ‪‬ﻨْﺪ‪ ‬ﺳ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﺭ‪‬ﺓِ ﺍﻟْﻤ‪‬ﻨْﺘَﻬﻲ«‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﻲ ﺳﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤ‪‬ﻨﺘﻬﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﻣﺰﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛـﺮﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﻫـﻴﭻ ﻫـﻢ ﻧﻤـﻲﺧـﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺜﺶ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ‪» .‬ﻋ‪‬ﻨْﺪ‪‬ﻫﺎ ﺟ‪‬ﻨَﺔُ ﺍﻟْﻤ‪‬ﺎْﻭﻱ«‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥﺟﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻬﺸﺖ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺎﻛـﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺁﻧﺠﺎﺳﺖ‪» .‬ﺍ‪‬ﺫْ ﻳ‪‬ﻐْﺸَﻲ ﺍﻟﺴ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﺭ‪‬ﺓَ ﻣﺎ ﻳ‪‬ﻐْﺸﻲ«‪ .‬ﺁﻥﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺘـﻲ ﺳـﺪﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﺎﻟﻪﺍﻱ ﻓﺮﻭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﺧﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺳﺪﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭﺧﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﭼﻪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ؟ »ﻭ‪ ‬ﻟَﻘَﺪ‪ ‬ﺭ‪‬ءﺍﻩ‪ ‬ﻧَﺰَﻟَﺔً ﺍُﺧْﺮﻱ«‪ .‬ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻔﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﻪﻛﺴﻲ ﺭﺍ؟ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘـﻮﻱ ﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 126‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻻﻥ ﻋﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﮔﻔﺘﻨـﺪ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮْ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣـﺪﻳﺚ ﺑـﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨـﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﻲ ﺍﻫﻞ ﺳـﻨﺖ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻘـﻞ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻋﺎﻳﺸﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪﻡ »ﻭ‪ ‬ﻟَﻘَﺪ‪ ‬ﺭ‪‬ءﺍﻩ‪ ‬ﻧَﺰَﻟَﺔً ﺍُﺧْﺮﻱ«‪ .‬ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﺩﻳـﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﮔﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺟﺒﺮﺋﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳـﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺷـﺘﺒﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻓﻬﻤﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻘـﺎء ﺷـﺒﻬﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻭﻝ ﺩﻳـﺪﻥﻫـﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪» :‬ﻣﺎ ﻛَﺬَﺏ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻔُﺆﺍﺩ‪ ‬ﻣﺎ ﺭ‪‬ﺃﻱ«‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻝ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻭﻍ ﻧﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻧﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ‪:‬‬
‫»ﺍَﻓَﺘُﻤﺎﺭ‪‬ﻭﻧَﻪ‪ ‬ﻋ‪‬ﻠﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳ‪‬ﺮﻱ«‪ .‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻝ ﺑﺮﻣﻲﺧﻴﺰﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻧﭽـﻪ ﻣـﻲﺑﻴﻨـﺪ؟‬
‫ﺑ‪‬ﺮﺩ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻣﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺠﺎﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻭﺣـﻲﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﻭﺣﻲ‪» .‬ﻓَﺎَﻭ‪‬ﺣﻲ ﺍ‪‬ﻟﻲ ﻋ‪‬ﺒ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﻩ ﻣﺂ ﺍَﻭ‪‬ﺣﻲ«‪ .‬ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪» :‬ﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻍَ ﺍﻟْﺒ‪‬ﺼ‪‬ﺮُ ﻭ‪ ‬ﻣﺎ ﻃَﻐﻲ«‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ »ﺑﺼﺮ« ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪» .‬ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻍَ ﺍﻟْﺒ‪‬ﺼ‪‬ﺮُ ﻭ‪ ‬ﻣﺎ ﻃَﻐﻲ«‪ .‬ﭼﺸﻢ ﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﺮﻑ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﻪ ﻛﺞﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧـﻪ‬
‫ﻃﻐﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺳـﺮﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﭼﺎﺭﭼﻮﺏ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺭﺅﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭼﺸﻢ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﻣـﻲﺑﻴﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﭼـﻪ؟ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛـﺮﺩﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﻳـﺪﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥﺟﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺼﺮ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺼﺎﺭ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﻳﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺑ‪‬ﺮﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻠﻤﺮﻭﻱ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﺲ ﻭﺳﻴﻊﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻌﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲﺑـﺮﻡ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ‪127‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻨـﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺸﺖ ﺧﺎﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻴﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨـﻪ ﺟـﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﻨـﺪ‬

‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻌﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﻴﺪﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻭ ﺑﻴﻨـﺪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺷﻚ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ؟ ﺁﻥ ﭼﻴـﺰﻱ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﺩﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺣﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﭘﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺸﺖ ﺧﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﭼﺸﻤﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺸﺖ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺶ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺟﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﻪ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﭼﺸـﻤﻲ ﺑـﺎ ﻗـﺪﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑ‪‬ـﺮﺩ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻣﻨـﺪ ﻓﻜـﺮﻱ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﻴـﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺸـﺖ ﺧـﺎﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳـﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳـﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴـﺎﺋﻞ ﻭ ﺣﻘـﺎﻳﻘﻲ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻨـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺑـﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺘـﻲ ﻫـﻴﭻﮔﻮﻧـﻪ ﺗﺠـﻮ‪‬ﺯ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﺯﮔﻮﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺑﺮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﺩﻝ ﻭ ﺑﺼﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﻝ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﻜﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﭘ‪‬ﺮ ﺑ‪‬ﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻـﺎﺣﺐ ﻭﺣـﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﻧﺒﻮﺕ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻭ ﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺒـﺮ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﺒـﺄ ﺑـﺎ ﺧﺒـﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻭ ﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺁﮔـﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧـﺐ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﻣﺄﻣﻮﺭﻳـﺖ‬
‫ﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﭙـﺮﺩﺍﺯﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗـﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡﺁﻭﺭ ﺣﻖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﭘ‪‬ﺮﺑ‪‬ﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ــ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺭﺳـﻨﺪ ﺑﮕـﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﮔـﺎﻫﻲ ﻫﺴـﺖ ـــ‬
‫‪ 128‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺍﻡ ﺁﺭﺍﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻠﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻬﺶ ﻫﻤـﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﻜـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﺣـﻞ ﻗﺒﻠـﻴﺶ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺑﻘﻪ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺶﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻭ ﻳـﻚ ﺟﻬـﺶ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻣﻨﺪ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺜﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺜﺖ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﺁﻥ ﻗـﺪﺭﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑ‪‬ـﺮﺩ ﺩﻳـﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻬﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻛـﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﻣﺒﻌـﻮﺙ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺳﺘﺎﺧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺍﻭﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﻋﺎﻣـﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﻪ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻳـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺸﻌ‪‬ﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻬﻠﻤﻴﻦ ﺳـﺎﻝ ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪ ‬ﻭﺣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﮕﻮﻧـﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓـﺖ ﻛـﺮﺩ؟ ﭼﻨـﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓـﺖ‪‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻣﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﺎﻥﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻟﺮﺯﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭ ﺟﻨﺐ ﻭ ﺟﻮﺵ ﻭ ﻏﻮﻏـﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺁﻣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻣﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﻣﻨـﺰﻝ ﻭ ﮔﻔـﺖ‪ :‬ﻣـﺮﺍ ﺑﭙﻮﺷـﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻴـﺰﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻟﺮﺯﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﺩﻧﺒـﺎﻝ ﭼﻨـﻴﻦ ﺭﺳـﺘﺎﺧﻴﺰﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺸﻲ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺄﻣﻮﺭﻳﺖ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻧﺠﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺎﻡﺁﻭﺭ ﺣﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺷـﺘﻪﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﻗﻠـﻢ ﻳـﻚ ﻋـﺎﻟ‪‬ﻢ ﻧﺴـﺒﺘﺎً‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﻭﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪) .‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤـﻲﺧـﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺑﮕـﻮﻳﻢ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺔ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺶ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺍﻧﺼـﺎﻓﺎً ﺧﻮﺍﻧـﺪﻧﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ(‪ .‬ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺜﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺑﻦ ﺧﻠﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻـﻔﺤﻪﻫـﺎﻱ ‪ 91‬ﺗـﺎ ‪ 99‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﺸﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﺓ ﺟـﺎﻟﺒﻲ ﺩﺭﺑـﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺣـﻲ ﻭ ﻧﺒـﻮﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌـﻪ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺴـﺒﺘﺎً ﺟﺎﻟـﺐ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﻧـﺪﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺄﻣﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻭ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ؟ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤـﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪ؟ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴ‪‬ﺖ ‪129‬‬

‫ﺑﻴﺎﺑﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻲ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻲ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘـﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻳـﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﭼـﻪ ﭼﻴﺰﻫـﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺩ؟ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﻭ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﻭ ﺁﮔـﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﭘـﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺪﺩ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩ؟ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﺲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﺮﺑـﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸـﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤـﻚ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﺴﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻘﻞ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺗﻼﺵ ﺑﻜﻨـﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﺌﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ؟ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺵ‪ ،‬ﭼﺎﺭﻩﺍﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻜﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺁﮔـﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺳﺮﭼﺸﻤﺔ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺸﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲﻫﺎ ﭼﻪ ﻭﺍﻛﻨﺸﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻋـﻼﻭﻩ ﺑـﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺁﮔـﺎﻫﻲﻫـﺎ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥﺑﺨﺶ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭﺑـﺎﺭﺓ ﺷﻨﺎﺳـﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻴﻦ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺑـﻲﺗﻔـﺎﻭﺕ ﻭ ﺑـﻲﺍﻋﺘﻨـﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ؟ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻲﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻝ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘـﻲ ﻭ ﺻـﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﺠـﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﻲ ﻫﺴـﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴـﺪﺍﻥ ﺣـﺲ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻎ ﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺮﻭ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ‪ ،‬ﺧﺒـﺮ ﺩﻫﻨـﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻼﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺟﺎﻟـﺐ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﻧـﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﺑـﺎﺭﺓ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ ﻫﺴـﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻧﮕﻴﺨﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻧﮕﻴﺨﺘﻪ ﻧﻤﻲﺷـﻮﺩ؟ ﻭ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻧﮕﻴﺨﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﻛﻨﺶ ﺳﺎﻟﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﻧﺸـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﻛـﻨﺶ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻨﻄﻘـﻲ؟ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻧﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻨـﺪ‪ :‬ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨـﺪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﻛـﻨﺶ‬
‫‪ 130‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﻟﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ ﻭﻝ ﻛـﻦ ﺑﺎﺑـﺎ! ﻳـﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻛﻨﺶ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ ﺣـﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﺒﻴﻨـﺪ ﺍﻳﻨﻬـﺎ ﭼـﻪ ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨـﺪ؟ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺠـﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ؟ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻤﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ؟ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻜﻲ؟ ﺑـﻲﺗﻔـﺎﻭﺕ ﺑـﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎً ﻭﺍﻛﻨﺶ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﻟﻢ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺭﻓـﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺣـﺎﻝ ﺧـﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﻱ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺭﻓﺖ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎ ﺻـﻔﺖ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﻭ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﺓ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻣـﻲﺷﻨﺎﺳـﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻣـﻲﻳﺎﺑـﺪ؛ ﭼﻨـﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺘـﻲ ﭘﻴـﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴـﺮﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺍﻭ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻭ ﭼﺮﺍ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺩﻳﺪﻱ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ؟ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺒ‪‬ﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺗﺎﺯﻧﺪ ﻭ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﻔﻜﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻲﻓﻬﻤﻢ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﭼﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻌﺒ‪‬ﺪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻌﺒ‪‬ـﺪ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﻘﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺒ‪‬ﺪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﻧﺸﻨﻮﻡ؟ ﭼـﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺧ‪‬ﺮَﺩ ﺧﻮﺩﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺑـﻪ ﻣـﻦ ﮔﻔﺘﻨـﺪ ﻳـﻚ ﺳﺮﭼﺸـﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﺍﻏﺶ ﺑﺮﻭﻡ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻢ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻲﺗﻔـﺎﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻓﺘﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻖ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻢ ﻭ ﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪﻡ ﺳﺮﭼﺸـﻤﺔ ﺁﮔـﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﻠّﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎ ﻓﺮﻣـﺎﻥ ﭼـﻪ ﻛﺴـﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻢ؟ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻤﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺯﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳـﺎ ﺑـﺎ ﻓﺮﻣـﺎﻥ ﻋﻘـﻞ؟ ﭘـﺲ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﭘﻴـﺮﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻲ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻭ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﻤﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﮔﺬﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺗﻌﺒ‪‬ﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺗﻌﺒ‪‬ـﺪ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﺰّﻝ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﺶ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﻳـﻢ‪ ،‬ﺟﻔﺎﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﮔﻔـﺖ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺑﻲﭼﻮﻥ ﻭ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﻘﻞ؛ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺧ‪‬ـﺮﺩﻱ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺲ ﻭ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻲ )‪(1‬‬
‫ﺑِﺴ‪‬ﻢِ ﺍﷲِ ﺍﻟﺮﱠﺣ‪‬ﻤﻦِ ﺍﻟﺮﱠﺣﻴﻢ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﻴﺪﻭﺍﺭﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺟﻠﺴﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻼﺱ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺮﺍﻥ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻮﺩﻣﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬـﺖ ﻛﻠـﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﻪ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻛﻨﻮﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺟـﺮﺍ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠـﻲﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋـﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍ ﻳﺎ ﻃﺮﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨـﺪ ﺩﺍﺷـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺲ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻛﺘﺒﺎً ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺑﮕـﺬﺍﺭﺩ ﺗـﺎ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌـﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻃـﺮﺯ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳـﺪ ﺩﻭﺳـﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﺰﻳﺰﻣـﺎﻥ ﭼـﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻮﺩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﭼﻪ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﻨﺎء ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧـﺲ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ــ ﺑﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺩﻛﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻫﻨﺮ ﻭ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﻬﺮﻱ ــ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘـﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎ ﺩﻭ ﭼﻴـﺰ ﺑـﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵﻫﺎﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺘـﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ـ ﺳﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺣﺜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻗﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﮕﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ ﺧﻮﺩﺷـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺆﺍﻻﺕ ﻭ ﺍﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎً ﻧﻘﺪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﺳـﺘﺎﻧﻤﺎﻥ ﭘـﻴﺶ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺣﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻗﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺒﺎﺷـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺳـﺎﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠـﺎ‬
‫‪ 136‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻣﻲﺁﻳﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻇﺮﻓﻴـﺖ ﻭﻗـﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺳـﺆﺍﻻﺕ‬


‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﻧﻜﺘـﺔ ﻣـﺒﻬﻢ ﻭ ﻧـﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﺗﻔﻜـﺮ ﺍﺳـﻼﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻲﺍﻻﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤـﻲﺩﺍﻧـﻢ ﺁﻳـﺎ ﺁﻗﺎﻳـﺎﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻧﻢﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺳﺆﺍﻻﺕ ﻛﺘﺒﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﮔﺬﺍﺷـﺘﻪﺍﻧـﺪ ﻳـﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺮ؟ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﻭﺳـﺘﺎﻥ ﺑـﻪ ﻛﺴـﻲ ﺳـﺆﺍﻻﺗﻲ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸـﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻳـﺎ‬
‫ﺷﻔﺎﻫﻲ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻭ ﺣﻞ ﻫﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺳـﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ؟‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺳﺆﺍﻻﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎً ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺣﻞ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﻤﻲﺭﺳـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺳـﺆﺍﻻﺗﻲ ﻣﻄـﺮﺡ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﺣـﻞ ﻧﻬـﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺭﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻗﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻧﻢﻫﺎ ﻣﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻗـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺪﻫﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺳـﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﻣـﻦ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺎﺳـﺦ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻇﻒ ﺑﺎﺷﻢ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻲﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﻧـﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻴـﺪﻭﺍﺭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﺆﺍﻻﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮ ﻓﺮﺻﺖ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻣﻲﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺤﺜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﻢ‪ :‬ﺑﺤﺚ ﻭﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﻲ )ﻛﻪ ﻟﻐﺘﻲ ﻋﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻥﻫـﺎﻳﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻪ ﺯﺑـﺎﻥ ﻋﺮﺑـﻲ ﺁﻣـﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﺍﻫـﻞ ﻟﻐـﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺖ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻥ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﻤﺎﻧـﺪﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﺒـﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﻛﺴـﻲ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺮﺍﺭﺁﻣﻴﺰ ﻭ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻄﻠـﺐ ﺑـﻪ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺮﺍﻳﺖ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻬﻤﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﻧﺸـﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺁﻥ ﻃﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻔﻬﻤﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﺣﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﻤﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻣﻄﻠـﺐ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻨﻮﻧﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﻨﺎﻳﻪﺍﻱ‪ ،‬ﺭﻣـﺰﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻪ ﺷـﻜﻠﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻴﺎﻭﺭﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻓﻢ ﭼﻪ ﮔﻔـﺘﻢ ﻭ ﭼـﻪ ﻓﻬﻤﺎﻧـﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﺣـﻲ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﻲ )‪137 (1‬‬

‫ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼً ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺁﺩﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺖ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻣـﻲﻓﻬﻤﺎﻧـﺪ‪ .‬ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﮔﻔﺘـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﺣﻲ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑـﻪ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻨـﺎ ﺁﻣـﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪:‬‬
‫»ﻓَﺨَﺮَﺝ‪ ‬ﻋ‪‬ﻠﻲ ﻗَﻮ‪‬ﻣ‪‬ﻪ ﻣ‪‬ﻦَ ﺍﻟْﻤ‪‬ﺤ‪‬ﺮﺍﺏِ ﻓَﺎَﻭ‪‬ﺣﻲ ﺍ‪‬ﻟَﻴ‪‬ﻬِﻢ‪ ‬ﺍَﻥْ ﺳ‪‬ﺒ‪‬ﺤ‪‬ﻮﺍ ﺑ‪‬ﻜْـﺮَﺓً ﻭ‪ ‬ﻋ‪‬ﺸ‪‬ـﻴ‪‬ﺎً«‪ 1.‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺯﻛﺮﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﺯﻛﺮﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺮﺍﺑﺶ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻣﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ ـــ‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺎﺩﺕ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺎﺩﺕﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺳـﺨﻦ ﮔﻔـﺘﻦ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲﺩﺍﻧﺴﺘﻨﺪ ــ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻬﻤﺎﻧـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺗﺴـﺒﻴﺢ ﺧـﺪﺍﻱ‬
‫ﮔﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺷﺎﻣﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻴﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠـﺎ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺒﻴـﺮ ﻛـﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺯﻛﺮﻳﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪» :‬ﻓَﺎَﻭ‪‬ﺣﻲ ﺍ‪‬ﻟَﻴ‪‬ﻬِﻢ‪ .«‬ﻭﺣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻣﺰﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻬﻤﺎﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺷﺎﻣﮕﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪﺍً ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡ ﻗﻠﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﻄﻠﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﻣﺰﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻝ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺍﻓﺘﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻠﺒﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﻓﻬﻤﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؛ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡ ﻗﻠﺒـﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻥﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺯﻧﺒﻮﺭ ﻋﺴﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫»ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍَﻭ‪‬ﺣﻲ ﺭ‪‬ﺑ‪‬ﻚ‪ ‬ﺍ‪‬ﻟَﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﱠﺤ‪‬ﻞِ ﺍَﻥِ ﺍﻟﺘﱠﺨ‪‬ﺬﻱ ﻣ‪‬ﻦَ ﺍﻟْﺠِﺒﺎﻝِ ﺑ‪‬ﻴ‪‬ﻮﺗﺎً ﻭ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ـﻦَ ﺍﻟﺸﱠـﺠ‪‬ﺮِ ﻭ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ﻤ‪‬ـﺎ‬
‫ﻳ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﺮِﺷُﻮﻥ«‪ 2.‬ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻧﺒﻮﺭ ﻋﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣـﻲ ﻛـﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻬـﺎﻡ ﻛـﺮﺩ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻻﻧﻪﻫﺎﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻮﻩ ﺑﺴﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻳـﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺑﺴـﺖﻫـﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻓﺮﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﺎﻥ‪» .‬ﺍَﻭ‪‬ﺣﻲ ﺍ‪‬ﻟَﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﱠﺤ‪‬ﻞِ« ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻧﺒـﻮﺭ ﻋﺴـﻞ ﺍﻟﻬـﺎﻡ ﻛـﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :11‬ﭘﺲ ﺯﻛﺮﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺮﺍﺏ )ﻋﺒﺎﺩﺕ( ﺑﺮ ﻗﻮﻣﺶ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻣﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺻﺒﺢ ﻭ ﺷﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺴﺒﻴﺢ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﺯ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ«‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﺤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :68‬ﻭ ﺧﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻧﺒﻮﺭ ﻋﺴﻞ ﻭﺣـﻲ ﻛـﺮﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻛـﻮﻩﻫـﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘـﺎﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﻘﻒﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻓﻴﻊ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﮔﻴﺮ«‪.‬‬
‫‪ 138‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ‪» :‬ﺍ‪‬ﺫﺍ ﺯ‪‬ﻟْﺰِﻟَﺖ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﺎَﺭ‪‬ﺽ‪ ‬ﺯِﻟْﺰﺍﻟَﻬـﺎ‪ .‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍَﺧْﺮَﺟ‪‬ـﺖ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْـﺎَﺭ‪‬ﺽ‪ ‬ﺍَﺛْﻘﺎﻟَﻬـﺎ‪ .‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻗـﺎﻝَ‬
‫ﻚ َﺍﻭ‪‬ﺣـﻲ ﻟَﻬـﺎ«‪ 1.‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺙ َﺍﺧْﺒﺎﺭ‪‬ﻫـﺎ‪ .‬ﺑِـ َﺎ ﱠﻥ ‪‬ﺭﺑ‪‬ـ ‪‬‬
‫ﺍ ْﻟ ‪‬ﺎﻧْﺴﺎ ُﻥ ﻣﺎﻟَﻬـﺎ‪ .‬ﻳ ‪‬ﻮ ‪‬ﻣﺌ‪‬ـ ‪‬ﺬ ُﺗﺤ‪‬ـ ‪‬ﺪ ُ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺘﺎﺧﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥﮔﺎﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻜﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﺁﻧﭽـﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻣﻲﺭﻳﺰﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﭼﻪ ﺧﺒﺮ ﺍﺳـﺖ!؟ ﭼـﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦﻃﻮﺭ ﺷﺪ؟ ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑـﻪ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﻣـﺰ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ؟ ﺑـﻪ ﻭﺣـﻲ‪» :‬ﺑِـﺎَﻥﱠ ﺭ‪‬ﺑ‪‬ـﻚ‪‬‬
‫ﺍَﻭ‪‬ﺣﻲ ﻟَﻬﺎ«‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻭﺣـﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣـﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻤﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻫﻤـﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻨﺔ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺧﺒﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬـﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﻣﺰﻱ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﺷـﺎﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺮﺍﻁ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺸﺮ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻴﻦ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﻱ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﻭﺣﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑـﺮ ﺍﻳـﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻨـﻲ ﺍﺻـﻠﻲ ﻛﻠﻤـﻪ ﻋـﺎﻡﺗـﺮ ﻭ‬
‫ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻧﻲﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﻣـﺎ ﻣﺴـﻠﻤﺎﻥﻫـﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ »ﻭﺣﻲ«‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﻲِ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑـﻪ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺫﻫﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻲﺭﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺮﻭﺵ ﻏﻴﺒﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻭﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﻱ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺁﻥ‪.‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ‪» :5-1‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺨﺖﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﺔ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻟﺮﺯﻩ ﺩﺭﺁﻳـﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺧﻮﻳﺶ )ﻛﻪ ﮔﻨﺞﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺕ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ( ﻫﻤـﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﻝ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺍﻓﻜﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ )ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﺯ( ﺁﺩﻣﻲ )ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻁ ﺣﻴـﺮﺕ ﻭ ﺍﺿـﻄﺮﺍﺏ ( ﮔﻮﻳـﺪ‪ :‬ﺯﻣـﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﭼﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ؟ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﺧﻮﻳﺶ ﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﻣﻲﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪ .‬ﻛـﻪ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡ ﻛﻨﺪ )ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺨﻦ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭﺵ ﺁﮔﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ(«‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﻲ )‪139 (1‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﻣﺰﻱ ﻭ ﺳﺮّﻱ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﻪ ﺗﺼـﻮ‪‬ﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﭘﻴـﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ؟ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻜﺮّﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳـﺆﺍﻝ ﺑـﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺘـﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻭ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻭ ﭼﺮﺍ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘـﻪ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﻭﺣـﻲ‬
‫ﭼﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺫﻫﻦ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻬﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠـﺐ ﺁﻣـﺎﺩﻩ ﺷـﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺨﻦ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟـﻪ ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣـﻮﻥ ﻣـﺎ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳـﻚ ﺳﻠﺴـﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺳﺘﺪ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﻱ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻣﻲﮔﻴـﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﻱ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺷـﻜﻞﻫـﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧـﺎﮔﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺳﺘﺪ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻻﻥ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻪﺍﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻻﻣـﭗ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪﺭﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺭﻭﺷـﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﻣـﻲﺩﻫـﺪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻜﺎﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺴــﺎﻣﻲ ﻛــﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳــﻦ ﺍﺗــﺎﻕ ﻗــﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧــﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳــﻚ ﻧــﻮﻉ ﻋﻜــﺲﺍﻟﻌﻤــﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻀﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﺎﺑﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻮﺍ ﻭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﮔﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻩﻫـﺎﻳﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﮔﺎﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﻓـﺮﺍﻭﺍﻥ ﻣـﻲﺩﻫـﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﭼﻴـﺰﻱ ﻣـﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘـﻪ ﺗـﺎ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺻـﺪﺩ ﺟﺴـﺖﻭﺟـﻮ ﻭ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺠﻜﺎﻭﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﻟﻪﻫﺎ ﭼﻪﻗﺪﺭ ﻭﺳـﻴﻊ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻠﺪﺍﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺷﻤﺎﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻧﺶ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺳﺘﺪﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؛ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻀﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺧﺎﻙ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺁﺏ‪ .‬ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﮔﻴـﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﻴﺰﻫـﺎ ﻣـﻲﺩﻫـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﻀـﺎ ﻧـﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻏـﺬﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﻀﺎ ﺑﻮﻱ ﻣﻌﻄﺮ ﻣﻲﺩﻫـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺷـﻤﺎ ﭼﻴـﺰﻱ ﻣـﻲﮔﻴـﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷـﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺁﺏ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺁﺏ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴـﺪ؟ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺏ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻣﻲﺍﻧﮕﻴﺰﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺏ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫـﻢ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻭ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺁﺏ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﺪ؟ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﮔﻠﺪﺍﻥ ــ ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﮔﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎﻳﻲﺍﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ــ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻮﺍﺯﺵ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻄﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﻣ‪‬ﺔ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻮﺍﺯﺵ ﻣـﻲﺩﻫـﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨـﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺑﻮﻳـﺎﻳﻲ ﺷـﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪ 140‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻧﻮﺍﺯﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺯﺵ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻣﻲﺍﻧﮕﻴﺰﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺏ ﺑﺪﻫﻴـﺪ‪،‬‬


‫ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻏﺬﺍﻳﻲ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻮﺕ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﭘﺮﺳﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌـﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺤـﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤـﻪ ﻧـﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺳﺘﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﻟﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻇﺮﻳﻒ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺒﺎﺩﻟﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ‪ ،‬ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﭼﺸﻤﺎﻧﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﺸﻢ ﺷـﻤﺎ ﻛـﻪ ﺑﺴـﺘﻪ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﭼﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺫﻫﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﻲﺷـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣـﻦ ﻧﺎﮔﻬـﺎﻥ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑـﺮ‬
‫ﭼﺸﻤﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﻡ‪ .‬ﭼﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ؟ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑـﺮ ﭼﺸـﻢ ﺷـﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺫﻫﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﺸـﻤﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣـﻲﻳﺎﺑﻴـﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻳـﺎﻓﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ ﺩﺍﺭﻳـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﻱﺷـﻌﻮﺭ ﺍﺳـﺖ ـــ ﻣﻮﺟـﻮﺩﺍﺗﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺷﻌﻮﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ــ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﻱﺷﻌﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧـﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘـﺶ ﺑﺴـﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻼﻗـﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ ﺍﻳﻨﻬـﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺷـﻤﺎ ﺍﮔـﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﻍ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﭼﻪ ﺣـﺪ ﺷـﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﺔ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﻍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧـﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺁﺏ ﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺸﻤﺶ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻮﻳﻴﺪﻧﺶ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ ،‬ﻇـﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻧﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﻳﺶ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﻧـﻪ ﻣـﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧـﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨـﺪ ﻭ ﻧـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻮ ﺩﺭﻙ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻇﺮﻑ ﺩﺍﻧﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻇـﺮﻑ ﺁﺏ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺎﺭﺵ ﻣﻲﮔﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺁﺏ ﻛﻨﺎﺭﺵ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻍ ﺗﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ؟ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﻱ ﺷﻌﻮﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑـﺎ ﻣﺤـﻴﻂ ﺍﺟﺘﻤـﺎﻋﻲ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﻲ )‪141 (1‬‬

‫ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﺔ ﺣﻴﺎﺕ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﻭﺍﺑﺴـﺘﻪ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦﻛـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﻋﺎﻟﻲﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻣﺘﺮﻗﻲﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻧﻘـﺶ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﻭ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺍﻭ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺣﺴﺎﺱﺗﺮ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻣـﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧـﺪ ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓـﺖﻫـﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻴﺶ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲﻫـﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﻡﻫـﺎﻱ ﺁﮔـﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻲ ﺩﺭﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻭ ﭘﺮﺳﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﮔﺮﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﺔ ﺣﻴﺎﺕ ﻧـﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﻡﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻣـﻲﺑﻴﻨـﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺼﺮﻱ؛ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺩﺭﻙ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ :‬ﻧـﺮﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺮ‪ ،‬ﺷﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻔﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻮﻳﻴﺪﻥ ﺩﺭﻙ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻄﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﺑﻮ ﻳـﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺵﺑﻮﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﺩﺭﻙ ﻣﻲﻛﻨـﻴﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﻧـﻮﺍﻉ ﺻـﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻤـﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺩﺭﻙ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ :‬ﺷﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻲﻣﺰﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﺦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﺎﺕ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺳﺎﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺧـﻮﺏ ﺩﻗـﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺔ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖﻫـﺎﻱ ﺫﻫـﻦ ﻣﺎﺳـﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤـﻴﻂ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﺠﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫـﺎ‪ ،‬ﭼﺸـﻢ‪ ،‬ﮔـﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺼـﺎﺏ ﻻﻣﺴـﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳـﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻮﻳﻴـﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳـﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﭼﺸﻴﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣـﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨـﺪ ﻣﻴـﺎﻥ ﻣـﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺤـﻴﻂ ﺭﺍﺑﻄـﺔ‬
‫ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺤﺼﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎﺳﺖ؟ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣـﻲﺗـﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑـﺎ ﭼﺸـﻢ ﻭ‬
‫‪ 142‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﻡﻫﺎﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻻﻣﺴﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺼـﺎﺏ ﻻﻣﺴـﻪ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ؟ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﭼـﻪ ﺟـﻮﺍﺑﻲ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ؟ ﺁﻳـﺎ ﻭﺳـﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﺒـﺎﻁ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛـﻲ ﻣﻴـﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺟـﻮﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻧﺶ ﻣﻨﺤﺼﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﻲﻧﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻮﺍﺑﺶ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺳﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫* ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻼً ﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺎً‪ .‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﺩﻭ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺑﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﺑﺮﻭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻭ ﺩﺧﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺞ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ؟‬
‫* ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﻍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﻮﺍﺱ ﭘﻨﺞﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭼﻪ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ؟‬
‫* ﻣﺜﻼً ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﭼﻪ؟‬
‫* ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺣﺲ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﺩﺛﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﻠﺒﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻗـﺎﺕ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺲ ﺷﺸﻢ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺶ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻣﻲﺍﻓﺘﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻳـﻦﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﺧﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﻲ )‪143 (1‬‬

‫* ﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻱ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺧـﺎﺭﺝ ﻣـﻲﮔﻴـﺮﺩ‪،‬‬


‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺫﻫﻦ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﻧﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺸﺄ ﺁﻥ ﺣﻮﺍﺱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺮﺳﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻄﻠﺒﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﻲ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﻢ؟‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺷﻌﺒﻪ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻋﺶ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻼً ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺷﺎﺧﺺﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﻲﻧﻮﻳﺴـﻴﻢ‪ .1 :‬ﺍﻟﻬـﺎﻡﻫـﺎﻱ ﻗﻠﺒـﻲ؛ ‪.2‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﺎﺕ ﻋﻘﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺑﺘـﺪﺍ ﺗﻮﺿـﻴﺢ ﺩﻫـﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗـﺎ ﺑﺒﻴﻨـﻴﻢ ﭼـﻪﻗـﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﻠﺒﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍَﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻜﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺫﻫﻨـﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻗـﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻥ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﻲ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺣﺲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺲ ﺷﺸﻢ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡ ﻗﻠﺒﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ »ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﺕ ﺷﺪ« ﺗﻌﺒﻴـﺮ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﺩ ﻭ ﮔـﺎﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻫﻤﺪﺭﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﺮﻧﮕـﻲ ﺁﻥ »ﺗﻠـﻪﭘـﺎﺗﻲ« ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻋﺎﻃﻔـﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺩﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﮕﺮﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﭘﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﻋـﺎﻃﻔﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘـﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﻋﺎﻃﻔﻲ؛ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻋﺎﻃﻔﻲ‪ .‬ﮔﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﻧـﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﺮﺽ؛ ﺩﺭﺩﻣﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻠﻪﭘﺎﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﺪﺭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺩﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻫﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﺍﻓﺘﺪ ﻭ ﺧﻴﺎﻝﺑﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻡﺑﺎﻓﻲ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻭﻍ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻑﻫـﺎﻱ ﻣـﻦ ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﺩﻱ ﺩﺭﺑـﺎﺭﺓ ﺁﻥ ﺯﻳـﺎﺩ ﭘﻴـﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻩ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻜﻨﻢ‪ ،‬ﻧﻪ ﻣﻲﭘﺬﻳﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻧـﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 144‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻣــﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣــﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻳــﻦ ﺗﻠــﻪﭘــﺎﺗﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺣﺴــﺎﺱ ﻫﻤــﺪﺭﺩﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺩﻭﺭ ﻛــﻪ ﻣﻜــﺮﺭ‬


‫ﺩﺍﺳﺘﺎﻥﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺑﻴﮕﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﺩﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﺷﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺮﺩﻡ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﺓ ﺷﻚ ﻣﻲﻧﮕﺮﻳﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦﻛـﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺣﺎﺩﺛﻪﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭﻻً ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑـﺮﺍﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎً ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﻓﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻬـﺎﻳﻲ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻄﻠـﺐ ﻛـﺎﻓﻲ ﺑـﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺳﺘﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻫﻞ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻭﺭ ــ ﺧـﻮﺩﺵ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﺮﺑﺎﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ــ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦﮔﻮﻧـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺗﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﺭﮔﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺮﺗﺤﺮّﻙ ﻭ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎً ﺑﻪ ﻛﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺕ ﻣﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫)ﭼﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺳـﻴﺎ ﻭ ﭼـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﻭﭘـﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻣـﻲﮔﻔـﺖ‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣـﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻏـﺎﺯ ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ‬
‫ﺯﻧﺎﺷﻮﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺴﺮ ﻭ ﺑﭽﻪﻫﺎﻳﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴـﺐ ﻭ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺕ ﻣﻲﺭﻓﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﺧﺪﺍﺣﺎﻓﻈﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﻭ ﻣﻲﺭﻓﺘﻢ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﺗـﺎ ﺯﻣـﺎﻧﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻡ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﻧﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﻲ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻔﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﺗﻲ ﺣﻮﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻑﻫﺎ ﭘﺮﺕ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻢ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺯﻭﺩﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻡ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭﻡ ﺗـﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩﺍﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺷﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺩﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻭﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﭼـﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻡ‪) .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﻏﻠﻂ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺑـﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺕ ﻣﻲﺭﻓـﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗـﺎ ﻣﻮﻗـﻊ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤـﻊ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻭ ﺳﻼﻡ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻢ ﺧﺪﺍﺣﺎﻓﻈﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﻲ )‪145 (1‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴـﺎﻓﺮﺕ ﻫـﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺑـﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧـﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺯﻱ ﻛـﻪ ﺑﻠـﻴﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﺮﻓﺘﻢ ﻭ ﭘﺮﻭﺍﺯ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻫـﻢ ﻧـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻫـﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ــ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ــ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﻨـﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﺗﺨﺎﻧـﻪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﺩﻡ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻼﻥ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﻳـﻚ ﻭﺳـﻴﻠﻪﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻭﺩﮔﺎﻩ ﻣﻌﻄﻞ ﻧﺸﻮﻡ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨـﺰﻝ ﺑﻴـﺎﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺗـﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦﻛـﻪ ﻳـﻚ ﺑـﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺗﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﻌﻤـﻮﻝ ﭼﻨـﺪ ﺭﻭﺯﻱ ﺁﻧﺠـﺎ ﺑـﻮﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺭﻫـﺎﻳﻢ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺘﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻃﺒـﻖ ﻣﻌﻤـﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺩﺍﺩﻡ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﺷﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻼﻥ ﭘﺮﻭﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻬﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﻢ ﺗـﺎ ﻣﺎﺷـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﺷﺐ ﺑـﻪ ﻫﺘـﻞ ﺭﻓـﺘﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳـﻔﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻤـﺎﺩﻱ ﺷـﺮﻕ ﻭ ﻏـﺮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺩﻟـﻢ ﺷـﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﻧﺎﮔﻮﺍﺭﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺳـﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﺩﺛـﻪﺍﻱ ﻧـﺎﮔﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻫـﺮ ﻗـﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻢ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺭﺍﻡ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﺷـﺐ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﻣـﻲﺭﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠـﻴﻂ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤـﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺧﺒﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﺍﻡ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﻢ ﻭ ﻓـﺮﺩﺍ ﺷـﺐ ﺁﻧﺠـﺎ ﻫﺴـﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳـﺪﻡ ﺍﺻـﻼً‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺭﺍﻡ ﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺩﺷﻲ ﻛـﺮﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻪ ﻫـﺮ ﺷـﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻮﺭ ﺩﻝ ﻣﻨﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺴ‪‬ـﺮ ﻧﺸـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﻢ‪ :‬ﺧﻮﺏ ﭼﺎﺭﻩﺍﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﻠﻔﻨﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻢ ﭼﻪ ﺧﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗـﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﺍﻗﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻓﻜﺮﻡ ﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑـﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻲﺳـﺎﺑﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﮔﻔـﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﺎً ﺑﻪ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺷﺐ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺧـﺎﻧﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﺑﻴـﺪﻩ ﺑـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﺏ ﺑﻴﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻣﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺧﺒﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﺷﺐ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻧﺎﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻪ ﺧﺒﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻲﻛـﻨﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺖ‪ :‬ﭼﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﻣﮕﺮ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻲ؟ ﮔﻔـﺘﻢ‪ :‬ﻧـﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﺠــﺎ ﺗﻠﻔــﻦ ﻛــﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﺳــﺎﻥ ﺑــﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺍﺳــﺘﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺷــﻤﺎ ﺧﺒــﺮﻱ ﺑﮕﻴــﺮﻡ‪ .‬ﺑــﻪ ﺍﻭ‬
‫‪ 146‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻧﮕﻔﺘﻢ ﭼﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﮔﻔﺘﻢ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺍﺳـﺖ؟ ﺑﭽـﻪﻫـﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺸـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﻳﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﭽـﻪﻫـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻮﭼـﻚ ﻭ ﺑـﺰﺭگ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩﺷـﺎﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﮕﺎﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﻭ ﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺸﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﻜـﺮﻡ ﺗـﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻱ ﺁﺭﺍﻡ ﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺸﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷـﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﻳﺪﻡ ﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺩﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺭﺍﻡ ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻧﺎﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘـﻪ ﺗﺨﻔﻴـﻒ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﺶ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﺷﺐ ﻛﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺗﻬـﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺁﻣﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﺮﻭﺩﮔﺎﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺪﻡ ﺩﻳﺪﻡ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﻛـﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﺸـﻪ ﻳـﺎ ﭘﺴـﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﻨﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺁﻣﺪﻧﺪ ﻣﺮﺍ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻭﺩﮔﺎﻩ ﺁﻣﺪﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻧﮕﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤـﺎﻥﺟـﺎ ﻣـﺮﺍ ﺩﭼـﺎﺭ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﻧﮕﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺆﺍﻝﺁﻣﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚﻳﻚ ﭼﻬﺮﻩﻫﺎ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩﻫﺎ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻢ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺧﻮﺏ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﺩﺛـﻪﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻻ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ـ ﭘﻨﺞ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺩﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﻦ ﺁﻣﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺁﻣـﺪﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣـﻲﮔﻔﺘـﻴﻢ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻨﻴﺪﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﺎﻛﺖ ﺑﻮﺩﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺳﺨﻨﻲ ﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻝ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ .‬ﻧـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﺮﺃﺕ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﺑﭙﺮﺳﻢ ﭼﻪ ﺧﺒﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺟﺮﺃﺕ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻟﺐ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺨﻦ ﮔﺸﺎﻳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﭼﻪ ﺧﺒﺮ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺗـﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻜـﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻡﺁﺭﺍﻡ ﻣـﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻓﺮﺩﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺷـﺒﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﻣـﻦ ﻧﮕـﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻡ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﺩﺛـﺔ ﻧـﺎﮔﻮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻜـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﺯﻧـﺪﺍﻧﻢ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﺳـﺖ ﻫﻤـﺮﺍﻩ ﺑـﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻗـﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺒﻠـﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺻـﻼً‬
‫ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻫﻴﭻﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻼً ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺷـﺐ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺻﺮﻓﺎً ﺍﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﺍً‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻋﻴﻨﺎً ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺑﻌﻀـﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﻲ )‪147 (1‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻧﺒﺎﺷ ﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻛـﻞ ﻣﺴـﺄﻟﻪ ﺩﻗﻴـﻖ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻳـﻚ ﺭﻭﻳـﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻪﭘﺎﺗﻲ ﻭ ﻫﻤﺪﺭﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﻣﻌﻠـﻮﻡ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﺩ ﻣﻴـﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺍﺵ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻮ ﻣـﺒﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣـﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧـﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻮﺍﺱ ﭘﻨﺠﮕﺎﻧـﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻤﺎﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻩ ﺟـﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺡ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺑـﻮﻁ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ؛‬
‫ﺑﺤﺜﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ »ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ« ﺑﺒﺮﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﻭ ﭼﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﺸﺄ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﺑﺤﺜﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺤﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﺭﺍﺑﻄـﺔ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛـﻲ ﻣﻴـﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺤـﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺣﻮﺍﺱ ﭘﻨﺠﮕﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺧـﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﺒﻲ ﺗﻌﺒﻴـﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﺎﺕ ﻋﻘﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻠﮕﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺖ ﻭ ﺷـﻨﺎﺧﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﻭﺳﻴﻌﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻣﻌﺘﻘﺪﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺫﺍﺗﺎً ﻗﺪﺭﻱ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﮔـﺎﻫﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺁﮔـﺎﻫﻲﻫـﺎﻱ ﻗﺒـﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﺮﺑـﻪ ﮔﺬﺍﺷـﺘﻪﺍﻧـﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ‬
‫ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻧـﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺸـﺎﻫﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﻴﻨـﻲ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﻱ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲﻫﺎ ﺣﺘـﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳـﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲﻫﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺏ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﻋﻠﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻟﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﻓﻬﻤﺪ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻋﻠﺖ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻣﻲﺷـﻮﺩ؟ ﭼﮕﻮﻧـﻪ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻓﻬﻤﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻋﻠﺖ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺷـﻤﺎ ﻣـﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴـﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭼﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴـﺪ؟ ﺩﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻴﺒﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﻭ ﻣﻲﺑﺮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ 148‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺔ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷـﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺭﻭﻳـﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻧﺠـﺎﻡ‬


‫ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺣﺲ ﻭ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺪﻩﺍﻳﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺍﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠـﻪﮔﻴـﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻜﺮ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻳـﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟـﻲ ﺷـﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ )ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻴﺒﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺑﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴـﺪ ﺩﺭﻣـﻲﺁﻭﺭﻳـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻲﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻳﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﺎﺻـﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄـﺔ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﻋﻤـﺎﻝ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻋﻠﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻧـﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴ‪‬ـﺖ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺖ‪) ،‬ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻴـﺐ ﺑـﺮﺩﻥ(‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴـﺪ‪) ،‬ﻛﻠﻴـﺪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻔﻞ‪) ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺯﺩﻥ(‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﻳـﻚ ﻣﻌﻨـﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳـﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ‪ .‬ﻗﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻠﻤﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﻫﻢ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﻴﭻﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﺑﻮﺩ؟ ﻫﻴﭻﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻛﻠﻤـﺎﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺣﻮﺍﺱ ﺩﺭﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺲ ﻻﻣﺴﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﺎﺳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺣﺲ ﺑﺎﺻﺮﻩ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﺎﺳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺳـﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻴـﺐ ﺑـﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺎ ﺣـﻮﺍﺱ ﺩﺭﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ‪ .‬ﻗﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﻤـﻪ ﺍﻣـﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻣﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺲ ﺩﺭﻙ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﻲ )‪149 (1‬‬

‫ﻋﻠﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺳﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﺐ ﺷﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﺖ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﻴـﺎﻥ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧـﺪﻥ ﻛﻠﻴـﺪ ﻭ ﺑـﺎﺯ ﺷـﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺷـﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺠـﺎ ﺩﺭﻙ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ؟ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺣﻮﺍﺱ ﺩﺭﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﻲ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ؟ ﭼﺸـﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﭼﻪ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ؟ ﺩﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻛـﺖ ﺩﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧـﺪﻥ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﺛﺮﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴ‪‬ﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧـﺪﻥ ﻛﻠﻴـﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑـﺎ ﻛﻠﻤـﺔ ﺳـﺒﺐ ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﻲﺍﻱ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭﻙ ﻛﻨـﺪ؟‬
‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻮﺍﺱ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻧﻴﺴـﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻙ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺫﻫﻦ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ــ ﻳﺎ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻋﻘـﻞ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ ـــ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛـﻲ ﺑﺮﺗـﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺣـﺲ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺧـﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻙ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﺎﺕ ﻋﻘﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ‪ :‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺤﺼﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﻲ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺫﻫﻨﻲ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﺣـﻮﺍﺱ ﺑﺴـﻲ ﮔﺴـﺘﺮﺩﻩﺗـﺮ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﻮﺍﺱ ﭘﻨﺠﮕﺎﻧـﺔ ﻇـﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻳـﻚ ﺳﻠﺴـﻠﻪ ﺣـﻮﺍﺱ ﻳـﺎ ﻳـﻚ ﺳﻠﺴـﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﺪﺍﻱ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻩ ﺩﻟﺘﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺩ ﺩﻝ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺠﺎ ﺍﺣﺴـﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ؟ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪﺍﻱ؟ ﭼﺸﻢ‪ ،‬ﮔﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳـﺖ ﻛﺸـﻴﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﻧـﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺩ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﭘﻴﻜﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻚ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﺣـﺲ ﺑـﺎﻃﻨﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻳـﻚ ﻧـﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺣﺴﻲ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺣﺲ ﺷﻤﺮﺩﻩ ﺷـﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺣﻮﺍﺱ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﻨﺞ ﻧﻤﻮﻧـﻪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ؛ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫‪ 150‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺗﺎ ﻏﻠﻂ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭼﻪﺑﺴﺎ ﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﺣﺲ ﺑﺎﻃﻨﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫـﻢ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻲ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺣﺴـﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺩ ﺩﺭﻭﻧـﻲ‬
‫ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺯﺑﺮﻱ ﻭ ﻧﺮﻣﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ ﺑـﺎ ﺩﺳـﺖ ﺍﺣﺴـﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻋﻠﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﺗﻠﻪﭘﺎﺗﻲ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓـﺖ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﺒـﺮ ﻧـﺎﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻳـﻚ ﺷـﻮﺭ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺩﻝ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻗﺒﻴـﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﻮﺍﺱ ﺑﺎﻃﻨﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺟﺪﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺤﺚ ﭼﻪ ﺷﺪ؟ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻋـﺎﻟﻢ ﺑـﺎ ﻳﻜـﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺳـﺘﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻗﺴـﻤﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺕ‪) ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺷـﻌﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤـﻴﻂ ﻣـﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺸـﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲﻧـﺎﻣﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓـﺖﻫـﺎ ﺍﻧـﻮﺍﻉ ﻭ ﺍﻗﺴـﺎﻡ‬
‫ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﭼﺸﻢ‪ ،‬ﮔﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺯﺑـﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺣـﺲ‬
‫ﻻﻣﺴﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻧﺞ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺲ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻥ ﻛـﺞ ﻫﺴـﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳـﺖ ﻫﺴـﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﭼﺸﻤﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺜـﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻫﻤـﺔ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺣـﻮﺍﺱ ﺑﻴـﺮﻭﻥ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜـﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﻠﺒﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻪﭘﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻘﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﻲ )‪(2‬‬
‫ﺑِﺴ‪‬ﻢِ ﺍﷲِ ﺍﻟﺮﱠﺣ‪‬ﻤﻦِ ﺍﻟﺮﱠﺣﻴﻢ‪‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﻭ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﻭﺳﻴﻊ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺣﺴـﺎﺱ ﻭ ﺧـﻼﻕ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺟﻠﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛـﻪ ﺭﻩﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺭﺍﻩﻫـﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧـﺎﮔﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺟـﻮﺩﺍﺗﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔـﻮﺵ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺷـﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻨـﺎ ﺑـﺮ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺻـﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑ‪‬ﺮﺩ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺧـﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺣـﺲ ﺷـﻨﻮﺍﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﻀﻲﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻲﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻨﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﮔـﻮﺵ ﻛﺴـﻲ ﺳـﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻣﻌﻴ‪‬ﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺻﻼً ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺟﺎﻟﺐﺗﺮ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺸـﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫـﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻌﻴ‪‬ﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪ .‬ﻣـﺜﻼً‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻲﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻠﻨـﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣـﺮﻭﻑ ﺏ ﻭ پ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺸـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺧـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻـﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻭﺟﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﻴ‪‬ﻦ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻋـﺪﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴ‪‬ﻦ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺳﮓ ﺑﺎ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟـﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻨﻮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑ‪‬ﺮﺩ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷـﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺑ‪‬ـﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺳﮓ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﻣﺎ ﻭ ﺳﮓ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺭﻳـﻢ ﻭ‬
‫‪ 154‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﻮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺸﻨﻴﺪﻡ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺳﮓ ﺷـﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳـﺎ‬


‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻢ ﺑﮕـﻮﻳﻢ ﻣـﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨـﺪ ﻓـﻼﻥ ﺻـﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺳـﮓ ﺷـﻨﻴﺪ؛ ﭼـﻪ ﭼﻴﺰﻫـﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ! ﻣﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻡ ﻧﺸﻨﻴﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﺩ؟ ﺁﻳـﺎ‬
‫ﺍﮔــﺮ ﻛﺴــﻲ ﺍﻳــﻦ ﺣــﺮﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺯﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣــﺮﻑ ﻋﺎﻗﻼﻧــﻪﺍﻱ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺍﺳــﺖ ﻳــﺎ ﺣــﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﻼﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ؟ ﺁﻳﺎ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺨﻦ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻬﻞ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻳـﺎ ﻧﺎﺷـﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﻗﺖ ﻭ ﻫﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺫﻛﺎﻭﺕ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺮﻛﻲ ﺍﻭ؟ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﻼﻩ ﺳﺮﺵ ﻧﺮﻭﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﮔﻮﻟﺶ ﻧﺰﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﻧﻜـﺎﺭ ﺟﺎﻫﻼﻧـﻪ ﺍﺳـﺖ؟ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻜﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﺷـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮﻛـﻲ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﺎﺷـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻏﻔﻠـﺖ ﻭ ﺑـﻲﺗـﻮﺟﻬﻲ ﻭ ﻛﻤـﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻠﻪ ﺻـﺪﺍﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺴـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺳـﮓ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻨﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻨﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﻨﺎﻳﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻠﺪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻛﺮﻳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮕﺎﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺒﺎﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺟـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ــ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺭﻧﮓ ــ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦﻗﺪﺭ ﺯﻳﺒـﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺭﻧﮓﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻳﺒﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷـﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺖ؟ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺩﻭﺧﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺭﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺩﺍﺏﺗﺮ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺸﻨﮓﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺻـﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻠﺪ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺎﻭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﮔﺎﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺭﻧﮕﺎﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻭ ﻫـﺮ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻫـﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﻨـﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺭﻧﮓﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷـﻨﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺍﻣـﻮﺍﺝ ﺧـﺎﺹ ﻭ ﺷـﻤﺎﺭﻩﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻲ ﺭﻧـﮓ ﺳـﻔﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳـﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺯﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺳـﺒﺰ ﻭ ﻗﺮﻣـﺰ ﻭ ﺁﺑـﻲ‪ ،‬ﭼﺸـﻢﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟــﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﭼﺸــﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻧــﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﻨــﺎﻳﻲ ﻳــﻚ ﺟــﻮﺭ ﻛــﺎﺭ ﻧﻤــﻲﻛﻨــﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﻲ )‪155 (2‬‬

‫ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻋﻜﺲﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻳﻜـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ‬
‫ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﻴﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻫﺮ ﻛـﺲ ﭼﺸـﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﻮ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻢ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﻴﻨﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻭ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ ﭼﻪ ﺣﺮﻑﻫﺎ! ﺧـﻮﺏ ﻣـﻦ ﭼﺸـﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗـﻮ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﻴﻨﻢ؟ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑ‪‬ﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﻳﺪ ﭼﺸﻢﻫﺎ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﻡﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌـﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﺸﺮ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﻡﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺣﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﺑ‪‬ﺮﺩ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻙ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﮔﺴـﺘﺮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ؟ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﺷﻤﺎﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴـﺪ ‪ 173‬ﺗـﺎ‪ .‬ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺮ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ ﮔﻮﺷـﺔ ﺁﺳـﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ 895‬ﺗﺎ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﭼﺮﻧﺪ ﻛﻤﺘـﺮ ﺑـﺰﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣـﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺣﻀـﻮﺭ ﺩﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻤﺎﺭﻡ‪5 ،4 ،3 ،2 ،1 .‬؛‬
‫‪ 173‬ﺗﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺟـﻮﺍﺏ ﺷـﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸـﺖ ﺗﻠﺴـﻜﻮپ ﻣـﻲ ﺑـﺮﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺣﺎﻻ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﻦ ﻭ ﺑﺸﻤﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ‪ 895 ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻴﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺒﻴﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﭼﻴﺰ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻴـﺪﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﺪ؟ ﻧﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺸﻤﻲ ﺑـﺎﺯ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﺔ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﺩﻳـﺪﻥ‬
‫ــ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭻ ــ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﻴﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﻫﺴﺖ؟ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﻭ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺩﺳﺮﻱ ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨـﺪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻲﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻭﻟﻲ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺑﻨﺪﻩ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤـﻲﺑﻴﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ 156‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﺳﻜﻮپ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻـﻔﺤﺔ ﻛﺎﻏـﺬ ﻧﮕـﺎﻩ‬


‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﻪ ﻏﻮﻏﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭼـﻪ ﻓﺎﺻـﻠﻪﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦﻗـﺪﺭ ﻓﺎﺻـﻠﻪﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﻧﺸﻤﻨﺪ ﺩﻗﻴـﻖ ﺑﭙﺮﺳـﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﭘﺮ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻧﺠـﺎﻳﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺧـﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﺩﺍﺭ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ‪ 1×1‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﺎﺭﺩ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﭘ‪‬ﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺴـﺒﺖ ﺧـﺎﻟﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1×1‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴـﺎﺭﺩ ﻫـﻢ ﻛﻤﺘـﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻻﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻚ ﻓﻀـﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻄـﺮﺡ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎً ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺪﺍﺷﻨﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﭘﺎﺳـﺨﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺩﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻋﻮﺽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪﻧﺪ‪ :‬ﺧـﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻜﻨﺪ؟ ﻣﻲﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ‪ :‬ﺑﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﺧـﺪﺍ ﻣـﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧـﺪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻛـﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺨﻢ ﻣﺮﻍ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺩﻫﺪ؟ ﻣﻲﮔﻔﺘـﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺧﺪﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻜﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﭘﺲ ﭼﺮﺍ ﮔﻔﺘﻲ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻜﻨﺪ؟ ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﺩﻳﻢ ﻭ ﻣﻲﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛـﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﻣﺤﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦﻛـﻪ ﺧـﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺻﻼ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺷﺪﻧﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻜﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﻤﺔ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺪﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳـﻚ ﻛـﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﺸـﺪﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺏ ﺁﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﺸﺪﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺧﻠﻠـﻲ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﭼـﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﻫﺴﺖ؟ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻟـﻲ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻣﺜـﺎﻝ ﺣـﺎﻻ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻋﻮﺽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﭙﺮﺳﻨﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺨﻢ ﻣﺮﻍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺩﻫـﻴﻢ؟ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺑﮕـﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﺑﻠـﻪ‪ .‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﺟﺪﻳـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺴـﺎﻡ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﻗﺴـﻤﺖ ﻭﺍﻗﻌـ ًﺎ ﭘ‪‬ـﺮ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻲ )‪157 (2‬‬

‫ﻛﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺭ ﭘﻨﺒﻪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﭘﻨﺒﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪﺍﺵ ﭘﺮ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳـﺪ؛ ﻭﻟـﻲ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘِﺮِﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﭘﻨﺒﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻨﺪﻕ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻨﺪﻕ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ‪ .‬ﻛﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻧﻤﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻻﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺩ ﺑﻨّﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺍﻳـﻦﻫﻤـﻪ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪﺍﻱ؟ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻭﺍﷲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﷲ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤـﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭘ‪‬ـﺮ ﻛـﺮﺩﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻜـﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺕ ﺯﺩﻡ؛ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﺳـﻜﻮپ ﺟﻠـﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻧـﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣـﻲﺑﻴﻨـﺪ ﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻱ! ﻋﺠﺐ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻫﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ! ﻫﻤﺔ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺻﻼً ﭘ‪‬ﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻧﻤﻲﺧﻮﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭼﺸﻢ‪ ،‬ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻌـﺎً‬
‫ﻫﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؛ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﻴﻨﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻪ ﺧـﺎﻃﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺑ‪‬ﺮﺩﻱ ﻣﻌﻴ‪‬ﻦ ﺁﻓﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺗﺮ ﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﺑ‪‬ﺮﺩﺵ ﭼﻨـﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﺑـﺮ ﺷـﺪ؛‬
‫ﭼﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﻳﺰﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻭ ﭼﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺏ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﻦ‪ .‬ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺷـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﻨﻴﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻳـﻚ ﺳـﻤﻌﻚ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﺣﺎﻻ ﮔـﻮﺵ ﻛـﻦ‪ .‬ﻣـﻲﺑﻴﻨـﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘـﻲ ﺻـﺪﺍﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻨﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼً ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻤﻌﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭ ﻣـﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧـﺪ‪ .‬ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨـﺪ ﺣـﺎﻻ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ ﮔﻮﺵﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺒﻴﻦ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﻮﻱ؟ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻧﻪ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻨﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻤﻌﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭ ﺑﺒﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﻮﻱ؟ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻨﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨـﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﻮ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺠﺎ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﻮﻱ؟ ﻣﻦ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﺎ ﺳـﻤﻌﻚ ﻫـﻢ ﺩﻗـﺖ ﻛـﺮﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻨﻴﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺰﻳﺴﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷَﺖ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﻲﻫﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻧﻤﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷَﺖ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ژﺍﭘﻦ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻗﺸﻨﮓ ﮔـﻮﺵ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 158‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺑﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﺁﻥﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﻴﺪﻡ ﻛـﻪ ﻓـﻼﻥﻛـﺲ‬


‫ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﻛﻴﻮ ﺳﺨﻨﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺗﻮ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻨﻴﺪﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺁﻣﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻧﻲ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﻮﻟـﻪﻫـﺎﻱ ﺷـﻨﻴﺪﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﭼﻪ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻧﻲ؟ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺍﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑ‪‬ﺮﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧـﺪ ﺁﻧﭽـﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ژﺍﭘـﻦ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺖ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻴﻨﺎً ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﻋﺮﺍﻳﺾ ﺑﻨـﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠـﺎ‪ .‬ﻫـﻴﭻ ﻓﺮﻗـﻲ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ژﺍﭘﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﻮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺎ ﺻـﺪﺍﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﻮﻳﺪ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻮﺝ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺝ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﻣـﻮﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜـﻲ ﺗﺒـﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺝ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻀﺎ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﻘـﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻫﻮﺍ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﻗـﻞ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻣﻮﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﻗﻞ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﮔﺮﻧـﻪ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺟﻨﺎﺏ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﻻﻥ ﺑﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻢ ﺁﻥﻃـﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﭼﺴﺒﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻭ ﮔـﻮﺵ ﺷـﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻫـﻮﺍ ﭘـﺮ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭼﻪ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪ؟ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻧﺎﻗﻞ ﻓﺮﻛـﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻧﺎﻗﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺻـﺪﺍﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺷﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺮﻁ؛ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺑ‪‬ﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻴﻨـﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺷـﻨﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺑـﺎﻻ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑ‪‬ﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻴﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣـﻲﺑﻴﻨـﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﻴﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﻮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻨﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑ‪‬ـﺮﺩ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻠﻪﭘﺎﺗﻲ )ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫـﺪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣـﺎ ﺍﻻﻥ ﺑﺤـﺚ ﻧﻤـﻲﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺪﺍﻡﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﻡﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﺒـﺎﻁ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ(‪ ،‬ﺑ‪‬ـﺮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺳـﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﺩﺛـﻪﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻙ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﻭﺳـﻴﻊﺗـﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻲ )‪159 (2‬‬

‫ﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻪﭘﺎﺗﻲِ ﻭﺳﻴﻊﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑـﻪ ﻗﻠـﺒﺶ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﺩﻟـﺶ ﭼﻴﺰﻫـﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻮ ﺑﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﻘـﻂ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﭼﻴﺰ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺸﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﻳـﺮﺓ ﻫﺴـﺘﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭﻙ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑـﺎﻻ ﻭ ﺑـﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺣﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻓﻌﻼً ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻨﺎﺳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻢ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺛﻤﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣـﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨـﺶ ﺍﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ــ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺳﻴﻢ ــ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺜﺎﻝﻫﺎ ﻛﺎﺳﺘﻢ؛ ﻭﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻲﻛـﻨﻢ ﭼـﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗـﻊ ﺗﻌﻠـﻴﻢ ﺑـﻪ ﺩﺭﺩ ﺷـﻤﺎ ﻣـﻲﺧـﻮﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﺼـﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﺎﺕ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺩﻳﺪﻧﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﻭﺳـﻴﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﻓﺮﺳـﺘﺎﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﺸـﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻴﻞ ﻣﻲﺯﻧـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧـﺎﻙ ﺑﺮﻣـﻲﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﻮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺩﻭﺭ ﻣـﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬـﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻬﻤﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﺎﺕ ﻋﻘﻠﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﺩﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴ‪‬ـﺖ ﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﻳـﻚ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﺭﺍﺑﻄـﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﺮﻳﻲ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻙ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻥ ﮔﻔﺘﻴـﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴ‪‬ﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻌﻘﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻗـﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻠﺘـﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎﻻ‬
‫ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻭﺝ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ؟ ﻋﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻜﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻮﻕﺍﻟﻌـﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﺎﺕ ﺑﺸـﺮ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﺁﻧﭽـﻪ ﺍﻣـﺮﻭﺯ ﻣـﺎ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫‪ 160‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛﺎﺕ ﻣﻲﻓﻬﻤﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻛﺸﻒ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴـﺒﺖ‬


‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻭ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﺩﺭﻙ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳـﺖ؟‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺰﻧﻢ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜـﻲ ﻣـﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴـﺪ ﭼﻴﺰﻫـﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎ ﭼﺸـﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻚ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨـﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺩﻳـﺪﻧﻲﻫـﺎﻱ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜـﻲ‬
‫ﭼﻪﻗﺪﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ؟ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ؟ ﺩﻳﺪﻧﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜـﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﻨـﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﺫﺑـﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳـﺪﻧﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ؟ ﺷـﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺘﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣـﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﺧـﻮﺩ ﺟﺎﺫﺑـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﭼﻴﺰﻫـﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺷـﻤﺎ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻚ ﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪﻩﺍﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻥ ﻗﻄﺐ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﺁﻫﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﺧـﻮﺩﺵ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﺸﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻗﻄﺐ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻚ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺎﺝ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪﮔﻴـﺮﻱ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﭼـﻪﻗـﺪﺭ ﺯﻳـﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺘﻨﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺸـﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺗﺠﺰﻳـﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺤﻠﻴـﻞ‬
‫ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺴﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺸﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺴـﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﺱ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﺶ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺴﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪﮔﻴﺮﻱﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻫﻴﭻﻳـﻚ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﻮﺍﺱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺟﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻳﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺑﺮﺳـﻴﻢ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﺓ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﭼـﻪ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ؟ ﻭﺣـﻲﺍﻱ ﻛـﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻲ )‪161 (2‬‬

‫ﻣﻲﮔﻴـﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣـﻲﺍﻱ ﻛـﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﻣـﻲﮔﻴـﺮﺩ ﻋﺒـﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻳـﻚ ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭ‬


‫ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻧﻲﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻭ ﺷـﻤﺎ ﻧﻤـﻲﺷـﻨﻮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻭ ﮔﺮﻧـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﻭ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﻮﺩ؟ ﺑ‪‬ﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻧﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺑ‪‬ﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﻈﻴـﺮ ﺗﻘﻮﻳـﺖ‬
‫ﺑ‪‬ﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﺓ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﻲ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﺓ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴـﺎﻡﻫـﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻨﻮﻳﻢ ﻛـﻪ ﻗـﺒﻼً‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻨﻴﺪﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﭘﻴﺎﻡﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﻮﻳﻢ ﻧﻪ ﺑـﻲ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳـﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻘـﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺗـﺎ ﺑﺘـﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺻـﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻨﻮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً ﻣﻲﺷﻨﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺯﻣـﺎﻧﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳـﻮ ﮔـﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻨﻮﻡ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً ﻣﻲﺷﻨﻮﻡ؟ ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺳﺨﻨﺮﺍﻧﻲﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﻮﺵ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨـﺪ؟ ﭼﻴـﺰﻱ ﻧﻤـﻲﺷـﻨﻮﻳﺪ؟‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻨﻮﻳﺪ؟ ﺧﻴـﺎﻻﺗﻲ ﺷـﺪﻩﺍﻳـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻨﻮﻳﺪ ﻳـﺎ ﻭﺍﻗﻌـﺎً‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻨﻮﻳﺪ؟ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً ﻣﻲﺷﻨﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺩﻣـﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳـﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍﺩﻳـﻮ ﻣﺤـﺮﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﻔﺖ‪ :‬ﻳﺎﺭﻭ ﺧﻴﺎﻻﺗﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻣﻲﺷـﻨﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﻭﺭ ﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﺎﺩﻩﺍﻳـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻴﺎﻻﺗﻲ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ؟ ﺁﻥ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳـﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮔـﻮﺵ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺨﻨﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﻛﻴﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﻮﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﻻﺗﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳـﺎ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﻲﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻬﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻴﺎﻻﺗﻲ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ؟ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﻻﺗﻲﺍﻧﺪ؟‬
‫ﺁﻥﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً ﮔﻮﺵ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﻻﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﺍﻭ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﭼﻴـﺰﻱ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺩﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﺗﻮﺍﻧﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺧﻴـﺎﻝ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﻣـﻲﺩﻫـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﮔﺮﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺧﻴﺎﻻﺗﻲ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻭ ﻭﺍﻗﻌـﺎً ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﻲ )‪(3‬‬
‫ﺑِﺴ‪‬ﻢِ ﺍﷲِ ﺍﻟﺮﱠﺣ‪‬ﻤﻦِ ﺍﻟﺮﱠﺣﻴﻢ‪‬‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺷﺐ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺸـﺮ ﭘﺮﺗـﻮ ﻣـﻲﺍﻓﻜﻨـﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻋﻠـﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻘـﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭ ﺗـﺎ ﻣﺤﺴـﻮﺏ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻘﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣـﻲﮔـﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﻢ‪ :‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻄﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﺸﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸـﻪ‪ .‬ﻣﻴـﺎﻥ ﭘﺮﺗـﻮﺍﻓﻜﻨﻲ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗـﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻟﺤﻈـﻪ ﻫـﻴﭻﮔﻮﻧـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻨﺎﺳﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻜـﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗـﺖ ﺑﻴﺸـﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﭽـﻪ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮﺑﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻴﻐﺎﺗﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺣﻲ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻀﺎﺩ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺩﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﺍﻧﺶ‪ ،‬ﻋﻘﻞ ﻭ ﺩﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻭﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺨﻦ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﻀـﺎﺩ ﻣﻴـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺩﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻋﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻭﺣﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﻀﺎﺩ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﻞِ ﻋﻠـﻢﻧﻤـﺎ ﻭ ﺩﻳـﻦ ﻳـﺎ‬
‫ﭘﻨﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﻦﻧﻤﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻀﺎﺩﻱ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻢﻧﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﻚ ﻋﻠﻢﻧﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻢ ﻋﻠﻢﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻋﻠـﻢ ﺭﺍﺳـﺘﻴﻦ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﺔ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻨﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻳﻦﻧﻤﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺴﻠّﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠـﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸـﺔ ﺑﺸـﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘـﻲ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻴ‪‬ﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺩﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧـﺎﻡ ﻭﺣـﻲ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺟﺎ ﺯﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺘﺎﺏﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺑــﻪ ﻧــﺎﻡ ﺩﻳــﻦ ﻧﻮﺷــﺘﻪ ﻣــﻲﺷــﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺍﻳــﺎﺗﻲ ﻛــﻪ ﺑــﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒــﺮ ﺍﻛــﺮﻡ‬
‫‪ 166‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫)ﺹ( ﻭ ﺍﺋﻤﻪ ﻃﺎﻫﺮﻳﻦ )ﺱ( ﻳﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﻧﺴـﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﺭﻭﻍ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺴـﺒﺖ ﺷـﻚ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻭﻟـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻜﻨﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺻﻼً ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻧـﻪ؟ ﻳﻜـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑـﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﺪﻳـﺪﻩﻫـﺎﻱ ﺍﺟﺘﻤـﺎﻋﻲ ـ ﻣـﺬﻫﺒﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺬﻫﺒﻲ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺩﻧﻴﺎ )ﻣﺴـﻴﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻬـﻮﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴـﻠﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺯﺭﺗﺸـﺘﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﺍﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﺪﻱ ﻭ ﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ( ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﺬﻫﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺣﺮﻓﻪ ﺍﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺩﺟﻮ‪ ،‬ﺩﻏﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﺷﻤﻨﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻳﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻳﻪﻫـﺎ ﭼﻬـﺮﺓ ﺭﺍﺳـﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺮ ﺗـﻮ ﺑﺒﻴﻨـﻲ ﻧﺸﻨﺎﺳـﻴﺶ ﺑـﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺑﺲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺒﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮگ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺯ‬

‫ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗــﺖ ﺗــﻮﺩﺓ ﻣــﺮﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣــﺮﺩﻡ ﻛــﻢﺧﺒــﺮ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﻤــﻪﻣ‪‬ﻠّﺎﻫــﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﻤــﻪﺭﻭﺷــﻨﻔﻜﺮﻫﺎ‪،‬‬


‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﻔﻜﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻴﻤﻪﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻠّﺎﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺒﻠّﻐـﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﻨـﻲ ﻧﻴﻤـﻪﺁﮔـﺎﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻛﻢﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﻧـﺎﻡ ﻣـﺬﻫﺐ ﻣﻌﺮﻓـﻲ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﺷـﻨﻔﻜﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻴﻤﻪﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺬﻫﺐ ﻣﻲﻛﻮﺑـﺪ‪ .‬ﺑـﺎ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺑـﻪ ﻧـﺎﻡ ﻣـﺬﻫﺐ‬
‫ﻛﻮﺑﻴﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﮔﻮﻳﻲ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺬﻫﺐ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺶﻣﻴﺨﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﻮﺑﺎﻧﺪﻧﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺶﻣﻴﺨﻪ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺬﻫﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺒﻠّﻎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪﺁﮔﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺣﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻴﻤﻪﺁﮔـﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻠّـﺎﻱ ﻧﻴﻤـﻪﺁﮔـﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣـﺪﺍﺡ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻠﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﻔﻜﺮ ﺩﻳﻨـﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ ﺩﻓـﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﺸﺖﻣﻴﺨﻪﺍﺵ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺬﻫﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣـﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﻘﻖ ﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺻﻼً ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺬﻫﺐ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻧﺎﺩﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺷﻤﻦ ﻧﺎﺩﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭻﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺬﻫﺐ ﻣﺤﻖّ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﻃﻞ ﺍﻧﺪ؛ ﻫﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺷﻤﻦ ﻧﺎﺩﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺩﻭﺳـﺖ ﻧـﺎﺩﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻲ )‪167 (3‬‬

‫ﻋﺠﻴﺐ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥﻛﻪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻛﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺳﺨﺖﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺍﻳـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺳﺨﺖﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻫﻤـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷـﺨﺺ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﺍﻛـﺮﻡ )ﺹ( ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺭﻭﺍﻳﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪) ،‬ﻫﻢ ﺷﻴﻌﻪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﺳﻨﻲ( ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣـﻦِ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﻟـﺐ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻧﺎﻥ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨﻨـﺪ ﻭ ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨـﺪ‪» :‬ﻗـﺎﻝ ﺭﺳـﻮﻝﺍﷲ«‪،‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺤﻚ ﻧﺰﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻧﻜﻨﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻚﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﻳـﻚ ﻣﺤـﻚ ﺍﺻـﻠﻲ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺩﺳـﺖ ﺷـﻤﺎ ﺭﺳـﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻳﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣـﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺍﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻮﺍﻣﻊ ﺣﺪﻳﺚ‪ ،‬ﻫـﻢ ﺍﻫـﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻨﺖ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺷﻴﻌﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺮﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺍﻳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺻﺎﺩﻕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﻌﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ »ﻗﺎﻝ ﺻﺎﺩﻕ«‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻗﺎﻝ ﺻﺎﺩﻗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺴـﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ﺩﻳﻨﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ ﻭ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻣﺤـﻚﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻢ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤﻚﻫـﺎ ﺩﺳـﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣـﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑـﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻋﺮﺿـﻪ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻟـﺬﺍ ﺍﻳـﻦﻛـﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﺸـﻪ ﺑﻨـﺪﻩ ﺍﺻـﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻢ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺁﻥﺷﻨﺎﺳﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺮﻭﻳﺞ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻭ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻳﺪﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﭼـﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ؟ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻚ ﻭ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﻴـﺎﺭ ﺯﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻭ ﻋﻴﺎﺭﺳﻨﺠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﺑـﺮ ﻋﻠـﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺮ ﻳﻘـﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻨـﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺁﻧـﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻗـﻮﻝ ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧـﺪ ﭼﻴـﺰﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻇـﻦ ﻧﻘـﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪» :‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻣﺎ ﻟَﻬ‪‬ﻢ‪ ‬ﺑِﻪ ﻣ‪‬ﻦْ ﻋ‪‬ﻠْﻢٍ ﺍ‪‬ﻥْ ﻳ‪‬ﺘﱠﺒِﻌ‪‬ﻦَ ﺍ‪‬ﻟّﺎ ﺍﻟﻈّﻦﱠ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍ‪‬ﻥﱠ ﺍﻟﻈﱠﻦﱠ ﻻ ﻳ‪‬ﻐْﻨﻲ ﻣ‪‬ـﻦَ ﺍﻟْﺤ‪‬ـﻖﱢ‬
‫‪ 168‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺷَﻴ‪‬ﺌﺎً ﻭ ﻣﺎﻟﻬﻢ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻢ«‪ 1.‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪» .‬ﺍ‪‬ﻥْ ﻫ‪‬ـﻢ‪‬‬
‫ﺍ‪‬ﻟّﺎ ﻳ‪‬ﻈُﻨﱡﻮﻥ«‪ 2.‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻇﻦ ﺣـﺮﻑ ﻣـﻲﺯﻧﻨـﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﻣﻜـﺮﺭ ﺍﻋـﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪» :‬ﺍ‪‬ﻥﱠ ﺍﻟﻈﱠﻦﱠ ﻻ ﻳ‪‬ﻐْﻨﻲ ﻣ‪‬ﻦَ ﺍﻟْﺤ‪‬ﻖﱢ ﺷَﻴ‪‬ﺌﺎً«‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻇﻦ ﻭ ﮔﻤﺎﻥ ﻳـﺎ ﭼﻴﺰﻫـﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻪ ﻇﻦ ﻭ ﮔﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻇﻦ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﺣﻘﻴﻘـﺖ ﺩﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻳﻘﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺄﺳﻒ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻭﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠـﻒ ﺍﺳـﻼﻣﻲ‬
‫ــ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻴﻌﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻫﻞ ﺳﻨﺖ ﻫﻢ ﻫﺴﺖ ــ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻭﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺬﻫﺒﻲ ﺩﻧﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈـﺮ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪﺷﻨﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﺬﻫﺒﻲ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴـﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺍﻓﺘـﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜـﻲ ﻋﻮﺍﻣـﻞ ﺧـﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑـﻮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺩﻳﻨﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ؛ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﻃـﺮﺡ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻼً ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﻱ ﻫﻢ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﻫـﻢ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺻﻮﻻً ﺑﺎ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻪ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻠﻲ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺷـﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﻡ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﭼﻬﺮﺓ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﻦ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻻﻳﻪﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺿﺨﻴﻤﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺿﺪ ﺩﻳﻨﻲ ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ؟ ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳـﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺿﺪ ﺩﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻮﺍﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺿـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﮔـﻮﻳﻢ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﻪ ﺭﺑﻄﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﺁﻗـﺎ ﺑـﻴﻦ ﺧﺮﺍﻓـﺎﺕ ﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺸﻜﻮﻙ ﻭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻢ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﺠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :28‬ﻭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺁﻥﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧـﺪ ﻭ ﺟـﺰ ﺩﺭ ﭘـﻲ ﮔﻤـﺎﻥ ﻭ ﭘﻨـﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻇﻦ ﻭ ﮔﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﻢ ﺣﻖ ﻭ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺳﻮﺩﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ«‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻘﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :78‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﭘﺎﺑﺴﺖ ﺧﻴﺎﻻﺕ ﺧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺑﻴﻬﻮﺩﺓ ﺧﻮﻳﺶﺍﻧﺪ«‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﻲ )‪169 (3‬‬

‫ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﺟﺶ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﻋﻼﺟﺶ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﻭﻟـﻮ ﻣﻨﺎﻓـﺎﺗﻲ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﺮّﺯ ﻧﺪﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﻦ ﻗﺒـﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻜﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻮ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﺎﺟﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻴـﺰﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻣـﺮﻭﺯ ﺑـﻪ ﻧـﺎﻡ ﻋﻠـﻢ ـــ ﻋﻠـﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻢ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ــ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ »ﻗﺎﻝَ ﺭ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ﻮﻝُﺍﷲ« ﭘـﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﻭﻍ ﺷـﺪﻩ‪،‬‬
‫»ﻗﺎﻝَ ﺍﻟْﻌ‪‬ﻠْﻢ«‪» ،‬ﻳ‪‬ﻘُﻮﻝُ ﺍﻟْﻌ‪‬ﻠْﻢ« ﻫﻢ ﭘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺩﺭﻭﻍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻢ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻢ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ! ﭼﻪ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ؟ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻠﺴـﻠﻪ ﻣﻄـﺎﻟﺒﻲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺭﻳﺰ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨـﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻴـﺰﻱ ﺟـﺰ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺿﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﺿﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﻈﺮﻳـﺔ ﻋﻠﻤـﻲ ﻛﺠـﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﻛﺠﺎ؟ ﺍﺭﺯﺵ ﻧﻈﺮﻳـﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻤـﻲ ﻓﻘـﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺼـﻮﺹ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﻠﻤﻴﻮﺱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺟﺎﻟﺒﻲ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻣﻄﻠـﺐ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻄﻠﻤﻴﻮﺱ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻓﺮﺿﻴﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲﻛـﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻛُﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺰﺭگﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﻠﻚﺍﻻﻓﻼﻙ ﻳـﺎ ﻓﻠـﻚ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻠﻚ ﺑﻲﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﻓﻠﻚ ﺍﻃﻠﺲ؛ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﺗﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲﻛـﺮﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻓﻠـﻚﺍﻻﻓـﻼﻙ ﻫـﺮ ‪24‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﭼﺮﺧﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻓﻼﻛﻲ ﺭﺍ ــ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ـــ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﻣﻲﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨـﺎ ﺑـﺮ ﺍﻳـﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻔﺖ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻠﻚﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠـﻲ‪ ،‬ﻫـﺮ ﻳـﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﭘﻮﺳـﺘﻪﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺒﻊ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﺔ ﺭﻭﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺻـﻠﻲ‪ 24 ،‬ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ ﻳـﻚ ﺑـﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺯﻣـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻲﭼﺮﺧﺪ‪ .‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻠﻚﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻨﻄﻘـﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻓﻠﻚ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻓﻠﻜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘ‪‬ﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤـﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻠﻚ ﻫﺸﺘﻤﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻭ ﻣﻲﮔﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ‬
‫‪ 170‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺣﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻠﻚ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ ﻣﻲﺭﺳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﺣﺮﻛـﺖ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳـﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣـﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳـﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻭ‬
‫ﺷﺒﺎﻧﻪﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺒﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺑـﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﮔﻔﺖ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺳﺮ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﻠﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻓﻼﻙ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﭼﻪ ﭼﻴﺰ؟ ﺑﺎ ﮔـﺮﺩﺵ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻓﻠﻚ ﻧﻬﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﻠﻜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻠﻚ ﺟﺎﻣﻊ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺑـﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻲﮔﻔﺖ ﻣﺎﻩ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻃﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎﻩ ﻫﻢ ﻳﻚ ﮔـﺮﺩﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠـﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻠﻚ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﻗﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﻛﻠـﻲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳـﺐ ﺑـﺎ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻠﻚﺍﻻﻓﻼﻙ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻣـﺪ ﺑـﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺳـﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﻴـﻖ ﺭﻳﺎﺿـﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛــﺖ ﻣــﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷــﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻭﺿــﻊ ﺯﻣــﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺷــﺖ‪ ،‬ﺧﺴــﻮﻑ ﻭ ﻛﺴــﻮﻑ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ؟ ﻣﮕﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻗـﺪﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺸﺮ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺶﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ؟ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﺁﻳﻨـﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺶﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ؟ ﺑﺮ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺶﺑﻴﻨـﻲ ﻣـﻲﺷـﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻻ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻼﻥ ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺯﺩﻩ ﻣﺎﻩ ﻳـﺎ ﺣﺘـﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺼـﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺪ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﻼﻥ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﻼﻥ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺴﻮﻑ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﻳـﺎ‬
‫ﻛﺴﻮﻑ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻳـﺎ ﻣـﺎﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﺴﻮﻑ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻧﻈﺮﻳـﻪ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻭﻻً ﺍﻭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﻫـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺮ ﺍﺳـﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺍﺗﺶ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺩ؛ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻃﺮﺯ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻲ )‪171 (3‬‬

‫ﺣﺴﻲ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺑـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲﮔـﺮﺩﺩ‪،‬‬


‫ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻦﻃﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﮔﻔﺖ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﺩ ﻳـﻚ ﭼﻴـﺰﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻳـﻚ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﺍﺳـﺘﻨﺘﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﻳـﻚ ﻧـﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺱ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺱ ﻣﻲﺯﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﻲ ﻭ ﺑـﺎ ﺗـﻮﺟﻴﻬﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺫﻫﻨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻭ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﺪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﮕﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﺷـﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﻋﻠﻤـﻲ‪ ،‬ﺷـﻨﺎﺧﺘﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﺮ ﭘﺎﻳـﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻴـﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﻳـﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠـﻒ ﻧﻈـﺎﻡ ﻭ ﭘﻴﻮﻧـﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫـﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺑـﺎﺯﺩﻩ ﺗﺠﺮﺑـﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺻـﺤﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺯﻣـﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺻ ﺤﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺪﺱ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻞِ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﭼﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ؟ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺎﻟﺐ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺴﻮﻑ ﻭ ﻛﺴﻮﻑ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻳـﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺣﺴـﺎﺏ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳـﻚ ﻧﺘﻴﺠـﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺴﻮﻑ ﻭ ﻛﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﭘﻨﺠﺎﻩ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺭﺻﺪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺗﺶ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺳـﺘﺎﺭﮔﺎﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﺑﺖ ﻭ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺳـﺒﻪﻫـﺎ ﻭ ﺭﺻـﺪﻫﺎ ﭘـﻴﺶﺑﻴﻨـﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻔﺖ‪ :‬ﻓﻼﻥ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺶ ﻣﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻼﻥ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﺍﻓﻪﮔﻮﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻫﻴـﺄﺕ ﺑﻄﻠﻤﻴﻮﺳـﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﺸـﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺴﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻩ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻲ ﻫﻢ‬
‫‪ 172‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘـﻴﺶﺑﻴﻨـﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻤـﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻌـﺎً ﺳﻴﺴـﺘﻢ ﺯﻣـﻴﻦ ﻭ‬
‫ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻗﻄﻌﻲ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﺗﻠﻘـﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﻳـﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺳﻲ؟ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻗﺮﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﻗﻄﻌﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺁﻣﺪﻧﺪ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﻧﺎﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺑﻲﻗﻮﺍﺭﻩﺍﺵ ﻳـﻚ ﻟﺒـﺎﺱ ﺩﻳﻨـﻲ ﻫـﻢ ﭘﻮﺷـﺎﻧﺪﻧﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺲ ﺁﻣﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ﻫﻴﺄﺕ ﺑﻄﻠﻤﻴﻮﺳﻲ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺯﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺧـﻼﻑ ﺩﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺣــﺮﻑ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺍﺳــﺖ ﻭ ﭘــﺪﺭ ﮔﺎﻟﻴﻠــﺔ‪ 1‬ﺑﻴﭽــﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﺩﻧــﺪ ﻛــﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﺘﺎﻟﻴــﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ﻫﻴﺄﺕ ﺑﻄﻠﻤﻴﻮﺳﻲ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻛﭙﻠﺮ‪ 2‬ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﻦﻃﻮﺭ؛ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻣﺪﻩﺍﻧـﺪ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺣﺪﺱ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﺑﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺁﻣﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺸﺘﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺩﻳﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻡ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺣ ﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﺳـﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻬﻤـﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﻧـﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﻈـﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺳﻴ‪‬ﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﺫﺑﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷـﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺶﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﺴﻮﻑ ﻭ ﺧﺴﻮﻑ ﻫﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺳـﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺣﺮﻛـﺖﻫـﺎ ﺑـﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻛـﺖ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﻋـﻴﻦ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺧﻴﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ‪ ‬ﺯﻣـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﺮﺳـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﻩ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬

‫‪1. Galileo Galilei‬‬


‫‪2. Johannes Kepler‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﻲ )‪173 (3‬‬

‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺸـﺨﻴﺺ ﻭﺿـﻊ‬


‫ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻣـﻦ ﺑﺤﺜـﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺷﻨﺒﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻻ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺟﺎ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻜـﺮ ﻣـﻲ ﻛـﻨﻢ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺸﺎءﺍﷲ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺮﻱ ﻣﻄـﺮﺡ ﺷـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺳـﺘﺎﻥ ﺷـﺐ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺷـﻨﺒﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺳﺆﺍﻻﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ؛ ﺩﺭﺑـﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻜﺎﻣـﻞ ﻭ ﭘﻴـﺪﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﭼﻴﺰﻫـﺎﻱ ﺗـﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻢ ﺭﺑﻄﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻡ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺟﺎ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﺟﺎ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ ﻛﻪ ــ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳـﺪ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﻣـﻦ ـــ ﺍﻭﺟـﻲ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺴـﺄﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻮﭼﻴﮕَﺮﻱ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺭﻓﺘـﻴﻢ ﻛـﻪ ﺁﺧـﺮ ﭼـﻪ؟ ﭼـﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ؟ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻗﻬﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ؟ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍﺟـﻊ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺴﻲ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺩﺳـﺖ ﺩﻭﺳـﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨـﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺁﻟﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴـﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺑـﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺻـﻼً ﻣـﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﻗﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﭼﺸﻤﺶ ﺍﺑﺮﻭﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺻﻼً‬
‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﭼﻪ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﭼﺮﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺣﺸﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ؟ ﻧﻪ ﺧﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﺭﺯﺵ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻬﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ؟ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺸﺐ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﺳـﺒﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺤـﺚ ﺭﺍ ﻣـﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧـﺪﻳﻢ ﺧﻴﻠـﻲ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻟﺐﺗﺮ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻓﻠﺴﻔﺔ ﺩﻳـﻦ ﺑﺨـﺶ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈـﻪﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨـﻪ‬
‫ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺖ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻣﺸﺐ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺣـﺎﻻ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻜﺮﻱ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺟـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺭﺯﺵ ﻭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻦِ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ﺩﻳﻨﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺩﺍﻧﺸﻤﻨﺪ ﻣﺴـﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﻣـﻲﮔـﻮﻳﻢ‬
‫‪ 174‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺣﻖ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻟﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻧـﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻤـﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﻴﺴـﻢ‬
‫)ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍﻳﺶ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺴﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ( ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻛﻨﻲ‪ .‬ﺣﺘـﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﺔ ﭘﮋﻭﻫﺶﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑـﺪﻫﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻲﮔﻴﺮﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ »ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ« ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﻳـﻚ ﺍﺻـﻄﻼﺡ ﺩﺍﺭﻳـﻢ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺻـﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺻﻞ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻋﻴـﺐ ﻛـﺮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﻃﻞ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻓﺮﺿﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺿﻴﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﺮﻭﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻄﻠﻤﻴﻮﺱ ﻣـﻲﺧﻮﺍﺳـﺖ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺿﻴﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻧﻤﻲﮔﻔﺘﻢ ﺁﻗﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺨﻠّـﻒ ﺩﻳﻨـﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺴﻮﻑ ﻭ ﺧﺴـﻮﻑ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻜﻦ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻢ ﻣـﺬﻫﺐ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﺮﻭ ﺟﻠﻮ‪ .‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﺻـﻞ ﻋﻠﻤـﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺧﺒﺮ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺧﺒﺮ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺛـﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳـﺘﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺑـﻞ‬
‫ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫـﺪ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴـﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺍﺯ ﺧـﻮﺍﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻲﭘﺮﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺁﺩﻡ ﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸـﺮ‪ ،‬ﭘـﺪﺭ‪ ،‬ﭘـﺪﺭﺑﺰﺭگ ﻣـﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﺗﻮ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺭ‪‬ﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺗﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻨﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﻡ ﭼﻪ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﺧﺒﺮ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻱ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﻃﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﭘـﺲ ﺍﮔـﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻲ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻛ‪‬ﻲ ﺁﻓﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﺩ ﻧﮕﻮ ﺑـﻴﻦ ﻭﺣـﻲ ﻭ ﻋﻠـﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻀﺎﺩ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻄﻠﺒﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺣﻴﺎﻧـﺎً ﺍﺯ ﻭﺣـﻲ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺗﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﻲ ﻭ ﻭﺣﻲ‬

‫‪1. Tranformism‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﻲ )‪175 (3‬‬

‫ﻗﻄﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭻﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻀﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﻤﻲﻳﺎﺑﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻀﺎﺩ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻓﺮﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻇﻨّﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺣﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﻲ ﺑـﺎ ﻭﺣـﻲ ﻓﺮﺿـﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺣﻲ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭ ﮔﺮ ﻧﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻛـﺎﻓﻲ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺛﺒـﺎﺕ ﻭﺣـﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﺮﺍ؟ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﺎﻓﻲﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺎﺕﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻬـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺗﻀـﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺗﻔـﺎﻕﻫـﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﻛـﺮﻳﻢ ﺑـﻪ ﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﻱ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﭼﺸﻢ ﻭ ﮔﻮﺷَﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻦ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣـﺮ ﺩﻳـﻦ ﺟـﺰ ﺍﻣـﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺖ ﺍﺭﺯﺵ ﺩﻳﻨﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻗﺎﻳـﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻤـﺎﻱ ﺍﻋـﻼﻡ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﻗﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻮﺍﻥ ﺿﺪ ﺩﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺒـﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄـﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮔﻔﺘﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﻢ ﭘﻨﺠﺎﻩ ﺑـﺎﺭ ﺑـﺮ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻪ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻨﺠﺎﻩ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ »ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺣﻮﺍﺷﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻌـﺎﻟﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻓﺘـﺎﻭﻱ ﺣﻘﻴـﺮ ﻣﺠـﺰﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻥﺷﺎءﺍﷲ«‪ .‬ﻧﺨﻮﺍﺳﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻘﻴﻨﺎً ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﺮ ﻛـﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻲﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻳﻘﻴﻨﺎً ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻴﻨـﺎً ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳـﻦ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺁﻣﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﻄﻠﺒﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺮﻓﻲ ﺯﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓـﻮﺭﺍً‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻭ ﭼﻤﺎﻕ ﺗﻜﻔﻴﺮ ﻧﻜﺸﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﻫـﺎ ﭼﻴﺴـﺖ؟ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦﻛـﻪ ﺧـﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺻﺎﺣﺒﺎﻥ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻧﻤﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻘﻴﻨـﺎً ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨـﺪ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻜﻨﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻇﺎﻳﻒ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷـﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﻢ ﻫﺴـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴـﺎﻁ ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ‬
‫ﭼﻪ؟ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻧﻤﻲﺩﺍﻧﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘـﺲ‬
‫ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﭼﻪﻗﺪﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺴـﺖ؟ ﻣﻜـﺮﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻗـﻮﻱ ﻫـﻢ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻗﻮﻱ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﭼﻪ؟ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺍﻗﻮﻱ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻣـﻦ ﺑـﺎ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺩﻥﻛﻠﻔﺖﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫـﺪ‬
‫‪ 176‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﻗﻮﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻄﻌﻲ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤـﺔ ﺍﻗـﻮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﮔﻔﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﻮﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭼﻪﻗﺪﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺳـﺎﻟﻪﻫـﺎ ﻫﺴـﺖ؟‬
‫ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻥ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﺎﺯﻩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍَﺣﻮ‪‬ﻁ ﻭ ﺍَﻗـﻮﻱ ﻭ ﻇـﺎﻫﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻭﺟـﺐ ﺑـﺎ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻗﻮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻠﺶ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺣـﻮﻁ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻭﺟﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﭼﻴـﺰﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻠﺶ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣـﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﺘﻌـﺎﺭ‪‬ﻑ ﺑـﺎ ﺩﻟﻴﻠـﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻣﺼـﺎﻟﺤﺎﺕ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻫـﺮ ﻣﺴـﻠﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻜﻠّﻔﻲ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﻌﻲ ﺑـﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈـﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺑﺤﺜﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺮﺩ ﻳـﺎ ﻳـﻚ ﮔـﺮﻭﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺤﺪ‪ ‬ﻳﻞِ ﻭﺍﺳﻊﺍﻟﻌﻠﻢﺗﺮ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺎ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻘـﺎﺕ ﮔﺴـﺘﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳـﻚ ﻗـﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﺩﮔﺮﮔﻮﻥ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﻦ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﻗﺎ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻼﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻓـﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻭﺭﻳﺠﻴﻨـﺎﻝ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺻـﺎﺣﺐ ﻣﻔـﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺳـﺎﻟﻪ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺳـﺎﻟﺔ ﺁﻗـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻭﺟﺮﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺧﻤﻴﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻳـﺪ ﻭﺳـﻴﻊ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﻃﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪﺍﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﺎﺗﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺗـﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻟﺤﻈـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻣﺘﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﻲ ﻣﺴـﻠّﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻠـﻢ ﻣﺴـﻠّﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﻌﻴـﺎﺕ ﻋﻠـﻢ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻱ ﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﺳـﺮﺍﻍ ﻧـﺪﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻫﻤـﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻮﻫﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺴﻠّﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺴﻠّﻢ ﺁﻥ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺴﻠّﻢ ﺩﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺴﻠّﻢ ﻋﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺴﻠّﻢ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺴﻠّﻢ ﺩﻳـﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓـﻲ ﻣﻴـﺎﻥ ﻏﻴـﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻲ )‪177 (3‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﻠّﻢ ﺩﻳﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺴﻠّﻢ ﺩﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﻠّﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﻭ ﻋﻘﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﻠّﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﻦ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺪﮔﺎﻩ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻼﺕ ﻋﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﻛﻼﻣﻲ ﺍﺻﻮﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻬـﺎ ﻣـﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨـﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺍﺩﻟﺔ ﺩﻳﻨﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ؟ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺴﻠّﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺑـﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺸﻒ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﮔﻔﺖ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺯﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ؟ ﻋﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﻣﻌﺘﻘﺪ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻼﺕ ﻋﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﻭ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺩﻟﺔ ﺩﻳﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻋﻘﻞ ﺍﺟﻤﺎﻻً ﻳﻜـﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﺭﺑﻌﻪ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨـﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺘـﻪ ﺑﺤـﺚ ﺩﺍﺭﻳـﻢ‪ .‬ﻧـﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺒﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻐﺮﻱ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻛﺒﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﻳـﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﻌﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺻﻐﺮﻱ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻭِﻝﺍﻧﮕﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺧﻴﻠـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺩﻟـﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻼﺕ ﻋﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻼﺕ ﻋﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺒﺮﻱ ﺑﺤﺜﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻐﺮﻱ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ‪ :‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻭﺣﻲ ﻫـﻴﭻﮔﻮﻧـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻗﺮﺁﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﻫﻢ ﺣﻔـﻆ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻪ »ﺍ‪‬ﻥﱠ ﺍﻟﻈﱠﻦﱠ ﻻ ﻳ‪‬ﻐْﻨﻲ ﻣ‪‬ﻦَ ﺍﻟْﺤ‪‬ﻖﱢ ﺷَﻴ‪‬ﺌﺎً«‪ .‬ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ ﺷـﺮﻁ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺘـﻲ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﻲ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺁﻗﺎ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺻـﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﻲ ﻛﺠﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻗﻄﻌﻲ ﻛﺠﺎ؟ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻳﻦﻫﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺁﺯﺍﺩﻣﻨﺸﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺮﺯﻧﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﮕﺎﻧﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻢ‪ ،‬ﻛﺴـﺎﻧﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻭﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﺑـﺎ ﻗﺎﻃﻌﻴـﺖ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﮔﻔﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺸﺖﮔﺮﻣﻲ ﻣﺤﻜﻤـﻲ ﺑـﻮﺩﻩ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﺮ ﺣﺴـﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﺎﺕ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺸﺖﮔﺮﻣﻲ ﺗـﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻟﺤﻈـﻪ ﺣﺘـﻲ ﺧﻴﻠـﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻮﻱﺗﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻠﻢﺯﺩﮔﺎﻥ ﻫـﻢ ﺧـﻮﺍﻫﺶ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﻛـﻪ ﻓـﻮﺭﺍً‬
‫‪ 178‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺳﻮﺳﻴﺎﻟﻴﺴﻢ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪﺷﻨﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻑﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﺥ ﻣﺎ ﻧﻜﺸﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺳﻴﺎﻟﻴﺴـﻢ ﻋﻠﻤـﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻻً ﻣـﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺼـﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻲ ﺳـﺎﻝ ﭘـﻴﺶ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺻﻼً ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﻛ ﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻋﻠـﻮﻡ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻜـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺷـﺮﺍﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﻳـﻚ ﺍﺻـﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎﺯ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﻲ ﻋﻠﻢ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﻃﺒﻴﻌـﺖ ﻳـﻚ ﺟـﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ؛ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻣـﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻـﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺁﻫﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﺫﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﻜﺎﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺻـﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ؟ ﻳﻚ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﺫﺑﻪ ﻛﺸﻒ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻭ ﮔﺮ ﻧﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌـﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺿﻤﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﻲﺁﻳـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺘﺪ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﺸـﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺁﺯﻣـﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟـﻮ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﺼﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ‪ .‬ﻓﻼﻥ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﺏ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻼﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺻﺪ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺒـﺘﻼ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﺑﻠﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺧـﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺑـﻪ ﻫﻤـﺔ ﻣـﺮﺩﻡ ﺑﮕـﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﺏ ﭘﺮﻫﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺒﺘﻼ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺑﻠﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻢ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺔ ﺍﻃﺒﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﻧﺶ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻭﻱ ﺿﺪ ﺁﺑﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺗﺰﺭﻳﻖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﻪ ﭼﻴﺰ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ؟ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺘﻨﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﻲ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ‪ .‬ﻭ ﮔـﺮ ﻧـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺏ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﺪﻧﻔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺻﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﺠﺎ ﺑـﺪﺍﻧﻢ؟ ﺑﻨـﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﻋﻴﻨﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﻴﻨﻲ ﭼﻪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﺻـﻞ ﻋﻠﻤـﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻲ )‪179 (3‬‬

‫ﻛﺮﺩ؟ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪» :‬ﺍﺻﻞ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ«‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺧﻮﺩﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴـﻞ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ ﺍﺻـﻞ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺰﻳﺴﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﺎﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺣـﺎﻻ ﺍﻭﺝ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻓﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻧﻴـﺎ ﺣﺘـﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺴﻠّﻢ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﺳﺎﺳـﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻـﻞ ﻳﻜﺴـﺎﻥ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺻﻼً ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺭﺑـﻂ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴـﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﭽﻪ ﺗﺮﺑﻴـﺖﻛﻨﻨـﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﭽـﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﻋﺎﺻﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺗـﺮﺵﺭﻭ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ ﺧـﻮﺏ ﺍﺳـﺖ؟ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ؟ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﺔ ﻳﻚ ﺑﭽﻪ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﺖﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﺔ ﺑﭽﺔ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻋﺎﺻﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻣﺸﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦﭼﻨـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺷﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺪﮔﺎﻩ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﻢ؟ ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦﺟـﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺱ ﻣﻲﺯﻧﻢ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﺣﺪﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﺍ ﻓﻜﻨﺪﻡ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺩﺭ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻛﻮﺩﻛﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪﻫﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻗﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﺩ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺟـﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻟﺠﺎﺟﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻫﻤﻪﭼﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭ ﺑـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻋـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻧﻪ‪ ‬ﻣﺼﺮّﺍﻧﺔ ﻣﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ‪ .‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺧـﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ‪ 22‬ﺳﺎﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﺣـﺎﻻ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﺑﭽﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻮﺱ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺑﺪﻫـﺪ؟ ﻧـﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺑﻴﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻪ ﺑﭽﻪﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺑﻪﺭﻭﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻄﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﺧﻮﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻛﺴـﺎﻧﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﻗﻴـﻖﺗـﺮ‬
‫‪ 180‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺸﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﻠﻪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻨﺪ؟ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻴـﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻭ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ؟ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻭ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ؟ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ؟ ﭼـﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻜﻨﻨﺪ؟ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺻﺎﺩﻕ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺟﺎﻧﺸﻴﻦ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻲ ـ ﭼﻬﻞ ﺳﺎﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻋﻠـﻮﻡ ﺭﻓﺘـﺎﺭﻱ ﺑـﺎ ﻋﻠـﻮﻡ ﻃﺒﻴﻌـﻲ ﻓـﺮﻕ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻭ ﭘـﻮچ‪ .‬ﻧـﻪ‪ ،‬ﭘـﻮچ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﻛـﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺣـﺎﻻ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﻧﻤـﻲﺗـﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺁﺳﺎﻥﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﻥ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﻼﺑﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺭﻭﻱ ﻣ‪‬ﻨﻔ‪‬ﻊ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﻴﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣ‪‬ﻨﻔ‪‬ـﻊ‪ .‬ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﻊ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻮﺑﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﻊ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻮﺑـﺎ ﻣﻨﻔـﻊ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﺭژﺍﻧﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﻲﺧﻮﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻃـﺮﻑ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﺍﻧﺴﻪ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧـﺪﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺁﺯﺍﺩﻱﻫﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺲ ﺑﺪﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﺍﻧﺴـﻪ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺻﻼً ﭘﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺮ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥﻫـﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷـﺮﺍﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻓﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺎﺭ ﻭ ﭘﻮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺻـﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑـﻪ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﻳﺎﺭﻭﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻓﺖﻫﺎ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪﺍﻡ ﭼﺮﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ؟ ﭼـﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄـﻪﺍﻱ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟ ﺷـﻤﺎ ﺧﻴـﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺴﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺎﺭﺳﻴﺴـﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﺘـﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻧـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻭﻱ ﻗﻄﻌﻲ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﻱﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﺧﻴـﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻔﺘـﺎﺩ – ﻫﺸـﺘﺎﺩ ﺳـﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪ 1920‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﺣـﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 80‬ﺳـﺎﻝ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ 80 .‬ﺳـﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﭘﺎ ﮔﺬﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﻫﻨـﻮﺯ ﻫـﻢ ﻳـﻚ ﭘـﻮﻝ ﺳـﻴﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻲ )‪181 (3‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺍﺭﺯﺵ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻣـﻲﺧـﻮﺍﻫﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ‪ .‬ﺗﻮ ﻫﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻲﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺩﻫـﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗـﻮ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻮﻝ ﻧﺰﻥ‪ .‬ﺗﻮ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺵ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻣﻤﻠﻜـﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﻓﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺻﺶ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺻـﻼً ﻫـﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋـﺎﺕ ﺑـﺎ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻲﺯﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻔﺖﻭﮔﻮﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺤﺜﻲ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﺎ ﺣـﺎﻻ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻭﮔﻮﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺥ ﻭ ﺷـﺎﻧﺔ ﻫـﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺸـﻜﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﺎ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﺼﺒﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﭘـﻴﺶ ﺑﻜﺸـﻢ‪ .‬ﭼـﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻋﻠـﻢ ﺑـﺎ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﻢ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻨﺪ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﻨﺪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﻦ‪ .‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻗﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺬﻫﺒﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣـﻲﮔـﻮﻳﻢ ﭼـﺮﺍ ﻗﺒـﻮﻝ ﻧﻤـﻲﻛﻨﻴـﺪ؟‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻳﻦﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﺣﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﻫـﻴﭻﮔﻮﻧـﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﻓـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻓﺘﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺯﻥ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺩ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺮ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣـﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺧﺘـﺮ ﻣـﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﭘﺴﺮ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺻﺪﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﻛﺘﺎﺏﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺒﻴـﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ »ﺍ‪‬ﻥﱠ ﺍﻟﻈﱠـﻦﱠ ﻻ ﻳ‪‬ﻐْﻨـﻲ ﻣ‪‬ـﻦَ ﺍﻟْﺤ‪‬ـﻖﱢ‬
‫ﺷَﻴ‪‬ﺌﺎً«‪ .‬ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﻳـﻚ ﭼﻴـﺰ ﻏﻴـﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻗﻄﻌﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﺧﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻧﻈﺮﻳﺔ ﺩﺳﺘﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﺪﺓ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻭﺣﻲ‬
‫ﺑِﺴ‪‬ﻢِ ﺍﷲِ ﺍﻟﺮﱠﺣ‪‬ﻤﻦِ ﺍﻟﺮﱠﺣﻴﻢ‪‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺁﻝ ﻋﻤﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﻼﻭﺕ ﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﭼـﺎﺭ ﺷـﺪﻳﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻜﺮﻱ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺮ ﭼﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻳﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺧـﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﻔـﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤـﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻛـﺎﻓﺮ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻭ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﮕﻴﺰﻩ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺮﺑﻨﺎﻱ ﻓﻜـﺮ ﻭ ﻋﻤـﻞ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄـﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﭼﺸﻢﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺻﺤﻨﺔ ﺭﺳـﺘﺎﺧﻴﺰ ﻭ ﺑـﺎﺯﺩﻩ ﻧﻴـﻚ ﻭ ﺑـﺪ ﺟﺎﻭﻳـﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻟﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺻـﺤﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺑـﺎﺯﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗ‪‬ﻒ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺛﺮﻭﺕ ﻭ ﻧـﻪ ﭘﺴـﺮﺍﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻛﺎﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﺣـﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺳـﻮﺩﻣﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺩﻭﺯﺥﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ﺷﻴﻮﺓ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﺪﺍﻥ ﻓﺮﻋﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻭﻍ ﺷﻤﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﻫـﻢ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﻴﻔﺮ ﮔﻨﺎﻫﺎﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﺆﺍﺧﺬﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺧﺪﺍ ﺳﺨﺖﮔﻴﺮﺗـﺮ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺑـﻪ ﻛـﺎﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﮕـﻮ‬
‫ﺳﺮﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻘﻬﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤـﻪﺗـﺎﻥ ﻳـﻚ ﺟـﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺯﺥ ﮔـﺮﺩﺁﻭﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺪﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺯﺥ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺸـﺎﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻲﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺟﻨﮓ ﻣـﻲﻛـﺮﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻛﺎﻓﺮ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﺩﻳﺪﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺑﻪﺭﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﭼﺸﻤﺸـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻣﻲﺁﻣﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻫﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﺎﺭﻳﺶ ﻛﻤـﻚ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ ﻭ ﻣـﻲﺑﻴﻨﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻣـﺮﺩﻡ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 188‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻋﻼﻗﻪﻣﻨﺪﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪﻫﺎﺳﺖ‪ :‬ﺯﻥ‪ ،‬ﭘﺴﺮ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﭘﺴـﺮ ﺑﮕـﺬﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻗـﺪﺭﺕ ﻭ‬


‫ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ »ﻗَﻨﺎﻃﻴﺮِ ﻣ‪‬ﻘَﻨﻄﺮﻩ« ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺛﺮﻭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫـﻢ ﺑـﻪ ﺩﻧﺒـﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺑﮕـﺬﺍﺭﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺸﻤﺖ(‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺯﻥ‪ ،‬ﭘﺴﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺩﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺒﺎﺷـﺘﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃـﻼ ﻭ ﻧﻘـﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳـﺒﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻍﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥﺩﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﭼﻬﺎﺭﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺰﺭﻋﻪﻫﺎ؛ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﺪﺓ ﻣـﺮﺩﻡ‪ ‬ﺁﺭﺍﺳـﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺟﺎﻟـﺐ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺯﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﺮﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺷﻮﻛﺖ ﻭ ﺟﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺟﻼﻝ؛ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻬﺮﺓ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺩﻧﻴﺎﺳـﺖ(‪ .‬ﺍﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻫﺴﺖ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﻋﺎﻗﺒﺖ ﻧﻴﻚ‪ .‬ﺑﮕﻮ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻬﺘـﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺒﺮ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ؟ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺗﻘـﻮﺍ ﺩﺭﺁﻳﻨـﺪ ﻭ ﭘـﺮﻭﺍﻱ ﺣـﻖ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺰﺩ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﻬﺸﺘﻲ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻛَﻔَﺶ ﻧﻬﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺟﺎﻭﺩﺍﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺴﺮﺍﻥ ﭘﺎﻙ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑـﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤـﺔ ﺍﻳﻨﻬـﺎ‪ ،‬ﺧﺸـﻨﻮﺩﻱ ﺧـﺪﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺒﻮﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﺎﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﺧﺪﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﮔﻨﺎﻫﺎﻥ ﻣـﺎ ﺩﺭﮔـﺬﺭ ﻭ ﻣـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻘـﺔ ﺁﺗـﺶ ﻧﮕـﻪ ﺩﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻴﺒﺎﻳﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻓﺮﻭﺗﻨﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺣﻖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺧﺮﺝﻛـﻦﻫـﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺤﺮﮔﺎﻫﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﻔﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻣﻲﺧﻴﺰﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻣﺠﺴﻢ ﻣﻲﻛﻨـﺪ ﻭ ﻣـﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫـﺪ ﻧﺘﻴﺠـﻪ ﺑﮕﻴـﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺤﺜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﻜﺮﺭ ﺳـﺆﺍﻝ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨﻨـﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄـﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻲﻛـﻨﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺑـﻪ ﺳـﺆﺍﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻭﺳـﺖ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻧﺒﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻧﺒﻮﺕ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻻﻝِ ﻛﻼﻣﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻋﻘﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺁﺩﻡﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪﭼﻴﺰ ﻧﻤﻲﺭﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻘﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤـﻪﭼﻴـﺰ ﺭﺍ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺁﻝ ﻋﻤﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ‪.17 -10‬‬


‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‪ :‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻭﺣﻲ ‪189‬‬

‫ﻧﻤﻲﻓﻬﻤﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‪ .‬ﺧﺪﺍ ﻫﻤﻪﭼﻴﺰ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺮ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻋﻘﻠﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪﭼﻴـﺰ ﻧﻤـﻲﺭﺳـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪﺟﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﻴﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺧﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺸﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﺸﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺑﺤـﺚ ﻫـﺎ ﻛـﻪ ﺗـﺎ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻗﺮﻥ ﺫﻫﻦ ﭘﮋﻭﻫﺸﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﻗﻠﺐ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﻣـﻲﻛـﺮﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻻﻟﻲ ﻗﺎﻧﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﺭﺍﻡ ﺁﺭﺍﻡ ﺑـﺎ ﮔﺴـﺘﺮﺵ ﺑﺤـﺚﻫـﺎﻱ ﺍﺟﺘﻤـﺎﻋﻲ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺷﻮﺍﺭﻱﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﺷـﻨﮕﺮﻱ ﮔﺬﺷـﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻗﺎﻝﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩﺍﺵ ﺑـﻪ ﭘـﺎ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﻣـﺜﻼً ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨـﺪ ﺷـﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫ﺱ ﺭﻭﺷـ ِ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷـﺮﻁ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻛـﻪ ﻣـﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻗـﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﺩﺳـﺘﺮ ِ‬
‫ﺑﻲﺩﻏﺪﻏﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﻗـﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﻣـﻲﺭﻭﻳـﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻪ ﻫـﺮ ﺭﺳـﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴ‪‬ﻪﺍﻱ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻮﺭ ﻓﺘﻮﺍ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﺪ ﻣـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻼﺗﻜﻠﻴﻔـﻲ ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻤـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻀﺎﺩ ﺑﺸﺮﻱ ﺧﻼﺻﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺑـﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳـﻚ ﺩﺭﻳﭽـﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﭼﺎﻩ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺠﺘﻬﺪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻜﺮ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺶ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺒﺎﻁ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﻣﺠﺘﻬﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺟـﻮﺭ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﺍﺳـﺘﻨﺒﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻮﺭ ﻓﺘﻮﺍ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻮﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻓﺘﻮﺍ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺣـﺎﻻ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺪﺗﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﺷـﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﻴﺢ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ ﻣﻮﺳـﻲ ﺁﺧـﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺁﻥ ﻏﻮﻏﺎﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺤﺚﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺟـﺎﻱ ﺧـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪﻳﻢ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺯﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻗـﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻧﺒﻮﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻣـﺎ ﻭﻋـﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ 190‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺩﺍﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘـﺎﻡ ﻋﻤـﻞ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻤـﺎﻥ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻳـﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﻔﺘﻴـﺪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺸـﺮِ ﺳـﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻥ ! ﺑﻴـﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﺖ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻭ ﺗﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﻳـﻚ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺴﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﭘﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻡ‪ .‬ﺁﻣﺪﻡ ﻭ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻢ ﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺷﺴـﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺭﻓﺘـﻪ‬
‫ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﮔﺮﺍﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺟﺘﻬﺎﺩ ﻣﺬﻫﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻳـﻚ ﺁﻳـﻪ ﭼﻴـﺰﻱ ﻣـﻲﻓﻬﻤﻨـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﻬﻨﻪﮔﺮﺍﻳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺳﻨﺖﮔﺮﺍﻳﺎﻥ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻣﻲﻓﻬﻤﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺣﺪﻳﺚ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺧـﺘﻼﻑ ﺁﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻬﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﻃﻼﻳـﻲ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﻭﺷـﻦِ ﺩﻝﺍﻧﮕﻴـﺰﻱ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺤـﺚ‬
‫ﻧﺒﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﻳﺶ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭ ﺟﻠﺐ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻛـﻪ ﭼﺸـﻢ ﺑـﺎﺯ ﻛـﺮﺩﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻲﭼﻤﺎﻕ ﺁﻣﺪﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﭼﻤـﺎﻗﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﭼﻤﺎﻕ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻛﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺗﺮﻛﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﻧﮕﺸـﺘﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺗﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﻲﺩﺍﺩﻳﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺍﻫﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻖ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻻﻝ ﺑـﻮﺩﻩﺍﻳـﻢ ﻭ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻥﺷﺎءﺍﷲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﺻﻼً ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﺔ ﻧﺒﻮﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻃﺮﺯ ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﭘﺴﻨﺪﻳﺪﻡ؛ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻗﺪﻡ ﺍﻭﻝِ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ‪ ‬ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻨﺠﺶ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻔﻜﺮ ﺑﺸـﺮﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﺻـﻼً ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻛﺠﺎ ﺑﻔﻬﻤﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻲ )ﻉ( ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ؟ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻱ؟ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﺑـﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪ‪ .‬ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲﻓﻬﻤﺪ ﻣﻮﺳﻲ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑـﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻤﻲﻓﻬﻤﺪ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲﺭﻭﺩ؟ ﻃﺮﺯ ﻓﻜﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﮔﺎﻡ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﻘﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﺪﺭﺕ‪‬‬
‫ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ‪ ‬ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﻣﺴﻠّﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺒﻮﺕ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﻜﺎﺭﻩ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻍ ﺑﺎﻃﻞ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻘﻞ ﻭ ﺧ‪‬ﺮَﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺴـﻠّﻢ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﺒﻮﺕ ﻧﻴﺎﻣﺪﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ ﻋﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻜﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺒـﻮﺕ ﺑﮕﻮﻳـﺪ ﻋﻘـﻞ ﺑﻴﻜـﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‪ :‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻭﺣﻲ ‪191‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻱِ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦﻛـﻪ ﺍﺻـﻼً ﻣـﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺠـﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻔﻬﻤﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻗﺎ ﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻋﻘﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻨـﺪﺍﺯﻡ‪ .‬ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴـﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩ‪ ،‬ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺧﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﺠﺎ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺳ‪‬ﺤﺮ ﻭ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﻱِ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﮔﺮ‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺸﻢﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺩﺳﺘﻲِ ﺑﻨﺪﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﻔﻬﻤﻢ؟ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻛـﻨﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻴﻨﺪﻳﺸـﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﺮ ﻛـﺲ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺣـﺮﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺑـﺎﺭﺓ ﻫـﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺘﺒﻲ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﻼً ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺣـﺮﻑ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺰﻧـﺪ؛ ﻗﺮﺁﻧـﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺮﺗﺎﺳﺮﺵ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻔﻜﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻘﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻋﻘﻠﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻔﻬﻤﻲ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺣﻖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺗـﺎ ﺑـﺮ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﺎﻧﻲِ ﻋﻘﻞ ﺩﺍﻍ ﺑﺎﻃﻞ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ؟ ﺍﺻﻼً ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﺮﺩ؟‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺑـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻘـﻞ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﻣﺎ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ؟ ﭘﺲ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻋﻘﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺳﻤﻴﺖ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻼً ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻘـﻞ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺯﺵ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﭘﺎﻙ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻱ ﻭﺣـﻲ ﻫـﻢ ﺧـﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﺸـﺮ ﻛـﻪ ﻋﻘـﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺎ ﻋﻘﻠـﺶ ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﺍﺻـ ً‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﺑﺸﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥِ ﺑﻠﻮﻍِ ﻋﻘـﻞ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻘﻠﺶ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ؛ ﭼﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺣﻲ؟ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻃــﺮﻑ ﻣﻄﻠــﺐ ﺍﺳــﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﻳــﻚ ﻃــﺮﻑ ﻣﻄﻠــﺐ ﺑــﻮﺩ ﻛــﻪ ﻋﻘــﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛــﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺸﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥِ ﺑﻠﻮﻍِ ﻋﻘﻠﺶ ﻧﺮﺳـﻴﺪﻩ ﺑـﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨـﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻲ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻭﺣﻲ ﻣﻲﺁﻣﺪ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣـﻲﻛـﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺸﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﻋﻘﻼﻧﻲ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻦ ﻭﺣـﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺟـﻮﺭ ﺗُﻨـﺪ ﺭ‪‬ﻭﻱ‪،‬‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺍﺻﻼً ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﻳـﻚ ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮﻱ‬
‫‪ 192‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺪﻳﻢﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺶ‪ .‬ﻧﺨﺴﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠـﺐ ﭼـﺎپ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﻼً ﻫﺸﺖ ـ ﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﭘـﻴﺶﺗـﺮ ﻫـﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺤـﺚﻫـﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﻔﺘﺔ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻦِ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲﺍﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺪﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺪﻡ ﻛﺸﻒ ﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﺧﺪﺍ ﻗـﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻗﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺍ ﺳﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍﻫﻲ ﻭ ﺳﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻲ ﻭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺭﺍﻫﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﺒﺢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﻛﺴـﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻭﻡ ﺯﻭﺩﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻡ ﻣﻲﺭﺳﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﻮﺑﻮﺱ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺎﺩﻩ؟ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲﺍﻡ ﺑﺎ »ﻳﺎ«‬
‫ﻭ »ﻳﺎ« ﻭ »ﻳﺎ« ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻊِ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﻴـﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﻜﻢ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻏﺮﻳﺰﻱ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳـﺎ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺭﺿـﺎﻱ ﻏﺮﻳـﺰﺓ ﺟﻨﺴـﻲ ﻭ ﺟـﻨﺲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺁﺏ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺗﺸـﻨﻪ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺷـﻜﻤﺶ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺮﺍﺏ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻫﻤﻴﻦﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﺮﺳﻪ ﻣﻲﺯﻧـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺻـﻼً ﺧـﻮﺩ ﺣﺮﻛـﺖ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺠﺎ؟ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺡ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺟﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻗُﻢ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻧﺼﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ؟ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻴﭻ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺪﺭﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔـﻪﮔـﺎﻫﻲ ﻣـﺎ ﻫـﻢ ﻣﺜـﻞ ﺣﻴـﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﭘﺮﺳﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﺩﻩﺭﻭﻱ ﺑـﻲﻫـﺪﻑ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻏـﺬﺍ ﻛـﻪ ﻣـﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴـﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺨﻮﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﻇﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻏﺬﺍ ﻓﺎﺳﺪ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺷـﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﻴـﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺲﭘﺮﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻧﺒﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺣﻴـﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻫﻮﺷـﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻋﺴﻞ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﻳـﻚ ﺷـﺪﻥ ﺑـﻪ ﻳـﻚ ﮔﻴـﺎﻩ ﺧﻴﻠـﻲ ﺭﺍﺣـﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻨﺸﻴﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻨﺸﻴﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷـﺘﺒﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺸﻴﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝِ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺯﻧﺒﻮﺭ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻧﺶ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣـﺎ ﭼـﻪ؟‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺗﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﻱ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﮔﻮﺷﺔ ﺩﻧﻴﺎﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‬
‫ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺪﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑِﻜَﻨَﺪ؟ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ ﻣـﺎ ﺳـﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻫـﻲ ﻭ ﺳـﻪﺭﺍﻫـﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‪ :‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻭﺣﻲ ‪193‬‬

‫ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺭﺍﻫﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑِﮕَﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻨﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻔﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺑﮕﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪﻡ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺯﻥ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺩﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫـﺪ ﺷـﻮﻫﺮ ﻛﻨـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﭘﺪﺭ ﻭ ﻣﺎﺩﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﮕﺎﺭ ﺩﺧﺘﺮﺷـﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘـﺖ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘـﺪﺭ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺩﺭ ﭘﺴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺴﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﺪﻫﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑـﺎ ﻛـﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺧﺘـﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺯﺩﻭﺍﺝ ﻛﻨﺪ؛ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺎﺗﻲ! ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﭙﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﭙﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺸﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﺁﺧﺮﺵ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﺻﺪﻱ ﻫﻔﺘﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﻱ ﺷﺼﺖ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﻱ‬
‫ﭘﻨﺠﺎﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺯﺩﻭﺍﺝﻫﺎ ﻧﺎﻓﺮﺟﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻓﺮﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺏ ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻔﺖﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺩﺳﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟ ﻧﻪ‪ .‬ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً‬
‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏِ ﺭﺍﻩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ‪ ‬ﺭﺍﻩ‪ ‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺑـﺮ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻜﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ »ﻇُﻠُﻤﺎﺕ‪ ‬ﺑ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﻀُﻬﺎ ﻓَﻮ‪‬ﻕَ ﺑ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﺾ«‪ 1‬ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﺮ ﺳـﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲﺍﺵ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦﻫﺎﻱِ ﺭﻭﺷﻦﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﭘﺮﺗﻮﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﭘﺮﺗﻮ ﺑﻴﻔﻜﻨـﺪ ﺗـﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﺮﺍﻫﻪ ﺑﺸﻨﺎﺳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎً ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺁﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻔﻜـﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸـﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻭﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﻘﻞ ﻭ ﺧﺮﺩ ﺍﻭﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲِ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻲ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲِ ﻋﻘﻠـﻲِ‬
‫ﺍﻭﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﺮﺍﻍِ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﺑﻪﺭﻭ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻜﺮِ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻜﻨﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮﻱِ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﻭ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺮﻳﻀﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺰﺷﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌـﻪ ﻛـﻨﻢ‪ ،‬ﻛـﺪﺍﻡ ﭘﺰﺷـﻚ؟ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺑﭙﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﭙﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻣﺸﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻭﺳـﺖ ﻣﺸـﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺪﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﭘﻨﺞ ﻧﻔﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺑﻴﻤـﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺩﻛﺘﺮ ﻓـﻼﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌـﻪ ﻛـﺮﺩﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺧـﻮﺏ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠـﻪ ﻛـﺮﺩ‪،‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :40‬ﻇﻠﻤﺖﻫﺎ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ«‪.‬‬
‫‪ 194‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺵ ﻫﻢ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻫـﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨـﻪ ﻛـﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻃﻤ‪‬ـﺎﻉ ﻫـﻢ ﻧﺒـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺁﺭﺍﻡﺁﺭﺍﻡ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷـﻨﮕﺮﻱ ﻭ‬
‫ﭘﺮﺗﻮﺍﻓﻜﻨﻲِ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﻭ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸـﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺠﺰﻳـﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺤﻠﻴـﻞ ﺧـﻮﺩﻡ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺷﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ ﺗﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺷـﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻔﻜ ـﺮِ ﺑﺸــﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺷــﻜﻲ ﻧﻴﺴــﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳــﻦ ﺟﻤﻠــﺔ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﺟﻤﻠــﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳــﻦﻛــﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﻛﻮﺷـﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮﻱﺍﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩ ﻫﻢ ﺗﺮﺩﻳﺪﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ .‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ــ ﺧﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﻩﻫـﺎﻱ ﻋﻘـﺐﻣﺎﻧـﺪﮔﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻣﺎﻧــﺪﮔﻲ ﻭ ﮔــﺎﻡﻫــﺎﻱ ﻧﺨﺴــﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻤــﺪﻥ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻫﻨــﮓ ﺑﺸــﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺧــﻮﺍﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﻋﻠـﻢ ﻭ ﺻـﻨﻌﺖ ﻭ ﺗﻤـﺪﻥ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻫﻨـﮓ ﺑﺸـﺮﻱ ـــ ﻣﻴـﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﺔ ﮔﻮﺷﻪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮﻱﺍﺵ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﮔﻮﺷﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺩﻳﺪﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ :‬ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﺔ ﺑﺸﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺔ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﺶ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺔ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷـﻦ ﻧﻜـﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻫـﺰﺍﺭ ﺳـﺎﻝ ﭘـﻴﺶ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﻫﺰﺍﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺼﺪ ﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻫـﻢ ﻧﻤـﻲﻛـﺮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺻﺪ ﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻫـﻢ ﻧﻤـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﻮﺷـﺔ ﻧﺎﺭﻭﺷـﻦ ﻓـﺮﺍﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺧﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ــ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﮕﺮ ــ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﺮﺍﻫـﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻴـﺎﺝ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﭼـﺮﺍﻍ ﺭﻭﺷـﻨﮕﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻳـﻚ ﭼـﺮﺍﻍ ﺭﻭﺷـﻨﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ‪ :‬ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪ ﻭ ﺁﮔـﺎﻫﻲﻫـﺎﻳﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻛﺴـﺐ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‪ :‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻭﺣﻲ ‪195‬‬

‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﻜﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻜﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺛﻤـﺮ ﺭﺳـﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴـﺪﺍﻧﻲ‬


‫ﻭﺳﻴﻊﺗﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﺘﺄﺳﻔﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺔ ﻗـﺪﺭﺗﺶ‪ ،‬ﻗـﺪﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﭘﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﻏﻴﺮﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻛﺴﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﻭ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪﺍﻡ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﻲ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺪﺍﻱِ ﻋـﺎﻟﻢِ ﻗـﺎﺩﺭِ ﻣﺘﻌـﺎﻝ ﭼﻴﺰﻫـﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻳﻢ ﻋﻴﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻳﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﻡ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﭼـﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﭘﺎﻳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦﺗﺮ ﻛﻨﻢ‪ ،‬ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲﺍﻡ ﺻﺤﻴﺢﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺣﺮﺹ ﻭ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻊ ﻭ ﻋﺸﻖ ﻭ ﺷﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺖﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﻋﻠـﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺍﻧـﺶ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻱ ﻣﻲﺭﻓﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺟﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠـﺐ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺻﺤ‪‬ﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻧـﻪ؟‬
‫ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻧـﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺑـﺲ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺪﺍﻡﻳﻚ؟ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﻄﻮﻳﻲ ــ ﻣﮕـﺮ ﻋﻠـﻢ ﺍﺭﺳـﻄﻮﻳﻲ ﻗـﺪﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﭘﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ؟ ــ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻗﺪﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﭘﺎﻱ ﺑﺸﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺸﻤﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺭﻧﺴﺎﻧﺲ ﻣﻲﺁﻣﺪﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻲﮔﻔﺘﻨـﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻤﻨﺪﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﺯﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳـﺎ ﺷـﻤﺎ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻛﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮ ﺩﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﻜـﻢ ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻠـﻢ ﺍﺭﺳـﻄﻮﻳﻲ ﭼﺴـﺒﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑـﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠـﻮﻳﺰ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﻄﻮﻳﻲ ﺑـﺲ ﺍﺳـﺖ؟ ﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷـﻨﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺭﻧﺴﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﺮﻭ ﭘﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ‪‬ﺕ؟ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻭ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺰ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻳﺪ؟ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻛـﺎﺭِ‬
‫ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﺭِ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥِ ﻫﻮﺷﻴﺎﺭِ ﺩﻝﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥِ ﻓـﺮﻭ‬
‫ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺎﻓﻞِ ﺑﻲﺧﺒﺮ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ؟ ﻛﺪﺍﻡﻳﻚ؟ ﺁﻧﺠـﺎ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﺠـﺎ ﻫـﻢ ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ ﻣـﻦ ﻳـﻚ ﻣﻨﺒـﻊِ ﺗـﺎﺯﺓ ﺁﮔـﺎﻫﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺻـﻼً ﻗﻤﺎﺷـﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻤـﺎﺵ ﻧـﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦِ ﻋﻠـﻢ‬
‫‪ 196‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺟﺪﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﺮﺍﻍﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺷﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺠـﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ؟ ﻓﻀﺎ ﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﭘﺸـﺖ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺷﻴﺸـﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴـﻴﺎﺭ ﺧـﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﺗـﻪ‬
‫ﺣﻮﺽ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺏ ﻫﻢ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺧـﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻫﻮﺍ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﺏ ﻫـﻢ ﻋﺒـﻮﺭ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺷﻜﻢ ﺑﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻪ؟ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻔﻬﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﻱﺍﻡ؟ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧـﻪ ﭼـﻪ؟‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﺮﺍﻍﻫﺎ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ؟ ﻧﻪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠـﺎ ﺍﺻـﻼً ﻧـﻮﻋﻲ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﻋﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﻌﻪﺍﻱ ﺩﮔﺮ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺷﻌﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﻳﻚ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﺟﺪﻳـﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺷﻌﺔ ‪ X‬ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮﻱ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﻧﻔـﻮﺫ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛـﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ؟ ﺣﺎﻻ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣـﺮﻳﺾ ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻪﺍﺵ ﺧﻮﺏ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ ﻳـﺎ ﻧـﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﻔﺘﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﻔﺘﻲ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﻳـﻚ ﺷـﻤﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﻊ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺏ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﻻﻣـﭗ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﭼـﺮﺍﻍﺩﺳـﺘﻲﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﻲِ ﺑﺎﻃﺮﻱﺩﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻭﻳـﺪ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻲﺷـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺻـﻼً ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻋﺒـﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻨﺲ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﺒﺮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﮔﻔﺘﻨـﺪ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺷﻌﺎﻋﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺸﻒ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻮﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﮔﻮﺷـﺖ ﺗـﻮ ﻋﺒـﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﭼﻪ ﺧﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳـﺎ ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ ﻭﻝ ﻛـﻦ ﺑﺎﺑـﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﻫﻢ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﺎ ﺑﺮﻭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﭼﺮﺍﻍﻫـﺎ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻫﻢ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻌﺎﻋﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻪ ﭼﺮﻧﺪﻫﺎ! ﻣﻲﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﭼﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ؟ ﻣﻲﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺑﻨـﺪﺓ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‪ :‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻭﺣﻲ ‪197‬‬

‫ﺧﺪﺍ ﺻﺤﻪ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﻢ؟ ﻳﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑـﻪ ﻳـﻚ ﺁﺩﻡِ ﻋﺎﻗـﻞِ ﻫﻮﺷـﻴﺎﺭ ﮔﻔﺘﻨـﺪ ﺍﺷـﻌﻪﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻛﺸﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﻉﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﻛﻤـﻚ‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ؟ ﭘﺸﺖ ﭘـﺎ ﺯﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﻲﺍﻋﺘﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﻌﺔ ﻧﻮ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﺯﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﺔ ﺗﺤﺠ‪‬ﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺸـﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺷﻴﺎﺭﻱ؟ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﺔ ﺗﺤﺠ‪‬ﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺪﺓ ﺧﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﻋﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻪ ﺍﺷﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﻤـﻮﻟﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻪ ﺍﺷﻌﺔ ﻣﺎﻭﺭﺍء ﺑﻨﻔﺶ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭻﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﻋﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻲ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﻛﻨﺶ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﻭ ﭼﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺤﺠ‪‬ﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻭﻡ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻢ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭﺳـﺖ ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷـﻨﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ؟ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺍً ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﺒﺮ ﺷﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮﻱ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻭ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻛـﻦ ﻭ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﺧﺒﺮ ﺷﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺷـﻌﺎﻉ ﺭﻭﺷـﻨﮕﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴـﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺴﻲ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻦ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪﻳﻢ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﻱ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭ ﻭ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺳﻌﻲ ﻧﻜـﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺑﮕـﻮﻳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﺑـﻪ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﻣـﻦ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺑﺤﺜـﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﻧﻘـﺶ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﻱ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻛـﺮﺩ؛‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻜـﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﻭﺣـﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻌﺎﻉﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﻧ‪‬ﮕَـﺮ ﻭﺣـﻲ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮگ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؛‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮگ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ ﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ! ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﺁﮔـﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﻔﻬﻤـﻲ ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣـﺮگ ﭼـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﺷﻌﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ــ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦﻫﺎﻱ ﻗـﻮﻱ ﻋﻠـﻢ‬
‫‪ 198‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﺭﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺯﺵ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻜﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ــ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷـﻦ‬


‫ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻪ ﺑﻨﻔﺶ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﮔﺮ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﻧـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻭﺭﺍء ﺑﻨﻔﺶ‪ .‬ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺗـﻮ ﺭﻭﺷـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮگ ﺧﺒﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﭼﻪﻗﺪﺭ ﻟﻄﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‪» :‬ﺯ‪‬ﻳ‪‬ﻦَ ﻟ‪‬ﻠﻨّﺎﺱِ ﺣ‪‬ﺐ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺸﱠﻬ‪‬ﻮﺍﺕ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ﻦَ ﺍﻟﻨﱢﺴﺂء‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﺒ‪‬ﻨـﻴﻦَ ﻭ‪‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟْﻘَﻨﺎﻃﻴﺮِ ﺍﻟْﻤ‪‬ﻘَﻨْﻄَﺮَﺓِ ﻣ‪‬ﻦَ ﺍﻟﺬﱠﻫ‪‬ﺐِ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻔ‪‬ﻀﱠﺔِ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﺨَﻴ‪‬ﻞِ ﺍﻟْﻤ‪‬ﺴ‪‬ﻮ‪‬ﻣ‪‬ﺔِ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﺎَﻧْﻌﺎ‪‬ﻡ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﺤ‪‬ـﺮْﺙ«‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺩ ﮔﺮﺍﻳﺸﻲ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﺷﺮﺕ ﺑـﺎ ﺯﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻥ ﮔﺮﺍﻳﺸﻲ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﺷﺮﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﺯﻧﺪﺍﻥ ــ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﭘﺴﺮﺍﻥ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﺕﺍﻧـﺪ‬
‫ــ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﺩﺭ ﻋﻬﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ‪ ،‬ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ ﻗﺒﻴﻠـﻪﺍﻱ ﺑـﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺴـﺮ ﺭﻣـﺰ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻳـﻲ ﻭ ﺛـﺮﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺷﺶ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧـﻢ ﻛـﻪ ﺁﺩﻡ ﻟـﺬﺕ ﻣـﻲﺑـﺮﺩ؛ ﻣـﻦ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﮔﻮﻳﻢ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻧﻪﺍﺵ ﺑﻴﺎﻳـﺪ ﺑﻴـﺮﻭﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ ﺻﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺐ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻧـﺎﻡ ﺍﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮﻛـﺖ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﻴـﻒ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ ﺭﻣﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﺑـﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺳـﻴﺎﻩ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧـﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﻣﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻼﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺷﺶ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ )ﺣﺎﻻ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎ ﮔﻠـﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﺑﻮﺱ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺑﺮﻱ ﻣﺎﻝ ﻓﻼﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺷﺶ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ(‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴـﺮﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻨـﺪ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺻﺪﻫﺎ ﻫﻜﺘﺎﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺯﺭﺍﻋﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻗﺎﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﻴﻒ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺔ ﺍﻳﻨﻬـﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻛﺴﻲ ﻧﻤﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻧﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺑـﺎ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺁﻝ ﻋﻤﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :14‬ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺐ ﺷﻬﻮﺕ ﻧﻔﺴـﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴـﻞ ﺑـﻪ ﺯﻥﻫـﺎ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺯﻧـﺪﺍﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﺎﻥﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻃﻼ ﻭ ﻧﻘﺮﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺐﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﻴﻜـﻮ ﻭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﭘﺎﻳـﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣـﺰﺍﺭﻉ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﺯﻳﺒـﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﻝﻓﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ«‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‪ :‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻭﺣﻲ ‪199‬‬

‫ﺷﻌﺎﻉﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻻﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺯﻥ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺯﻥ ﻣﻌﻤـﻮﻟﻲ‬


‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﮕﺮ ﺗﻮ ﺑـﺎ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ ﺁﮔـﺎﻫﻲﺍﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺯﻥ ﺯﻳﺒـﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﻲ؟ ﻣﮕﺮ ﺍﻱ ﺯﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻮ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺩ ﺧـﻮﺵﺍﻧـﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺩﺍﻧـﻪ ﻭ ﻳـﻚ ﻣـﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻓَﻜَﺴ‪‬ﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺮﺩ ﺧﻮﺵﺍﻧﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﻭ ﻗﻴﺎﻓﻪﺍﻱ ﻣﺮﺩﺍﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﻲ؟ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺑﮕـﻮﻳﻢ‪» :‬ﻗُﻞْ ﺍَﺅُﻧَﺒ‪‬ﺌُﻜُﻢ‪ ‬ﺑِﺨَﻴ‪‬ﺮٍ ﻣ‪‬ﻦْ ﺫﻟ‪‬ﻜُﻢ‪ ‬ﻟ‪‬ﻠﱠـﺬﻳﻦَ‬
‫ﺍﺗﱠﻘَﻮ‪‬ﺍ ﻋ‪‬ﻨْﺪ‪ ‬ﺭ‪‬ﺑ‪‬ﻬِﻢ‪ ‬ﺟ‪‬ﻨّﺎﺕ‪ ‬ﺗَﺠ‪‬ﺮﻱ ﻣ‪‬ﻦْ ﺗَﺤ‪‬ﺘ‪‬ﻬ‪‬ﺎ ﺍﻟْﺎَﻧْﻬﺎﺭ‪ ‬ﺧﺎﻟ‪‬ﺪﻳﻦَ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍَﺯ‪‬ﻭﺍﺝ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ﻄَﻬ‪‬ﺮَﺓٌ ﻭ‪‬‬
‫ﺭِﺿْــﻮﺍﻥٌ ﻣ‪‬ــﻦَ ﺍﷲ«‪ 1.‬ﺗــﻮ ﺑﺎﻳــﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺴــﺎﺑﮕﺮﻱﻫــﺎﻱ ﺯﻧــﺪﮔﻲﺍﺕ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻛﻨـﻲ‪ .‬ﺑـﻪ ﺗـﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺮﺩﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻖ ﺩﺭﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣـﻖ ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﺯﻳﺒﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺴﺖ‪» .‬ﺟ‪‬ﻨّﺎﺕ‪ ‬ﺗَﺠ‪‬ﺮﻱ ﻣ‪‬ـﻦْ ﺗَﺤ‪‬ﺘ‪‬ﻬ‪‬ـﺎ ﺍﻟْﺎَﻧْﻬـﺎﺭ«‪ .‬ﺑـﺎﻍﻫـﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻏﺴﺘﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﻬﺸﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺏ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺴﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﭘـﺎﻛﻴﺰﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭﻙ ﺗﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺘﺖ ﺗﻜﺎﻣـﻞ ﭘﻴـﺪﺍ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺿﺎﻱ ﺧﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺴـﻲ ﺭﻭﺷـﻨﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺷـﻌﺎﻉﺍﻓﻜـﻦ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺗﺰﺍﺣﻢ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ــ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺗﺰﺍﺣﻢ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ »ﺭ‪‬ﺑ‪‬ﻨﺂ ءٰﺍﺗ‪‬ﻨﺎ ﻓ‪‬ﻲ ﺍﻟﺪ‪‬ﻧْﻴﺎ ﺣ‪‬ﺴ‪‬ﻨَﺔً ﻭ‪ ‬ﻓ‪‬ـﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟْﺂﺧ‪‬ﺮَﺓِ ﺣ‪‬ﺴ‪‬ﻨَﻪ«‪ 2‬ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻳـﺎ ﺁﻥ ـــ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘـﺪ‪‬ﻡ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺁﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﻛﺪﺍﻣﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ؟ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮﻱ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﺗﻮﺍﻓﻜﻨﻲﺍﺵ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻧﺴـﻴﻪﺍﻱ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺁﻝ ﻋﻤﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪)» :15‬ﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ( ﺑﮕﻮ‪ :‬ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﻢ ﺑـﻪ ﺑﻬﺘـﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ؟ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﺍ ﭘﻴﺸﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻧﺰﺩ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻍﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻬﺸﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳـﺮ ﺩﺭﺧﺘـﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺮﻫﺎ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺎﻭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻨﻌ‪‬ﻢ ﻫﺴـﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺯﻧـﺎﻥ ﭘـﺎﻛﻴﺰﻩ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺍﺳـﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﻭ )ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤـﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮ( ﺧﺸﻨﻮﺩﻱ ﺧﺪﺍ«‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻘﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :201‬ﺧﺪﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻌﻤﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻧﻴﺎ ﻭ ﺁﺧﺮﺕ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﻣﻨﺪ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻥ«‪.‬‬
‫‪ 200‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺐ ﻓﻴـ ‪‬ﻪ ‪‬ﺍ ﱠﻥ ﺍﷲَ‬


‫ﺱ ‪‬ﻟﻴ‪‬ـ ‪‬ﻮ ٍﻡ ﻻ ‪‬ﺭﻳ‪‬ـ ‪‬‬
‫ﻚ ﺟـﺎ ‪‬ﻣ ‪‬ﻊ ﺍﻟﻨّـﺎ ِ‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻧﻘﺪﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ » :‬ﺭﺑ‪‬ﻨـﺂ ‪‬ﺍﻧﱠـ ‪‬‬
‫ﻻﻳ‪‬ﺨْﻠ‪‬ﻒ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻤﻴﻌﺎﺩ«‪ 1.‬ﻣﮕﺮ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻋـﺪﻩﺍﺵ ﺑـﻪ ﺑﻨـﺪﻩﺍﺵ ﺗﺨﻠـﻒ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ؟‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﺔ ﻧﺒﻮﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻣﻲﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﺻﻼً ﻋﻠﻢ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮگ ﭼﻪ ﺧﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﺷـﻨﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺧﺒﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞﻣﻼﺣﻈـﻪﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟ ﻭﺣﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‪ .‬ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣـﺮگ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺒﺮﻫﺎﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲﺍﻡ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﻜﻨﻢ ﻳـﺎ ﺣﺴـﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻧﻜﻨﻢ؟ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﻜﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻩ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻧﻴﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥِ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥِ ﻣﺆﻣﻦِ ﺑﻪ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﻭ ﻭﺣـﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺼﻒ‪ ‬ﺧﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﺭﺁﻣﺪﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻘﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻭ ﻭﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺁﺑﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻮﻱ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺰﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍﻫﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺭﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻼً ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ »ﻧﺴﺎء ﻭ ﺑﻨﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻗﻨﺎﻃﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﻨﻄـﺮﺓ ﺫﻫـﺐ ﻭ ﻓﻀـﻪ«‬
‫ﻫﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺑﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺴﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻨﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﻃﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﻨﻄـﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺫﻫﺐ ﻭ ﻓﻀﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺪﮔﺎﻩ ﺷﺮﻳﻌﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺪﮔﺎﻩ ﺧﺪﺍﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻋﻴـﺐ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﮕﺬﺭﻡ‪ .‬ﭼﺮﺍ؟ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﻢ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪» :‬ﻗُﻞْ ﺍَﺅُﻧَﺒ‪‬ﺌُﻜُﻢ‪ ‬ﺑِﺨَﻴ‪‬ﺮٍ«‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻫﻤـﺘﺶ ﺑﻠﻨـﺪ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﺿﺎﻱ ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍﻫﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺷﺐ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮﻱﺍﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺷـﻌﺎﻉ ﻭﺣـﻲ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺁﻝ ﻋﻤﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :9‬ﭘﺮﻭﺭﺩﮔﺎﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻘﻘﺎً ﺗﻮ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺯﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺷﺒﻬﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻭﻋﺪﺓ ﺧﻮﻳﺶ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ«‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‪ :‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻭﺣﻲ ‪201‬‬

‫ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺳﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺰﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻣـﺆﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻏﻴـﺮ ﻣـﺆﻣﻦ ﺟـﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪» :‬ﻗَﺪ ﻛﺎﻥَ ﻟَﻜُﻢ‪ ‬ءﺍﻳ‪‬ﺔٌ ﻓﻲ ﻓ‪‬ﺌَﺘَﻴ‪‬ﻦِ ﺍﻟْﺘَﻘَﺘﺎ ﻓ‪‬ﺌّﺔٌ ﺗُﻘﺎﺗ‪‬ﻞُ ﻓﻲ ﺳ‪‬ـﺒﻴﻞِ ﺍﷲِ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍُﺧْـﺮٰﻱ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓ‪‬ﺮَﺓٌ«‪ 1.‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻔﻬﻤﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻭ ﺻﻒ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﺆﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺠﺎﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳـﺘﺔ ﻣﺤـﺪﻭﺩ ﻛﻮﭼـﻚ ﺑـﺎ ﺩﺳـﺘﻪﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭگﺗﺮ ﻭ ﭘﺮﻗﺪﺭﺕﺗﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺮﺻﺔ ﻧﺒﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻖ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲﺁﻣﺪﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺆﻣﻦِ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻖ ﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ؟ ﻧـﻪ‪ .‬ﺣﺴـﺎﺑﮕﺮﻱﻫـﺎﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﮕﺮﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﻳﺶ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺩﺍﺷـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺸﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻲﺭﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺶ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﺭﻓﺖ‬
‫ﺳﺮﺍﻍ »ﺧَﻴ‪‬ﺮٍ ﻣ‪‬ﻦْ ﺫﻟ‪‬ﻜُﻢ‪ .«‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺗﺎﺯﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻨﺸﻴﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻻ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺁﻣﺪﻡ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﺭ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﻓﻠﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺧﻼﺹ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﮓ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﻪ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺑـﻮﺩ؟‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻓﺎﻉ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﺗﺶ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻭﺍﻧﺶ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺁﻥ ﻳﻜﻲ ﻫﻢ ﺳﺮ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﭼـﻪ ﻣـﻲﮔـﻮﻳﻲ؟‬
‫ﺍﻻﻥ ﻓﺮﺻﺘﻲ ﻧﺼﻴﺐ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛَﻠَﻚ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﻭ ﭼﻬـﺎﺭ ﺗـﺎ ﺭﺟﺎﻟـﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻜَﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﺻﺖ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﻢ؟ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻫﺪﻑﮔﻴـﺮﻱ‪ .‬ﺣﺴـﺎﺏﻫـﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠـﺎ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣـﻲﺯﻧـﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻳـﺎ ﺑـﺎﺯ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎﺭﺍﻧﺶ ﺳﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻏﺎﻓﻠﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣـﺎ ﺳـﺒﺰ ﺑﺸـﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻨﻴـﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻧﺪ؟ ﺟﻨﮓ ﺩﺭﮔﻴﺮ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻳـﻚ ﮔـﺮﻭﻩ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺠﻬـﺰ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺁﻝ ﻋﻤﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :13‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺁﻳﺘﻲ )ﺍﺯ ﻟﻄﻒ ﺧﺪﺍ( ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﭼـﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭ ﺷﺪﻧﺪ )ﺩﺭ ﺟﻨﮓ ﺑﺪﺭ( ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺟﻬﺎﺩ ﻣـﻲﻛﺮﺩﻧـﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ«‪.‬‬
‫‪ 202‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻛﻢ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﭘﺮﺗﻮﺍﻥﺗـﺮ ﺧﻴﻠـﻲ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺗـﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳـﺮﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﭘﻴـﺮﻭﺯﻱ‬


‫ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﻧﻴﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﻭ‪‬ﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪» :‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﷲُ ﻳ‪‬ﺆَﻳ‪‬ﺪ‪ ‬ﺑِﻨَﺼ‪‬ﺮِﻩ ﻣ‪‬ﻦْ ﻳ‪‬ﺸـﺂء«‪ 1.‬ﺧـﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥﻣﻨﺪﻱﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴـﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺸـﻤﻮﻝ ﻳـﺎﺭﻱ ﺧـﺪﺍ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ؟ »ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﱠﺬﻳﻦَ ﺟﺎﻫ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﻭﺍ ﻓﻴﻨﺎ ﻟَﻨَﻬ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﻳ‪‬ﻨﱠﻬ‪‬ﻢ‪ ‬ﺳ‪‬ﺒ‪‬ﻠَﻨﺎ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍ‪‬ﻥﱠ ﺍﷲَ ﻟَﻤ‪‬ﻊ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻤ‪‬ﺤ‪‬ﺴ‪‬ﻨﻴﻦ«‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﺶ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻓﺮﺍ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺫﻫـﻦ ﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻜﺮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﮔﻔﺘﻪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﻣـﻦ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﺩﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻘﻼﻧـﻲ ﺭﻭﺯﻣـﺮﻩﺍﻱ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻴﻜﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺗـﺎ ﺁﺧـﺮ ﺩﻭﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﻔﻜﺮﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻫﻮﺷـﻤﻨﺪﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺣﺴـﺎﺑﮕﺮﻱﻫـﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺭﺯﻳﺪﻩ ﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﻄﺮ ﻟﻐﺰﺵ ﺍﻭ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﻡ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻛﻢﺗﻮﺍﻥﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﺸﺮﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺭﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﻔﻜﺮﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﺗﺮﻳﺎﻟﻴﺴﺘﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﻧﭽـﻪ ﺗـﻮ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﻴﻪ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻻ ﻧﻘﺪﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻣﻲﺩﻫـﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺳﺮ ﺑﺰﻧﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺖ ﺷﺨﺼـﻲﺍﺵ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻓﻜﺮﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘـﻪ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢﮔﻴﺮﻱﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻢ ﻻ ﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﺳـﺒﻪ‪ ،‬ﻃـﺮﺯ‬
‫ﻓﻜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻃﺮﺯ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻓﺮﻣـﻮﻝﻫـﺎﻳﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻻﻥ ﻋـﺮﺽ ﺷـﺪ ﺟـﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺑﺮ ﺳﺮ ﺑﺰﻧﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧـﺪ ﻋﺎﻣـﻞ ﺍﺗﺨـﺎﺫ ﺗﺼـﻤﻴﻤﻲ ﺑـﺮ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺁﻝ ﻋﻤﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :13‬ﻭ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ«‪.‬‬


‫‪ .2‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﻜﺒﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :69‬ﻭ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ )ﺭﺍﻩ( ﻣﺎ )ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻝ( ﺟﻬﺪ ﻭ ﻛﻮﺷﺶ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻘﻘﺎً ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻩﻫﺎﻱ )ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺖ ﻭ ﻟﻄﻒ( ﺧـﻮﻳﺶ ﻫـﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﻤﻴﺸـﻪ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﻳـﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻜﻮﻛﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ«‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‪ :‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻭﺣﻲ ‪203‬‬

‫ﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﺷﺨﺼﻲﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‬


‫ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷـﻨﮕﺮﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﭘـﺲ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻲﮔﻮﻳﻢ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺟﺎ؛ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻢ ﻫﺮ ﺟﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﺷﻪﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻼﺗﻜﻠﻴﻔﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺪﻋﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﮔﻮﺷﻪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ؟ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻦ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﻓﻼﻥ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ؟‬
‫ﻛﺠﺎ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻫﺴﺖ؟ ﻫﺮ ﻛـﺲ ﻫـﻢ ﻛـﻪ ﭼﻨـﻴﻦ ﺍﺩﻋـﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣـﺮﻑ‬
‫ﮔﺰﺍﻑ ﻣﻲﺯﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨـﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺍﻳـﺎﺕ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺳـﻤﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺷﻴﻄﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻨﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﻲﮔﻮﻳﻢ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ؛ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﻪ ﺭﺑﻄـﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺣﺪﻳﺚ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻀـﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ؟ ﭼـﻪ ﻛﺴـﻲ ﭼﻨـﻴﻦ ﺍﺩﻋـﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺣـﺪﻳﺚ ﻛـﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻀﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺯﺣﻤﺖ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮔﺰﺍﻑ ﻭ ﺷﻮﺧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﻭ ﺳـﻌﻲ ﻛـﻦ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻣﻴـﺪﺍﻥﻫـﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺗﺮﻗﻲ ﻛﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺧـﻮﺩﺵ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﻲﮔﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭِ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻛﺎﺭِ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠـﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻫﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺷـﺒﺨﺘﺎﻧﻪ ﺗـﺎ‬
‫ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺧﺒﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺟـﺎ ﻫـﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺷـﻨﮕﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫـﻴﭻ ﻛـﺪﺍﻡ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺎﺗﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻭﺣـﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ :‬ﻭﺣـﻲ ﻳـﻚ ﻧـﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻘﻞ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﺷـﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﻲ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴـﺪﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ 204‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﻲ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣـﻲ ﺍﺻـﻼً ﺑـﻪ ﺳـﺮﺍﻍ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺎﻣـﺪﻩ ﻣﺜـﻞ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻮﻟﻮژﻳﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻓﻀﺎﻳﻲ‪ .‬ﭘﺮﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺑﻴﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﻨـﻲ ﺩﺑﻴﺮﺳـﺘﺎﻥﻫـﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘـﺔ ﺷـﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫)ﮔﻴﻼﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﺯﻧﺪﺭﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻤﻨﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ(‪ .‬ﺁﻗﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗـﺪﺭﻳﺲ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ ﻭ ﺟـﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻤ‪‬ﻢ ﻫﻢ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎً ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭﺱﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑـﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻳـﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻜﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻣﺪ ﻭ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺳﺨﻨﺎﻧﺶ ﮔﻔﺖ ﺑﺸﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻪ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻪ ﺳﻠﻮﻝ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻠﻮﻝ ﮔﻴﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﻨـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﺳﻔﻴﻨﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﺳﻠﻮﻝ ﮔﻴﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﺮﻣـﺎﻳﺶﻫـﺎﻱ ﺁﻗﺎﻳـﺎﻧﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺁﻧﺠـﺎ‬
‫ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻬﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮔﻔﺘﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻋـﺮﺽ ﻛـﻨﻢ ﻣـﺎ ﭼﻨـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺸﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﻠﻮﻝ ﺣﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭼـﻪ ﻛﺴـﻲ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ؟ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺩﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺮ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻦ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗـﺎً ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌـﺎﺕ ﻣـﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﺶﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺴﻔﻲ ـ ﻣﺬﻫﺒﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻓﻴﻀﻲ ــ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﻠﺴـﻔﻲ ﺧﻮﺩﻣـﺎﻥ ـــ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﻱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺑﻪﺧﻮﺩ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﺾ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻓﺎﺿﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺍﻩ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻭﺯﻱ ﺑﺸﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﻴﻜﺮ ﻳـﻚ ﺳـﻠﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺣﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺜـﻞ ﺳـﻠﻮﻝﻫـﺎﻱ ﻃﺒﻴﻌـﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻲﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺑﻪﺧﻮﺩ ﻓﻴﺾ ﺣﻴـﺎﺕ ﺑـﺮ ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻴﻨﺎً ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﺍﻓﻜﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪﺭﻱ ﻫﻢ ﺁﻳﻴﻨﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮕﺎﺭﻧﮓ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ؛ ﻛﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝﻫـﺎﻱ ﻃﺒﻴﻌـﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻻ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻢ ﻛﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺳـﺖ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺻـﻴﺖ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‪ :‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻭﺣﻲ ‪205‬‬

‫ﻛﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻛﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﻃﺒﻴﻌـﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺠﺰﻳـﺔ ﻧـﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﺠـﺎﻡ ﻣـﻲﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮕﺎﺭﻧﮓ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻘﻞ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﭘﻴﻜﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻠﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﻜﺮ ﺳﻠﻮﻝ ﻛﻪ ﺳـﺎﺧﺖ ﺣﻴـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻖ ﻧﺎﻣﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻧﺼـﻴﺐ ﺍﻭ ﻫـﻢ ﺑﺸـﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻔﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻟﻘﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﮕﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﻍ ﭘﺮﻭﺍﺯ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗـﺪﺭﺕ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻴﻢ؟ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺖﻫﺎ ﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﻪ ﻣﺎﻝ ﻣـﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛـﻪ ﻣـﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﻣﺴﻴﺢ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﻣـﺎﻝ ﭼـﻪ ﻛﺴـﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ؟ ﻣـﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻴﺴـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺤﺠ‪‬ﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﻴﺪﻭﺍﺭﻡ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﻨﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺘﺤﺠ‪‬ﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨـﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻴـﺪﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﻲ ﺳﺮﺍﻏﺶ ﻧﻴﺎﻣﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﻲﮔﻮﻳﻢ ﻭﺣﻲ ﻧﻤـﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧـﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻳـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻢ ﻭﺣﻲ ﻧﻴﺎﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﻧﻴﺎﻣﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻭ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﻋﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻄّﻞ ﭼﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻲ؟ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺣـﻲ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻫﻞ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﻭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﻴﺎﺕ ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣـﺮگ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺻﻼً ﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺑﺤـﺚﻫـﺎﻱ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜـﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻮﻟﻮژﻳﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺑـﺎﺭﺓ ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣـﺮگ ﻣـﻲﺯﻧﻨـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺨﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺧﻨﺪﻩﺁﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺗﻬﻮﻉﺁﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻼً ﺑ‪‬ﺮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻴﻨﺎً ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﺯﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻓﻜﻦ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺩﺳـﺘﺶ ﺑﮕﻴـﺮﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻠﺒﺶ ﺩﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮﻱ ﻣـﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺻﻼً ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻢ ﺧـﻮﺩﺵ ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ ﻣـﻦ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺭﺍﻱ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺻﻼً ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭﺑـﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ 206‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻛﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺷﻮﺧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺟﺎﻫﺎ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎً ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﺟﺘﻤـﺎﻋﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﻭﺣﻲ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻤﻨﺪﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻫـﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣـﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ ﺑﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﻠّﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺣـﻲ‬
‫ﻭ ﻣﺴﻠّﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺟﻨﮓ ﻭ ﺩﻋﻮﺍ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪﺍﻧـﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻨﻴـﺎﺕ ﻋﻠـﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥﻣﻨﺪﻱﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﻣﺴﻠّﻢ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ ﻗـﺎﻧﻮﻥ‬
‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻋﺠﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑِﺴ‪‬ﻢِ ﺍﷲِ ﺍﻟﺮﱠﺣ‪‬ﻤﻦِ ﺍﻟﺮﱠﺣﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻄﻠﺒﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﺎﺭ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻛـﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨـﺔ ﺍﻋﺠـﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﮔﻔﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻄﻠـﺐ ﺑـﻮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩﺍﺵ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﻋﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺑـﺎﺭﻩﺍﺵ ﺗﻮﺿـﻴﺢ ﻛـﺎﻓﻲ ﻧـﺪﺍﺩﻳﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﻓﺮﻕ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺍﺑﻎ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻠﻲ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻬﺘـﺮ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩﺍﺵ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻭﻝ‪:‬‬
‫»ﻫﺮ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧـﺐ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﻣﺒﻌـﻮﺙ ﺷـﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻗـﺪﺭﺕ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻳـﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﻕﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺫﻥ ﺧﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻣﺎﻓﻮﻕ ﻗـﺪﺭﺕ ﻋـﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺸـﺮ ﺑـﻪ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﻧﺸـﺎﻥﺩﻫﻨـﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺮﻩﻣﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﻕﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﻭ ﮔﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﻭ‬
‫ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺳﺨﻦ ﺍﻭﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻛﺮﻳﻢ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﻕﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻩﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﺫﻥ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺻﺪﻕ ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﺩﻧـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳـﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻧﺒﻮﺕ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻓـﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺸﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺒﻴـﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﻫـﺎ ﺍﻧﺠـﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻨـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﺠـﺰﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻛﺮﻳﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺎﺿﺎﻱ ﺁﻳﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻘﺎﺿـﺎ ﻛـﻪ ﺗﻘﺎﺿـﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫‪ 212‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻝ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﺮﺩﻣﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﻓـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﻏـﺮﺽ ﻭ‬


‫ﻣﺮﺿﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍﻫﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺗﻘﺎﺿـﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﺠـﺰﺍﺕ ﺑـﻪ ﻣﻨﻈـﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺟﺰ ﺟﻮﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﻣـﻲﮔﺮﻓـﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣـﺜﻼً ﺑـﻪ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩﺁﺳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣـﺎ ﻳـﻚ ﻛـﻮﻩ‬
‫ﻃﻼ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺛﺮﻭﺕ ﺑﺮﺳﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻮﺽ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﺷـﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻜﺎﻑ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺒـﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ«‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﻣـﻦ ﺑﺤـﺚ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺴـﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﻛـﻨﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻢ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﭼﻪ‬
‫ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩﺍﺵ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪﺍﻳـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭﺑـﺎﺭﻩﺍﺵ‬
‫ﺳﺨﻦ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺤﺜﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ؟‬
‫* ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺤﺚﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺒﺘﻼ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﻫـﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠـﻒ ﺑـﺎ ﻫﻤـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺸـﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﭼـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺷـﺒﻬﻪ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣـﻲﻛﺮﺩﻧـﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴـﺄﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺠﺰﺍﺕ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻃﺒﻌﺎً ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻴﻠـﻲ ﺯﻳـﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻋﺠﺎﺯ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﻋﺠﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺣـﺪ ﻃﺒﻴﻌـﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ؟‬
‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻳـﻚ ﻋﻠـﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌـﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳـﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦﻛـﻪ ﻧـﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺠـﺰﻩ ﻳـﻚ ﭼﻴـﺰ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻛﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻬﺪﻩﺍﺵ ﺑﺮﻧﻤﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼً ﻋﺼـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺍژﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﮕﻮﻧـﻪ ﺍﺳـﺖ؟ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻫﻢ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺍﺻﻼً ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﭼﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑـﻪ ﻣﻌﺠـﺰﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﺍً ﻳﺎﺩﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﺪﻣﺘﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻋﺠﺎﺯ ‪213‬‬

‫ﺩﻭ ﻧﻜﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﺷـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜـﺮﺍﺭ‬


‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﺠـﺰﺍﺕ ﭼﮕﻮﻧـﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﻣـﻲﮔﺮﻓﺘـﻪ؟ ﺁﻳـﺎ ﻋﻠـﻞ ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻧـﻪ؟ ﻧﻜﺘـﺔ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺍﻳـﻦﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻮﻻً ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﻨﺪ؟ ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺩﺭﺑـﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻛـﻪ ﻣﻌﺠـﺰﻩﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣـﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﻭﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻭﻗﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﺩﻣﻲ ﺳﺮ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡﺁﻭﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻭﺣﻲ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺣﻮﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﻼﻕ ﺍﻭ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻤﺲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻨـﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻨﺎﺳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ )ﺹ( ﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺸﻨﺎﺳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺁﻳﺎﺗﻲ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣـﺮﺩﻡ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻭ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﺓ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﻣﻲﻛﻨـﺪ؛ ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺄﻣﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺪﺑ‪‬ﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ‪ .‬ﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣـﺮﺩﻡ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺍﻛﺮﻡ )ﺹ( ﭘﻴﺎﻡﺁﻭﺭ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬
‫ﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻤـﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒـﺎﻁ ﺍﺩﺭﺍﻛـﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒـﺎﻁ ﺁﮔـﺎﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﻭ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳـﺎﺕ ﻣﻜـﺮﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪» .‬ﺍَﻓَﻼ ﻳ‪‬ﺘَﺪ‪‬ﺑ‪‬ﺮُﻭﻥَ ﺍﻟْﻘُﺮْﺁﻥَ ﺍَﻡ‪ ‬ﻋ‪‬ﻠﻲ ﻗُﻠُﻮﺏٍ‬
‫ﺍَﻗْﻔﺎﻟُﻬﺂ«‪ 1.‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺩﻝﻫﺎ ﺩﻝﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺭ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻞ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺖ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ؟‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣـﻦ ﻗـﺒﻼً ﺳـﺎﻝﻫـﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴـﺎﻥ ﺷـﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﺩﺍﻋﻴﻪﺍﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻢ‪ .‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻧﻤﻲﻧﮕﺮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﻝﻫـﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﻭ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺷﺪﻡ؟ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :24‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﻘﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺗﻔﻜﺮ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻳـﺎ ﺑـﺮ ﺩﻝﻫﺎﺷـﺎﻥ ﺧـﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞﻫﺎ )ﻱ ﺟﻬﻞ ﻭ ﻧﻔﺎﻕ( ﺯﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ؟«‪.‬‬
‫‪ 214‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍُﻣﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﻣﻲﺷـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺟـﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﺧﻄـﺎﺏ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ )ﺹ( ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪» :‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻣﺎ ﻛُﻨْﺖ‪ ‬ﺗَﺘْﻠُـﻮﺍ ﻣ‪‬ـﻦْ ﻗَﺒ‪‬ﻠ‪‬ـﻪ ﻣ‪‬ـﻦْ ﻛ‪‬ﺘـﺎﺏٍ ﻭ‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗَﺨُﻄﱡـﻪ‪‬‬
‫ﺑِﻴ‪‬ﻤﻴﻨ‪‬ﻚ‪ ‬ﺍ‪‬ﺫﺍً ﻟَﺎﺭ‪‬ﺗﺎﺏ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻤ‪‬ﺒ‪‬ﻄ‪‬ﻠُﻮﻥ«‪ 1.‬ﺗﻮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻧـﺪﻱ ﻭ ﻧـﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﻲﻧﻮﺷﺘﻲ؛ ﻭ ﮔﺮ ﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻃﻞﮔﺮﺍﻳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺷﻜﺎﻛﺎﻥ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺷﻚ ﻣـﻲﺷـﺪﻧﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺳﻮﺳﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺮﺓ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻳﻚﺑﺎﺭ ﺧﻄﺎﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺟﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪﺍﻳﺪ؟ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺷـﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻔﺘﻢ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺩﺷﻤﻦ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺸﺖ ﻛﻮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺣﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨـﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻳـﻚ ﺧﺒـﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻢ ﭘﻴـﺎﻡ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﺳﺘﺎﺧﻴﺰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺍﺏ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻛﻴﻔﺮ ﻭ ﭘـﺎﺩﺍﺵ ﺧـﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﻮﺷﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑـﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻧﺒﻮﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﻣـﻲﺑﻴﻨـﻴﻢ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﺍﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺳـﻴﺮﺓ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﺍﺗـﻲ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺮﺓ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪﺟﺎ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻪﺟﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻭ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺠـﺰﻩ ﺑـﻮﺩﻥ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﻧﺸـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﺓ ﭼﺸﻤﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳـﻚ ﻣﻌﺠـﺰﺓ ﻓﻜـﺮﻱ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺮﺩﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪ ﺍﻋﺠﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻙ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻠﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻘﻞ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﻜﺒﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :48‬ﻭ ﺗﻮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻲ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﺧﻄـﻲ ﻧﮕﺎﺷـﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺒﻄﻼﻥ )ﻣﻨﻜﺮ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ( ﺩﺭ ﻧﺒﻮﺗﺖ ﺷﻚ ﻭ ﺭﻳﺒﻲ ﻣـﻲﻛﺮﺩﻧـﺪ )ﻭ ﻣـﻲﮔﻔﺘﻨـﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺘﺐ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﺗﺄﻟﻴﻒ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(«‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻋﺠﺎﺯ ‪215‬‬

‫ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﭼﺸﻤﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻜﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪ ﻧﺮﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺗﻲ‬
‫ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻙ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖﺷﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻔﻬﻤﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨـﺪ ﻧﺒـﻮﺕ ﻣﻮﺳـﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺸﻒ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﺴـﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻫﺴﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻴﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣـﺮﺩﻡ ﻋﺮﺿـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﺳـﺘﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧـﺐ ﺍﻭ ﺁﻣـﺪﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﭘﻴﻚﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﻫﻤـﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ‪ .‬ﺣـﺎﻻ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺳﻔﻴﺮﻱ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﺍﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸـﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﭘﺸـﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﻣـﻲﺧﻮﺍﺳـﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﻬﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﺭﻧﺎﻣﺔ ﻛﺘﺒﻲ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺮﺩﻣـﻲ‬
‫ﻼ ﺍﻫﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻧﻴﺴـﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﻓﻬـﻢ ﺍﺳـﺖ؟ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺼـﺮﻱ ﻛـﻪ ﻣـﺮﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﺻ ً‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻴﺮ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﺭﻧﺎﻣﺔ ﻛﺘﺒﻲ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻴـﺎﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻭ ﺣﺘﻤـﺎً‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼً ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﻋﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻛﻢ ﺑﺪﺍﻧـﺪ ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻚ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺎﻛﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﺼﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻧﺸـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻧﻤﻲﺩﺍﻧﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻤـﻮﻻً ﭘﻴـﻚﻫـﺎ ﻧﺸـﺎﻧﻪﻫـﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮﻱ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺷـﺎﻥ ﻣـﻲﺑﺮﺩﻧــﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻋﺼـﺮﻫﺎ ﻫــﻢ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﺸــﺎﻧﻪﻫـﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕــﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﺔ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻴـﺎﻥ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺳﺤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﺩﻭ ﻭ ﺷﻌﺒﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷـﻨﺎﺧﺘﻨﺪ ﻳـﻚ ﻧـﻮﻋﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺒﺎﻫﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺑﻮﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺷـﺎﺋﺒﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺵ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺒﺎﻫﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻛـﻪ ﺧﻴﻠـﻲ ﻧـﺎﺩﺍﻥﺗـﺮ‬
‫‪ 216‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺑﻮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺸﻤﺸﺎﻥ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﺩﻳﺪﻧـﺪ ﻧﻤـﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴـﺘﻨﺪ ﻧﺘﻴﺠـﻪﮔﻴـﺮﻱ‬


‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺳ‪‬ﺤﺮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻟـﻲ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻋـﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻪ ﻋﺼﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻲ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺤﺮ ﻭ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﺣﺮﺍﻥ ﻓﺮﻋـﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔـﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨـﻲ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ ...» :‬ﻓَﺎ‪‬ﺫﺍ ﻫ‪‬ﻲ‪ ‬ﺗَﻠْﻘَﻒ‪ ‬ﻣﺎ ﻳ‪‬ﺎْﻓ‪‬ﻜُﻮﻥ«‪ 1،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺣﺮﺍﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳ‪‬ﺤﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪» .‬ﻓَـﺎُﻟْﻘ‪‬ﻲ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺴ‪‬ـﺤ‪‬ﺮَﺓُ ﺳـﺎﺟِﺪﻳﻦَ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻟُﻮﺍ ﺁﻣ‪‬ﻨّﺎ ﺑِﺮَﺏ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻌﺎﻟَﻤﻴﻦَ‪ .‬ﺭ‪‬ﺏ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ﻮﺳﻲ ﻭ‪ ‬ﻫﺎﺭ‪‬ﻭﻥ«‪ 2.‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑـﺮ ﺍﻳـﻦ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭﻫـﺎﻳﻲ ﺑـﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻓﻮﻕ ﺳ‪‬ﺤﺮ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺎﻓﻮﻕ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳـﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻴﺴـﻲ‬
‫)ﻉ( ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻴﻦﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﺭﻫـﺎﻳﻲ ﻣـﻲﻛﺮﺩﻧـﺪ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺳـﻦ ﺭﺷـﺪ ﻋﻘﻼﻧـﻲ‪ ،‬ﺷـﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﺳﻴﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻛﻔﺮ ﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺳـﺤﺮ ﺗﻠﻘـﻲ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧـﺪ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻧـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜـﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻌـﺂً‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﮔﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺁﻣـﺪﻩ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺸﺎﻥ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﮔﺮﺍﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻴـﺰﺓ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ ﺣﺎﻻ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﺩ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﺎﺭﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﺻﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﺮﺳﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﻃﻼ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻟﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﻃﻼ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳ‪‬ـﺤﺮﻱ ﺑﻴﺸـﺘﺮ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﻌﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪]» :45‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺳﻲ ﻋﺼـﺎﻱ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﻔﻜﻨـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﻧﺎﮔـﺎﻩ )ﺍژﺩﻫـﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪ ﻭ([ ﻫﻤﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺳﺤﺮﺍﻧﮕﻴﺰﻱ ﺳﺎﺣﺮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻡ ﻓﺮﻭ ﺑﺮﺩ«‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﻌﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ‪» :48-46‬ﺳﺎﺣﺮﺍﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩ ﺑﺪﻳﺪﻧﺪ )ﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﺎً ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺳﺤﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻲ( ﺑﻪ ﺳﺠﺪﻩ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺪﺍﻱ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﭘﺮﻭﺭﺩﮔﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻭ ﻫﺎﺭﻭﻥ«‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻋﺠﺎﺯ ‪217‬‬

‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻌﻼً ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳ‪‬ﺤﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦﻫـﺎ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨـﻴﻦ ﻛـﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﻲﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﺠـﺰﻩ ﺑـﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺣﻲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﻔﻜﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻫﺒﺮ ﻓﻜﺮﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻫﺒﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﻔﻜﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨـﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻫﺒﺮ ﻣﺘﺮﻗﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﻔﻜﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ؛ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻧﻘـﺶ ﻧﺒـﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﻔﺎ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺶﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺒﻲ ــ ﻧﻤﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻫﻤﺔ ﻧﻘﺶﻫﺎﻳﺶ ــ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺶ ﺍﺻﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻭﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ »ﻭ‪ ‬ﻣﺎ ﻳ‪‬ﻨْﻄ‪‬ﻖُ ﻋ‪‬ﻦِ ﺍﻟْﻬ‪‬ـﻮﻱ‪ .‬ﺍ‪‬ﻥْ ﻫ‪‬ـﻮ‪‬‬
‫ﺍ‪‬ﻟّﺎ ﻭ‪‬ﺣ‪‬ﻲ‪ ‬ﻳ‪‬ﻮﺣﻲ‪ .‬ﻋ‪‬ﻠﱠﻤ‪‬ﻪ‪ ‬ﺷَﺪﻳﺪ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻘُﻮﻱ«‪ 1.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺁﻧﭽـﻪ ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ‪» .‬ﺍُﺑ‪‬ﻠﱢﻐُﻜُﻢ‪ ‬ﺭِﺳﺎﻻﺕ‪ ‬ﺭ‪‬ﺑ‪‬ﻲ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍَﻧَﺎ ﻟَﻜُﻢ‪ ‬ﻧﺎﺻ‪‬ﺢ‪ ‬ﺍَﻣـﻴﻦ«‪ 2،‬ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺶ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩﻫـﺎﻳﺶ ﻗـﺎﻃﻌﻴﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﭼـﻮﻥ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺸﺮ ﻗﺎﻃﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌـﺪﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﻃﻌﻴﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺗﻜﺎء ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺑـﺮ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩﻫـﺎﻱ ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﺖ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻭ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺭﻭﺑﻪﺭﻭ ﻧﺒﺎﺷـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﻣﻌﻠـﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺳﺮﭼﺸﻤﻪ ﻭﺣﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﺠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ‪» :5-3‬ﻭ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺳﺨﻦ ﻧﻤﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺨﻦ ﺍﻭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻏﻴـﺮ ﻭﺣـﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺪﺍ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ )ﺟﺒﺮﺋﻴﻞ( ﻫﻤﺎﻥ )ﻓﺮﺷﺘﺔ( ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎ )ﺑﻪ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺧﺪﺍ( ﻋﻠﻢ ﺁﻣﻮﺧﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ«‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻋﺮﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :68‬ﭘﻴﻐـﺎﻡ ﺧـﺪﺍﻳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﺷـﻤﺎ ﻣـﻲﺭﺳـﺎﻧﻢ ﻭ ﻣـﻦ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺷـﻤﺎ ﻧﺎﺻـﺢ ﻭ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺮﺧﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺍﻣﻴﻨﻢ«‪.‬‬
‫‪ 218‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻫﻢ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻓﻼﻥ ﺩﺍﻧﺸﻤﻨﺪ ﻭ‬


‫ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻤﻨﺪ ﻧﻴﺴـﺘﻢ؛ ﺑﻠﻜـﻪ ﻓﺮﺍﺗـﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﻫﺴـﺘﻢ‪ .‬ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ ﺍﻣـﺮﻭﺯ ﻫـﻢ ﻧﺸـﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﺷﻚ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺷـﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻣـﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻜـﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﺷـﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻣـﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻜـﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻧﺒﻴـﺎء‬
‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻛﺮﻳﻢ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒـﻖ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻫﻨﮓ ﻗﺪﻳﻢ ﺑﺸﺮﻱ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺏ ﻣـﻲﻛـﺮﺩﻩ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳـﻖ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﺎﻓﻮﻕ ﻛﺎﺭﻫـﺎﻱ ﻋـﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻏﻴـﺮ ﻋـﺎﺩﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ‬
‫ﺳ‪‬ﺤﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﻌﺒﺪﻩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺪﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﮔﻔﺘـﻪ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩ‪ .‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﺵ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻋﺼﺮﻱ ــ ﻫﺰﺍﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﻦﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ــ ﻫﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﻱ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺣﻲﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﭙﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻭﮔﺮﻧﻪ ﺑـﺮﻭﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻣـﺮﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﺯﻱ ﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼً ﻣﻌﺠﺰﺍﺗـﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻨﮓ ﺑﺪﺭ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺷﻜﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺭﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺳـﻲ‬
‫)ﻉ( ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﺯﻱ ﻧﺒﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻣﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻏﻴﺒﻲ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺴـﺄﻟﺔ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﻭ ﻏﻴـﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺠـﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦﻫﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﻔﺎ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻧﺸـﺎﻧﻪﻫـﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﺯﻱ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻼً ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻏﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻼً ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺎﻣـﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻣـﻞ ﭘﻴـﺮﻭﺯﻱ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻋﺠﺎﺯ ‪219‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﻀﺖ ﺧﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻓﻮﻕ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻓﻮﻕﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ؟ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻣﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﻋﻮﺗﺸﺎﻥ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﺯﻱ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻣﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑـﻮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﺯﻱ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼً ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﮔﺬﺷﺖ ﺍﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ )ﻉ( ﭼﻴـﺰﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘـﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺮﮔﺬﺷﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻲ )ﻉ( ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﮔﺬﺷـﺖ ﻋﻴﺴـﻲ )ﻉ( ﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺮ ﻋﻬـﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘـﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ؛ ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﮔﺬﺷـﺖ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ )ﺹ( ﻛﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺶ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻧﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﺑـﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺁﺗﺶ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺷـﻤﺎﺭ ﻳﻜـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣـﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻴـﺎﻭﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻓـﻲ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ؛‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﺑـﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻣﻠﺘـﺰﻡ ﺑﺎﺷـﻴﻢ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻣﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻏﻴﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﺯﻱ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺩﺍﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺬﺍﺏﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺁﻣـﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﺯﻱ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺁﻣـﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺷﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺼﺺ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﺍﺕ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻏﻴﺒﻲ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ ﻭ ﭼﺮﺍ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺧـﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺟﺪﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺭﻭﻳﻢ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﻳﻚ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﻓـﻮﻕﺍﻟﻌـﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﻕﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻩ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ؟ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺭﺍ ﻣـﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﺗﻔﺼـﻴﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺤـﺚ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻞ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦﻛـﻪ‬
‫‪ 220‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺩﻭﺳﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﻛﺮﻳﻤﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﻣـﻲﮔﻔﺘﻨـﺪ ﻭ‬


‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺁﺭﺍ ﻭ ﻋﻘﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺭﻭﺷﻦﺗـﺮﻱ ﻣـﻲﺭﺳـﻴﺪﻳﻢ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﺎً ﻫﻢ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﻛﺮﻳﻤﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻪ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪﺍﻱ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻳﻢ؟‬
‫* ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺣﺎﻛﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺣﺎﻛﻢ ﺑﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻲ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﻤﺔ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻲ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻲ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﮔﻴﺮﻡ ﻛﻪ ﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺪﻳـﺪﻩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷـﺘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻧـﺪﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﺵ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻗﻀﻴﺔ ﺳﺎﻣﺮﻱ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺘﺶ ﺁﻥ ﮔﻮﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﻲﺭﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭ ﻣﻲﭘﺮﺳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻣـﻦ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﺠـﺰﺍﺕ ﻋﻠـﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻠـﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻛﻢ ﺑﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺪﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﺎﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﮔـﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻗـﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻭ ﻳـﻚ ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤـﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳـﻴﻢ ﻭ ﭼـﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻨﺎﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻤﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﮔﺬﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻜﺘﺔ ﻇﺮﻳﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻟﻢ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻇﺮﺍﻓﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺫﻫـﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﺁﻳـﺎ ﻣﻌﺠـﺰﻩ ﺑـﺮﺧﻼﻑ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺣﺎﻛﻢ ﺑﺮ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺠـﺰﺍﺕ ﺟﺰﺋـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈـﺎﻡ ﻛﻠـﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻛﻢ ﺑﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﺴﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﺍﺕ ﺑـﺮ ﺧـﻼﻑ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺠﺰﺍﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺳـﺘﺜﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻗـﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺑـﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻣـﻲﺁﻳـﺪ ﺑـﺮ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻋﺠﺎﺯ ‪221‬‬

‫ﻃﺒﻖ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺩﺧﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺑﺨـﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺳـﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴـﻚ ﺳـﺎﺧﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻧـﺪﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺳـﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛـﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻧﺪﻱ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻼﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻓـﻼﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻼﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﺓ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻓﻜﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻭ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺧﻴﻠـﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻮﻱ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨـﺎﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺩﺳـﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺩﺳـﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧـﻮﺩﺵ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﻛﻨـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻧـﺪﺵ ﻣﺸـﺨﺺ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺧﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻛﺴﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﺎﺗﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﭘﻴﺶﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﺓ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴـﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘـﺮﻝ ﻭ ﻫـﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﺩﺭﺳـﺖ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﭼﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻊ ﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺑـﺎ ﻓﺮﻣـﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻓﺮﻣـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺟﺎﻟﺒﺶ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻔﻴﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻀـﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴـﺐ ﺳـﻔﻴﻨﻪﻫـﺎﻱ ﻓﻀـﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺰﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺩﺷﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﺣﺘـﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺳﺮﻧﺸﻴﻦ ﺳﻔﻴﻨﻪ ﺩﺧﺎﻟـﺖ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺠـﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺳﺮﻧﺸﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺷـﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﭘـﻴﺶﺑﻴﻨـﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺮﻧﺸﻴﻦ ﺳـﻔﻴﻨﻪ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎ ﺗﻤـﺎﻡ ﺳﻴﺴـﺘﻢ ﺳـﻔﻴﻨﻪ ﺁﺷـﻨﺎ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛـﺎﻣﻼً‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﻴﺶﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫‪ 222‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﻲ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﻨﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﭘﻴـﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻔﻴﻨﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻛﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻔﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺍﺧـﻞ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻛﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﻋﻴﻨﺎً ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﺍﺕ ﻫﻢ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣـﺎ ﻋـﺎﻟﻢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌـﺖ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﮕﻴـﺮﻳﻢ ﻧﻈﻴـﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺳـﻔﻴﻨﻪ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻤـﺎﻱ ﻃﺒﻴﻌـﺖ ﺷـﻨﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻈﻴـﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻧﺸﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﻨﻪ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗـﺎﺭ ﻭ ﭘـﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺟﺰﺋﻴـﺎﺕ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻨـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻗﺘﻀـﺎﻱ ﮔـﺮﺩﺵ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼً ﺍﻗﺘﻀﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭘـﺲﻓـﺮﺩﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﻣـﻲﺁﻳـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺩﻩﺍﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻠـﻲ ﻓﺮﺍﺗـﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺍﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺑـﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﻧﻴﺎﻳـﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺎﺗﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺗﻤـﺎﻡ ﺭﻳـﺰﻩﻛـﺎﺭﻱﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﻪ ﺻﺎﺩﻕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ »ﻭ‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗَﻘُـﻮﻟَﻦﱠ ﻟ‪‬ﺸَـﻲ‪‬ء‪ ‬ﺍ‪‬ﻧّـﻲ ﻓﺎﻋ‪‬ـﻞٌ‬
‫ﺫﻟ‪‬ﻚ‪ ‬ﻏَﺪﺍً‪ .‬ﺍ‪‬ﻟّﺎ ﺍَﻥْ ﻳ‪‬ﺸﺎء‪‬ﺍﷲ ‪ 1.«...‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﭘـﻴﺶﺑﻴﻨـﻲ ﺗﻤـﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺭﻳﺰﻩﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﺮﺍ؟ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ »ﺍ‪‬ﻟّﺎ ﺍَﻥْ ﻳ‪‬ﺸـﺎء‪‬ﺍﷲ« ﻣﺮﺑـﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺍﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻛﻢ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑـﻪ ﺩﺍﺧـﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌـﺖ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﮕـﻮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﺪﻩ ﻧﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ ﻣﮕﺮ ﺁﻥﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻥﺷﺎءﺍﻟﻠّﻬﻲ ﭘﺸـﺘﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻥﺷﺎءﺍﷲ ﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺑﻲﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺑـﻲﺗﺼـﻤﻴﻤﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻠﻜـﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﺷﺎءﺍﷲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﻨﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺁﺩﻡ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻗﺎﻃﻊ ﻣـﺪﺑ‪‬ﺮ ﻣـﻲﮔـﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻻﺯﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺘﺄﺳﻔﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻻ ﺍﻟﻪ ﺍﻻ ﺍﷲ ﻭ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﻤﻪﭼﻴﺰ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻥﺷـﺎءﺍﷲ ﻣـﺎ ﻫـﻢ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻬﻒ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ‪ 23‬ﻭ ‪» :24‬ﻭ ﺗﻮ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻣﮕﻮ ﻛـﻪ ﻣـﻦ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓـﺮﺩﺍ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﮕﺮ ﺁﻥﻛﻪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻲ )ﺍﻥﺷﺎءﺍﷲ( ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ«‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻋﺠﺎﺯ ‪223‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً ﺑﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻬﺎﻧـﻪﺍﻱ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺴـﺨﺮﻩ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺴـﻠﻤﺎﻧﺎﻥ‬


‫ﺩﺭﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲﻫﺎ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﻣﻲﮔـﻮﻳﻲ ﻣﺴـﻠﻤﺎﻧﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﺍﻥ ﺷﺎءﺍﷲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﺷﺎءﺍﷲ! ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﭼـﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﻗﺎ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﮕـﺬﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﻥﺷـﺎءﺍﷲ ﺭﺍ ﻃـﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﺍﻥﺷـﺎءﺍﷲ ﻟﻐـﻮ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﺮﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧـﺎﻳﻴﺶ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﺭﺳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺆﻣﻦ!‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﻦﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑـﺎ ﺣﻜﻤـﺖ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﻭ‬
‫ﺣﻜﻴﻢ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟ ﺣﻜﻴﻢ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﭼـﻪ؟ ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﻛﺎﺭﻫـﺎ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‪ .‬ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﻳﻚ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﺣﻜﻴﻢ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﻴﭻﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ؛ ﭼـﻮﻥ ﻧﻈـﺎﻡ ﺑـﻪ ﻣﻌﻨـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻌﺶ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺣﻜﻤﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﻕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺣﻜﻤﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻫـﻴﭻ ﻣـﺆﻣﻨﻲ ﻧﮕﻔﺘـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺣﻜﻤﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺣﻜﻤﺖ ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﭼﻪ؟ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﻜﻤﺖ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﭼﻪ؟‬
‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺑـﻮﺩﻥ‪ .‬ﺣﻜﻤـﺖ ﻧﻤـﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧـﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﭼﻪ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﻲ؟ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ؟ ﻧﻪﺧﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻛـﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻲ‪ .‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻛﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻲ ﻳﻚﺟﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﺟﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈـﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﻲ ﺣﺎﻛﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺧﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ؛ ﺩﺧﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺴـﺎﺏ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖﺷﻨﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻭ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻨﺶ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻳﺮﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺭﻣـﺰ ﻣﻌﺠـﺰﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﺩﺳـﺖ ﺑﻴـﺎﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 224‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﭼﺮﺍ؟ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺣـﺎﻛﻢ ﺑـﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌـﺖ ﻭ ﻓـﺎﺋﻖ ﺑـﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌـﺖ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺠﺰﺍﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻦﭼﻨﻴﻦﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺷـﻜﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷـﻜﺎﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﮔﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﮔﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺧـﻼﻑ ﻃﺒﻴﻌـﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﺩ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺯﻧﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ﻃﺒﻴﻌـﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻜﻮﺷﺪ ﺍﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻳﻜﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺸﻒ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺷﻌﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻥ ﻭ ﮔﻮﺷﺖ ﻋﻀﻼﺕ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣـﻲ ﺩﻫـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﮕﻮﻳـﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧـﻞ ﻣﻌـﺪﻩ‬
‫ﭼﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻼﻑ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻛﺸﻒ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻳـﻦﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺱ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻳﻜﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺸﻒ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨـﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﭼـﻪ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﺩ؟ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻫﻢ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺤﺼﻴﻼﺕ ﻭ ﺑـﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑـﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻜﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﻣﻼﺣﻈـﻪ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ »ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻـﻮﺭ« ﻛـﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺒﻴـﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺠـﺰﺍﺕ ﺑـﺮ ﺧـﻼﻑ ﺭﻭﻧـﺪ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﭘـﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺠـﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻴﭻﻭﻗﺖ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺮﻋﻴﻦ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻔﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﺮﻉ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﻫﻤﻴﺸـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺵ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻓـﺮﺩ ﻏﻴـﺮ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺖﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﻫـﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺣﺎﻛﻢ ﺑﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﭼـﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻨـﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺣﻜﻤـﺖ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺠﺰﺓ ﻫﻴﭻﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺣﻜﻤﺖ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑـﺮ ﺧـﻼﻑ ﺭﻭﻧـﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻋﺠﺎﺯ ‪225‬‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﻛـﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩ ﻣﺤﺎﻝ ﻋﻘﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤـﺎﻝ ﻋـﺎﺩﻱ؟‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻝ ﻋﻘﻠﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩ ﻧﻤـﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧـﺪ ﺑـﺮ ﺧـﻼﻑ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺣﺎﻛﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩ ﻣﺤﺎﻝ ﻋﻘﻠـﻲ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟـﻲ ﻣﺤـﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻣﺘﻌـﺎﺭﻑ ﻃﺒﻴﻌـﺖ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺤـﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻘﻞ ﺍﺻﻼً ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ؛ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﺎﻝ ﻋﻘﻠﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ؛ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﻘﻠﻲ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩ ﻛـﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﻘﻠﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻭ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘـﻴﺶﺑﻴﻨـﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﺎﻝ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﻘﻠﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻳـﻦﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﻩ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺳـﻤﺒﻠﻴﻜﻲ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﻴﻢ؟‬
‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺜﻼً ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻋﺼـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻲ )ﻉ( ﺍژﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﻋﺼﺎﻱ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍژﺩﻫﺎ ﺷـﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﻤﺒﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﺗـﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﺑﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ؟ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺠـﺰﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﻋﻤﻠـﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ؟ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺍژﺩﻫﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ؟‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺳﻤﺒﻠﻴﻚ ﻛـﻪ ﻳـﻚ ﻣﻄﻠـﺐ ﺻـﺤﻴﺢ ﺑـﻮﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺘﺄﺳﻔﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﻤﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﺐﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺒﺎﻟﻐـﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻧﻤﻲﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻣﺴـﺄﻟﺔ ﺳـﻤﺒﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ 226‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺻـﻠﻲﺍﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻫـﻢ‬


‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﺰﻳﺰﻱ ﻣﻘﻴـﺪ ﻫﺴـﺘﻨﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭﺑـﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺼﺔ ﮔﺎﻭ ﺑﻨﻲﺍﺳﺮﺍﺋﻴﻞ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻘﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻘﺮﺓ ﺳﺮﻣﺎﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺳـﺮﻣﺎﻳﻪﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺑـﻮﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺩﻣﺶ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺷـﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﻛﻤـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻣﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﭽﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺍﻳﻦﻃﻮﺭ ﻣـﺮﺩﻩﻫـﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ! »ﻓَﻘُﻠْﻨَﺎ ﺍﺿْﺮِﺑ‪‬ﻮﻩ‪ ‬ﺑِﺒ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﻀ‪‬ﻬﺎ ﻛَﺬﻟ‪‬ﻚ‪ ‬ﻳ‪‬ﺤ‪‬ﻲِ ﺍﷲُ ﺍﻟْﻤ‪‬ﻮ‪‬ﺗﻲ«‪ 1.‬ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻨﺎ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﺠﻴﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﻋﺮﻓـﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺎﺭﻑ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻻﻳﻞ ﺍﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩﺍﺗﺸـﺎﻥ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺋـﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷـﻜﻞ ﻳـﻚ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ ﻣﺒـﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﻲﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻـﻴﻪ ﻣـﻲﻛـﻨﻢ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪﻥ ﺍﻗﻼً ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﺍﺣﺘﻴـﺎﺝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳـﻚ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﺣﻀـﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺫﻫﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪ ﻧﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﺧﺮ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻳـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﭼﻴﺰ ﻭ ﺳﻪ ﭼﻴﺰ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻫﻢ ﺑﭽﻴﻨـﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻫﻤﻪﺷﺎﻥ ﺳﻤﺒﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ؟ ﻣﺜﻼً ﻋﻴﺴﻲ )ﻉ( ﻣـﻲﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳـﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﻴﻜﺮﺓ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﻍ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺳﺎﺯﻡ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻣﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺫﻥ‬
‫ﺧﺪﺍ ﭘﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﺳﻤﺒﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﻳـﺎ ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺩﮔﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﻣـﺮﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻋـﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ؟ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﻪ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﻛﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻣﺒﺘﻼ ﺑﻪ ﺑ‪‬ﺮَﺹ‪ 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺷﻔﺎ ﻣـﻲﺩﻫـﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺑﺪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻛـﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛـﻮﺭﺩﻝ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻈـﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒـﺘﻼ ﺑـﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻛﺴـﻲﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻘﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :73‬ﭘﺲ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻳﻢ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻋﻀﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺑـﺪﻥ ﻛﺸـﺘﻪ ﺯﻧﻴـﺪ )ﺗـﺎ‬
‫ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺗﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ(‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧﺪ ﻣﺮﺩﮔﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩ«‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺷﻲ ﺟﻠﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺪﻥ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻟﻚﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺶ ﻭﺳـﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻋﺠﺎﺯ ‪227‬‬

‫ﺭﻧﮕﺎﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﺳﺖ! ﺣـﺎﻻ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺑـﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ ﻣـﻦ ﺑـﻪ ﺷـﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻢ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺍﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻻﻍ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻪ؟ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﻓﻮﻕﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﻕﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺎ ﻭ ﺳﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺎ ﻭ ﺩﻩ ﺗـﺎ ﻛـﻪ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪ .‬ﺧـﻮﺏ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺁﻗﺎﻳـﺎﻥ‬
‫»ﺳﻤﺒ‪‬ﻠﻴﻜﻴ‪‬ﻮﻥ« ﻳﺎ »ﺳﻤﺒ‪‬ﻠﻴ‪‬ﻮﻥ« ﻫﻤﺔ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﺑﭽﻴﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻨـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻬـﺎ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻤﺒﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﭼﻪ؟ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺗﺎﺯﻩ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺳـﻤﺒﻠﻴﻚﻫـﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺏ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﭽﺎﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ؟ ﺁﺧـﺮ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺣـﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﺳﻤﺒﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻗﻼً‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺒﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺶ ﻛﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺘﺸﺎﺑﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺏﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎً ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕﻫـﺎ ﭼـﻪ ﻣـﻲﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪﻧـﺪ؟ ﻻﺑـﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻼﻩ ﺳﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺗـﺎ ‪ 1300‬ﺳـﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﮕﺬﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻻ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻔﻬﻤﻴﻢ! ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻤﺒﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﻢ ﻣـﻲﻓﻬﻤﻨـﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻇـﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﺍﺗﻲ ﻫﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻌﻨـﻲ ﻓﺮﺍﺗـﺮ ﻛـﻪ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻪ ﺑﺴﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺧﻮﺏ ﻧﻤـﻲﺩﺍﻧﺴـﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻭﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﻙ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ؛ ﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﻲﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺑـﻮﺩ ﻳـﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻌﻨـﻲ ﮔﻤـﺮﺍﻩ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺷـﺖ‪ .‬ﺣـﺎﻻ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻣﻌﻨـﻲ ﺻـﺤﻴﺤﺶ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﻭﺷـﻨﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ ﻫـﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﻧﻤـﻲﺷـﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺿﻼﻟﺖ!‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻤﺒﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﺁﻳـﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲﺷﺎﻥ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻭﺭﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻋـﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻨـﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺍﻳـﺎﺕ ﻣـﺎ ﻫـﻢ ﻫﺴـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ‬
‫‪ 228‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺭﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﻃﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻃﻦ ﻫﻢ ﺑـﺎﻃﻨﻲ‬


‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﻃﻦﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺂً ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻢ ﻫـﺮ ﺁﺩﻡ ﻣ‪‬ﺘَﻔَﻘّـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻛـﺲ ﻳـﻚ ﻳـﺎ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺁﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺪﻱ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﻨـﻲ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺑﻲﺍﺭﺯﺵ ﺑـﻮﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺑـﺎﺭﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﻣـﺖ ﻫـﻢ ﺍﻳـﻦﻃـﻮﺭ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 1600‬ﺁﻳﻪ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﺖ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺒﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﭘﺲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺳﻤﺒﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻇـﺎﻫﺮﺵ ﻓﻬﻤﻴـﺪﻩ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫـﻴﭻ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ! ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﻓﻬﻤﻴﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻬﺸـﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﻬﺸﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻌﻤﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺬﺍﻳﺬ ﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻟﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺟﺎﻟﺒﻲ ﻫـﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﺑﻌـﺪﺍً‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﮔﻔـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﺴـﺔ ﺩﻭ ﻫﻔﺘـﻪ ﭘـﻴﺶ ﻧـﻮﺍﺭﺵ ﻫﺴـﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﭼﻪ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ؟!‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠـﺎ ﻧﻬﺮﻫـﺎﻱ ﺟـﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﺴﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺔ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﺴـﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺒـﻞﺧﺎﻧـﻪ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺧﻼﺻﻪﺍﺵ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺑﻬﺸﺖ ﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﺒﻞﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻪ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﺎﻣـﻞ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﻫﺴﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﻪ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﺑﻲﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ ﺍﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻟﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﻲﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﻤﺒﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺁﻳـﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻻﻟـﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺳﻤﺒﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻣـﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻬـﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻫﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻋﺠﺎﺯ ‪229‬‬

‫* ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﺁﺩﻡ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺳـﻤﺒﻠﻴﻚ‬


‫ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟‬
‫ﺑﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﺔ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻓﺮﻳﻨﺶ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺧﻴـﺮﺍً ﭼﻬـﺎﺭ ﺟﻠﺴـﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺟﻠﺴﻪ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻥﺷﺎءﺍﷲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺮﺻﺖ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﻗﺪﺭﻱ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺸﺶ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﻭ ﺷـﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺨﻨﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭ ﭼـﺎپ ﺑﺸـﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺫﻫﻦ ﭘ‪‬ﺮ ﺍﻥ ﻗُﻠﺘﻲ ﻳﺎ »ﺍﻥ ﻗُﻠﺖ«ﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻤﻲﺍﻡ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪﺍﻡ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻧﻜـﺮﺩﻩﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﺣـﺎﻻ ﭼﻄـﻮﺭ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮﺍﻥ ﮔﻴـﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺪ ﻧﻤﻲﺩﻫﺪ! ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻫﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻪﺍﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻃﻲ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﺩﻳﺪﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﮔﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻـﺤﺒﺖ ﻧﺸﺴـﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﺗﻔـﺎﻫﻢ ﻧﺮﺳـﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳـﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫* ﭘﺎﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﻤﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﻴﻦ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻛﺮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻋﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﮔﻔﺖ‪ :‬ﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺑـﺎ ﻫـﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺲ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒـﻮﻝ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ ﺑﺤـﺚ »ﻻ ﺗَﻘْﺮَﺑـﺎ ﻫـﺬ‪‬ﻩ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﱠﺠ‪‬ﺮَﺓ«‪ 1،‬ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺩﻛﺘﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻌﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺤﺜﻲ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺁﻓﺮﻳﻨﺶ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺷﺠﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺷﺠﺮﺓ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻔﺴـﻴﺮ ﺻـﺎﻓﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺷﺠﺮﻩ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻﻳﺖ‪ .‬ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﻋﻤـﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺟﻴـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻌﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻧﺎﺭﻭﺍ ﺑﻜﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺷﺠﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺠﺮﺓ ﺧﺒﻴﺜـﻪ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻘﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪ 35‬؛ ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻋﺮﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :19‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺧﺖ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﻧﺸﻮﻳﺪ«‪.‬‬
‫‪ 230‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺠﺮﻩ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻭﻻﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻘﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺸـﺎﻥ ﮔﻔﺘـﻪ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ‬
‫»ﺑﻴﺖﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﻡ« ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺣﺮﺍﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻧﻘﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻣﺮﺣﻮﻡ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻪﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ ﺑـﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﺻـﺤﻴﺢ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺻـﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ؟ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﮔﻔﺘﻢ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺩﻛﺘﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﻘـﺎﺩ ﻣـﻦ ﺑـﻪ ﺷـﻤﺎ ﻳـﻚ ﺍﻧﺘﻘـﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺿـﻮﻉ ﺻـﺤﻴﺢ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺻﺪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻫﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﻓﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﺑﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻦﻃﻮﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﻢ ﻛـﻪ ﻣﻄـﺎﺑﻖ ﺳـﻠﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳـﻚ ﻋﺒـﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳـﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷـﺖﻫـﺎﻱ ﻣـﺎ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻔﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺳـﻨﺪﺵ ﻛﺠﺎﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﭼﻄـﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻴﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺻـﺤﺖ ﻭ ﺳ‪‬ـﻘﻢ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﺎﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺑﻪ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺳـﻠﻴﻘﺔ ﺧـﻮﺩﺕ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﮕﻮ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﺰﻧـﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻪ ﻧـﺎﻡ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﺰﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﺰﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ »ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ« ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺻـﻼﺣﻴﺖ ﺍﺳـﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﺾ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻧﻤـﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧـﺪ ﺳـﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺠﺐ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ ﻭ ﻳﺎﺩﻡ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺎﺩﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﭼﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺟﻤﻊﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﺗـﺎ ﺑﺒﻴـﻨﻢ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺷﺤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺠﺮﻩ ﻫﺮﮔـﺰ ﻧﻤـﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧـﺪ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻋﺠﺎﺯ ‪231‬‬

‫ﺷﺠﺮﺓ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻛﺲ ﺍﻗﻼً ﻳـﻚ ﺑـﺎﺭ ﻗﺼـﺔ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧـﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻓﻬﻤﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﺪ‪» :‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍ‪‬ﺫْ ﻗﺎﻝَ ﺭ‪‬ﺑ‪‬ﻚ‪ ‬ﻟ‪‬ﻠْﻤ‪‬ﻼﺋ‪‬ﻜَﺔِ ﺍ‪‬ﻧّﻲ ﺟﺎﻋ‪‬ﻞٌ ﻓ‪‬ﻲ ﺍﻟْﺎَﺭ‪‬ﺽِ‬
‫ﺧَﻠﻴﻔَﺔً ﻗﺎﻟُﻮﺍ ﺍَﺗَﺠ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﻞُ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣ‪‬ﻦْ ﻳ‪‬ﻔْﺴ‪‬ﺪ‪ ‬ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻭ‪ ‬ﻳ‪‬ﺴ‪‬ﻔ‪‬ﻚ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺪ‪‬ﻣﺂء‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻧَﺤ‪‬ﻦُ ﻧُﺴ‪‬ﺒ‪‬ﺢ‪ ‬ﺑِﺤ‪‬ﻤ‪‬ـﺪ‪‬ﻙ‪‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ‬ﻧُﻘَﺪ‪‬ﺱ‪ ‬ﻟَﻚ‪ ‬ﻗﺎﻝَ ﺍ‪‬ﻧّﻲ ﺍَﻋ‪‬ﻠَﻢ‪ ‬ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗَﻌ‪‬ﻠَﻤﻮﻥَ‪ .‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻋ‪‬ﻠﱠﻢ‪ ‬ﺁﺩ‪‬ﻡ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﺎَﺳ‪‬ﻤﺂء‪ ‬ﻛُﻠﱠﻬﺎ ﺛُﻢ‪ ‬ﻋ‪‬ﺮَﺿَﻬ‪‬ﻢ‪‬‬
‫ﻋ‪‬ﻠَﻲ ﺍﻟْﻤ‪‬ﻶﺋ‪‬ﻜَﺔِ ﻓَﻘﺎﻝَ ﺍَﻧْﺒِﺆُﻧﻲ ﺑِﺎَﺳ‪‬ﻤﺂء‪ ‬ﻫﺆُﻵء‪ ‬ﺍ‪‬ﻥْ ﻛُﻨْﺘُﻢ‪ ‬ﺻﺎﺩ‪‬ﻗﻴﻦَ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﻟُﻮﺍ ﺳ‪‬ـﺒ‪‬ﺤﺎﻧَﻚ‪ ‬ﻻ‬
‫ﻋ‪‬ﻠْﻢ‪ ‬ﻟَﻨﺂ ﺍ‪‬ﻟّﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻋ‪‬ﻠﱠﻤ‪‬ﺘَﻨﺂ ﺍ‪‬ﻧﱠﻚ‪ ‬ﺍَﻧْﺖ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻌ‪‬ﻠﻴﻢ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﺤ‪‬ﻜﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﻝَ ﻳﺂ ﺁﺩ‪‬ﻡ‪ ‬ﺍَﻧْﺒِﺌْﻬ‪‬ﻢ‪ ‬ﺑِﺎَﺳ‪‬ﻤﺎﺋ‪‬ﻬِﻢ‪ ‬ﻓَﻠَﻤ‪‬ﺂ‬
‫ﺍَﻧْﺒ‪‬ﺎَﻫ‪‬ﻢ‪ ‬ﺑِﺎَﺳ‪‬ﻤﺂﺋ‪‬ﻬِﻢ‪ ‬ﻗﺎﻝَ ﺍَﻟَﻢ‪ ‬ﺍَﻗُﻞْ ﻟَﻜُﻢ‪ ‬ﺍ‪‬ﻧّﻲ ﺍَﻋ‪‬ﻠَﻢ‪ ‬ﻏَﻴ‪‬ﺐ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺴ‪‬ﻤﻮﺍﺕ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﺎَﺭ‪‬ﺽِ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍَﻋ‪‬ﻠَﻢ‪ ‬ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗُﺒ‪‬ﺪﻭﻥَ ﻭ‪ ‬ﻣﺎ ﻛُﻨْﺘُﻢ‪ ‬ﺗَﻜْﺘُﻤ‪‬ﻮﻥ«‪ 1.‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﺳﺮ ﺩﺍﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺷـﺠﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﺩﺍﺳـﺘﺎﻥ ﺷـﺠﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻑﻫﺎﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﻫـﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ ﻗﺼـﻪ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗـﺖ‬
‫ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺠﺮﺓ ﻋﻠـﻢ ﻭ ﺁﮔـﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﻣـﻦ ﻫﻤﻴﺸـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳﺸـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻔﺘﻢ ﻭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺒ‪‬ﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺪ ﺑﻲﻏﺮﺿﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﻣـﻲﭘـﺬﻳﺮﻓﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲﮔﻔـﺘﻢ ﺍﺳـﺘﻤﺪﺍﺩ ﻛـﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ؛ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﻗـﺪﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﺯﺍﻓﺰﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺼـﺎﻑ ﺍﻳـﻦﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﻃـﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯﺍﻓﺰﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻮﻱ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺧـﺪﺍﻳﺶ ﺭﺣﻤـﺖ ﻛﻨـﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻘﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ‪» :33-30‬ﻭ )ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺁﺭ( ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﭘﺮﻭﺭﺩﮔﺎﺭﺕ ﻓﺮﺷﺘﮕﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺧﻠﻴﻔﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﮔﻤﺎﺷﺖ‪ ،‬ﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺧـﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﮔﻤﺎﺷـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻓﺴﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺧﻮﻥﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻳﺰﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺁﻥﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺴـﺒﻴﺢ ﻭ ﺗﻘـﺪﻳﺲ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﻴﻢ؟ ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧـﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ )ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﻠﻘﺖ ﺑﺸﺮ( ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﻲﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻫﻤـﺔ ﺍﺳـﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺁﺩﻡ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺣﻘﺎﻳﻖ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﺮﺷﺘﮕﺎﻥ ﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻳﻨﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻋﻮﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺻﺎﺩﻗﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺰﻫﻲ ﺗﻮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻧﻤﻲﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺟﺰ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﻳﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﺎ ﻭ ﺣﻜﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﺍﻱ ﺁﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﻼﺋﻜﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﻘـﺎﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﺳﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺧﺪﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻔﺘﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑـﺮ ﻏﻴـﺐ ﺁﺳـﻤﺎﻥﻫـﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﻧﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭ ﻭ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻢ؟«‪.‬‬
‫‪ 232‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭ ﻧﺪﻳﺪﻡ ﻭ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻣﻨﻪﺍﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ‬


‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻦﻃﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﺮﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭ ﻧﺪﻳﺪﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﻟﺠﺎﺝ ﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺪﻩ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻳﺎﺩﻡ ﻧﻤـﻲﺁﻳـﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫـﻴﭻ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻲ ﺳﺴﺘﻲ ﺷﻜﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﭘ‪‬ﺮ ﺿـﺮﺑﻪﺍﻱ ﺑـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺧﻴﻠـﻲ ﺳـﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻗﻌـﺎً ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻭﺳﻴﻌﻲ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﻛﻨـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻳﻦﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺑ‪‬ﻴِّﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺧﻴﻠـﻲ ﺑ‪‬ـﻴِّﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﺪ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻤﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻘﺮﻩ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻔﻬﻤﺪ ﺷﺠﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺷﺠﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻪ ﺧﻼﻑ ﻋﻘﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﻪ ﺧﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻣﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺁﻣﺪﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻳﺪﻳﻢ ﺳﺨﺖ ﻓﺤﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ؛ ﻓﺤﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻛﻴﻚ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﻔﺘﻢ ﭼﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ؟ ﮔﻔﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻃﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻃﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ )ﺹ( ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺩﺧﺘﺮﺵ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺯﻫﺮﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﺑﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﭘﻮﺵ ﺭﻭﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺸﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺁﻳـﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﻛﺸﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ‪ .‬ﮔﻔﺘﻢ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺠﺎ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﺩ؟ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺻﻼً ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻡ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺑﻲﺍﺟـﺎﺯﻩ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺑﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ »ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍ‪‬ﻧﱠﻚ‪ ‬ﻟَﻌ‪‬ﻠﻲ ﺧُﻠُﻖٍ ﻋ‪‬ﻈـﻴﻢ«‪ 1‬ﻧﻤـﻲﺧـﻮﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻲﺍﻵﻣﺎﻝ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺁﻣـﺪ ﻭﺳﻄﺸـﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﺑﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻨﺪﺓ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷـﺖ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻜﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :4‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﺗﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﻜﻮ ﺧُﻠﻘﻲ ﻋﻈﻴﻢ ﺁﺭﺍﺳﺘﻪﺍﻱ«‪.‬‬


‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ﺍﻋﺠﺎﺯ ‪233‬‬

‫ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﺘﻘﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻭﻻﻳﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻲﭘﺴﻨﺪﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻨﺪﺓ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣـﻼ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻓﻴﺾ ﻛﺎﺷﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻭﻻﻳﺘﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻢ ﻏﻠﻂ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﺎً ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺳـﻜﻮ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﮔﻔﺘﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻻﻝ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﮔﻔﺖ ﭼـﻮﻥ ﻓﻼﻧـﻲ ﻭﻻﻳﺘـﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺣﺮﻓﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻴﻨﺎً ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻼﻧﻲِ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻭﻻﻳﺘﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺣﺮﻑﻫﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻃﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻣﺮﺣﻮﻡ ﻣﻼ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻓﻴﺾ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻔﺘـﻪ ﻭ ﻫـﻴﭻ‬
‫ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺁﻣﺪﻡ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺯﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺩﺭﺁﻣﺪﻳﺪ؟‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩﺵ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﺤﻨﺶ ﺑـﺪ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﻜﻮﻡ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻻ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺣﻀﻮﺭ ﺫﻫﻦ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺣﺮﻓﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼ ﻣﺤﺴـﻦ ﻓـﻴﺾ ﮔﻔﺘـﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻲﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻣـﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴـﺪ ﺷـﺠﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻠـﻢ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺧﻼﻑ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﻡ ﭼﻴـﺰ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮﻱ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺳﻨﺖ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺒﺎﻳـﺪ ﺧـﻮﺩﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻠﺰﻡ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭼـﻮﻥ ﻓـﺮﺩ ﺳـﻨﺘﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺗـﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺳﻨﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻠﺰﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻑ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺁﺏ ﺷﻨﺎ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺧﻴﻠـﻲ ﻣﺤﻜـﻢ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻧﻌﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﺏ ﻣﻲﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳـﺘﺤﻜﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﻴـﺎﺝ‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﺎً ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﺻﺒﺢ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺁﻗﺎﻳﻲ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺧﻴـﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷـﻮﺭﺍﻧﮕﻴﺰﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺼـﺎﻳﺺ‬
‫‪ 234‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﮔﻔﺘﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺣﻮﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻌﺘﻲ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻤـﺎﻝ ﺑﺴـﻴﺎﺭ ﺟـﺎﻟﺒﻲ ﺑـﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻮﺭﺍﻧﮕﻴﺰﻱ ﻭ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱﺍﻧﮕﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳـﺘﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗـﺖ ﺧﻴﻠـﻲ ﻋـﺎﻟﻲ ﻧﺘﻴﺠـﻪ ﻣـﻲﺩﻫـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻵﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺳـﺘﻮﺍﺭ ﺳـﺨﻦ ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﭼﻨـﺪﺍﻥ ﺷـﻮﺭﺍﻧﮕﻴﺰ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱﺍﻧﮕﻴﺰ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺳـﺘﻮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﺳـﺘﺤﻜﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻮﺭﺍﻧﮕﻴﺰﻱ ﻭ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱﺍﻧﮕﻴﺰﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﺸﻢ‬
‫ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺍﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎء‬
‫ﺑِﺴ‪‬ﻢِ ﺍﷲِ ﺍﻟﺮﱠﺣ‪‬ﻤﻦِ ﺍﻟﺮﱠﺣﻴﻢ‪‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺍ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻭﻻﺩﺕ ﭘ‪‬ﺮ ﺑﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﺩﻭﺍﺯﺩﻫﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﻋﺼﺮ )ﻋﺞ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭ ﻫﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﺖ ﺷﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻴﺪﻭﺍﺭﻡ ﺭﻫﺮﻭﺍﻧـﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺳﻼﻟﺔ ﭘﺎﻙ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻭ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎﻳﺐﺍﻻﻣﺎﻡ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﻫـﺮ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﺑـﺎ ﻣﻌﻴـﺎﺭ ﻣﻜـﺎﺭﻡ ﻭ ﻓﻀـﺎﻳﻞ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺯﺵﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻭ ﺳﻨﺠﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﻣـﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨـﺪ ﻧﺎﻳـﺐ ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﭼﻪ ﺧﻮﺵ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﺖ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻜﺮﻣﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﻧﻬﺎﻥ ﺟﺴﺖﻭﺟﻮ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺯﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ )ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧـﻪ ﺻﺪﺩﺭﺻـﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟـﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﺻﺪﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ( ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﻳﺐ ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭﺵ ﻣﺘﺠﻠّﻲ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻭ ﻋـﺪﺍﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺒـﻮﺕ ﻭ ﻧﻘـﺶ ﺍﻧﺒﻴـﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪» :‬ﻟَﻘَﺪ‪ ‬ﺍَﺭ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ﻠْﻨﺎ ﺭ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ﻠَﻨﺎ ﺑِﺎﻟْﺒ‪‬ﻴِّﻨﺎﺕ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍَﻧْﺰَﻟْﻨﺎ ﻣ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﻬ‪‬ﻢ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻜ‪‬ﺘﺎﺏ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥَ ﻟ‪‬ﻴ‪‬ﻘُﻮﻡ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻨّﺎﺱ‪‬‬
‫ﺑِﺎﻟْﻘ‪‬ﺴ‪‬ﻂ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍَﻧْﺰَﻟْﻨَﺎ ﺍﻟْﺤ‪‬ﺪﻳﺪ‪ ‬ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ‬ﺑ‪‬ﺄْﺱ‪ ‬ﺷَﺪﻳﺪ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ﻨﺎﻓ‪‬ﻊ‪ ‬ﻟ‪‬ﻠﻨّﺎﺱِ ﻭ‪ ‬ﻟ‪‬ﻴ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﻠَﻢ‪ ‬ﺍﷲُ ﻣ‪‬ﻦْ ﻳ‪‬ﻨْﺼ‪‬ـﺮُﻩ‪‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ‬ﺭ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ﻠَﻪ‪ ‬ﺑِﺎﻟْﻐَﻴ‪‬ﺐ«‪ 1.‬ﻣﺎ ﺭﺳﻮﻻﻧﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨـﺎﺕ ﻓﺮﺳـﺘﺎﺩﻳﻢ )ﺑـﺎ ﭼﻴﺰﻫـﺎﻳﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨـﺪ(‪ .‬ﻭ ﺑـﺎ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :25‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﺎ ﻣﺎ ﭘﻴﻤﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺩﻟّﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﺍﺕ ﻓﺮﺳـﺘﺎﺩﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻳﺸـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻋﺪﻝ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺗـﺎ ﻣـﺮﺩﻡ ﺑـﻪ ﺭﺍﺳـﺘﻲ ﻭ ﻋـﺪﺍﻟﺖ ﮔﺮﺍﻳﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺁﻫـﻦ )ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻠﺰﺍﺕ( ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ )ﺟﻨﮓ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺯﺍﺭ( ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻨـﺎﻓﻊ ﺑﺴـﻴﺎﺭ ﺑـﺮ ﻣـﺮﺩﻡ ﺍﺳـﺖ )ﻧﻴـﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻋﺪﺍﻟﺖ( ﺁﻓﺮﻳﺪﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺭ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ﻠﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﻗﻠﺒـﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﻳـﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ«‪.‬‬
‫‪ 240‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻳﻢ )ﻛﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﻭ‬


‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺳﻨﺠﺶ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺑﺸﻮﺩ ﺣﻖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻃﻞ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺯﺵﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛـﺮﺩ( ﺗـﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻗﺴﻂ ﻭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﻣﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥﻫـﺎ‬
‫ﺁﻓﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﭘﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻫﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻓﺮﺳـﺘﺎﺩﻳﻢ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﺎ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻣــﻲﺷــﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﻫــﺎﻱ ﺳــﺨﺖ ﺑــﻪ ﻭﺟــﻮﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ )ﻭﺳــﻴﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺳــﺖ ﺑــﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﺎﻧﺔ ﻗﻬﺮﺁﻟﻮﺩ( ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺳﻮﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺔ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﺴـﺘﻨﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﻭ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻧﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺣﻲ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﻌﺜﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﻫﺴﺖ؛ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺁﻳﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻧﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘـﺶ ﺍﻭﻟـﺶ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪﻫـﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺮﺳﺶﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﻬﺎﻡﺯﺩﺍﻳﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻚ ﻣﺒﻬﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻘﺪﻩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮔـﺮﻩﻫـﺎ ﻣـﺎﻧﻊ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﻟﻢ ﺑﻴﻨﺪﻳﺸﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻟﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻲ ﻭ ﺳـﺎﻟﻢ ﻭ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﺎﻧـﻪ ﺗﺼـﻤﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮ ﻣﻲﮔﺸﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻣﺒﻬﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻦ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﻓﺮﺳﺘﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﻲ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮﻱ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﻱ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮﻱ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﭼـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺩﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﭼﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻌﺠﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺒﻴـﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺋﻤـﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣ‪‬ﺠﺞ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻟﻬﺎ ! ﺧﻮﺩﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺸﻨﺎﺳﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﺠﺘـﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻨﺎﺳﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻧﺒﻴ‪‬ﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺸﻨﺎﺳﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺸﻨﺎﺳﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣـﻦ ﺣﺠـﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﺸﻢ‪ :‬ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺍﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎء ‪241‬‬

‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﻃﻊ ﺗﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻨﺎﺳﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﺣﺠﺖ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳـﺖ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﻫﺴـﺘﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﺔ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ؛ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪﻫﺎﻳﺸﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻴﻢﺷﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑـﺎ ﻋﻤـﻞ ﻭ ﺳـﻨﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﺷﻴﻮﺓ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻴﺸﺎﻥ؛ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺳﻴﺮﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻨﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺒﻴـﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺁﺩﻡ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨﻨـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻝ‬
‫ﺁﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﺪﺍﻥ ﺁﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﻐﺰ ﺁﺩﻡ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺒﻴـﺎ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ ﻣـﻲﻓﺮﺳـﺘﻴﻢ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ ﻭﺳـﻴﻠﺔ ﻫـﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻫﺴـﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺘـﺎﺑﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻫـﻢ ﻛـﻪ ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧـﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻓﺮﺳﺘﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﻓﺮﺳـﺘﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑـﺰﺍﺭ ﻫـﺪﺍﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﭘﻴﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﻫـﺪﺍﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤـﺎﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﻫﺒــﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴــﺎﺝ ﻓــﺮﺍﻭﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻫــﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠــﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﻳﻜــﻲ ﻣﺮﺣﻠــﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺭﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺭﻫﺒـﺮﻱ؛ ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﺭﻫـﺮﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺮﺍﻁ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺁﻣﻮﺯﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺑ‪‬ﻲ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﭘﻴﺮِ ﺭﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﻲﺑﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﻱ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺣﻖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣـﻲﻛﺸـﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺭﻫﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻌﺎﺩﺗﻤﻨﺪ ﺯﻳﺴﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﻛﻨـﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﮕﻴﺰﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻣﻲﺍﻧﮕﻴﺰﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻭﺝ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺳـﻌﺎﺩﺗﻤﻨﺪ ﺯﻳﺴـﺘﻦ ﭼﻴﺴـﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﻴﻔﺘﻨـﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺒﻲﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﻨـﺪ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺒـﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘـﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻤـﻮﻻً‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻭ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ‪ :‬ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﻭﺣـﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻭﻧﺪ ﺑﻲﺁﻥﻛﻪ ﻣﺴـﺌﻮﻝ ﺭﺳـﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﭘﻴـﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﺴـﻴﻢ ﮔﻔﺘـﻪ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣـﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪﺍﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺣﺘـﻲ ﺩﺭﺑـﺎﺭﺓ ﻓَـﺮﻕ ﻣﻴـﺎﻥ ﻧﺒـﻲ ﻭ ﺭﺳـﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺎﺣﺐﻧﻈﺮﺍﻥ ﻫﻤﻴﻦﻃﻮﺭ ﮔﻔﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺒﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻧﺒﻲ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻧﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫‪ 242‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺧﺒﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧَﺒ‪‬ﺄ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺧﺒـﺮ ﻣـﻲﮔﻴـﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺳـﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻑﻫﺎ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﻓﻌﻼً ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺚ ﭘﻴﭽﻴـﺪﻩ ﺷـﻮﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﺟﻤﺎﻻً ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺣﻤﺖ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﺮ ﺻـﺮﺍﻁ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻲ ﻭ ﻧﺒﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻧﺒﻲﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﺴـﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﺭﺳـﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺷـﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ ﺑـﻪ ﺭﺍﺳـﺘﻲ ﻧﺘـﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﺗـﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ ﭼﻨـﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺒﻴـﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻧﺒﻲ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﺷﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺧﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺸﺎﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ ﺑـﺎ ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﻨﺸﻴﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪» .‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ«‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻳﻨﺠـﺎ ﻫﺴـﺘﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺭﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺷﺄﻥ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍَﻣﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺭﻫﺮﻭﺍﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪ ﺍﻋﻼ‬
‫ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﺩﻭ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻩﺍﻧـﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺒﻴـﺎﻳﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺭﻫﺮﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻔﺲﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﻣﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﺛﺮ ﭼﻨﺪﺍﻧﻲ ﻧﮕﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺻـﺮﻓﺎً ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﭘﻴﺸﺎﭘﻴﺶ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺣﺮﻛـﺖ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺭﻫﺮﻭﺍﻧـﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺭﻫﺒﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺭﺁﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺴﺌﻠﺔ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﺶ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺧﻠﻴﻞ )ﻉ( ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻟﻬﺎ ! ﻣـﺮﺍ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺒﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻩ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧﺪ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺁﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻱ ﺍﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻣﺎ ﺗـﻮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧﺪﺍ ! ﺍﺯ ﺫﺭﻳ‪‬ﻪ ﻭ ﻧﺴـﻞ ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﺸﻢ‪ :‬ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺍﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎء ‪243‬‬

‫ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ؟ ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥﻫـﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻫﻞ ﺳﺘﻢ ﻭ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﺳـﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﻨﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺒـﺮ ﺑﺎﺷـﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍﻣـﺎﻡ ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﻫﺒﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻖ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻛﺴـﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﭘﻴﺸـﺎﭘﻴﺶ ﺟﻤﻌﻴـﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﺟﻤﺎﻋـﺖ ﺑـﻪ ﻧﻤـﺎﺯ ﻣـﻲﺍﻳﺴـﺘﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺠـﺎ؟ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﺸـﺎﭘﻴﺶ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺯﮔﺰﺍﺭﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﺯﮔﺰﺍﺭﺍﻥ ﻫﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﻪﺍﻱ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺳﺨﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺁﻳﻪﺍﻱ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺫﻛﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻫـﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﻭ ﺑﺠﺎ ﻣـﻲﺁﻭﺭﻧـﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍﻣـﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺸﺎﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻋـﻴﻦ ﺣـﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻫﻢ ﭘﻴﺸﺎﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨـﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ؟ ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ؟ ﺁﻧﺠـﺎ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻱ ﺭﻩ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻥ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻥ ﻭ ﺳﺪ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻣﻲﺍﻓﺘـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺷﺎﻥ ﺭﻫﺮﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻱ ﺁﺭﻣﺎﻥْ ﭘﻮﻳﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﻭﺍﻻﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺳـﺪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺍﺻﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤـﻊ ﺍﺳـﺖ؛‬
‫ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻊ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻳﺎﺭﺍﻧﺶ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻲﻧﺸﺴﺖ؟ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺣﻠﻘـﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻳﺎﺭﺍﻧﺶ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩ؟ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻊ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻱ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺶ ﻧﻤـﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴـﺖ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻨﺎﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﺓ ﺯﻳﺒﺎﻱ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﻳـﻢ‪ .‬ﺑـﺮﺍﺩﺭﺍﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺮﺍﻥ ! ﺣﺮﻑﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻲﺯﺩﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﻴﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻳـﻚ ﺳـﺎﻝ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺪ ﺳﺨﻦ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻣـﻲﮔﻔﺘـﻴﻢ‪ :‬ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﭼﻨـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻣﻲﮔـﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﭼﻨـﻴﻦ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺎ ﭼﻪ ﺣﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳـﺖ ﺁﻣـﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ؟ ﺍﻣـﺮﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯﻱ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫‪ 244‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺳﺨﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻭ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﻘّﻖ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺭﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬


‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲﭘﺬﻳﺮﻡ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﭙﺬﻳﺮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﺭﻣـﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻌـﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳـﻚ ﺭﻭﺯﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﻫﻪ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣـﺎ ﻧﻤـﻲﺗـﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﻳـﻢ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﻳـﺎﻥ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻫﺴـﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺑﻪﺧﻮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺷﺘﺎﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺷـﺎﻧﺰﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻫﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﺺ‪ ‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻤـﻲﺧـﻮﺍﻫﻢ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻢ ﻫﻴﭻﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻴﭻﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻫﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻘﺼـﻴﺮ ﻧﺪﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻟـﻲ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻗﺖ ﻭ ﺷـﺠﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺻـﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﻣـﻲﮔـﻮﻳﻢ ﻛـﻪ ﺟﻬـﺖ ﺣﺮﻛـﺖ ﺭﺍ ﮔـﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﻱ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻣـﻲﻃﻠﺒﻴﺪﻳـﺪ ﻭ ﻣـﻲﻃﻠﺒﻴـﺪﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗـﻼﺵ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛـﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺷﺘﺎﺏ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ؟ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻤﻊﺑﻨﺪﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻪ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺟﻤﻊﺑﻨﺪﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻊﺑﻨﺪﻱﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﺩﺍﻥ ﺑﻲ ﻏـﺮﺽ ﻭ ﻣـﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺁﮔـﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻴـﺰﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺁﺷـﻨﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﺳـﺨﺘﻲﻫـﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺷﻮﺍﺭﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺧﻂ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻢ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻟﻬﺎ ! ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮ ﻣﻲﺧـﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﻣﻨـﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺻﺮﺍﻁ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺻﺮﺍﻁﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺒﻴﻞﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩﻫـﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓـﻲ ﮔـﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻜﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻢ ﭘﻴﺸﺎﭘﻴﺶ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨﻨـﺪ ﻭ ﻫـﻢ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻊ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻫﻤﺔ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈـﺎﻡ ﺟﻤﻬـﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺳـﻼﻣﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﺷـﻜﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤـﻊ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﻨـﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤـﻊ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻴﭻﻛﺲ ﺣﻖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺳ‪‬ﻤﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻫـﻴﭻ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﺸﻢ‪ :‬ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺍﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎء ‪245‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺻﻞﻫـﺎﻱ‬


‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻫﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﻀﻲﻫﺎ ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ ﺻـﺤﺒﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺒﺮﻱ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﻲﻛﺸﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺿـﻌﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄـﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺯﻭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﮔـﻮﻳﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻣـﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﺖ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘـﻪ ﻭ ﺑـﺎ ﺳـﺮﻋﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﺷﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﺖ ﻫﻢ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻣﺘـﻲ ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﻣﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺻﻼً ﻧﻤﻲﺑﻴﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻭ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﻣﻨـﺪ ﺷـﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣــﺎﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈــﺮ ﺑﻴــﻨﺶ ﻭ ﻣــﻨﺶ ﻭ ﺭﻓﺘــﺎﺭ ﻣــﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧــﺪ ﺻــﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺑــﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣــﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴـﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣـﻖ‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﺎﻫﺶ ﺁﻥﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻭ ﻭ ﺍﻣـﺖ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﭘﺮﻧﺸﺪﻧﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻣـﺎﻣﻲ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﻘﺸﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻫﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﻣﺖ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﭘﻴﺸﺘﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘـﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﻴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺁﻥﻗﺪﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲﻫﺎ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻗﺘﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﺪ‪» .‬ﺍَﻻ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍ‪‬ﻥﱠ ﻟ‪‬ﻜُﻞﱢ ﻣ‪‬ﺄْﻣ‪‬ﻮﻡٍ ﺍ‪‬ﻣﺎﻣﺎً ﻳ‪‬ﻘْﺘَﺪﻱ ﺑِﻪ«‪ 1‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺣـﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺄﻣﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻗﺘﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﻻ )ﻉ(‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺳﺨﻦ ﻣﻲﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧﻢ ﺷـﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦﺟﻮﺭ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻟﻜﻦ »ﻓَﺎَﻋﻴﻨُﻮﺍ ﺑِﻮ‪‬ﺭ‪‬ﻉٍ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﺟ‪‬ﺘ‪‬ﻬﺎﺩ«‪ 2.‬ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻜﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﻭﻩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧـﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥﻗﺪﺭ ﭘﻴﺸﺘﺎﺯ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺶﮔﺎﻡ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺶﺭﻭ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺻﻼً ﻣﻠﺖ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺸﻨﺎﺳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻙ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً ﻫﻢ ﭘﻴﺸـﺘﺎﺯ ﻭ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﻣﺠﻠﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﺎﺭﺍﻻﻧﻮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺝ‪ :33‬ﺹ‪.474‬‬


‫‪ .2‬ﻛﻠﻴﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﺝ‪ :2‬ﺹ‪.187‬‬
‫‪ 246‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﭘﻴﺶﮔﺎﻡ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺶﺭﻭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻﻼً ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﻙ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧـﺪ‪.‬‬


‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺁﻥﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﻫﺴﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻭ ﺧﺪﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﺮﺩﻣﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥﻗﺪﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑـﺮ ﻣـﺮﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺯﺑﻪﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣـﺮﺩﻡ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸـﻪﻫـﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﺭﺍﺗﺸـﺎﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﺭﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻓﻬﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻭ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﺷﺎﻥ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺩﺭﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻨـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﺩ ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻮﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪» :‬ﻟَﻘَﺪ‪ ‬ﻛﺎﻥَ ﻟَﻜُﻢ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﺭ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ﻮﻝِ ﺍﷲِ ﺍُﺳ‪‬ـﻮ‪‬ﺓٌ ﺣ‪‬ﺴ‪‬ـﻨَﻪ«‪ 1.‬ﺍﻧﺒﻴـﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑ‪‬ﻌـﺪ‬
‫ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫـﻢ ﺍﻣـﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻫﺒﺮﻧـﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﻛﺸﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻲﺑ‪‬ﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺯﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻛﺴﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺎﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩ؛ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻛﺸﺶ ﻭ ﺟﺎﺫﺑـﻪﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﻛﺸﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺍﺳـﻮﺓ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻣﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑ‪‬ﺮﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻜﺸﺎﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺘـﻲ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘـﻪ ﻃﺒﻴﻌـﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺚﻫﺎ ﺟﺎﻱ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﻭ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺑﺤﺜـﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻊﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﻋﺪﺍﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻡﺁﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻋﺪﻝ ﻭ ﻗﺴﻂ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪» :‬ﻛُﻮﻧُﻮﺍ ﻗَﻮ‪‬ﺍﻣﻴﻦَ‬
‫ﺑِﺎﻟْﻘ‪‬ﺴ‪‬ﻂ«‪ 2‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﻴﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﻗﺴـﻂ ﻭ ﻋـﺪﻝ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑـﺮﭘﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﻳـﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤـﻪ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﻋـﺪﻝ‪ :‬ﻋـﺪﻝ ﺍﺧﻼﻗـﻲ ﻭ ﻋـﺪﻝ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻳﺮﺑﻨﺎﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻗﻠﺒﺖ ﻭ ﻗﻠﺒﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺗـﺎ ﺑﺘـﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻣـﺪﻋﻲ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺣﺰﺍﺏ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :21‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺧﺪﺍ )ﭼﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺒﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣـﺖ ﺑـﺎ ﺩﺷـﻤﻦ ﻭ‬
‫ﭼﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻭﺻﺎﻑ ﻭ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻴﻜﻮ( ﺍﻗﺘﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﺳﺖ«‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﺴﺎء‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :135‬ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﺪﺍﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ«‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﺸﻢ‪ :‬ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺍﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎء ‪247‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﻼﻕ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﻢ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺻـﺤﻴﺢ ﻭ ﺳـﺎﻟﻢ ﻭ‬


‫ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻢ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﻫﺴـﺘﻢ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﻬـﺎﻳﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺍﺋﻤـﺎً‬
‫ﺩﺭﻭﻍ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻭﻍ ﻣﻲﺑﻨﺪﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻬﻤﺖ ﻣـﻲﺯﻧﻨـﺪ ـــ ﺩﺭﻭﻍ ﺑﺴـﺘﻦﻫـﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻤﺖ ﺯﺩﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﻛﺘﻴﻜﻲ ــ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﻤـﺎً ﺟﻌـﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺰﻭﻳـﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ ـــ ﺟﻌـﻞ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﻛﺘﻴﻜﻲ ــ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻋﺪﻝ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﻣﻨﺤـﺮﻑﺍﻧـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺒﻴـﺎ ﺑﺮﭘـﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪﮔﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻝﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻋﺪﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﻝ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﻋﺪﻝ ﺍﺧﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻋـﺪﻝ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻫﻨﮓ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﻝ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋـﺪﻝ ﺍﻳﻤـﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻋـﺪﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤـﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺒﻴـﺎ ﻋـﺎﺩﻝﺳـﺎﺯﻧﺪ؛‬
‫ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﻲﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻲ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﺎﻣﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﻝ ﺍﺧﻼﻗﻲ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺗﺄﺛﺮ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻭ ﻋﻜﺲﺍﻟﻌﻤـﻞ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩﺳـﺎﺧﺘﮕﻲ ﻭ ﻛـﺎﺭﺩﻫﻲ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﭘـﺬﻳﺮﻱ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑـﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋـﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺪﻝ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻭ ﻋـﺪﻝ ﺍﻗﺘﺼـﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤـﺔ ﺍﺑﻌـﺎﺩﺵ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﻣﻲﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﻝ ﺍﺧﻼﻗﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻨـﻮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻋـﺪﻝ ﺍﻗﺘﺼـﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪ .‬ﻣـﺎﺩﺍﻡ ﻛـﻪ ﺟﻤﻬـﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻋﺪﻝ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺑ‪‬ﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﻱ ﻋﺪﻝ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺍﻱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﻴـﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺧـﺪﺍﻱ ﻧﻜـﺮﺩﻩ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓـﺖ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﻫﺎﻧﻴﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪ ﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﻫﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻋﺪﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﻝ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺑﺨﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺷﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺷﺪﻧﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺗـﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻳﻢ ﺑﺎ »ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ«‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺯﺵﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﺣﻖ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻃﻞ‪ ،‬ﺯﺷﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺒـﺎ ﻓﺮﺳـﺘﺎﺩﻳﻢ ﺗـﺎ ﻣـﺮﺩﻡ ﺩﺭ‬
‫‪ 248‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﭘﺮﺗﻮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮﻱ ﻭ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨـﺪ ﻋـﺪﺍﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﻧـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺒﻴـﺎ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡﺁﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻋﺪﻝ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻓﻌﻠـﻲ ﻣـﺎ ﺁﺛـﺎﺭ ﻋـﺪﻝ ﺍﺟﺘﻤـﺎﻋﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺍﺧﻼﻗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻫﻤﻪﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺣـﺎﻻ ﻛـﻪ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ ﭼـﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﻢ؟ ﺣﺎﻻ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﺑﺴﺎﻣﺎﻧﻲﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺒﻌﻴﺾﻫـﺎ ﻭ ﺑـﻲﻋـﺪﺍﻟﺘﻲﻫـﺎ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ؟ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻧ‪‬ﻖ ﺯﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺑﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺧﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺪﺍﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺳﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﻛﻮ ﻋﺪﺍﻟﺖ؟ ﻏُﺮ ﺯﺩﻥ؟ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﭼﻪ ﺟﻤﻬﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲﺍﻱ ﺷﺪ؟ ﺧﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻩ ﺩﻟﺴﺮﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﻧﻮﻣﻴـﺪﻱ ﻭ‬
‫ﺿﻌﻒ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑـﺎﺑـﺎ ! ﺁﺭﺯﻭﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻬﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﺪ؛ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ ﺷـﺮﻭﻉ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨﻴـﺪ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﺔ ﺑﺎﺯﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﮕﺮﻳﺴﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻜﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻜﻢﺗﺮ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺁﻣـﺎﺩﻩ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻴﺸـﺘﺮ ﺧـﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲِ ﺳﻨﮕﻼﺥِ ﭘ‪‬ﺮﻧﺸﻴﺐ ﻭ ﻓـﺮﺍ ِﺯ ﺍﻧﻘـﻼﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎ ﻗﺎﻃﻌﻴـﺖ ﻫـﺮ ﭼـﻪ ﺑﻴﺸـﺘﺮ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻤﻮﺩﻥ؟ ﻛﺪﺍﻡﻳﻚ؟ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﺯﻙﻧﺎﺭﻧﺠﻲﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﺒﻞﺍﻧﺪ؛ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺰﺩ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ؛ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪﻳﺶ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺤﻲﻧﮕﺮﻧﺪ؛ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻜـﺮ ﻣﻲﻛـﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ‪ 22‬ﺑﻬﻤـﻦ ‪ 57‬ﻣﺒـﺎﺭﺯﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴـﺮﻭﺯﻱ ﺭﺳﻴـﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻤـﺎﻡ ﺷـﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻴـﻮﻩ ﭼﻴـﺪﻥ ﻭ ﺑﻬـﺮﻩﻣﻨـﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﺎﻝﻫﺎ ﻛ‪‬ﺸﺘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺩﺭﻭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﺭﻱ ﺟـﺎﻧﻢ! ﺣـﺎﻻ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻭ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭﻭ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨـﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﺑـﺮ ﺳـﺎﻝﻫـﺎﻱ ﻛ‪‬ﺸـﺖ ﻃـﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺸـﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﻭ ﻣــﻲﻛﻨــﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻭ ﺷــﺮﻭﻉ ﺷـﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟــﻲ ﻃــﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺍﺳــﺖ‪ ،‬ﺯﺣﻤــﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻗﻴﺖ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻭ ﻓﺪﺍﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫـﺪ؛ ﻧـﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺑﻲﺯﺣﻤﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺸﺎﻭﺭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺰﻳﺰ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑـﺎ ﺩﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻭ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﺟـﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺮﻣﻦﻛﻮﺑﻲ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺁﻧﺠـﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻜﻮﺑﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺩ ﺩﻫﻨـﺪ ﻭ ﮔﻨـﺪﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛـﺎﻩ ﺟـﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﮔﻨـﺪﻡﻫـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﺸﻢ‪ :‬ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺍﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎء ‪249‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪ ﻭ ﺧـﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧـﺎﻥ ﺑﭙﺰﻧـﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺨﻮﺭﻧـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﻣﻨﺪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﺸﺘﻪﺍﻧـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣـﺪﺕ ﻛﺸـﺘﻦ ﭼﻨـﺪﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩﺗﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺯﺣﻤﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺯﺣﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﺎﻡ ﻛﺸﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺯﺣﻤﺖ ﻛﺸـﻴﺪﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻼﺷﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺛﻤﺮ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺷﺘﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻭ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ‪ 22‬ﺑﻬﻤـﻦ ‪ 57‬ﺩﺭﻭ ﺁﻏـﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﻭﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫـﺪ ﻛﺸـﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻳـﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﭘﺮﻛﺎﺭ ﭘﺮﺯﺣﻤﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ؟ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭﻭ ﻛﺮﺩﻧـﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺷﻤﻨﺎﻥ ﺧـﺮﻣﻦ ﺳـﻮﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﭼـﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣـﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺁﺳـﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﻤـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗـﺖ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﺩﺭﻭ ﻣﺸـﻜﻞﺗـﺮ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﻭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﻀﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﮔﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻗﺖ ﻭ ﺻﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﺪﻣﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﻱ ﻋـﺪﺍﻟﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺧـﻂ ﻋـﺪﺍﻟﺖ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻨﺤﺮﻑ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﻇـﺐ ﺑﺎﺷـﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫـﺎﻱ ﺯﻳـﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻨﺤﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﻀـﻲ ﺳـﺆﺍﻝ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨﻨـﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻻ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺳﺮﻣﺎﻳﻪﺩﺍﺭﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺸﻪﻭﺭﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﺭﮔﺎﻧـﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﺯﺑـﻪﺭﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﺮﺥ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻭ ﮔـﺮﺍﻥ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥْ ﺳـﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺸـﺘﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻂ ﻋﺪﺍﻟﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ؟ ﺑﻠﻪ ﺟﺎﻧﻢ ! ﺩﺭ ﺧﻂ ﻋﺪﺍﻟﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺧﻂ ﻋﺪﺍﻟﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ؛ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻨﻜﺴﺮ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺧـﻂ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺍﻧﻘﻼﺏ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻮ ﺧﻂ ﺷﻜﺴـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﭙﻴﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻛﻮﻩﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﻪﺍﻱ؟ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﻧﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﻣﻨـﻪ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﻣﻨـﻪ ﭘﻴﺪﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﭼﻨـﺪﺍﻥ ﻧﺎﭘﻴـﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻧـﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥﺟﺎ ﻫﻢ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺩﻡ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﻴﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺴـﻲ ﻣـﻲﺭﻭﺩ ﺑـﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫‪ 250‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺻﺨﺮﻩﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺧﻴﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺳـﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘـﻂ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﻗﺪﻡ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻌﻮﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﻗﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺣﺮﻛـﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺭﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺻﺨﺮﺓ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺻﺨﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻋﺠـﺐ !‬
‫ﭘﺸﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﺨﺮﻩ ﮔﻮﺩﺍﻟﻲ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﻨﺞ ـ ﺷﺶ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺭﻓﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺁﻣﺪ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ .‬ﻛﻮﻫﻨﻮﺭﺩ ﭘ‪‬ﺮﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ! ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻧﺠـﺎ ﻛـﻪ ﺭﺳـﻴﺪﻱ ﭘﺸـﻴﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻱ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦﻃﻮﺭ ﺗﺎ ﻗﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﺭﻓـﺖ ﭘـﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺁﻣـﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻮﻫﻨﻮﺭﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﺳﺘﻴﻢ؟ ﺍﻳﻦﻃﻮﺭ ﻋﻤـﻞ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﻲ؟ ﻳـﺎ ﻣﺼـﻤﻢ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻲ ﻋﻴﺒﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ؛ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻜﻨﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺮﻭﻡ ﭘـﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻩ ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﻢ ﺑﺎﻻ؛ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﭘﻨﺞ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﻭﻡ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﺁﻳـﻢ ﺑـﺎﻻ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﺧﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ ﻭ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻠﻲ ﺣﺮﻛﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻤﺎﻝﻳﺎﻓﺘـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗـﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ .‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﻛﻤﺎﻝﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﻘﻼﺏ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺳـﺘﺜﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺟﻬـﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻚ ﺗـﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﺸﻴﺐ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺍﺯﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻳﻢ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺧﺴﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻟﺴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺄﻳﻮﺱ ﻧﺸﺪﻳﻢ ﺗـﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﺨﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻧﺨﺴﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻌﻮﺩ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻴﻢ ﺑـﺎ ﻧﻴـﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻤـﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻋﻤـﻞ ﻭ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﻭ ﻫﻤﺒﺴﺘﮕﻲﻣﺎﻥ ﻃﺎﻏﻮﺕ ﻭ ﻃﺎﻏﻮﺗﻴﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺮﻛﻮﺏ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣـﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﺣﻴﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻳـﻢ‪ .‬ﻣـﺎ ﻧـﻪ ﺧﺴـﺘﻪ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﻳﻢ ﻭ ﻧـﻪ ﺩﻟﺴـﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻳﻢ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭ ﺧﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻧﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺧﻴﺰﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛُﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺍﻥ ﺩﻭﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺭﻱ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﻱ ﻣﻮﻓﻘﻴـﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺭﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻧﺎﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻃﻲ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺟﻠﺴﻪ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﻊ ﻭ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺻـﺮﻑ ﻭﻗـﺖ ﻓـﺮﺍﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﺷﺪﻳﻢ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻧﻈﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻻﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮓ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪﺍﻱ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ‪ ،‬ﻧﻪ ﺳـﺎﺯﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻓﻘـﻂ ﺑـﺮ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﺸﻢ‪ :‬ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺍﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎء ‪251‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈـﻴﻢ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻘﻄـﻪ ﻧﻈﺮﻫـﺎﻱ‬


‫ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻲ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻡ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌـ ﻮﻻﻥ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮓ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨــﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﻀـﺎ ﻛﻨﻴــﻢ ﻭ‬
‫ﺧـﻮﺷﺤﺎﻝ ﺑـ ﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺷﻤﻦ ﺣﺘـﻲ ﺗﺤـﺖ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺧـﺘﻼﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳـﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻴﻘﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻒ ﻣـﺎ ﺭﺧﻨـﻪ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﻭ ﺟـﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﺑﻴﻔﻜﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻭ ﻗﺎﻃﻊ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﮕﺮ ﻧﻪ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﺳـﻮﻱ ﻋـﺪﺍﻟﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻝ ﻭ ﻗﺴﻂ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺷـﺘﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ؟ ﺁﺧـﺮ ﻣﮕـﺮ ﻧـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﺨﻲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺗﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺷﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ؟ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻴﭻ ﭼﻴﺰِ ﭘﻨﻬـﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺷــﻤﺎ ﻣــﺮﺩﻡ ﻧــﺪﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻣــﻦ ﺣﺘــﻲ ﮔﻔــﺖ ﻭﮔﻮﻫــﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﺎﺳــﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻫــﻢ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺨﻨﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﺴﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺳـﻔﻴﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻧﺨﺴـﺖ ﻭﺯﻳـﺮﻱ‪،‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺭﺍﻋﻈﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺭﺟﻠﻲ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻣـﻦ ﺻـﺤﺒﺘﻲ ﺑﻜﻨـﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻤـﻮﻻً ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﻣـﺎ ﭼﻴـﺰﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣـﺮﺩﻡ ﭘﻨﻬـﺎﻥ ﻧـﺪﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺻﻼً ﺑـ ﻪ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ ﺩﻟﻴـﻞ ﻛـﻪ ﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺩﻳﺪﻫﺎﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺷـﻤﻨﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﻨـﮓ ﻗـﺪﺭﺕ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﺰﻧﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕـ ﺮﺍﻥ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣـ ﺮﺩﻡ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﻧﮕـﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳـﻢ ﻛـﻪ ﻣـﺮﺩﻡ ﺩﭼـﺎﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﺪﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫـﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳـﻮ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳـﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺭﺳـﺎﻧﻪ ﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎً ﻣﺘﻌﻬﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﻴﺎ ﻥ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣـﺮﺩﻡ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺴﺖ ﺑﻔﻬﻤﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﺑـﺰﺭگ ﻧﻤـﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﻜﻨﻨـﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻣﺴـﺄﻟﻪ ﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺘﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻟﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺑﺪﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷـﻨﮕﺮﻱ‬
‫‪ 252‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻪﻗﺪﺭ ﺧﻮﺷﺤﺎﻟﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﺑـﺎ ﺷـﻤﺎ‬


‫ﺳﺨﻦ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﺳﺘﺎﻧﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷـﺪﻥ ﻧﻬﺎﺩﻫـﺎﻱ ﻣـﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺟﺎﻣﻌـﻪ ﻫﺴـﺘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﺩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲِ ﻣﺼﻮﺏ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻠﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺐ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻠﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻠﺖ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻟﻬﺮﻩﻫﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﮕﺮﺍﻧﻲﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﺶ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺷﺤﺎﻟﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻤﻬﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺭﺋﻴﺲﺟﻤﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻻﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴـﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﻣﻠﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺧـﻂ ﻭ ﻣـﺮﺯﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻠﺖ ﻧﻴـﺰ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻛﺮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﻤﻪﺷـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺧﺪﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺭﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻫﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﺮ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ »ﻭ‪‬ﺍﷲُ ﻣ‪‬ﻦْ ﻭ‪‬ﺭﺁﺋ‪‬ﻬِﻢ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ﺤﻴﻂ«‪ 1.‬ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻘﺮﺭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻭ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻜﻨـﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻣـﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﺴـﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺸﺐ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﺯﻩﺍﻱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺧﻮﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒـﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﻨﻲﺻﺪﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒـﺖ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻧﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﺖ‪ ‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻤـﺎﻥِ ﺑـﺎ ﻃﻤﺄﻧﻴﻨـﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧﺪ ﺳﻜﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺭﺯﺍﻧـﻲ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻣـﺎﻡ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨـﺎﻥﺁﻓـﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻲﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺩﻟﻬﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻴﺪﻭﺍﺭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺭﻱ ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻋﺪﺍﻟﺖ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳـﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻫـﺎﻱ ﻣﻜﺘﺒـﻲ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻋـﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺧﻄـﻮﻁ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺯﻫـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﻤـﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﺷـﻦ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺗﻼﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺣﺪﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻻﺍﻗﻞ ﻫﻤـﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﺑـﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻲﻣﻜﺘـﺐ ﻭ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :20‬ﻭ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﺳﺖ«‪.‬‬


‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﺸﻢ‪ :‬ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺍﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎء ‪253‬‬

‫ﺑﻲﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﺘﺮﺳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻠﺮﺯﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻴﺮﻡ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑـﺎ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺜﺎﻗﻲ ﺑﺴﺘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺿﺎﻣﻦ ﺁﻥ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﻴﺜﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﻨﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺜﺎﻗﺶ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺜﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻜﺘﺒـﻲ ﻭ ﺿـﺎﻣﻦ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻳﻤـﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘـﺰﺍﻡ ﺧـﻮﺩ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻭﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻬﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻧﮕﻴﺰﺓ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﻮﺕ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﺪﺍﻱ ﻧﺎﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻠﺖ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﺩﻳﺪﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ ــ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ ــ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻜﺘـﺐ ﻓـﺮﺍ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤـﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﻫﮕﺸﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻞﮔﺸﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻣـﺎ ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ‪ .‬ﻣـﺎ ﺭﻭﺩﺭﺑﺎﻳﺴـﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻳـﺎ ﭘﻴﭽﻴـﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺻـﺮﻳﺢ ﻭ ﺑـﺪﻭﻥ ﺭﻭﺩﺭﺑﺎﻳﺴـﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺧﻼﻕ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺗﻠﺦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺎﻧﺰﺩﻩ ـ ﺑﻴﺴﺖ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﭘﺮﺧﺎﺵ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﻨﺤﺮﻑ ﺷﺪﻱ؛ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻲ؟ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺮﺧﺎﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﺨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺷـﻴﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺭﻓﺎﻗـﺖﻫـﺎ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄـﻪﻫـﺎ ﻫﺮﮔـﺰ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧـﺪ ﺻـﺪﺍﻗﺖﻫـﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﺿﺎﺑﻄﻪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ ﻋﺎﺩﻻﻧـﻪ ﻭ ﻋـﺪﺍﻟﺖ ﺍﺟﺘﻤـﺎﻋﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﻼﻗﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳـﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﺿﺎﺑﻄﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻗﺖﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺭﻓﺎﻗﺖﻫﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺩﺭﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺭﻓﺎﻗﺖﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺩﺭﺑﺎﻳﺴـﺘﻲﻫـﺎ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﻴـﺎﺭ ﺻـﺪﺍﻗﺖﻫـﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﺿﺎﺑﻄﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺯﺵﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻣﻨﺤﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻤﻬﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﻙ ﻭ ﺧﻄﺮﺁﻓﺮﻳﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺤﻨﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺎﻣﻌـﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﻴﺪﻭﺍﺭﻡ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﻭ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺭﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻳﺪﻩﺁﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻬﺪﻱ ﻣﻮﻋﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﻋﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﺩﻭﺍﺯﺩﻫﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ )ﺳﻼﻡﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ(‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﺶ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻣـﺎ ﺭﻭﺷـﻦ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺸـﺮﻳﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫـﺪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 254‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ﺗﺒﻠﻴﻎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ؛ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝﻫـﺎﻳﻲ‬


‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻘﻠﻴـﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻟﻤـﺎﻥ ﻣﺴـﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﻣﺴـﺠﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻛـﺰ ﺍﺳـﻼﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻣﺒﻮﺭگ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺟـﻮﺍﻥﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻋﺰﻳﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺩﻳﻢ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻳﻤـﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺳـﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥﺩﻫـﻲ ﻭ ﺳـﺎﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﻲ ﻣـﻲﻛـﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲِ ﺩﺍﻧﺸﺠﻮﻳﻲﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻣﻲﻛـﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﮔﺮﮔـﺎﻥ ﺁﻧﺠـﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﻧﺸﺠﻮﻳﺎﻥ ﭘﺎﻛﺪﻟﻲ ﺑﻨﺸﻴﻨﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻛﺸـﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺤﺼﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﺠـﺎ ﻣـﻲﺁﻣﺪﻧـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠـﺎ ﻣﻜـﺮﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄـﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﺒﻠﻴﻐﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻣﻌـﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻭ ﭘ‪‬ﺮُﺑﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺗﺒﻠﻴﻎ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺖ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫـﺎﻱ ﺳـﺨﻨﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻫﻨﺮ ﻭ ﺗﺌﺎﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺒﻠﻴﻎ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﺳـﺨﻦ ﮔﻔـﺘﻦ ﺑـﺲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺳﺨﻨﻲ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﮕﺸﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﻦﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻦﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﻨﺞ ﺳﺎﻝ ﭘـﻴﺶ ﻫـﻢ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦﻃـﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺎﺩﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳـﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻳـﻚ ﺯﻣﺴـﺘﺎﻥ ﺳـﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻓـﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺷـﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﻫﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﺸﺠﻮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﺔ ﻛﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲﺭﻓـﺘﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻗـﺖ ﺍﺫﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺻﺒﺢ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﺠـﺎ ﺭﺳـﻴﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﺑـﺎ ﻳﻜـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺳـﺘﺎﻥ ﻛـﻪ ﻫﻤـﺮﺍﻩ ﺑـﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺪﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﻧﺸﺠﻮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﺰﻳﺰ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻫﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻮﺩﻧـﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﻔـﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻡ ﻭﺿﻮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺯ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ ﺭﺳـﻴﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺫﺍﻥ ﺻـﺒﺢ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺯﺷﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﺎﻋﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻳﺎﻓﺘـﻪ ﺑـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤـﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻧﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻪ ﺭﺑﻊ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺫﺍﻥ ﺻﺒﺢ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺳـﻴﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺿﻮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻭﻡ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻩﭘﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﻃﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﻪ ﺳﻴﮕﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺁﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺧﺮﺩﻩ ﻛﺎﻏـﺬ ﺭﻳﺨﺘـﻪ ﺑـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟــﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺧــﻮﺭﺩ ﺑــﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺟــﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﺰﻳــﺰﻱ ﻛــﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤــﺎﻳﻢ ﺑــﻮﺩ ﮔﻔــﺘﻢ‪:‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﺸﻢ‪ :‬ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺍﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎء ‪255‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﮔﻔﺖ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﻭ ﺩﻳﺸﺐ ﺭﻳﺨﺘﻪ ﺍﻧـﺪ ﻭ ﺻـﺒﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻛﻴﺰﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‪ .‬ﮔﻔـﺘﻢ‪ :‬ﻋﺰﻳـﺰﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺍ ﺟﻠﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺒﻴـﻨﻢ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳـﻮﺍﺭ ﻛـﻪ » ﺍَﻟﻨﱠﻈﺎﻓَـﺔُ ﻣ‪‬ـﻦَ‬
‫ﺍﻟْﺎﻳﻤﺎﻥ«‪ 1.‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﻫـﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺳـﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﻢ ﻧﺎﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﺎﺩﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻃـﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﻓﺘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺳـﻴﺪﻳﻢ ﻳـﺎ ﻧـﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﮔﻔﺘﻢ‪ :‬ﻋﺰﻳﺰﺍﻥ ! ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻣﺎ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﮕـﻮ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧــﺔ ﻋﻤﻠــﻲ ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠــﺎ ﻛــﻪ ﻣــﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴــﺪ ﻳــﻚ ﺗﺤﻘــﻖ ﻋﻴﻨــﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻋﺪﻝ ﺍﺧﻼﻗﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺪﻝ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳـﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﻧـﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺨﻦ ﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺳـﺨﻦ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺛﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺨﻦ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫـﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷـﻨﮕﺮﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﻪ ﻣﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺨﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺷـﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻴﻨﻴـﺖ ﻣﺤﺘـﻮﺍﻱ ﺳـﺨﻦ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺷـﺘﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻓﺮﻣـﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﭘﻴﺶ ﭘﺎﻱ ﻣﺎ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ‪ » :‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻛُﻮﻧُﻮﺍ ﺩ‪‬ﻋﺎﺓً ﺍ‪‬ﻟﻲ ﺍَﻧْﻔُﺴ‪‬ﻜُﻢ‪ ‬ﺑِﻐَﻴ‪‬ﺮِ ﺍَﻟْﺴ‪‬ﻨَﺘ‪‬ﻜُﻢ«‪.‬‬
‫» ﻣــﺮﺩﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑــﻪ ﺳــﻮﻱ ﺧﻮﻳﺸــﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﻳﺸــﺘﻦ ﺩﻋــﻮﺕ ﻛﻨﻴــﺪ ﻧ ـﻪ ﺑــﺎ‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﺘﺎﻥ« ﭘﺲ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻪ؟ » ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﺖ ﺑﺨﺸﻴﺪﻧﺘﺎﻥ«‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺔ ﺩﻟﻬﺮﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﮕﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻴﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻧﺎ ﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺷﻤﻨﺎﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺮﻧﮓ ﺑﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓـﻮﺭﺍً ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻔﺴـﻴﺮ ﻏﻠـﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﻨﮓ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺟﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺯﺩﻧـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺑـﻮﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﻣـﺮﺩﻡ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﻣﺠﻠﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﺎﺭﺍﻻﻧﻮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺝ‪ :59‬ﺹ‪.291‬‬


‫‪ .2‬ﻛﻠﻴﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﺝ‪ :2‬ﺹ‪.77‬‬
‫‪ 256‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﻪ ! ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﻝ ﺑﺴـﺘﻪ ﺑـﻮﺩﻳﻢ؟ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴـﺪ‬


‫ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺳﺨﻦ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﺸﺎﻥ ﭼﻪﻗﺪﺭ ﻓﺮﻕ ﻫﺴﺖ؟ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺟﺎ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻛﺲ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎً ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻜﻮﻡ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻌﻮﺭ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺷﻌﻮﺭﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺭﺍﺳـﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﻋﻤـﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺰﻳ‪‬ﻦ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﺒﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﻴﺪﻭﺍﺭﻡ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺟﻨﮓ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺻﻠﺢ ﻣﺎ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻪﭼﻴﺰ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻳـﺎﺭﻱ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﻭ‬
‫ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺍﻭ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸـﻪ‬
‫ﻭ ﺳﺨﻦ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﻤﻪﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻻﺍﻗـﻞ ﺍﻛﺜﺮﻳـﺖ ﺟﺎﻣﻌـﻪﻣـﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﺧﺼـﻮﺹ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻻﻥ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﻫﻔﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺑِﺴ‪‬ﻢِ ﺍﷲِ ﺍﻟﺮﱠﺣ‪‬ﻤﻦِ ﺍﻟﺮﱠﺣﻴﻢ‪‬‬
‫» ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍ‪‬ﺫْ ﺃﺧَﺬَ ﺍﷲُ ﻣﻴﺜﺎﻕَ ﺍﻟﻨﱠﺒﻴ‪‬ﻦَ ﻟَﻤﺂ ءﺍﺗَﻴ‪‬ﺘُﻜُﻢ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ﻦْ ﻛ‪‬ﺘَﺎﺏٍ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺣ‪‬ﻜْﻤ‪‬ـﺔٍ ﺛُـﻢ‪ ‬ﺟـﺂء‪‬ﻛُﻢ‪‬‬
‫ﺭ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ﻮﻝٌ ﻣ‪‬ﺼ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﻕٌ ﻟ‪‬ﻤﺎ ﻣ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﻜُﻢ‪ ‬ﻟَﺘُﺆْﻣ‪‬ﻨُﻦﱠ ﺑِﻪ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻟَﺘَﻨْﺼ‪‬ﺮُﻧﱠﻪ‪ ‬ﻗﺎﻝَ ء‪‬ﺍَﻗْﺮَﺭ‪‬ﺗُﻢ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍَﺧَﺬْﺗُﻢ‪ ‬ﻋ‪‬ﻠَﻲ‬
‫ﺫﻟ‪‬ﻜُﻢ‪ ‬ﺍ‪‬ﺻ‪‬ﺮﻱ ﻗﺎﻟُﻮﺍ ﺍَﻗْﺮَﺭ‪‬ﻧﺎ ﻗﺎﻝَ ﻓَﺎﺷْﻬ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﻭﺍ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍَﻧَﺎ ﻣ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﻜُﻢ ﻣ‪‬ـﻦَ ﺍﻟﺸّـﺎﻫ‪‬ﺪﻳﻦَ‪ .‬ﻓَﻤ‪‬ـﻦْ‬
‫ﺗَﻮ‪‬ﻟّﻲ ﺑ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﺪ‪ ‬ﺫَﻟ‪‬ﻚ‪ ‬ﻓَﺄُﻭﻟﺌ‪‬ﻚ‪ ‬ﻫ‪‬ﻢ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻔﺎﺳ‪‬ﻘُﻮﻥَ‪ .‬ﺍَﻓَﻐَﻴ‪‬ﺮَ ﺩﻳﻦِ ﺍﷲِ ﻳ‪‬ﺒ‪‬ﻐُﻮﻥَ ﻭ‪ ‬ﻟَﻪ‪ ‬ﺍَﺳ‪‬ﻠَﻢ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ـﻦْ‬
‫ﻓ‪‬ﻲ ﺍﻟﺴ‪‬ﻤﻮﺍﺕ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﺎَﺭ‪‬ﺽِ ﻃَﻮ‪‬ﻋ‪‬ﺎ ﻭ‪ ‬ﻛَﺮْﻫ‪‬ﺎ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍ‪‬ﻟَﻴ‪‬ﻪ‪ ‬ﻳ‪‬ﺮْﺟ‪ ‬ﻌ‪‬ﻮﻥَ‪ .‬ﻗُﻞْ ءﺍﻣ‪‬ﻨّﺎ ﺑِﺎﷲِ ﻭ‪ ‬ﻣـﺂ‬
‫ﺍُﻧْﺰِﻝَ ﻋ‪‬ﻠَﻴ‪‬ﻨَﺎ ﻭ‪ ‬ﻣﺂ ﺃُﻧْﺰِﻝَ ﻋ‪‬ﻠـﻲ ﺍ‪‬ﺑ‪‬ـﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ـﻤﻌﻴﻞَ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ـﺤﺎﻕَ ﻭ‪ ‬ﻳ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﻘُـﻮﺏ‪ ‬ﻭ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻻَﺳ‪‬ﺒﺎﻁ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻣﺂ ﺍُﻭﺗ‪‬ﻲ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ﻮﺳﻲ ﻭ‪ ‬ﻋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻨﱠﺒﻴ‪‬ﻮﻥَ ﻣ‪‬ﻦْ ﺭ‪‬ﺑ‪‬ﻬِﻢ‪ ‬ﻻ ﻧُﻔَﺮﱢﻕُ ﺑ‪‬ﻴ‪‬ﻦَ ﺍَﺣ‪‬ـﺪ‪‬‬
‫ﻣ‪‬ﻨْﻬ‪‬ﻢ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻧَﺨْﻦُ ﻟَ ﻪ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ﺴ‪‬ﻠ‪‬ﻤ‪‬ﻮﻥَ‪ .‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ﻦ ﻳ‪‬ﺒ‪‬ﺘَﻎِ ﻏَﻴ‪‬ﺮَ ﺍﻟْﺎ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ﻼﻡِ ﺩﻳﻨﺎً ﻓَﻠَﻦْ ﻳ‪‬ﻘْﺒ‪‬ﻞَ ﻣ‪‬ﻨْﻪ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻫ‪‬ﻮ‪‬‬
‫ﻓ‪‬ﻲ ﺍﻟْﺂﺧ‪‬ﺮَﺓِ ﻣ‪‬ﻦَ ﺍﻟْﺨﺎﺳ‪‬ﺮﻳﻦَ‪ .‬ﻛَﻴ‪‬ﻒ‪ ‬ﻳ‪‬ﻬ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﻱ ﺍﷲُ ﻗَﻮ‪‬ﻣﺎً ﻛَﻔَﺮُﻭﺍ ﺑ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﺪ‪ ‬ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻧ‪‬ﻬِﻢ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺷَﻬِﺪ‪‬ﻭﺍ‬
‫ﺍَﻥﱠ ﺍﻟﺮﱠﺳ‪‬ﻮﻝَ ﺣ‪‬ﻖﱞ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺟﺂء‪‬ﻫ‪‬ﻢ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﺒ‪‬ﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﷲُ ﻻﻳ‪‬ﻬ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﻱ ﺍﻟْﻘَﻮ‪‬ﻡ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻈّـﺎﻟ‪‬ﻤﻴﻦَ‪ .‬ﺍﻭﻟﺌ‪‬ـﻚ‪‬‬
‫ﺟﺰَﺁﺅُﻫ‪‬ﻢ‪ ‬ﺍَﻥﱠ ﻋ‪‬ﻠَﻴ‪‬ﻬِﻢ‪ ‬ﻟَﻌ‪‬ﻨَﺔَ ﺍﷲِ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻤ‪‬ﻼﺋ‪‬ﻜَﺔِ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻨّﺎﺱِ ﺍَﺟ‪‬ﻤ‪‬ﻌـﻴﻦَ‪ .‬ﺧﺎﻟ‪‬ـﺪﻳﻦَ ﻓ‪‬ﻴﻬـﺎ‬
‫ﻻَﻳ‪‬ﺨَﻔﱠﻒ‪ ‬ﻋ‪‬ﻨْﻬ‪‬ﻢ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻌ‪‬ﺬَﺍﺏ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻻﻫ‪‬ﻢ‪ ‬ﻳ‪‬ﻨﻈَﺮُﻭﻥَ‪ .‬ﺇِﻟﱠﺎ ﺍﻟﱠﺬﻳﻦَ ﺗﺎﺑ‪‬ﻮﺍ ﻣ‪‬ـﻦْ ﺑ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ـﺪ‪ ‬ﺫﻟ‪‬ـﻚ‪ ‬ﻭ‪‬‬
‫ﺍَﺻ‪‬ﻠَﺤ‪‬ﻮﺍ ﻓَﺎ‪‬ﻥﱠ ﺍﷲَ ﻏَ ﻔُﻮﺭ‪ ‬ﺭ‪‬ﺣ‪‬ﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺇِﻥﱠ ﺍﻟﱠﺬﻳﻦَ ﻛَﻔَﺮُﻭﺍ ﺑ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﺪ‪ ‬ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻧ‪‬ﻬِﻢ‪ ‬ﺛُﻢ‪ ‬ﺍﺯ‪‬ﺩﺍﺩ‪‬ﻭﺍ ﻛُﻔْﺮﺍً‬
‫ﻟَﻦْ ﺗُﻘْﺒ‪‬ﻞَ ﺗَﻮ‪‬ﺑ‪‬ﺘُﻬ‪‬ﻢ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﻭﻟَﺌ‪‬ﻚ‪ ‬ﻫ‪‬ﻢ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻀّﺂﻟﱡﻮﻥَ‪ .‬ﺍ‪‬ﻥﱠ ﺍﻟﱠﺬﻳﻦَ ﻛَﻔَﺮُﻭﺍ ﻭ‪ ‬ﻣﺎﺗُﻮﺍ ﻭ‪ ‬ﻫ‪‬ﻢ‪ ‬ﻛُﻔّﺎﺭ‪‬‬
‫ﻓَﻠَﻦْ ﻳ‪‬ﻘْﺒ‪‬ﻞَ ﻣ‪‬ﻦْ ﺍَﺣ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﻫ‪‬ﻢ ﻣ‪‬ﻞْء‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﺎَﺭ‪‬ﺽِ ﺫَﻫ‪‬ﺒﺎً ﻭ‪ ‬ﻟَﻮِ ﺍﻓْ ﺘَﺪ‪‬ﻱ ﺑِﻪ‪ ‬ﺍﻭﻟَﺌ‪‬ﻚ‪ ‬ﻟَﻬ‪‬ﻢ‪ ‬ﻋ‪‬ـﺬﺍﺏ‪‬‬
‫‪ 262‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺍَﻟ‪‬ﻴﻢ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻣﺎ ﻟَﻬ‪‬ﻢ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ﻦْ ﻧﺎﺻ‪‬ﺮﻳﻦَ‪ .‬ﻟَﻦْ ﺗَﻨﺎﻟُﻮﺍ ﺍﻟْﺒِﺮﱠ ﺣ‪‬ﺘّﻲ ﺗُﻨْﻔ‪‬ﻘُـﻮﺍ ﻣ‪‬ﻤ‪‬ـﺎ ﺗُﺤ‪‬ﺒ‪‬ـﻮﻥَ ﻭ‪ ‬ﻣـﺎ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺗُﻨْﻔ‪‬ﻘُﻮﺍ ﻣ‪‬ﻦْ ﺷَﻲ‪‬ء‪ ‬ﻓَﺎ‪‬ﻥﱠ ﺍﷲَ ﺑِﻪ‪ ‬ﻋ‪‬ﻠ‪‬ﻴﻢ‪.«‬‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺣﻜﻤﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺷـﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩﺍﻡ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﭽـﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺳـﺖ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳــﻮﺭﺓ ﺁﻝ ﻋﻤــﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳــﺎﺕ ‪» :92-81‬ﻭ )ﻳــﺎﺩ ﻛــﻦ( ﺁﻥﮔــﺎﻩ ﻛــﻪ ﺧــﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒــﺮﺍﻥ )ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺖﻫﺎﺷﺎﻥ( ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺣﻜﻤﺖ ﺑﺨﺸـﻴﺪﻡ ﺳـﭙﺲ ﺑـﺮ ﺷـﻤﺎ )ﺍﻫـﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺏ( ﺭﺳﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺁﻣﺪ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻲ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻳﻌﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣـﻲﺩﺍﺩ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ؛ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩ‪» :‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻴﺪ؟‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺧﺪﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﮔﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮔﻮﺍﻫﻢ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺳﻮﻻﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ )ﺍﺯ ﺣﻖ( ﺑﮕﺮﺩﺍﻧﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻘﻘﺎً ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻓﺎﺳـﻘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨـﺪ ﺑـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﻳـﺎ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﺮﺍﻥْ ﺩﻳﻨﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﻃﻠﺒﻨﺪ؟ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺁﻥﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻩ ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺍﻩ ﻣﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﻱ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﮕـﻮ‪ :‬ﻣـﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﺧـﺪﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻳﻌﺖ ﻭ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺳـﻤﺎﻋﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺍﺳـﺤﺎﻕ ﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻘﻮﺏ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺯﻧـﺪﺍﻧﺶ ﻧـﺎﺯﻝ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﭽـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﻣﻮﺳـﻲ ﻭ ﻋﻴﺴـﻲ ﻭ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧـﺐ‬
‫ﭘﺮﻭﺭﺩﮔﺎﺭﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ )ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩﺍﻳﻢ( ﻓﺮﻗﻲ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻫﻴﭻﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﻢ‬
‫ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻄﻴﻊ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﺪﺍﻳﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻛﺲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ ﺩﻳﻨـﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴـﺎﺭ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﻫﺮﮔـﺰ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘـﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺎﻥﻛﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧﺪ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻤـﺎﻥ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺧﺪﺍ ﻭ ﮔﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻲ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺍﻭ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺩﻟﺔ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺎﻓﺮ ﺷـﺪﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ؟ ﻭ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺳﺘﻤﻜﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺒﺮﻱ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﻴﻔﺮ ﺁﻥ ﮔـﺮﻭﻩ ﻛـﺎﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺷﺘﮕﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻫﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﻟﻌﻨﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﺎﻭﻳـﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﮕـﺎﻩ ﻟﻌﻨـﺖ‬
‫)ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﻨﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ( ﺑﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﺬﺍﺏ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻧﻴﺎﺑـﺪ ﻭ ﻫﺮﮔـﺰ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﺭﺣﻤـﺖ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﮕﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺼﻴﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﻮﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ )ﻫﺮ ﺑﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ( ﺍﺻﻼﺡ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺁﻣﺮﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻬﺮﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﺎ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﺮ ﺷـﺪﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﻛﻔﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺗﻮﺑﺔ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﺎ ﮔﻤﺮﺍﻫﺎﻥ ﻫـﻢ ﺁﻧـﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨـﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﻓﺮ ﺷﺪﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﻛﻔﺮ ﺧﻮﻳﺶ ﻣ‪‬ﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﺮ ﻳـﻚ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩﻱ ﺧـﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫)ﺍﺯ ﻋﺬﺍﺏ ﺧﺪﺍ( ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻃﻼ ﺑﻪ ﻓـﺪﺍ ﺁﺭﻧـﺪ ﻫﺮﮔـﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺸـﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘـﻪ ﻧﺸـﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻋﺬﺍﺏ ﺩﺭﺩﻧﺎﻙ ﻣﻬﻴ‪‬ﺎ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻭ ﻳـﺎﺭﺍﻧﻲ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨـﺪ ﺩﺍﺷـﺖ‪ .‬ﺷـﻤﺎ ﻫﺮﮔـﺰ ﺑـﻪ ﻣﻘـﺎﻡ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻛـﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﺎﻥ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ ﻣﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺒﻮﺏ ﺷﻤﺎﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺧـﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﻧﻔﺎﻕ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ«‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﻫﻔﺘﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﻦ ‪263‬‬

‫ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻳﻤـﺎﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﻳـﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻳـﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﺧـﺪﺍﻱ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺖ‪ :‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺘﺮﺍﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴـﺪ؟‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺧﺪﺍﻱ ﮔﻔﺖ‪ :‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻭ ﮔﻮﺍﻩ؛ ﻣـﻦ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﻫﺪﺍﻥ ﻭ ﮔﻮﺍﻫﺎﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻢ‪ .‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺁﻥﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻛـﺲ ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺭﻭ‬
‫ﺑﮕﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﺒﻬﻜﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺟﺰ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﻃﻠﺒﻨﺪ؟ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﺑﻪﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﻱ ﺍﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﮕﻮ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩﺍﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻧﭽـﻪ ﺑـﺮ ﺍﺑـﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺳـﻤﺎﻋﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺍﺳـﺤﺎﻕ ﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻘﻮﺏ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺍﺩﮔﺎﻥ ﺍﻭ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻲ ﻭ ﻋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧــﺐ ﺧﺪﺍﻳﺸــﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷــﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﻫــﻴﭻ ﺗﻔــﺎﻭﺗﻲ ﻣﻴــﺎﻥ ﻫــﻴﭻﻳــﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬــﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﮔﺬﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻛﺲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﻨﻲ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺠﻮﻳـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘـﻪ ﻧﻤـﻲﺷـﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺳـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻭﺩﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺎﻥﻛﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻣﺮﺩﻣﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥﺁﻭﺭﺩﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻛﻔﺮ ﺭﻓﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ؟ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥﻛﻪ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻧـﺪ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺣﻖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﺪﺍ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺳﺘﻤﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻴﻔﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻟﻌﻨـﺖ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺷـﺘﮕﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻫﻤـﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﺟﺎﻭﺩﺍﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻟﻌﻨﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑـﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻋـﺬﺍﺏ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺳـﺒﻚ‬
‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻬﻠﺘﻲ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﮕﺮ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﻧـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺑﭙﺮﺩﺍﺯﻧﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺩﺭﮔﺬﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻬﺮﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻛـﻪ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻧﺸـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻛﻔﺮ ﺭﻓﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻛﻔﺮﻱ ﺭﻭﺯﺍﻓﺰﻭﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﮔﻤﺮﺍﻫﺎﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﻓﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣ‪‬ﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﻔـﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔـﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻃﻼ ﺑﺪﻫﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻔﺮﺷـﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘـﻪ‬
‫‪ 264‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺷﻜﻨﺠﻪﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﺩﻧﺎﻙ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎﻭﺭﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺷـﻤﺎ ﻫﺮﮔـﺰ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻧﻤﻲﺭﺳﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺶ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ــ ﻭ ﺟﺎﻧﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ــ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﺍﻳﻦ »ﺟﺎﻧﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ« ﺭﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﮔﻔﺘﻢ(‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻫـﺮ ﭼـﻪ ﺷـﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﻔـﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺒﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟـﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺍﺳـﺘﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﻮﻧـﺪﺵ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﻖ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣـﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧـﺎﺕ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ﺧﻮﺩﻣـﺎﻥ ﺍﺩﺍ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻫﻔﺘـﺔ ﮔﺬﺷـﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻪ ﺩﻧﺒـﺎﻝ ﺳـﺆﺍﻝ ﻳـﻚ ﻋـﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺤﺜﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺁﺧـﺮ ﺁﻳـﺎﺕ ﻧـﺎﻇﺮ ﺑـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣـﺎﻻ‬
‫ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﻳﻚﻳﻚ ﺁﻳـﻪﻫـﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﺁﻳـﺎﺕ ﭼﻨـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ »ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍ‪‬ﺫْ ﺃﺧَﺬَ ﺍﷲُ ﻣﻴﺜﺎﻕَ ﺍﻟﻨﱠﺒﻴ‪‬ﻦَ ﻟَﻤﺂ ءﺍﺗَﻴ‪‬ﺘُﻜُﻢ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ﻦْ ﻛ‪‬ﺘَﺎﺏٍ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺣ‪‬ﻜْﻤ‪‬ﺔٍ‬
‫ﺛُﻢ‪ ‬ﺟﺂء‪‬ﻛُﻢ‪ ‬ﺭ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ﻮﻝٌ ﻣ‪‬ﺼ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﻕٌ ﻟ‪‬ﻤﺎ ﻣ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﻜُﻢ‪ ‬ﻟَﺘُﺆْﻣ‪‬ﻨُﻦﱠ ﺑِﻪ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻟَﺘَﻨْﺼ‪‬ﺮُﻧﱠﻪ‪ ‬ﻗﺎﻝَ ء‪‬ﺍَﻗْﺮَﺭ‪‬ﺗُﻢ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍَﺧَﺬْﺗُﻢ‪‬‬
‫ﻋ‪‬ﻠَﻲ ﺫﻟ‪‬ﻜُﻢ‪ ‬ﺍ‪‬ﺻ‪‬ﺮﻱ ﻗﺎﻟُﻮﺍ ﺍَﻗْﺮَﺭ‪‬ﻧﺎ ﻗﺎﻝَ ﻓَﺎﺷْﻬ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﻭﺍ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍَﻧَﺎ ﻣ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﻜُﻢ ﻣ‪‬ﻦَ ﺍﻟﺸّـﺎﻫ‪‬ﺪﻳﻦ«‪ .‬ﺧـﺪﺍ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺣﻜﻤﺘـﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺷـﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﭘـﺲ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﻣﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼـﺪﻳﻖ ﻭ ﺗﺄﻳﻴـﺪ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﺪﺍ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻓـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺣﻜﻤﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﻣـﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﻖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻧﺪ؟ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﭼـﻪ ﻛﺴـﺎﻧﻲ ﻳـﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪ؟ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﮔﻔﺖ‪ :‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺘـﺮﺍﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻳـﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﺪ؟ ﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﻋﺘﺮﺍﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﮔﻔﺖ‪ :‬ﺣـﺎﻻ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﻢ ﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻤـﺎﻥ ﻫﺴـﺘﻢ‪ .‬ﺧـﻮﺏ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﻫﻔﺘﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﻦ ‪265‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻳﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﻘـﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺁﻳـﻪ ﺁﻣـﺪﻩ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﭘﻴﻤـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ؟ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻣﻴـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺧﺪﺍ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﭼﻴﺴـﺖ؟ ﻣﺤﺘـﻮﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﻤـﺎﻥ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺼـﺪﻳﻖ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻤـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ؟ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﻤـﺎﻥ؟ ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗـﺖ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﭼـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﺩﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻲﺯﻧﺪ؟ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒـﺎﻃﻲ ﺑـﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻣـﺮﺩﻡ ﻧـﺪﺍﺭﺩ؟ ﺧـﻮﺏ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻇﻒ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣـﻲﺁﻳـﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺼـﺪﻳﻖ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺄﻳﻴـﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﺁﻳﻴﻨﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻼً ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻧـﺪ ﻭ ﻛﻤﻜـﺶ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﭼﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﻣﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﻪ ﭼﻴﺴـﺖ؟‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺨﻦ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺸﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﺍﻥ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺸـﻴﻦ ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ‪ :‬ﺧـﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺣﻜﻤﺘﻲ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﻱ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﺍﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻲ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﭘﻴـﺮﻭﺍﻥ ﺷـﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻃـﺮﻑ ﭘﻴﻤـﺎﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﻤﺎﻳـﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻫﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺍﻣﺖ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳـﺎﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻜﺮ ﻭ ﺑﻴﻨﺶ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺶ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﻭﻳـﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﻣﺤﺼـﻮﻝ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻣﻨﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻌﺼﺐ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﻭ ﺗﺴـﻠﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺧﺪﺍﻱِ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻓ‪‬ﺮِﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻴـﺎﻭﺭﺩ؟ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﺍﻧﺸـﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﭼـﻪ ﻛﺴـﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ؟ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﺍﻧﺸﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ؟ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦﻛـﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻬـﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪» :‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍ‪‬ﺫْ ﺃﺧَﺬَ ﺍﷲُ ﻣﻴﺜﺎﻕَ ﺍﻟﻨﱠﺒـﻴ‪‬ﻦَ«‪ .‬ﺧـﺪﺍ‬
‫‪ 266‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﻫﺎ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺣﻜﻤﺖ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻢ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻣﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺧﻠﻖ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻳﺎﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﻲﺭﻭﻳـﺪ ﺩﺳـﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﺔ ﻣﺘﺤﺠ‪‬ﺮِ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‪ ‬ﻗﻔﺲﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪ ‬ﻣﺮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺍﺩﻱ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﺭﻭﻳـﺪ ﺁﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ ،‬ﺁﺩﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﻨﺶ ﻭﺳﻴﻊ‪ ،‬ﺁﺩﻣﻲ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧـﻪ ﺁﺩﻣـﻲ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺣﻜﻤﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺰﺭگ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﺖ ﺑﺸﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺖ ﺑﺸﻮﺩ؛ ﻫﻴﭻ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﻪ ﻣﻲﭼﺴﺒﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ‪» .‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳ‪‬ﺎْﻣ‪‬ﺮَﻛُﻢ‪ ‬ﺍَﻥْ ﺗَﺘﱠﺨ‪‬ﺬُﻭﺍ ﺍﻟْﻤ‪‬ﻶﺋ‪‬ﻜَﺔَ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻨﱠﺒﻴ‪‬ﻴﻦَ ﺍَﺭ‪‬ﺑﺎﺑﺎً ﺍَﻳ‪‬ﺎْﻣ‪‬ﺮُﻛُﻢ‪ ‬ﺑِﺎﻟْﻜُﻔْﺮِ‬
‫ﺑ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﺪ‪ ‬ﺍ‪‬ﺫْ ﺍَﻧْﺘُﻢ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ﺴ‪‬ﻠ‪‬ﻤ‪‬ﻮﻥ«‪ 1.‬ﻣﺘﺄﺳﻔﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﺳـﺘﻪﺍﻳـﻢ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻣﻘﻄـﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺯﻧﺪﺓ ﺗﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﻮﺣﻴـﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﻧـﺎﻗﺺ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻣـﺎ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻭﺻﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻭﺻـﻲ‪‬ﻫـﺎ ﻭ ﺟﺎﻧﺸـﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻣـﺎﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﻮﺍﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻬـﺎ ﭼـﻪ ﻫﺴـﺘﻨﺪ؟‬
‫»ﻋ‪‬ﺒ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﻩ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺭ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ﻮﻟُﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋ‪‬ﺒ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﻩ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍ‪‬ﻣﺎﻣ‪‬ﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋ‪‬ﺒ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﻩ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻭ‪‬ﺻﻴ‪‬ﻪ‪ .«‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻳـﻢ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﺍﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻡ ﻣﻲﮔـﺬﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫـﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦﻫـﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺒـﺖﻫـﺎ ﻭ ﻋﺸـﻖﻫـﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻗـﻪﻫـﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻡﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺪﺍﻱ ﻳﻜﺘـﺎ ﻣﺤﻜـﻢ ﺷـﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﻛـﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻴـﺎﻧﻲ ﺑـﺰﺭگ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻤـﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﭘ‪‬ﺮﺍﺭﺝﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤـﺎ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻱ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ؟ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﻱ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ؟ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﻱ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺁﻝ ﻋﻤﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :80‬ﻭ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷـﻤﺎ ﺍﻣـﺮ ﻧﻜﻨـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﻓﺮﺷـﺘﮕﺎﻥ ﻭ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺧﺪﺍﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ؛ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻔﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥﻛـﻪ )ﺑـﻪ ﺧـﺪﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻳﮕﺎﻧﻪ( ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ؟«‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﻫﻔﺘﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﻦ ‪267‬‬

‫ﺧﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻮﻳﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﭼﻴﺰ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺤﺮﻑ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼً ﭼﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ؟ ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺳـﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﻋﻮﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺧﻴﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻏﺎﻓﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺩﻩ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺻﺪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨـﺪﻫﺰﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤـﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﭘﺮﺳﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺭﻭ‬
‫ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺪﺍﭘﺮﺳﺘﻲ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﺡ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪﺟﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺧﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﻫـﺎ ﭘﻴﻤـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺣﻜﻤﺖ ﻭ ﺁﻳﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻖ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺁﻣﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺮﻭﺍﻧﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺴـﺎﺯﻳﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑـﺮ ﺩﻋـﻮﺕ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﺑﻌـﺪﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻣﺘﻌﺼﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮﭘﺮﺳﺘﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻧﺪﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﮕﻮﻳﻨﺪ »ﻭ‪ ‬ﻗﺎﻟُﻮﺍ ﻛُﻮﻧُﻮﺍ ﻫ‪‬ـﻮﺩﺍً‬
‫ﺍَﻭ‪ ‬ﻧَﺼﺎﺭٰﻱ ﺗَﻬ‪‬ﺘَﺪ‪‬ﻭﺍ«‪ 1.‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎ ﺑﻨﺪﺓ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻬﻮﺩﻱ ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻬﻮﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ؟ ﻣﺴﻴﺤﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﻴﺤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ؟ ﻧﻪ‪ .‬ﺧﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﻦﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻔﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﺸـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ــ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ‪ ،‬ﭼـﻮﻥ ﺑـﻴﻦ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﺶ ﺟﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ــ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﻖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺣﻜﻤﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺑﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻴﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻼﻡ ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺠﻴﻞ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻴﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺯﺑﻮﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻴﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻼﻡ ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺮﭼﺸﻤﻪ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻫﺒﺮ ﺗـﺎﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑـﺎ ﺗﻮﻓﻴـﻖ ﺑﻴﺸـﺘﺮﻱ ﮔﻤﺮﺍﻫـﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻘﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :135‬ﻳﻬﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺎﺭﻱ ﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭﺁﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎﻓﺘـﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺣﻖ ﭘﻮﻳﻴﺪ«‪.‬‬
‫‪ 268‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺮﻭﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻨﺎﻩ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺮﻭﻣﺎﻥِ ﺍﺯ ﻋـﺪﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﻋـﺪﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺮﻭﻣﺎﻥِ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺖ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﻣﻌﺮﻓـﺖ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻧﺎﻳﻞ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﻜﺶ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗـﺖ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﺍﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦﻛـﻪ ﻣﺴـﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺄﻣﻮﺭﻳـﺖ ﺷـﻤﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟِﺪ‪ ‬ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻬﺪ ﻭ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﻓﺘﻴﺪ؟ ﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﺑﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﺧﺪﺍ ﻓﺮﻣـﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﺑﺎﺷـﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﻢ ﺷﺎﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻢ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺷﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻫـﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ »ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍ‪‬ﺫْ ﺃﺧَﺬَ ﺍﷲُ ﻣﻴﺜﺎﻕَ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﱠﺒﻴ‪‬ﻦَ«‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ »ﺟﺂء‪‬ﻛُﻢ‪ ‬ﺭ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ﻮﻝ« ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺁﻣﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺣﻜﻤﺖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﻖ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻳﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ؟ ﺍﻣﺖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﭼـﻪ ﻛﺴـﺎﻧﻲ؟ ﺍﻣـﺖ‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻣﺖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﭼﺮﺍ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻣﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺒﻴـﺎ ﻣـﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧـﺪ؟‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﻣﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺧﻮﺩﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﻢ‬
‫ﭼﻪ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪﺍﻱ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺻﻼً ﺁﻳﻪ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺩﻳـﺪ ﻧـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺑﻬﺎﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﻛـﻪ ﮔـﺎﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﺰ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛـﺮﺩ ﺗـﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻧﻈﻴـﺮ ﭼـﻪ ﭼﻴـﺰ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺪﺭﻱ ﺑﭽﻪﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﭽـﻪ ﻣﻨﺤـﺮﻑ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺟﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺪﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺑ‪‬ﺮَﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﻧﺸﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺟـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﻫﻔﺘﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﻦ ‪269‬‬

‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﺑﭽﺔ ﺗﻮ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﺪﺭ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﭽﺔ ﺗﻮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﺮﺍ؟ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦﻛـﻪ ﻣﺴـﺌﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﭽﻪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ‪» :‬ﺍَﻧَـﺎ ﻭ‪ ‬ﻋ‪‬ﻠـﻲ ﺍَﺑ‪‬ـﻮﺍ ﻫـﺬ‪‬ﻩ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟْﺎُﻣ‪‬ﻪ«‪ 1،‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻣﺖ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﭘﺪﺭ ﺍﻣـﺖ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﭘﺪﺭ ﺍﻣﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻣـﺖ ﭼـﻪ ﻛﺴـﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺧﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻣﺘﺸﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﻤـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﻣـﻲﮔﻴـﺮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺪﻋﻲ ﺟﺎﻧﺸﻴﻨﻲ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻄﻮﺭ؟ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻋـﺎﻟﻢ ﺩﻳـﻦ‬
‫ــ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻢ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ﺩﻳﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺫﻫﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺸﺖ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻤﺒﻪ ﺑﻠﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲﮔﻮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻋـﺎﻟﻢ ﺩﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﻴﻦ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻴﻦ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒـﻖ ﺧﻮﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﺭﺿـﺎﻱ ﺧـﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ ــ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻜﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺴـﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﺳـﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ؟‬
‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺍﻳﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﻭ ﺍﺋﻤﻪ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﺍﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻣﺖ »ﺍُﻣ‪‬ﻨﺎ« ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﭼﻪ »ﺍﻣﻨﺎ« ﻫﺴـﺘﻨﺪ؟ ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ‬
‫ﭼﻪ ﺍﻣﻴﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ؟ ﻣﮕﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺍﻣﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ؟ ﺍﻣﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺍﻣـﺖ ﺑـﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻫـﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﺳـﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺨﺖﻛﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺍﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣـﺎﻣﻼﻥِ ﻋﻠـﻢ ﺍﻫـﻞ ﺑﻴـﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﺘﺎﻡ ﺁﻝ ﻣﺤﻤـﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳـﺮ ﺳﺮﭘﺮﺳـﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺳـﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻭ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳـﻮﻱ ﺧﺎﻧـﺪﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﺩﻭﺧﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﺘﺎﻡ ﺁﻝ ﻣﺤﻤـﺪ ﺗﻌﺒﻴـﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ؛ ﻳﺘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻝ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﻛﺴـﺎﻧﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﺮ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﻣﺠﻠﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﻮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺝ‪ :16‬ﺹ‪.95‬‬


‫‪ 270‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻳﺘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﭘﺪﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﺔ ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﻗﻴ‪‬ﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺏ ﭼﻪ ﻗﻴ‪‬ﻤﻲ؟‬
‫ﻗﻴ‪‬ﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻜﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﺪ؟ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻴ‪‬ﻤﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻜﻮﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻪﭼﻴﺰ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ؟‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺍﻳﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘـﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺁﻳـﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺍﻳﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﭼﻪ ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣـﺎ ﺳـﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﭼﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻢ؟ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺗـﺎ ﭼـﻪ ﺣـﺪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣـﻦ ﻣﻜـﺮﺭ ﻭ ﺑـﺎ ﺻـﺮﺍﺣﺖ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪﺍﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻫﻢﻓﻜﺮﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭﺍﻥ ﻭ ﺧـﻮﺍﻫﺮﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻴﻨﺶ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﻜﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ﺩﻳﻨـﻲ ﻭ ﻣـﺮﺩﻡ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻣﻨﺤﺮﻑ‪ ‬ﻣﻨﺤﻂ‪ ‬ﺫﻟﺖﺁﻭﺭِ ﻣﺮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺍﺩﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻌﻠ‪ّ‬ﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊﮔﻴﺮﻱﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ﺩﻳﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﺭ ﺗﺎ ﺫﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺰﺭگ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﻠ‪ّ‬ﻢ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ ــ ﻣﺘﻌﻠ‪ّ‬ﻤﻲ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻭ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻓﺮﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺒﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣـﺘﻌﻠ‪ّ‬ﻢ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻠـﻢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌـﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ؛ ﺍﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺒﺖ‪ ‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻣـﺎ ﺍﻻﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻳـﻢ ﭼﻴـﺰ‬
‫ﻋﺠﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺒـﺎﺭﺯﻩ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺮﺭ ﮔﻔﺘﻪﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻌﻠ‪ّ‬ﻢ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﺩﺍﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻠـﻢ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﻠ‪ّ‬ﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﺖ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﻧـﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ؟ ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﻲﺷـﻮﺩ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﭼﺸﻤﺶ ﺍﺑﺮﻭﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺧﻴﺎﻝ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻣـﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄـﺔ ﺑـﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺼـﻞ ﻭ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﻫﻔﺘﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﻦ ‪271‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺑﺴﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺑﻴﺮﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺍﻧﺸﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﻢ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ ﻗﺒﻴـﻞ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬


‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﻧﺸﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺎﻏﻮﺕﻫﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺷﺒﻴﻪﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻢﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﺎﻟﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻦ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺎﻏﻮﺕﻫﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚﺗﺮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﻧـﺔ ﺭﻭﺷـﻨﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﭼﺮﺍ؟ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻃﺎﻏﻮﺕﭘﺮﻭﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﻣـﺮﺩﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴـﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺎﻏﻮﺕﭘﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺑـﺮ ﺣـﺬﺭ ﺑـﺪﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻣـﻦ ﮔﻤـﺎﻥ ﻧﻤـﻲﻛـﻨﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻼﺟﻲ ﺟﺰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﻣـﺎ ﺑﻴـﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﻣـﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺤﻴﺖ ﺑﻜﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺮﺩﻣـﻲ ﻧﺸـﻮﻳﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﻗـﺐِ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﺻـﻄﻼﺡ ﺭﻫﺒـﺮﺍﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﺎﻧﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺳﻲ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺒﺮﻱ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗـﺎ ﺷـﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭼﻴﺰ ﻧﻨﮕﺮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺼﺎﻑ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﺭ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻧﺪﻭﺯﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻜﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ ﺁﺵ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺳﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﺎ ﺧﺮ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳـﻚ ﺧﺮﺳـﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﭘـﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕـﺮﻱ ﺳـﻮﺍﺭﺵ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺎﻣﻌـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺭﺍﺑﻄـﺔ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﻴﺴ‪‬ﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣـﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﻣـﺎﻥ ﻫﻮﺷـﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺑـﻪ ﺧـﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻲﺩﺍﻧﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﻪ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺰﺍﺝ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺻﻼً ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺷﺶ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺩﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﺭﺍﺩﺕ ﺑﻮﺭﺯﺩ؟ ﻭ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺷﺶ ﻧﻤﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺑﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻭ ﺍﺛـﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻫﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﺸـﻜﻠﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﻫﻦ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﭼﻜﺶ ﻣﻲﺯﻧﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻮﺭﻩ ﻣﻲﮔﺬﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔـﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻧـﺮﻡ ﺷـﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﻭﻳﺶ ﭘﺘﻚ ﻣﻲﺯﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻫـﻦ ﺗﻌـﺎﺭﻑ‬
‫‪ 272‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﺣﻤﺖﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻋـﺎﻟﻢِ ﺗﻌـﺎﺭﻑ‬
‫ﻛﻦ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻭ ﺩﺭﻭﻏﻲ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺵ ﺁﻳـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬـﺎ ﻫـﻢ ﺩﺭﻭﻏـﻲ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺵ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻋﻤﺮﻱ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻋﺒﻮﺩﻳﺖ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻢ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺧﺪﺍ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻣـﻲ ﮔﻴـﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻻ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺮﺍﺣﺘـﺮﺍﻡ ﻭ‬
‫ﭘﺮﺍﺭﺝِ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴـﺪ‪» :‬ﺍ‪‬ﻧّـﻲ ﻋ‪‬ﺒ‪‬ـﺪ‪‬ﺍﷲِ‬
‫ءﺍٰ ﺗﻨ‪‬ﻲ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻜ‪‬ﺘﺎﺏ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺟ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﻠَﻨﻲ ﻧَﺒﻴ‪‬ﺎً«‪ 1.‬ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨـﺪﺓ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﻫﺴـﺘﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺍ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺑﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻨﺪﺓ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻨﺪﮔﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺯﺵ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﻋﺠﻴﺐ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤﺮﻭﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻴﺶ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻡ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻡ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻡ ﻣـﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻳـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ﺩﻳﻨﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻧﻤـﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻡ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻣـﻲ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻬـﺎﺭ‬
‫ﭼﻮﺏ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧـﻪ ﻓﺮﺍﺗـﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍ‪‬ﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺑﺮ ﺳـﺮ ﺁﻥ »ﻓﺮﺍﺗـﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ« ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻋﻴﻨـﺎً ﻧﻈﻴـﺮ ﺭﺍﺑﻄـﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺷﺪﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻥ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺷﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭼﮕﻮﻧـﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄــﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳــﺖ؟ ﺭﺍﺑﻄــﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳــﺖ ﻛــﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣــﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘــﺎﺩ ﻣــﻲ ﻛﻨــﺪ ﻭ‬

‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺔ ‪» :30‬ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﺪﺓ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺧﺪﺍﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺍ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻑ ﻧﺒﻮﺕ ﻋﻄﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩ«‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﻫﻔﺘﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﻦ ‪273‬‬

‫ﺯﻣﺎﻡﺩﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺎﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺷﺪﻧﻴﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﭼﻴﺴـﺖ؟‬


‫ﺯﻣﺎﻡﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﭘﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻪ ﺣﻖّ ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧـﻪ‬
‫ﺣﻖّ ﻣﺤﺎﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺭﺷﺪ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺭﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔـﺮ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪﺍﻱ ﺭﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪ ﺑـﺎ ﻫﻤـﺔ ﻛﺴـﺎﻧﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻄﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺣﻘـﻮﻕ ﻭ ﺣـﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑـﻞ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪ ﺭﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺔ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﻻﻫﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﻫﺐ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﻻﻫﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﻣﻨﺪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﻳﻒ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﻻﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺘﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺏ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﻨـﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﻛﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻌﺶ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻋـﻼﺝ‪ ‬ﻳـﻚ ﭼﻴـﺰ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﻤﻲﺭﺳﺪ‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺩﺓ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣـﺮﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪ؛ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻱﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥِ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎﻳﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦﺗﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟـﻲ ﻣـﻦ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣـﻲﻛـﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺻـﻼﺡ ﺑـﺎﻻﺗﺮﻱﻫـﺎ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻟــﺬﺍ ﭘﻴــﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻔــﺎء ﻧﻘﺸﺸــﺎﻥ ﺍﻳــﻦ ﻛــﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣــﻲﻛﺮﺩﻧــﺪ‪ .‬ﻫــﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻮﺷﻴﺪﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ ﻧـﺮﻡ ﻭ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺿﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎ ﻭﻣﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﺧﻮﺍﻫﺎﻧـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑـﺮ‬
‫ﺣﻖ ﻭ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﻠﻖ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎﻳﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺪﺷﺎﻥ ﺧﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺳﺮﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺗـﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻﻭﻗﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻖ ﺗﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻧﺪﺍﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺧﻠﻖِ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴـﺘﻨﺪ ﺑـﺎﻻ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻻ ﺍﻗﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﺨﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻜـﻢ ﭘـﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ؟ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ 274‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭﺻﻴﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺋﻤﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﺻﻴﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺋﻤﻪ ﻣﻲﺭﺳﺪ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺩﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻘﻴﻪﺍﻧﺪ؛ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺳﺮﺷـﺎﻥ ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﻳـﻦ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻴﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻓﻘﻴﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﻣﺎﻥ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ ﻫـﺎﻳﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﭼﻬـﺮﺓ ﺭﺍﺳـﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﻬﺮﺓ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻴﻦ ﻗﻠﺒﺎً ﻋﺸﻖ ﺑﻮﺭﺯﻧـﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑ ﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﭘﺎﻳﺒﻨﺪﻧـﺪ‪ .‬ﻣـﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻬـﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻓﻘﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻟﺒﺎﺱ ﺑﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﺒـﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﺎﻫﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﺎﻫـﺖ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻴـﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﺎﻫـﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ‪ ،‬ﻫﺸﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺖ‪ ،‬ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﺒﻨﺪﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻋﺪﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣـﻲ ﺭﺳـﻢ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺑـﺮﻭﻡ ﺳـﺮﺍﻍ ﺍﻭﻟـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺟﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺤـﺚ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﻢ ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺪ ﻛﻦ؟ ﺷـﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﺻـﻠﻲ ﻣﻘﻠﱠـﺪ‬
‫ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﻋﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﻴﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻳﺔ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺁﻳﺔ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ‪» :‬ﻓَﻤ‪‬ـﻦْ‬
‫ﺗَﻮ‪‬ﻟّﻲ ﺑ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﺪ‪ ‬ﺫَﻟ‪‬ﻚ‪ ‬ﻓَﺄُﻭﻟﺌ‪‬ﻚ‪ ‬ﻫ‪‬ﻢ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻔﺎﺳ‪‬ﻘُﻮﻥ«‪ .‬ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺣﻖ ﺧﺎﺿﻊ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‪ .‬ﮔﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ ﻫﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨـﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺗﺠﺮﺑـﻪ ﺷـﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺑﺘﻼ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑـﺎ ﻳـﻚ ﻧﻔـﺮ ﺑﺤـﺚ ﻭ ﺻـﺤﺒﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻲ ﺟﻮﻳﺎﻱ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺖ ﻭ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺵ ﺣﻖ ﺑﺎﺷـﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺣـﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﺳﻴﻊﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭﺑـﺎﺭﺓ ﺣـﻖ ﺑﺤـﺚ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﻖ ﻭﺳﻴﻊﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﭼـﻪ ﺑـﺮ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺣﻖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻃﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﺣﻖ؛ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﭘﺮﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﻖﭘﺮﺳﺘﻲ ﻛﺠﺎﺳﺖ؟ ﻗـﺪﺭﻱ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﻫﻔﺘﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﻦ ‪275‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺕ ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻭ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺣﻖْ ﺑﻲﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺑﻲﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳـﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺼﻮﺻـﻲ ﻭ ﺳـﺎﺧﺘﮕﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﺣـﻖ ﻧﺰﻧـﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﮔـﺮ‬
‫ﺁﻣﺪﻱﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﮕﻲ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺯ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﻧﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻖ ﺯﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤـﺎﻥﺟـﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﻖ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻱ‪ .‬ﺣﻖّ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺶ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻡ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺚﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻜﺮ ﺑﻴﻔﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺪﺭﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﻗـﺖ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻨـﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻨﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺍﻳﻦﻗﺪﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻖ ﺩﻡ ﻣﻲﺯﻧﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﻢ؟ ﭼﻪﻗﺪﺭ ﺣﻖﭘﺮﺳﺘﻴﻢ؟ ﺗﺎ ﭼﻪ ﺣـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﭘﺮﺳـﺘﻲ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻳﻢ؟ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺣﻴﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺟﺎﻣﻌـﻪﺍﻱ ﺯﻧـﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻪ ﻫـﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪ ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺟﺎﻣﻌـﺔ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴـﻴﺮ ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﭘﺮﺳﺘﻲﻫﺎﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺩ ﻧﻔـﻮﺫ ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﺧﻨﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺑـﺪﻭﻥ ﻗﻴـﺪ ﻭ ﺷـﺮﻁ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑـﺮ ﺣـﻖ ﺭﻭ‬
‫ﺑﮕﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲﺍﺵ ﺗﺒﺎﻩ ﻭ ﮔﻨﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪» .‬ﻓَﻤ‪‬ﻦْ ﺗَـﻮ‪‬ﻟّﻲ ﺑ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ـﺪ‪ ‬ﺫَﻟ‪‬ـﻚ‪ ‬ﻓَﺄُﻭﻟﺌ‪‬ـﻚ‪ ‬ﻫ‪‬ـﻢ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟْﻔﺎﺳ‪‬ﻘُﻮﻥَ‪ .‬ﺍَﻓَﻐَﻴ‪‬ﺮَ ﺩﻳﻦِﺍﷲِ ﻳ‪‬ﺒ‪‬ﻐُﻮﻥ«‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺣـﻖ‬
‫ﺭﻭ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﻨﻲ ﺟﺰ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ؟ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻛـﻪ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﭼﻴﺰ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺣﻖ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‪» .‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻟَﻪ‪ ‬ﺍَﺳ‪‬ﻠَﻢ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ﻦْ ﻓ‪‬ـﻲ ﺍﻟﺴ‪‬ـﻤﻮﺍﺕ‪ ‬ﻭ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟْﺎَﺭ‪‬ﺽِ ﻃَﻮ‪‬ﻋ‪‬ﺎ ﻭ‪ ‬ﻛَﺮْﻫ‪‬ﺎ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍ‪‬ﻟَﻴ‪‬ﻪ‪ ‬ﻳ‪‬ﺮْﺟ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ـﻮﻥ«‪ .‬ﻫﻤـﺔ ﭼﻴﺰﻫـﺎ ﻭ ﻫﻤـﺔ ﻛﺴـﺎﻧﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ؛ ﺧﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺒﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ‪» :‬ﻗُﻞْ ءﺍﻣ‪‬ﻨّﺎ ﺑِﺎﷲ«‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻣﮕﺮ ﻧﻤـﻲﮔـﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻣـﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﺧـﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩﺍﻳﻢ؟ »ﻭ‪ ‬ﻣﺂ ﺍُﻧْﺰِﻝَ ﻋ‪‬ﻠَﻴ‪‬ﻨَﺎ«‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺁﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 276‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫»ﻭ‪ ‬ﻣﺂ ﺃُﻧْﺰِﻝَ ﻋ‪‬ﻠﻲ ﺍ‪‬ﺑ‪‬ﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ«‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻳـﻢ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻧﭽـﻪ ﺑـﺮ ﺍﺑـﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻤﺎﻋﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺤﻖ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺟﻨـﮓ ﻣﻴـﺎﻥ ﺍﺳـﻤﺎﻋﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺍﺳـﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺠــﺐ ﻣــﻲﻛــﻨﻢ ﻭ ﻭﺍﻗﻌـﺎً ﺷــﺮﻡﺁﻭﺭ ﺍﺳــﺖ‪ .‬ﺷــﺮﻡﺁﻭﺭ ﺍﺳــﺖ ﻛــﻪ ﮔــﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻼﻣﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﺑﻘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻓﺘﺨﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺟﺪﺍﻳﻲﺍﻓﻜـﻦ ﺑـﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺧﺎﻧـﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﺳـﻤﺎﻋﻴﻞ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺤﻖ ﻛﻮﺷﺶ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﺎﻋﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺤﻖ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺮ ﻳﻌﻘـﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺮ‬
‫ﺍَﺳﺒﺎﻁ )ﻓﺮﺯﻧﺪﺍﻥ ﻳﻌﻘﻮﺏ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺍﺩﮔﺎﻥ ﺍﻭ(‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﻬـﺎ ﻧـﺎﺯﻝ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪﺍﺵ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪» .‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻣﺂ ﺍُﻭﺗ‪‬ﻲ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ﻮﺳﻲ ﻭ‪‬‬
‫ﻋﻴﺴﻲ«‪ .‬ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻲ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻴﺴـﻲ ﻧـﺎﺯﻝ ﺷـﺪﻩ‪» ،‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻨﱠﺒﻴ‪‬ـﻮﻥَ«‪،‬‬
‫ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺔ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ‪» ،‬ﻻ ﻧُﻔَﺮﱢﻕُ ﺑ‪‬ﻴ‪‬ﻦَ ﺍَﺣ‪‬ـﺪ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ـﻨْﻬ‪‬ﻢ‪ ،«‬ﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﻤﻲﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﻫﺴـﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳـﺎﻥ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﺮﺍ؟ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦﻛـﻪ »ﻭ‪ ‬ﻧَﺨْﻦُ ﻟَﻪ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ﺴ‪‬ـﻠ‪‬ﻤ‪‬ﻮﻥ«‪ .‬ﭼـﻮﻥ ﻣـﺎ ﺗﺴـﻠﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻴﺴﻲ ﻛﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺧﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺳﻲ ﻛﻴﺴـﺖ؟ ﭘﻴـﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺧـﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺤﻖ ﻛﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺧﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﻤﺎﻋﻴﻞ ﻛﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺧﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﻫﺴـﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫»ﻭ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ﻦ ﻳ‪‬ﺒ‪‬ﺘَﻎِ ﻏَﻴ‪‬ﺮَ ﺍﻟْﺎ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ﻼﻡِ ﺩﻳﻨﺎً ﻓَﻠَﻦْ ﻳ‪‬ﻘْﺒ‪‬ﻞَ ﻣ‪‬ﻨْﻪ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻫ‪‬ﻮ‪ ‬ﻓ‪‬ﻲ ﺍﻟْﺂﺧ‪‬ﺮَﺓِ ﻣ‪‬ـﻦَ ﺍﻟْﺨﺎﺳ‪‬ـﺮﻳﻦ«‪ .‬ﻭ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡِ ﺑـﻲﺭﻧـﮓ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﻨـﻲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺧﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ ﻣﻨﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻧﻤﻲﺷـﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮﺕ ﻭ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺟﺎﻭﻳﺪ ﺑﻲﺛﻤﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﻋﻤﺮﺵ ﺑـﺪﻭﻥ ﺑـﺎﺯﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ؛ ﺧﺎﺳ‪‬ﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﺯﻳﺎﻥﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﺔ »ﻭ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ﻦ ﻳ‪‬ﺒ‪‬ﺘَﻎِ ﻏَﻴ‪‬ﺮَ ﺍﻟْﺎ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ﻼﻡِ ﺩﻳﻨﺎً ﻓَﻠَﻦْ ﻳ‪‬ﻘْﺒ‪‬ﻞَ ﻣ‪‬ﻨْـﻪ«‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳـﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﻧـﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﭼـﻮﻥ ﺑـﺎ ﻛﻤـﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺳﻒ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻋﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﺟﺴـﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛـﻪ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻔﺴـﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺭﺳـﻲ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﻫﻔﺘﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﻦ ‪277‬‬

‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ :‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗـﺎ ﻛﻨـﻮﻥ ﺑـﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﮔﺎﻧﮕﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻙ ﻛﻨﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳـﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘـﻪ »ﻭ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ـﻦ ﻳ‪‬ﺒ‪‬ﺘَـﻎِ‬
‫ﻏَﻴ‪‬ﺮَ ﺍﻟْﺎ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ﻼﻡِ ﺩﻳﻨﺎً ﻓَﻠَﻦْ ﻳ‪‬ﻘْﺒ‪‬ﻞَ ﻣ‪‬ﻨْﻪ« ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻣﻌﻨـﻲ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺻﻼً ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﺧﺎﺹ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺟﺰ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻬﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺎﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ‪ :‬ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻴـﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺘـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻢ ﺁﻳﻴﻦ ﺧﺪﺍ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻬـﺖ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﻣـﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫـﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳـﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺠﻴﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻢﺍﺭﺯﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺷـﻤﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﺗـﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺠﻴـﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺠﻴـﻞ ﺍﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺒﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺁﻣـﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻔـﺎﺕ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻙ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﺣﺎﻧﻴﻮﻥِ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﻳﻴﻦ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﻳﻬﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﺎً ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﺤﻦ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻟﻪﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺑﻪﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻟﻪﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻬﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺎﺭﺍ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺻﻼً ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﺦ ﻭ ﺑ‪‬ﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﮔﺮﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ »ﻭ‪ ‬ﻗﺎﻟُﻮﺍ ﻛُﻮﻧُﻮﺍ ﻫ‪‬ﻮﺩﺍً ﺍَﻭ‪ ‬ﻧَﺼﺎﺭٰﻱ ﺗَﻬ‪‬ﺘَﺪ‪‬ﻭﺍ« ﻣﻲﺷـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺧـﻮﺩﺵ ﻣﺮﺗﻜـﺐ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ »ﺍَﻳ‪‬ﺎْﻣ‪‬ﺮُﻛُﻢ‪ ‬ﺑِﺎﻟْﻜُﻔْﺮِ ﺑ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﺪ‪ ‬ﺍ‪‬ﺫْ ﺍَﻧْﺘُﻢ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ﺴ‪‬ﻠ‪‬ﻤ‪‬ﻮﻥ«‪ .‬ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﻳﻬﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻧﺼـﺎﺭﺍ ﻭ ﭘﻴـﺮﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻨﺼـﻔﺎﻧﻪ ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣــﻲﮔﻮﻳــﺪ ﺍﻱ ﻳﻬــﻮﺩ! ﻣﻨﺼــﻔﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷــﻤﺎ ﺳــﺆﺍﻝ ﻣــﻲﻛﻨــﻴﻢ ﺭﺍﺑﻄــﺔ ﺷــﻤﺎ ﺑــﺎ‬
‫‪ 278‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺗﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻧﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺭﻭﺷـﻦ ﻭ‬


‫ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭘـﺮﺩﻩﻫـﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﺩﻳـﺪ ﻭ ﺷـﻚ ﻭ ﺍﺑﻬـﺎﻡ ﺑـﺮ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻓﻜﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ؟ ﻛﺪﺍﻡﻳﻚ؟ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺤﻘﻴـﻖ ﺗـﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺭﺍﺗﺘـﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻼﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻓﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﻨﺼﻔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻳـﺎ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻼﻡ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖِ ﻣﺤﻘﻘﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺗـﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﻨـﻮﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺠﻴـﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﺎﺳـﺪ؟ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺗﺤﻘﻴـﻖ ﺷـﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻨﻬـﺎ ﺧـﺎﻟﺺ ﻧﻴﺴـﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳـﺪﺓ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﺑـﺎ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼـﺮﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ؟ »ﻛَﻴ‪‬ﻒ‪ ‬ﻳ‪‬ﻬ‪‬ـﺪ‪‬ﻱ ﺍﷲُ ﻗَﻮ‪‬ﻣـﺎً ﻛَﻔَـﺮُﻭﺍ ﺑ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ـﺪ‪ ‬ﺍﻳﻤـﺎﻧ‪‬ﻬِﻢ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺷَـﻬِﺪ‪‬ﻭﺍ ﺍَﻥﱠ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﱠﺳ‪‬ﻮﻝَ ﺣ‪‬ﻖﱞ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺟﺂء‪‬ﻫ‪‬ﻢ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﺒ‪‬ﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﷲُ ﻻﻳ‪‬ﻬ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﻱ ﺍﻟْﻘَـﻮ‪‬ﻡ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻈّـﺎﻟ‪‬ﻤﻴﻦ«‪ .‬ﺍ‪‬ﺷـﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ :‬ﺧﺪﺍ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺩﻣﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﻔﺘﻨـﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺧﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺁﻣﺪﻧـﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺩﻗﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﺪﻧﺪ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺧﺼﻮﺻـﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻬـﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻛﻤﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫـﻢ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻲ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻳﺪﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻣﺎ ﭘﻴﺮﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﺍﺗﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ ﺍﻳﻦﻛـﻪ ﭘـﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳـﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺵ ﺣﻖ ﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺯﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺤﺚ‬
‫ﻫﻔﺘﺔ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﭘـﺬﻳﺮﺵ ﻳـﻚ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷـﻮﺩ ﺣـﻖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘـﺎﻡ ﺑﺤـﺚ ﻗﺒـﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓـﻼﻥ ﻣﻨﻔﻌـﺘﺶ‬
‫ﺻﺮﻑﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً ﺷﻚ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻨـﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻧﻲ ﺑـﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﭘﺮﺳـﺘﻲ ﺑـﺰﺭگ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺁﺩﻣﻲ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ؟ ﻣـﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴـﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻪ؟ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﻭﺣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳـﻚ ﻋﻤـﺮ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﻫﻔﺘﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﻦ ‪279‬‬

‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺻﺮﻓﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺩﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﺝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺣﻖ ﺧﺎﺿـﻊ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ؟ ﺗـﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﭘﺮﺳـﺘﻲ ﻧﺮﻫﺎﻧﻴـﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣـﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴـﺪ‬
‫ﺣﻖﭘﺮﺳﺘﺶ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ؟ »ﻛَﻴ‪‬ﻒ‪ ‬ﻳ‪‬ﻬ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﻱ ﺍﷲُ ﻗَﻮ‪‬ﻣﺎً ﻛَﻔَﺮُﻭﺍ ﺑ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﺪ‪ ‬ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻧ‪‬ﻬِﻢ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺷَﻬِﺪ‪‬ﻭﺍ ﺍَﻥﱠ ﺍﻟﺮﱠﺳ‪‬ـﻮﻝَ‬
‫ﺣ‪‬ﻖﱞ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺟﺂء‪‬ﻫ‪‬ﻢ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﺒ‪‬ﻴ‪‬ﻨﺎﺕ«‪ .‬ﺩﻻﻳﻞ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﻔﺮ ﻭﺭﺯﻳﺪﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫»ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﷲُ ﻻﻳ‪‬ﻬ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﻱ ﺍﻟْﻘَﻮ‪‬ﻡ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻈّﺎﻟ‪‬ﻤﻴﻦ«‪ .‬ﺁﺩﻡ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻖ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤـﻼً ﺑـﻪ ﺣـﻖ ﺗﺠـﺎﻭﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻖ ﺧﻮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﻔـﻮﺫ ﻫـﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺧـﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺴ‪‬ﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺳﺘﻤﮕﺮ ﺳﺘﻢﭘﻴﺸﺔ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﻧﻤـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺩﻡ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺣﻖﭘﺬﻳﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﺶ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻬﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺣﻖ ﺭﻭﺑﻪﺭﻭ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً ﺣﻖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭙﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻣﺮﺩﻣـﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺗﺤـﺖ ﺗـﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻣـﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻣﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﭘﺮﺳﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﭘﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﻌﺸﺎﻥ ﺑـﻪ ﻣﻴـﺎﻥ ﻣـﻲﺁﻳـﺪ ﺣـﻖ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳـﺮ ﭘـﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﺬﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻛﻴﻔﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪» :‬ﺍَﻥﱠ ﻋ‪‬ﻠَﻴ‪‬ﻬِﻢ‪ ‬ﻟَﻌ‪‬ﻨَﺔَ ﺍﷲ«؛ ﻣﺤﺮﻭﻣﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺭﺣﻤﺖ ﺧﺪﺍ‪» .‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻤ‪‬ﻼﺋ‪‬ﻜَﺔِ«؛ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺷﺘﮕﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻬﺮ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺒﺖ ﻭ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺖ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ‪» .‬ﻭ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨّﺎﺱِ ﺍَﺟ‪‬ﻤ‪‬ﻌﻴﻦ«؛ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﺁﻥﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﻇﺎﻟﻢ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻇـﺎﻟﻢ ﺑـﺪﺵ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻇﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻇﺎﻟﻢ ﺑﺪﺵ ﻧﻴﺎﻳﺪ؟ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫـﺮ‬
‫ﻇﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻇﺎﻟﻢ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺧـﻮﺩﺵ ﻇﻠـﻢ ﻛﻨـﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻠﺒـﺎً ﻣﺘﻨﻔـﺮ ﻭ ﺑﻴـﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ؟ »ﺍﻭﻟﺌ‪‬ﻚ‪ ‬ﺟﺰَﺁﺅُﻫ‪‬ﻢ‪ ‬ﺍَﻥﱠ ﻋ‪‬ﻠَﻴ‪‬ﻬِﻢ‪ ‬ﻟَﻌ‪‬ﻨَﺔَ ﺍﷲِ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻤ‪‬ﻼﺋ‪‬ﻜَﺔِ ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻨّﺎﺱِ ﺍَﺟ‪‬ﻤ‪‬ﻌﻴﻦ« ﻭ ﻣﺎﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺰﺍﺝ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﺴﺖ‪» ،‬ﺧﺎﻟ‪‬ﺪﻳﻦَ ﻓ‪‬ﻴﻬﺎ«؛ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻟﻌﻨـﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺮﻭﻣﻴﺖ ﺟﺎﻭﺩﺍﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺮﻧﺪ‪» .‬ﻻَﻳ‪‬ﺨَﻔﱠﻒ‪ ‬ﻋ‪‬ﻨْﻬ‪‬ﻢ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﻌ‪‬ـﺬَﺍﺏ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﻻﻫ‪‬ـﻢ‪ ‬ﻳ‪‬ﻨﻈَـﺮُﻭﻥَ«؛‬
‫ﻋﺬﺍﺏ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻨﺠﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺳـﺪ ﻫـﻴﭻ ﻛـﻢ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺳـﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﻤـﻲﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺑﺮﻧﻤﻲﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺩﺍﻣﻦﮔﻴﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻬﻠﺘﻲ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﮔـﺬﺍﺭﻡ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ 280‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ » ﻭ‪ ‬ﻟَﻪ‪ ‬ﺍَﺳ‪‬ﻠَﻢ‪ ‬ﻣ‪‬ﻦْ ﻓ‪‬ﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴ‪‬ﻤﻮﺍﺕ‪ ‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍﻟْﺎَﺭ‪‬ﺽِ ﻃَﻮ‪‬ﻋﺎً ﻭ‪ ‬ﻛَﺮْﻫﺎً«؛ ﻫﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﻫـﺎ ﻭ ﺯﻣـﻴﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺧﺪﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﺧﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮ ﻃﻮﻉ ﻭ ﺍﻃﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻛﺮﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺒﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺑﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ :‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﻛَﺮﻩ ﻭ ﻳﻜﻲ ﻫـﻢ ﻛُـﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻛَـﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻳﺸﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻛَﺮﻩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﺟﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺧﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ ‪ .‬ﻛُﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥ ﻛـﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﻴﻞ ﻗﻠﺒﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺼﻠﺤﺖ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺗﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﻗـﺪﺭﻱ ﻣﺨـﺎﻟﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻞ ﻗﻠﺒﻲ ﺍﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻠﺒﻲ ﺍﺵ ﻫﻢ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼً ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺍﻱ ﺗﻠﺨـﻲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻴﻞ ﻗﻠﺒﻲ ﺍﺵ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺑـﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺑـﺎ ﻧـﺎﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺩﻭﺍ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻪ؟ ﻛُﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺍ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻠﻘﺶ ﺑﺮﻳﺰﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻪ؟ ﻛَﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺗﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺧﺪﺍ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻫـﺎﻳﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﭼﻨـﺎﻥ ﻛـﻪ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﻭ ﺷـﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺧﺪﺍﻳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺪﮔﻴﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻋﺸﺎﻕ ﻭ ﺍَﺣـﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻋﺒﺎﺩﺗﺸﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺎﺩﺕ ﺍﺣﺮﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻋﺎﺷﻘﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﺪﻩ ﺷﺎﻥ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻛﺴ ﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻃﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻛُﺮﻫـﺎً‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﭘـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺒﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻦ ﺁﺳـﺎﻳﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻣـﻲ ﮔﻮﻳـﺪ ﻧﻜـﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﺶ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﺪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﺪﺍﺳـﺖ؛ ﺑـﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻟـﻪﺍﺵ ﻛﻴﻔـﺮ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺮﺱ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻴﻔﺮ ﺧﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﺧـﻮﺩﺵ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﻫﻔﺘﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﻦ ‪281‬‬

‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻋﻤﻼً ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻛُﺮﻫﺎً‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺟـﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﻭ ﻛﺴـﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻫـﻢ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬـﺎ‬
‫ﻛَﺮﻫﺎً ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﺟﺒﺎﺭ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﺣﺸﺎﻥ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﻃﻐﻴﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻛﺸﻲ ﻋﺠﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻃﺎﻏﻮﺕ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺧـﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻤﺸﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟّﺎ ﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻭﺭ ﻭ ﻗـﺪﺭﺕ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻖ ﻭﺍﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺸﺮﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻪ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺣﻖ ﻭ ﻋﺪﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻣـﻲﻛﺮﺩﻧـﺪ ﻧـﻪ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻠﺨﻲ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻴﺮﻳﻨﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ؟ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻃﻮﻋﺎً ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑـﺮ ﺧـﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺣﻖ ﻭ ﻋﺪﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺍﻣـﺎ ﻧـﻪ ﺑـﺎ ﺷـﻴﺮﻳﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺪﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﺨﻲ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴـﻞ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲِ ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺣﻖ ﺭﺍ ﻛُﺮﻫﺎً ﻣﻲﭘﺬﻳﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺣﻖ ﻧﻴﺴـﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬـﺎ ﺧـﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﺎﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻭﺭ ﺷﻤﺸﻴﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻖ ﺗﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬـﺎ‬
‫ﻛَﺮﻫﺎً ﻭ ﺍﺟﺒﺎﺭﺍً ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺣﻖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﻴﻦﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻪ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻋـﺎﻟﻢ ﻫـﻢ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺳـﻪ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻛُﺮﻫﺎً ﻳﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﻋﺎً‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻝﻧﮕﺮﺍﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤـﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻃﻮﻋﺎً ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻛَﺮﻫﺎًﻫﺎ ﻳـﺎﺩ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺴـﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪ 282‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﭼـﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ؟ ﻛَﺮﻫـﺎً‪ .‬ﺷـﻴﻄﺎﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺶ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷـﻴﻄﺎﻥ ﺳـﺮﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﭼﻄﻮﺭ؟ ﻛَﺮﻫﺎً‪» .‬ﻭ‪ ‬ﺍ‪‬ﻟَﻴ‪‬ﻪ‪ ‬ﻳ‪‬ﺮْﺟ‪‬ﻌ‪‬ﻮﻥ«‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻃﻮﻋﺎً ﻭ ﻛﺮﻫﺎً ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﻪ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺁﻳﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﺸﺐ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩﺍﺵ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻛـﺮﺩﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣـﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧـﺪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄـﺔ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﻫﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻟﻢ ﺩﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻡﺩﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺩﻩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥﻫـﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ؛ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻭ ﻣـﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧـﺪ ﻣﺴـﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺣـﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﺛـﺮ ﺭﻫﺒـﺮﺍﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪﺍﻱ ﺣﻖﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺳـﻌﺎﺩﺗﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻧﻘـﺶ ﻫﻤـﺔ ﺍﻧﺴـﺎﻥﻫـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑـﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺑـﻴﺶ‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑـﺮ ﺣـﻖ ﺑـﻮﺩﻥ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍﻳـﻦﻛـﻪ ﻗـﺮﺁﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻨﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﺮ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻨﺪ ﻫﺮ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺮﺩﻭﻧﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﻴﺪﮔﻲﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑﻫﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒﺮ ﺗـﺎﺯﻩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧـﺪ ﻭ ﻓـﺮﺍ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺯﻧـﺪﮔﻲ ﺧـﻮﻳﺶ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻌﺎﺩﺕ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺘﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺣﻖ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻧﺎﻳﻞ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﺘﻤﮕﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺳﺘﻢﺩﻭﺳﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻜﺸﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﮔﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﺑﻜﺸـﺪ‪ .‬ﻗـﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻧﺨﺴﺘﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻗﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﭘﺴﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻳﻜـﻲ ﺑـﻴﺶ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﺁﻥ »ﭘﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﺧﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﻃﻲ ﺧﻮﻳﺸﺘﻦ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭ«‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﺻﺎﺩﻕ )ﻉ(‪85 ،79 ،52 ،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ )ﻉ( ‪219 ،99 ،72 ،59 ،15‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﻋﺴﮕﺮﻱ )ﻉ(‪85 ،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﻦ ﺧﻠﺪﻭﻥ‪128 ،‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﺠﺘﺒﻲ )ﻉ(‪85 ،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﻮﺩﺍﻭﻭﺩ‪36 ،‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‪43 ،21 ،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﻘﺎﻥ‪101 ،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﻴﻞ‪107 ،100 ،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺰﺍﺏ‪246 ،18 ،12 ،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺲ‪180 ،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺣﻨﺒﻞ‪36 ،‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺘﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪172 ،‬‬ ‫ﺁﺭژﺍﻧﺘﻴﻦ‪180 ،‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺮﺍﻥ‪254 ،239 ،43 ،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎ‪144 ،60 ،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﭙﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪21 ،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺑﻞ‪174 ،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺮﺍء‪48 ،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺎﻥﺷﻨﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻬﺪﻳﻦ‪60 ،‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺍﻑ‪229 ،217 ،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻫﻨﺮ‪135 ،‬‬
‫ﺁﻝ ﻋﻤــﺮﺍﻥ‪،189 ،188 ،187 ،113 ،‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﻮﺍﺭ‪289 ،269 ،‬‬
‫‪،202 ،201 ،200 ،199 ،198‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺭ‪218 ،201 ،‬‬
‫‪266 ،262‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻭﺝ‪252 ،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻫﺮ ﺍﺣﻤﺪ‪289 ،‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻭﺟﺮﺩﻱ‪176 ،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺮﺳــﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑــﻮﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻀــﻞ ﺑــﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻄﻠﻤﻴﻮﺱ‪174 ،169 ،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﻦ‪289 ،‬‬
‫ﺑﻘــــﺮﻩ‪،168 ،108 ،100 ،71 ،54 ،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺷﻴﻪ‪114 ،‬‬
‫‪267 ،232 ،231 ،229 ،226 ،199‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜـــﺎﻓﻲ‪،255 ،245 ،79 ،34 ،17 ،‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻲﺍﺳﺮﺍﺋﻴﻞ‪226 ،42 ،35 ،‬‬ ‫‪289‬‬
‫‪ 284‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺭﺍﺳﺘﮕﻮ‪135 ،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻲﻫﺎﺷﻢ‪18 ،‬‬


‫ﺭ‪‬ﺳ‪‬ﻮﻝِ ﺍﷲِ‪246 ،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻲﺻﺪﺭ‪252 ،‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‪74 ،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺮﻭﺕ‪289 ،37 ،‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺕ‪102 ،‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﻤﺒـﺮ‪13 ،‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﻡ‪34 ،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻬﺪﻳﻦ‪99 ،60 ،‬‬
‫ﺭﻳﺎﺿــــﻲ‪،170 ،118 ،117 ،116 ،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻗﺮﺁﻥِ ﻧﻮﻟﺪﻛﻪ‪101 ،‬‬
‫‪171‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻮﻙ‪34 ،‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﻮﺭ‪267 ،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‪289 ،30 ،‬‬
‫ﺯﺭﻛﺸﻲ‪101 ،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻣﺬﻱ‪36 ،‬‬
‫ﺯﻛﺮﻳﺎ‪137 ،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﻓﻲ‪232 ،230 ،229 ،‬‬
‫ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ‪138 ،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺮﺍﻥ‪289 ،145 ،17 ،‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺪ‪28 ،27 ،25 ،23 ،22 ،18 ،‬‬ ‫ﺗــــﻮﺭﺍﺕ‪،267 ،113 ،108 ،100 ،‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﻨﺐ‪28 ،26 ،25 ،23 ،18 ،‬‬ ‫‪277‬‬
‫ژﺍﭘﻦ‪157 ،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻛﻴﻮ‪161 ،158 ،‬‬
‫ژﻧﻮ‪60 ،‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺑِﺮِ ﺑﻦِ ﻋ‪‬ﺒ‪‬ﺪ‪‬ﺍﷲ‪35 ،‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﻨﺎﻥ‪204 ،‬‬ ‫ﺟﺒﺮﺋﻴﻞ‪126 ،124 ،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺪﺍﻟﺸﻬﺪﺍ )ﻉ( ‪85‬‬ ‫ﭼﻴﻦ‪180 ،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻮﻃﻲ‪101 ،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﺎﺯ‪115 ،62 ،‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻌﺘﻲ‪234 ،229 ،42 ،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻳﺪ‪239 ،55 ،‬‬
‫ﺷﻌﺮﺍ‪216 ،‬‬ ‫ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﺁﺩﻡ‪229 ،‬‬
‫ﺷﻮﺭﻭﻱ‪180 ،‬‬ ‫ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﻧﻮﺡ )ﻉ(‪15 ،‬‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺨﺎﺭﻱ‪36 ،‬‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺪ‪110 ،‬‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﻠ‪‬ﻢ‪36 ،‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻨﻪﺍﻱ‪232 ،‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺮﺳﻲ‪35 ،‬‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻳﺠﻪ‪18 ،‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻳﺸﻪ‪126 ،‬‬ ‫ﺧﻤﻴﻨﻲ‪176 ،‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ‪285‬‬

‫ﻛﻮﺑﺎ‪180 ،‬‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺪﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﺐ‪24 ،18 ،‬‬


‫ﮔﺎﻟﻴﻠﺔ‪172 ،‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﺴﺘﺎﻥ‪114 ،62 ،32 ،‬‬
‫ﮔﻴﻼﻥ‪204 ،‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ‪101 ،54 ،52 ،49 ،‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺋﺪﻩ‪48 ،42 ،‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻲ)ﻉ(‪34 ،‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺯﻧﺪﺭﺍﻥ‪204 ،‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻜﺒﻮﺕ‪214 ،202 ،‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﺷﺘﺮ‪84 ،‬‬ ‫ﻋﻴﺴــــــﻲ )ﻉ(‪،72 ،60 ،16 ،15 ،‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻤﺪﺑﺎﻗﺮ‪289 ،‬‬ ‫‪226 ،219 ،216 ،107‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺁﻥ‪،35 ،‬‬ ‫ﻋﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﺒﻲ‪289 ،30 ،‬‬
‫‪289‬‬ ‫ﻏﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﺍ‪128 ،‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻤــﺪ‪،27 ،26 ،18 ،17 ،15 ،13 ،‬‬ ‫ﻏﻼﻡﺍﺣﻤﺪ ﻗﺎﺩﻳﺎﻧﻲ‪42 ،‬‬
‫‪،61 ،42 ،38 ،37 ،33 ،29 ،28‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺍﻧﺴﻪ‪180 ،‬‬
‫‪،191 ،123 ،121 ،103 ،100‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻋﻮﻥ‪216 ،187 ،35 ،‬‬
‫‪289 ،269 ،213 ،201‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻠﺖ‪114 ،‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺣﺴﻦ ﺻﻔﺎﺭ ﻗﻤﻲ‪121 ،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻀﺎﺋﻞ‪36 ،‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﻨﻪ‪62 ،34 ،23 ،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻠﺴﻔﺔ ﺩﻳﻦ‪173 ،‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻳﻢ‪272 ،137 ،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺮﻭﺯﺁﺑﺎﺩﻱ‪32 ،30 ،‬‬
‫ﻣ‪‬ﺴﻨَﺪ‪36 ،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻚ‪160 ،156 ،118 ،‬‬
‫ﻣﺴـــــﻴﺢ‪،100 ،43 ،42 ،21 ،15 ،‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻣﻮﺱ‪32 ،30 ،‬‬
‫‪205 ،189 ،101‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻫﺮﻩ‪289 ،30 ،‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‪204 ،‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺘﻲ‪135 ،‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺮ‪85 ،‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﻳﺶ‪18 ،‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻬﺮﻱ‪135 ،‬‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻢ‪232 ،128 ،100 ،‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﻪ‪201 ،‬‬ ‫ﻗُﻢ‪192 ،‬‬
‫ﻣﻼ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻓﻴﺾ ﻛﺎﺷﺎﻧﻲ‪233 ،‬‬ ‫ﻛﭙﻠﺮ‪172 ،‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻗﺐ‪36 ،35 ،‬‬ ‫ﻛﻌﺒﻪ‪43 ،‬‬
‫‪ 286‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻣﻨﺘﺴﻜﻴﻮ‪74 ،‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻲ )ﻉ(‪،99 ،72 ،60 ،34 ،16 ،‬‬
‫‪،218 ،190 ،108 ،106 ،104‬‬
‫‪225 ،219‬‬
‫ﻧﺠﻢ‪217 ،168 ،123 ،122 ،98 ،‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻞ‪137 ،13 ،‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺎء‪246 ،200 ،‬‬
‫ﻧـــﻮﺭ‪،122 ،118 ،112 ،104 ،98 ،‬‬
‫‪204 ،193 ،139‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺭ‪‬ﻭﻥ‪216 ،34 ،‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻣﺒﻮﺭگ‪254 ،‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﺪﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ‪41 ،‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‪121 ،‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺷﻊ )ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻡ(‪72 ،‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻧﺎﻥ‪115 ،58 ،‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻳﻌﻘﻮﺏ‪289 ،‬‬
‫ﻛﻬﻒ‪222 ،‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻘـــــﻮﺏ‪،263 ،262 ،261 ،17 ،‬‬
‫‪276‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺏﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻫﺮ ﺍﺣﻤﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﻫﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﺒـﻲ ﻭ ﺷـﺮﻛﺎء‪،‬‬
‫‪1970‬ﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺮﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﻮﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﻦ‪ .‬ﻣﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺻﻴﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﺒﻌﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﻓﺎﻥ‪،‬‬
‫‪1355‬ﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻳﻌﻘﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻬﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﻼﻣﻴﻪ‪1365 ،‬ﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻤﺪﺑﺎﻗﺮ‪ .‬ﺑﺤﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﻮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺮﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎ‪1404 ،‬ﻕ‪.‬‬

You might also like